: ; ; 3 . : > or “
e : Sos fon ~ 2
ot Bees a kee Poet i te ee
ane
SS ee
ee wy pre
SO OS Yee Siw Soe
HANDBOUND
AT THE
ke
e
UNIVERSITY OF
TORONTO PRESS
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2009 with funding from
University of Toronto
http://www.archive.org/details/quarterlyjournalO2comp
a
'
yi
fa
.
iS
S ee
r 5
F
eite
Le?
y
,
‘
{
u >
I
i
;
{
an
i
<
;
[ ’
; ili 1) 7
‘ i?
if hilux, A , 4
. ) ) j
Oe
QUARTERLY JOURNAL
MICROSCOPICAL SCIENCE.
EDITED BY
EDWIN LANKESTER, M.D., F.RB.S., F.L.S.,
GEORGE BUSK, F.R.C.S.E., F.R.S., F.L.S.
VOLUME IL
GHith Allustrations on Wood and Stone.
On, A
. LONDON:
SAMUEL HIGHLEY, 32, FLEET STREET.
1854,
i an
pe
tiv a Fon
iY ae ait
a ; i
“ins i
ey
Atha”
ag
rod
y
:
PS, Tae 3 v ' : — ay
eee ts! 5 Say d
fi
>
Bate ‘
eas
a —«
ee |
vee oS
Ciaeenihis
rar i
4 AR
INDEX TO JOURNAL.
VOLUME II.
A.
Actinophenia, Shadbolt, G., on, 201.
Allman, Prof., on the structure, &c.,
of Bursaria, 61.
on the probable
structure of the starch granule,
163.
on the cellular struc-
ture of Hydra viridis, 61.
Amylacea corpora, Virchow, on, 101.
Anacharis alsinastrum, F. Branson,
M.D., on, 131.
on the rotation
of the cell-sap in, G. Lawson, on,
132.
a on the rotation
in the cells of, 54.
Angular aperture of the object-glasses
of compound microscopes, on the
relation of to their penetrating
power to oblique ra ee by J. W.
Griffith, M.D., 294
Animalcules, on the colouring of,
observations on, by T. C. White,
282.
Aperture, angle of, W. S. Gillett, on
the, 293.
oe of object-glasses, F. H.
Wenham, on the, 209.
a of object-glasses, on the
measuring of, and remarks on their
adjustment, F. H. Wenham, on the,
134.
Aquarium, the, by P. H. Gosse,
notice of, 278.
Arthromitus, 193.
Arthrodesmus incus, 237.
Arthroderma, 242.
Asplenium septentrionale, spermato-
zoids of, 126.
Asteraspori tum (Hoffmanni 2), 120.
VOL. Il.
|
|
B.
Bailey, Prof. J. W., List of the Dia-
tomacee procured in the United
States Exploring Expedition, 288.
Barry, Dr. M., on the structure of
the muscular fibrill and the mus-
cularity of cilia, 116.
Bary, Dr. Anton de, De generatione
sexuali plantoruum, 44.
Baum der, studies on the structure
and life of the higher plants, by
Dr. H. Schacht, 128.
Beale, Dr, Lionel, on cysts in the
kidney, 196.
me the microscope and its
application to clinical medicine,
267.
on a method of apply-
ing chemical re-agents to minute
quantities of matter, 58.
Binocular microscope, on a, by M.
Nachet, 72.
7 magnifier, 19.
microscope,
Riddell, on the, 18.
i microscope, F. H. Wenham,
on the, 132.
in and stereoscopic micro-
scope, W. Hodgson, on a, 57.
Bituminite, Prof. Traill, on, 143.
‘Black fur’ on the tongue, Dr. En-
lenberg. on a, 263.
Blut im Brode, 121.
Proi e .
- Boghead coal, composition of, by J.
Normandy, 200.
“Fs Prof. W. Gregory, ov,
201.
Bone, Dr. Redfern, on the structure
of, 61.
Botanieal letters, by Dr. F. Unger,
review of, 123
Y
298
Boswell, R. S., on Cellularia plumosa,
205. :
Branson, Dr. F., on Anacharis alsi-
nastrum, 131.
Braun, Dr. A., on some new or little-
known discovery of plants caused
by Fungi, 250. f
” on Rejuvenescence 1
Nature, 279.
Bristowe, Dr., on the occurrence of
hematoid crystals in a hydatid
eyst, 195.
Bursaria, Prof. Allman, on the struc-
ture, &c. of, 61.
Busk, G., on a developing solution
for microphotographs, 203.
x description of a magnetic
stop to the microscope, 280.
= on the occurrence of appa-
rent starch granules in the brain,
105.
5 catalogue of the marine
Polyzoa in the collection of the
British Museum, 277.
C,
Camera lucida, on the use of as a
micrometer, 291.
Cells, ciliated, R. Virchow, on the
irritability of, 108.
Cellularia plumosa, R. 8, Boswell, on,
205, >
Cellulose, on a substance presenting
the chemical reaction of, found in
the brain and spinal chord of man,
by R. Virchow, 101.
Cementing pencil, brass, description
of, by J. Gorham, 56.
Chara, on the multiplication of by
division, 40.
Chromatophores in the frog, R.
Virchow, on, 254,
Cladophytum, 193.
Clostertum Leibleinii, 236.
a limula, on cilia in, by §8.
G. Osborne, 234. d
Coal ; is it a mineralogical species?
140. .
Coles, Henry, on the camera lucida
as a micrometer, 291.
Collomia coccinea, hairs of, 43.
Colouring of animalcules, on the, 282.
Condenser, Powell and Lealand’s,
Dr. Inman, on, 60.
Connectivegtissue, on the develop-
ment of, Prof. A. Kolliker, 178.
Contractile substance of the lowest
animals, A. Ecker, on the, 1) 1.
Corpuscula tacttis, note to Mr, Hux-
ley’s paper on the, 139.
INDEX TO JOURNAL.
Corpuscula tactis, and Pacinian bo-
dies, structure and relations of, 1.
Corynocladus, 193.
Criiger, H., on the development of
starch, 173.
Crystals, hematoidin in a hydatid
cyst, Dr. Bristowe, on, 195.
Currey, F. M. A., on two new fungi,
240.
es translation of Schacht on
the microscope, review of, 45.
Cutaneous diseases, caused by para-
sitic growths, by Dr. B. Gudden,
on, 185.
6 dependent on pa-
rasitic growths, Dr. B. Gudden, on,
29. ;
Cuticle of ligneous plants, on the, 43.
Cysts in the kidney, Dr. L. Beale, on,
196.
Cysticercus pisiformis, on the trans-
formation of into Vania serrata,
255.
D.
Desmidium quadrangulum, 240,
Developing solution for microphoto-
graphs made by artificial light, 205.
Diatomaceous deposit of Mull, Prof.
Gregory, on the, 24.
Diatomacez found in the vicinity of
Hull, Sollitt, J. D., and Harrison,
R., on the, 61.
ss as test objects, 61.
Es list of the, discovered
in the United States Exploring
Expedition, 288.
Diatomaceous earth of Mull, on the,
with remarks on the classification
of the Diatomacez, by Prof. Gre-
gory, 90.
Didymoprium Borreri, 240.
Diseases of plants caused by Fungi,
Dr. A. Braun, on, 250.
Docidium, 237, 240.
Doryphora? elegans, 284.
E.
Eccrina, 193.
Ecker, Prof. A., on the ‘ contractile
substance of the lowest animals,’
Lads
Elastic fibres, on the development of,
by Prof. A. Kolliker. 178.
Enchondroma of the Testis, Jabez
Hodgson, on, 195.
Enterobryus, 192.
Equisetum arvense, spermatozoids of,
126.
Kulenberg, Dr., on a ‘ Black Fur’ on
the tongue, 263.
INDEX TO JOURNAL.
F.
Filaria, on a species of, found in the
blood of the dog, 33.
Fischer, Dr. L., on the Nostachacee,
43.
Flora and Fauna within living ani-
mals, by Dr. J. Leidy, review of,
190,
Fly’s foot, on the structure of, John
Hepworth, 158.
Fresenius, Dr. G., contributions to |
mycology, by, 118.
Frog, on chromatophores in the, 254.
Fungi, on two new, F. Currey, M.A.,
240.
a. OM aeuaen of plants, caused
by, 250.
Fungoid growth in the nails, Meiss-
ner, C., on a, 38.
G.
Generatione sexuali planterum de,
Diss, 44.
Gillet, W. S., on the angular aperture
of object glasses, 293.
Gorham, J., on a ‘brass cementing
aaa - 56.
ona ‘holder,’ for mount-
ing objects i in the dry way, 56.
i on the magnifying power
of short spaces, &c., 218.
Gosse, P. H., Naturalists Rainbles on
the Devonshire Coast, review of,
47.
6 The Aquarium,&c., 278.
Gregory, Prof. W., on the diatoma-
ceous deposit of Mull, 24.
Griffith, J. W., M.D., on the angular
aperture of object glasses, &c., 294.
Gruby, M. M., on a species of Filaria
found in the blood of the dog, 33.
Gudden, Dr. B., on cutaneous diseases
dependent upon parasitic growths,
29.
Be on diseases caused by
parasitic growths, 185,
H.
Hartig, on the cuticle of. ligneous
plants, 43.
Hepworth, John, on the structure of
the fly’s foot, 158.
Herapath, W. B., on the manufacture
of large available erystals of iodo-
quinine (Herapathite), 83.
on quinine and
quinidine (8 quinine) in the urine,
13..
299
| Highley, S, on coal, is it a mineralo-
|
|
gical species, 141.
Hodgson, W., on a binocular and
stereoscopic microscope, 57.
Hoffman, Prof. H., on contractile
tissues in the Hymenomycetes, 243.
Hogg, Jabez, the microscope, &c.,
277.
‘3 on Enchondroma of the
testis, 195.
Holder, for mounting objects in the
dry way, Gorham, J., on a, 56.
Hunt, G., on the spiral vessel of
rhubarb 288.
5 on the rotation in Vallis-
neria spiralis, 55.
Huxley, T. H., on the structure and
relations of the Malpighian bodies
of the spleen and tonsils, 74.
on the structure and
relations of the A tactis
and Pacinian bodies, 1.
Hydra viridis, Prof. Allman, on the
cellular structure of, 61.
Hymenomycetes, on contractile tissues
in the, Prof. H. Hoffmann, 243.
Hyphomycetes, on the flocci of, 119.
iF
Illumination of objects under the
microscope, with relation to the
aperture of the object-glass, &c.,
F. H. Wenham, on the, 145.
3 of transparent objects,
G. Rainey, on, 7, 65, 285.
Infusionsthiere die, ae by Dr. F
Stein, notice of, 272.
Inman, Dr. T., on Powell and Lea-
land’s condenser, 60.
Iodo-quinine (Herapathite), on the
manufacture of large available erys-
tals of, 85.
Itzigsohn, Dr. H., on the existence of
spermatazoids in certain freshwater
alge, 35.
on the propagation
of the Oscillarie, 188.
J.
Jones, Dr. Handfield, on mamellation
of the gastric mucous membrane,
195.
on a peculiar
form of uric acid crystals, 196.
K.
Kolliker, Prof. A., on the develop-
ment of nuclear fibres, elastic fibres,
and of connective tissue, 178.
300
Ie
Lawson, G., on the rotation of the
cell-sap in Anacharis alsinastrum,
132.
on the rotation in the
cells of plants, 54.
Leidy, Dr. Joseph, Flora and Fauna
within living animals, 192.
Leptothrix, 189.
Leydig’s Anatomico-histological, ob-
servations on fishes and reptiles,
review of, 126.
» onthe muscular structure in
Paludina vivipara, 36.
Ligneous plants, on the cuticle of, 43.
London Medical Society, physiologi-
eal section of, 142.
Lungs, Sarcina in the, 41.
M. -
Magnetic stage to the microscope,
description of a, 280.
Magnifying power of short spaces,
illustrated by the transmission of
light through minute apertures,
John Gorham, on the, 218.
Malpighian bodies of the spleen and
tonsillar follicles, T. H. Huxley,
on the ultimate structure and rela-
tions of 74,
Mamellation of the gastrie mucous
membrane, Dr. H. Jones, on, 195.
Manglesia cuneata, development of
the flower and fruit of, 43.
Meissner, C., on a fungoid growth in
the nails, 38.
Memoirs, botanical and physiologi-
eal, published by the Ray Society,
279.
Micrographie dictionary, the, notice
of, 278.
Micrometer, for the microscope, on
the best form of, 51.
‘i on the use of the Camera
lucida as a, 291.
with microscope, G.
Jackson, on the best forms of, 129.
Microscope, the, its history, con-
struction, and application, by Jabez
Hogg, review of, 277.
es the, and its application
to clinical medicine, by Dr. L.
Beale, review of, 267.
5 adapted for anatomical
demonstrations, and on a binocular
microscope, by M. Nachet, 72.
oS the, in its special appli- |
cation to vegetable anatomy and
physiology, by Dr. H. Schacht, 45.
INDEX TO JOURNAL.
Microscopical Society,
of, 142, 205, 293.
Moderator light, Rainey’s, 141.
Montagne, M. C., on the multiplica-
tion of Chara by division, 40.
Monas prodigiosa, 121.
Muciparous canals of fishes, 6
Muscular structure in Paludina vi-
vipara, Leydig, on the, 36.
i fibril, on the structure of,
and the muscularity of cilia, by
Dr. M. Barry, 116.
peters y, contributions to, by Dr. G.
F. Fresenius, 118.
proceedings
N.
Nachet, M., de Paris, on a microscope
adapted for anatomical demonstra-
tions, and on a binocular micro-
scope, 72.
Naturalist’s Rambles on the Devon-
shire Coast, review of, 47.
Nature, Prof. A, Braun’s Treatise of
Rejuvenescence in, 279.
Normandy, J., on the composition of
Boghead coal, 200.
Nostochacez, an attempt at the natu-
ral arrangement of, &c., 43.
Nuclear fibres, the development of,
Prof. A. Kolliker, 178.
O.
Oiduim Tuckeri, 44.
Okeden, Fitzmaurice (C.I.), on two
species of Triceratium, 284.
Ophiotheca, 241.
Osborne, The Hon. §. G., on ciliary
motion in Closterium limula, 234.
Oscillarie, on the propagation of,
Dr. H. Itzigsohn, 188.
Oscillaria tenuis, 189.
Oudemans, Dr., on the hairs of Col-
lomia coccinea, 43.
BP.
Pacinian bodies, structure and rela-
tions of, 1.
Pacini, Prof., on the structure of the
retina, 199.
Paget, James, Lectures on surgical
pathology, 197.
Paludina vivipara, note on the mus-
cular structure of, 36.
Parasitic Fungi, mode of growth of,
Edward Tucker, on, 204.
Pathological Society, transactions of,
review of, 195.
Paul, Dr. B, translation of Unger’s
botanical letters, 123.
INDEX TO JOURNAL.
Pentium, 237.
Peziza macrocalyzx, 121.
Phormidum, 189. ;
Photographs match, or camera lucidu
drawings of microscopic objects for
the stereoscope, Prof. Riddell, 290.
Pinnularia hebridensis, 27.
Pityriasis versicolor, 185. ‘
Polyzoa, marine, in the collection of
the British Museum, catalogue of,
277.
Powell and Lealand’s condenser, Dr.
Inman, on, 60. ’
Pseudo-entophyta, Dr. J. Leidy, on,
194.
Q.
Quinine and quinidine (8 quinine)
in the urine, 13.
R.
Rainey’s light moderator, 141.
Rainey, G., on the illumination of
transparent objects, 7, 65, 285.
Ray Society, botanical and physio-
logical memoirs, published by, 279.
Reagents, chemical, on a method of
applying to minute quantities of
matter, by L. Beale, 58.
Retina, on the structure of, 199.
Rhubarb, on the spiral vessel of, 288.
Riddell, Prof. J. L., on the binocular
microscope, 18.
» on match photographs,
&e., 290.
Robinson, The Rev. T. R., on the
measuring of the angular aperture
of the objectives of microscopes,
295.
Roper, F. C. S., on three new British
species of Diatomacez, 283.
Rotation in the cells of plants, G.
Lawson, on, 54.
“ in Vallisneria spiralis, G.
Hunt, on the, 55.
Royal Institution, on the construction
of the compound achromatic mi-
croscope, lecture on, by Charles
Brooke, M.A., F.R.S., 205.
Royal Irish Academy, on a new
method of measuring the angular
aperture of the objectives of micro-
scopes, by the Rev. T. R. Robinson,
D.D., 295.
Royal Society, on a new and more
correct method of determining the
angle of aperture of microscopic
object glasses, by W.S. Gillett, 293.
301
Royal Society of Edinburgh, proceed-
ings of, 143.
Ss.
Sarcina in the lungs, 41.
Savian bodies, 6.
Schacht, on the microscope, review of,
45,
a rs “Der Baum 12s.
Shadbolt, G., on the proposed new
genus ‘ Actinophenia,’ 201.
Siebold, C. Th. v., on the transforma-
tion of Cysticercus pisiformis into
Tenia serrata, 255.
Sollitt, J. D., and Harrison, R., on the
Diatomacee found in the vicinity of
Hull, 61.
Spermatozoids, on the existence of, in
certain freshwater Alge, 35.
Spiral vessel of rhubarb, on the, 288.
Spleen, T. H. Huxley, on the struc-
ture and relations of the Malpig-
hian follicles of, 74.
Starch, H. Criiger, on the develop-
ment of, 173.
», granule, Prof. Allman, on the
probable structure of, 163.
x Busk, on the occurrence of
particles resembling starch in the
brain, 105.
Stein, Dr. F., die Infusionsthiere, auf
ihne Entwickelungs Geschichte un-
tersucht, 272.
Stereoscopic and binocular micro-
scope, W. Hodgson, on a, 57.
Stirrup’s microscope, 140.
Surgical pathology, lectures on, by
Jas. Paget, review of, 197.
Symploca, 189.
40
Tenia serrata, derived from the trans-
formation of Cysticercus pisiformis,
255.
Test objects, Diatomacee as, 61.
Tongue, ‘ Black Fur’ on the, 263.
Tonsils, T. H. Huxley, on the strue-
ture and relations of the Malpighian
bodies of, 74.
Torbane Hill miueral, Prof. Traill, on
the, 143.
Tourmalines, artificial, on the manu-
facture of, 83.
Traill, Prof., on the Torbane Hill
mineral, 143.
Transparent objects, on the illumina-
tion of, 7, 65.
Triceratium armatum, 283.
Tucker, Edward, on the mode of
growth of parasitic Fungi, 204,
302 INDEX TO JOURNAL.
Tulasne, L, B., on the germination of | Virchow, R., on cellulose in the brain
the spores of the Uredinez, 110. and spinal chord of man, 101.
U. | W.
Uvella, 190.
Unger, Dr. F., botanical letters of, | Wenham, F. H., on the binocular mi-
123. croscope, 132.
Uric acid crystals, peculiar form of, on the aperture of
described by Dr. H. Jones, 196. object "glasses, &c., 134.
Uredinee Tulasne, on the germina- on the aperture of
tion of the-spores of, 110. object ‘elasses, 209.
on the illumination
Vv of - objects under the microscope,
a &e., 145.
Vibrisse, analogy of, with the muci- White, T. C., on the colouring of
parous glands of fishes, 6. animalcules, 282.
Vine, diseases of, 44.
Virchow, R., on chromatophores in DEA
the frog, 254.
on the irritability of | Xanthidium armatum, 287.
ciliated cells, 108. | Zoogalactusa tmetropha, 121.
.
Lonpon : Printed by W. Cowes and Sons, Stamford Street and Charing Cross,
QUARTERLY JOURNAL
OF
MICROSCOPICAL SCIENCE,
ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS.
On the SrructurE and Rewation of the Corpuscuta Tactus
( Tactile Corpuscles or Axile Corpuscles), and of the Pactnian
Bopvies. By Tuomas H. Huxtey, F.RS.
In February, 1852, Professor Wagner published in the Got-
tingen ‘ Gelehrte Nachrichten,’ the results of some observa-
tions, made by G. Meissner and himself, the tendency of
which was to establish the existence of peculiar bodies in
certain of the papille of the fingers and palm of the hand, to
which, from their relation to the nerves entering the papilla,
he ascribed special functions, and thence proposed to confer
upon them the name of corpuscula tactus—Tactile corpuscles.
Wagner’s principal positions are the following :—
1. The papilla of the hand are of two kinds—nervous and
vascular—the vascular papille containing no nerves, and the
nervous papille possessing no vessels.
2. The nervous papille contain a peculiarly constructed
oval mass, like a fir-cone, composed of bands or rows, arranged
one behind the other.
3. The dark-bordered nerve-fibres enter the papilla, pass
to this ‘‘ tactile corpuscle,” and terminate in it, either free or
dividing into five branches.
4, These corpuscles are analogous to the Pacinian bodies.
5. They are specially subservient to sensation.
Professor Kélliker, whom this Memoir touched somewhat
directly, replied in the ‘ Zeitschrift fiir Wissenschaftliche
Zoologie’ of the following June, by an essay on the same
subject (Ueber den Bau der Cutispapillen und der soge-
nannten Tactk6rperche R. Wagner’s), in which, having care-
fully repeated and extended Wagner’s observations, his
general conclusions are :—
1. a. The corpusculated papilla often contain vessels.
6. The vascular papilla of the lip contain nerves.
VOL. ITI. B
2 ON THE CORPUSCULA TACTUS.
c. In the lip and hand there are a few papilla without
axile corpuscles and with nerves.
2. The tactile corpuscle is not a peculiar body, but the
ordinary embryonic connective tissue remaining as the axis
of the papilla. Kdlliker therefore proposes to call it “axile
corpuscle.”
3. The nerves do not enter and terminate in the corpuscle
but wind round it and form loops.
4. The cdrpuscles are not specially subservient to sen-
sation.
Besides the surface of the hand Kolliker found these
corpuscles only in the red edges of the lips and at the point of
the tongue. :
Finally, in Miiller’s Archiv for 1852, Wagner, in a com-
munication accompanied by very good figures (Ueber der
Tactkorperchen, Corpuscula Tactus, Mull. Arch. H. 4), re-
ferring to the discrepancies between Kolliker and himself,
considers the question as to the peculiarity of the structure of
the corpuscles to be still open; he denies that the nerve
fibres form loops on the axile corpuscles (quoting, in confir-
mation of his own views, Meissner, Ecker, Briiche, and Giins-
burg), and, also, that nerves enter any papillae but those pro-
vided with tactile corpuscles. Wagner admits, however, that
certain of the papillz containing axile corpuscles also exhibit
vascular loops, but these, according to him, always have nervous
tissue at their extremities, and are in fact formed by the coales-
cence of a nervous and vascular papilla. Without pretending
to decide, when two such eminent doctors in physiology dis-
agree, I beg to lay before the reader the following results of
my own examination of this matter, accompanied by some
figures drawn ona larger scale, and with more attention to
detail than those furnished by Wagner or Kolliker. I can
best arrange what I have to say in the order of the points in
dispute, as given above.
1. In the human finger I have met with corpusculated
papilla containing vascular loops, though rarely (PI. I. fig. 2) ;
but I have observed no papillae without corpuscles, to present
nerves. That there is not, however, necessarily an inverse
relation between the presence of vessels and that of nerves,
is shown by the fungiform papille of the sides of the base of
the tongue in the Frog, in which very evident dark-contoured
nerves may be seen terminating in papilla, without any trace
of a_ tactile corpuscle, and with a large vascular loop
(fig. 6).
2. Everything I have seen leads me to believe with
Kolliker, that the ‘corpuscle’ is not histologically, in any re-
ON THE CORPUSCULA TACTUS. 3
spect, a special structure, but merely rudimentary connective
tissue (areolated embryonic connective tissue of Kolliker),
exactly resembling that which is to be found in the rest of
the papilla. This consists in fact of a homogeneous matrix
in which endoplasts (nuclei) are embedded, and which, in
various directions surrounding and radiating from these, is
metamorphosed into a substance more or less resembling
elastic fibre. The sole difference from the surrounding sub-
stance presented by the corpuscle consists in this, that these
elastic bands and filaments are more or less parallel to one
another, and perpendicular to the axis of the corpuscle
(fig. 1). :
In one respect, however, [ believe that the corpuscles are
peculiar, and something more than the mere, imperfectly
formed axis of the papilla. Kolliker has pointed out (le.
p- 67) that the nerve-tubules which enter the papilla are
accompanied by a delicate neurilemma, and I believe that the
“corpuscles” are its continuation and termination. In structure,
the neurilemma which surrounds the more delicate branches
of the nerves in the human finger (fig. 7) is identical with the
** corpuscles,” except that in the former the elastic element is
disposed parallel with the nerve fibre, while in the latter it
is more or less perpendicular to it. In fact, I believe, that
the “corpuscle” is simply the modified extremity of the
neurilemma of the nervous tubules which enter the papille.
3. With respect to the extremely difficult question of the
mode of termination of the nerves, | may state that, without
having any reason to urge against the existence of loops (on
the contrary, having observed them very distinctly in the
cutaneous papille of fishes), I have never been able to con-
vince myself of their presence, and frequently when I believed
I had such cases before my eyes, the use of a higher power,
or the causing the papilla to turn a little, would undeceive me.
On the other hand, it is by no means diflicult to obtain the
clearest possible eridence of the occurrence of the so-called
free ends (figs. 38, 4, 5). The dark-contoured fibres pass,
sometimes only a little beyond the proximal extremity of the
corpuscle (figs. 4, 5), sometimes quite to its distal end (fig. 3,
and here fertiiinate by one or two pointed extremities, which
appear to be continuous with the tissue of the corpuscle. I
have never been able to obtain any evidence of the entrance
of a dark-contoured nerve fibre into a “corpuscle.’ My
belief that the nerves in the cor pusculated papilla of Man do
really terminate in this manner, is strengthened by the ease
with which this mode of termination may be demonstrated in
the papille of the tongue of the Frog, to which reference
B 2
4 ON THE CORPUSCULA TACTUS.
has been made above (fig. 6). Here four or five coarse
nerve-fibres enter the papilla, run to its very extremity,
become pointed, abruptly lose their fatty nature, and termi-
nate in the delicate reticulated fibres, which represent the
elastic element of the connective tissue of the part.*
4. Wagner, as we have seen, compares the corpuscles to the
Pacinian bodies, and I think with great justice. The Pacinian
bodies are, as is well known, principally found attached to the
nerves of the hand and foot in Man, to those of the mesentery
in the cat, to the nerves of the extremities of many animals,
to those of the skin and beak in birds, and to the intercostal
nerves of the Boa constrictor. They are commonly said to be
composed of numerous corpuscles of connective tissue, arranged
concentrically, and separated by a clear fluid. The inner-
most contains, besides this fluid, a nervous fibre, which
terminates in a free clavate or branched extremity.
In the human hand, however, I have invariably found that
this description of their structure is not exactly correct. In fact,
I find no interspaces filled with fluid, nor any central cavity.
If the body be cut in two, each half remains as hard and uncol-
lapsed as before; if it be torn, each layer of the ‘ corpuscle ”
is seen to be united to its neighbour by a delicate, transparent,
more or less granular, or sometimes fibrillated substance.
Again, the nerve lies not ina cavity, but ina solid homogeneous
substance ;.and, so far as I have seen, terminates more or less
gradually in a portion of this mass, in which great numbers of
endoplasts (nuclei) lie, and which has thence almost the ap-
pearance of cartilage.{ The structure of the rest of the body
* Much has been said as to the possibility of confounding capillaries
with nerves; but I conceive that such a mistake could hardly be made by
any careful observer, unless perhaps strong alkaline solutions had been
allowed to act unwatched upon the preparation. I have made use of both
acetic acid and caustic soda, and I find the latter more available in dis-
covering nerves, the former in making out vessels and the general structure
of the papilla ; inasmuch as it renders their ‘‘nuclei” more obvious, while
soda makes them lessso. It is very useful sometimes to use these re-agents
alternately ; and it is a good rule to apply them to the object only while
under the microscope, so as to watch their gradual operation.
+ According to Will (Reichert’s Report, p. 69, Mill, Arch. 1851), the
contents of the central capsule of the Pacinian body in Birds is formed by
a dense cellular mass, and closely applied cells exist in the external neu-
rilemma. From observations upon these bodies in the Pigeon and Duck I
can confirm this statement: in fact, the Pacinian bodies of the birds are
very like the young forms of those of Man. I have also noticed, as Wagner
states (1. c. p. 499), that the internal cellular mass is occasionally trans-
versely striated, somewhat like a tactile corpuscle. The Pacinian bodies in
Birds are much more superficial than in Man, being situated in the super-
ficial layer of the corium, close to the sacs of the feathers. In the Pigeon
they are very small, frequently not more than 1-150th—1-200th of an inch
ON THE CORPUSCULA TACTUS. 5
is, essentially, the same,* and the appearance of their concentric
capsules is produced by the arrangement of their endoplasts
in concentric layers in the outer part of the Pacinian body,
and their connexion by the lamine and fibres of more or less
imperfect elastic substance.
The concentric lines in the Pacinian bodies are no more
evidence that they are composed of capsules, than the parallel
lines in the neurilemma of smal] nervous twigs (fig. 7) are
evidence that it is composed of concentric tubes. In each
case the appearances depend simply upon the disposition of
the lines of elastic tissue. In fact, the Pacinian bodies are
nothing more than thickened processes of the neurilemma of
the nerve to which they are attached ; and differ from the “ tac-
tile corpuscles” only in the circumstance that the thickening
takes place on each side of the nerve fibril, while in the
Pacinian body it takes place on both sides. The difference
in the direction of the apparent layers is not so great as it
seems, since, at each extremity of the Pacinian body, these
are, as in the tactile corpuscle, perpendicular to the direction
of the nerve.
5. The evidence with respect to the physiological functions
of either the corpuscula tactus or of the Pacinian bodies is
wholly negative ; and it seems useless to enter upon the region
of hypothetical suppositions. But I think that Comparative
Anatomy promises to offer some assistance in this case by
showing that these structures form the lowest terms, in a series
whose higher members attain a very great development in
certain animals, though their precise function is in many
cases obscure. The homology of the tactile corpuscles with
the Pacinian bodies appears, from what has been said, to be
clear. What are the Pacinian bodies? Mr. Bowman, in his
article on this subject in the Cyclopedia of Anatomy, will
not decide upon their function, but points out their close simi-
larity to certain bodies described by Savi in the Torpedo,
and subsequently more fully described by Leydig (Beitrage
zur Anat. d. Rochen. u. Haie.). These are capsules of homo-
in theirlong diameter, and possess only one or two “ capsules,” with a pro-
portionally large inner mass. In the Duck they are to be met with in great
numbers in the skin of the beak, especially in the ridged portion at its
edges. Here the Pacinian bodies, often very small (1-400th of an inch),
lie immediately under the epidermis, with their long diameters more or less
parallel to the surface; and the nerves are related to them, just in the
same manner as those of the fingers are to the tactile corpuscle. It is dif-
ficult to suppose that they have not here some special reference to the sense
of touch.
* Compare Strahl. Miill. Archiv, 1848, who gives a similar account of
the structure of the layers.
6 ON THE CORPUSCULA TACTUS.
‘geneous connective tissue, containing a semi-solid gelatinous
substance, and inclosing a knob-like process ; the termination
of the stalk of the vesicle. A nervous bundle passes through
the stalk, accompanied by a vessel, and branches out in the
knob ; its fibres become pale and terminate here, not passing
through as Savi stated. (Diag. C.)
In the Rays and Sharks, bodies precisely similar to these,
open by a tubular neck upon the outer surface of the skin. In
the Sharks they have no special external hard capsule, while
in the Rays they are provided with such acapsule, composed
of condensed connective tissue. (Diag. D. E.)
In the osseous Fishes, ampullz, similar to these, connected
together by a longitudinal tube open on the sides of the body
along the so-called lateral line. ‘The systems of each side are
connected by a transverse tube which passes over the occiput.
In the Sharks and Rays, organs of an exactly similar nature
form a system of ramifying tubes in the head and over the
sides of the body. These organs have hitherto been known as
the ‘ muciparous canals ;” though, as Leydig has well shown,
they contain a semi-solid gelatinous material, and have nothing
to do with the mucus of the skin, which is formed by the
altered epidermic layer. As Leydig has pointed out, then—
the Pucinian bodies, the Savian bodies, and the so-called
muciparous canals of osseous and cartilaginous fishes are
homologous organs, and form a series, whose lowest term, if
Wagner’s conclusion be correct, is formed by the corpuscula
tactus. What is the highest term? In the most complex am-
pulla, or muciparous canal, of a Ray or Shark, we find—1. ex-
ternally a thick coat, composed of condensed connective tissue ;
2, a nervous twig penetrating this, and passing to—8. an internal
delicate sac, which contains a gelatinous matter, communicates
with the exterior, and is lined by a layer of cells continuous
with the epidermis : on the walls of this the vessels and nerves
terminate. Now, we have only to conceive a single hair,
developed within one of these ampulla and taking the place
of the clear gelatinous matter, to have a vibrissa, such as is
met with in almost all the Mammalia about the lip and eye-
brow (see Diagr. F); and I conceive that the vibrisse are, in
fact, the most complex and fully developed forms of this series
of cutaneous organs.* Now, the vibrisse are, without doubt,
delicate ,organs of touch, and the mucous canals of Fishes
appear to be very probably of the same nature; but when we
* The auditory labyrinth is constructed on precisely the sameplan as the
muciparous canals of fishes, and the eye on that of a vibrissa, as might
realily be demonstrated ; so that all the organs of sense are to be regarded
as modifications of one and the same plan.
ON THE CORPUSCULA TACTUS. 7
come to the Savian and Pacinian bodies, and to the Corpuscula
tactus, two possibilities arise—either they may be still the
instruments of a modified sense of touch, or they may be
merely rudimentary representatives of the more completely
formed organs. At present there appears to be no sufficient
evidence to decide this point; and | would merely wish to
draw attention to the fact, that these organs are not isolated
structures, but form a series, with the function of whose
highest members only, we are at present fully acquainted.
Some Observations on the Ittumination of TRANSPARENT
Ossects. By Grorce Raney, M.R.C.S., Demonstrator
of Anatomy and Microscopic Anatomy at St. Thomas’s
Hospital.
Ir is observed by an excellent optician and writer on the
microscope that “the manner in which an object is lighted is
second in importance only to the excellence of the glass
through which it is seen. In the investigating of any new or
unknown object it should be viewed in turns by every descrip-
tion of light, direct and oblique, as a transparent object and
as an opaque object, with strong and with faint light, with
large angular pencils and with small angular pencils, thrown
in all possible directions. Every change will probably de-
velop some new fact in reference to the structure of the
object.” These remarks are so true that it is not too much to
say that the power and perfection of the best modern lenses
cannot be correctly estimated or fully appreciated unless em-
ployed in conjunction with the best modes of illumination ;
nor can the best methods of illumination be properly tested
without the best lenses, But, in proportion as these optical
inventions, like most other contrivances, approach perfection,
so do the difficulty and care necessary in using them increase ;
and hence, to secure their full advantage, it becomes the more
necessary to possess a certain amount of knowledge both of
their construction and their action.
In the judging of optical instruments it is of importance that
appropriate objects should be examined — namely, such as
have upon them the most delicate, though distinct markings.
I know of no microscopic specimen better adapted for test-
ing the excellency both of lenses and condensers than the one
now generally in use for this purpose—the Pleurosigma
angulatum.
I shall frequently have occasion in the following remarks to
allude to Gillett’s condenser and to Wenham’s paraboloid, but
8 ON THE ILLUMINATION OF TRANSPARENT OBJECTS.
as these excellent contrivances have been in use for some time,
and therefore are generally known, it would be superfluous in
me to describe their several parts, or to do more than simply
to name them.
Nothing can show the advantages of the improved method
of illumination better than a careful examination of the object
just named, first as illuminated in the ordinary way, and then
as illuminated in the improved one; afterwards contrasting
the appearances which it presents under these kinds of illumi-
nation. :
If the Pleurosigma angulatum be examined with a lens of
1-8th inch focus, and 150° angular aperture, by good day-
light reflected upon it by a plane or concave mirror in the
ordinary way, little more than the mere outline of the object
will be visible. Nor will any advantage be gained by in-
creasing the magnifying power of the microscope by the
employment of the deeper eye-pieces. On the contrary, these
are of more harm than benefit, in consequence of the diminu-
tion of light which they occasion. If, now, Gillett’s con-
denser be substituted for the mirror, and the light be admitted
only through the four or five smaller apertures of the revoly-
ing diaphragm of the condenser, so that the central rays only
of the pencil of light pass through the object, no dots or lines
will be seen upon it, but its appearance will be the same as
when the mirror was used; nor will the deeper eye-pieces be
of any use. Of course I am speaking of the condenser when
properly centered and adjusted. The non-appearance of
markings on the Pleurosigma under this kind of illumination
is differently explained. That it is not due to a deficiency of
_ light is evident from the following experiment. If one of
these apertures be stopped, and the diaphragm be so placed
that only a small quantity of light can pass obliquely through
the condenser by the next hole, distinct parallel lines are
made apparent, although the field of view is much darker than
before. And that it is notin this instance caused by an excess
of light, as imagined by some microscropists, is certain from
the following fact. Turn the revolving diaphragm so that the
pencil of light passing through the condenser is just sufficient
to render the markings on this object visible ; afterwards bring
successively the larger apertures under the condenser, and it
will be seen that the marking, in the place of becoming less
apparent as the diameter of the pencil of light increases,
becomes more so.
From these facts it is obvious that the appearance or non-
appearance of lines on the Pleurosigma is altogether inde-
pendent of the quantity of light, and due only to the direction
ON THE ILLUMINATION OF TRANSPARENT OBJECTS. 9
in which the rays are made to fall upon this object. As it
has been shown that the rays nearly perpendicular, called
direct rays in contradistinction to the oblique ones, are of no
use in the illumination of the object in question, and as its
marking is rendered perfectly distinct by oblique light, it
is evident that the most proper illumination in this case is
that in which the central part of the pencil of light is cut off
by a stop from the object, and only the oblique rays allowed
to pass through it. These ends are fully attained by Mr.
Gillett’s condenser: and, as by this contrivance the oblique
rays can be thrown equally on all sides of the minutest par-
ticles, shadows are prevented ; and markings, which, when
illuminated by oblique light only on one side, appear as lines,
are in this way resolved into their component dots.
It now remains to show in what manner oblique light acts
in developing structures which cannot be seen by nearly per-
pendicular rays. I may observe that it is not a question of
degrees of distinctness that | am considering, but the fact that
parts, which are perfectly distinct when examined by one
kind of illumination, are totally invisible when examined by
another kind.
The explanation of this fact seems to be deducible from the
following considerations.
Suppose a part to be made up of two substances intimately
connected, though distinct from each other, and both defi-
nitely arranged, whose refractive powers differ so little that
they cannot be distinguished from one another under the
microscope by the slight difference in their refraction of the
light passing through them. This is, I believe, the condition
of the Pleurosigma angulatum and other objects of a similar
kind. Now, if the light, by any kind of illumination, can be
prevented passing through one of these substances—the one
having the greater refractive power—whilst it passes freely
through the other, they will then become perfectly distin-
guishable, the one appearing dark, the other light. This is
what seems to take place when such objects as the one in
question are illuminated by oblique light; for a ray of light
cannot pass out of a denser into a rarer medium if the angle
of incidence exceed a certain limit, and this limit is different
in substances of different refractive powers. Thus all rays
incident on water, at an angle greater than 48° 36’, having to
pass from it into air will not be refracted, but reflected. In
the same way, all rays incident on glass, at an angle greater
than 41° 49’, and passing from it into air, will not be re-
fracted, but suffer total reflection. Hence, applying these
facts to the Pleurosigma, 1 think that it admits of but little
10 ON THE ILLUMINATION OF TRANSPARENT OBJECTS.
doubt that the dots appear dark only because the light
beneath falling upon them at an angle greater than that at ~
which all refraction ceases, and total reflection begins, cannot
be transmitted, and hence these dots are seen as opaque
bodies intercepting the passage of the light to the eye;
whilst, on the contrary, the other material, having a lower
refractive power, and therefore allowing all the oblique rays
incident upon it at the same angle to pass through it, will
necessarily appear bright.
The correctness of this conclusion will appear more pro-
bable when it is recollected that these two substances are dis-
tinguishable not by the one refracting the light differently to
the other, but by the fact of one refracting it, and the other
not; the former appearing bright and transparent, the latter
dark and opaque.
As respects the non-appearance of the markings under
direct illumination, it may be observed that, as the rays in .
this instance may nearly all be supposed to be incident upon
the object at an angle less than that at which refraction ceases,
they would be refracted by both substances nearly in the same
degree, and therefore each would appear to be transparent, and
the whole almost homogeneous.
These few facts show that, when all such objects as the
Pleurosigma are illuminated by oblique rays, they must be
examined by lenses which admit a large pencil of light, that
is, have a large angle of aperture, in order that an allowance
may be made for the diminished quantity of light which pene-
trates the object and enters the eye, in consequence of the
total reflection from the lower surface of the dots.
Having considered the class of objects best fitted to display
the effects of oblique illumination, | will now consider those
which are best seen by light passing through them almost
perpendicularly.
Although oblique light answers so well in the instances |
have adduced, there are some structures and objects for which
it is totally unfit, and which can only be successfully examined
by rays passing through them almost perpendicularly, that is,
by direct light.
Amongst this class of objects are all those which strongly
refract light, either from their density or spherical figure, as,
for instance, most recent structures, either animal or vegetable,
these consisting chiefly of corpuscles, and highly-refractive
particles of various forms and sizes,
The reason why such objects cannot be*seen when illumi-
nated by rays falling upon them very obliquely, but are dis-
tinct when illuminated by those which fall upon them almost
ON THE ILLUMINATION OF TRANSPARENT OBJECTS. 11
perpendicularly, will, I think, be apparent from a few conside-
rations respecting the undulatory theory of light. According
to this theory, the phenomena of refraction are due to vi-
brations produced in an elastic medium occupying the inter-
vals between the particles of all transparent substances by a
force proceeding from a luminous body ; and the elasticity of
this medium is less in proportion to the refractive power of
every transparent substance; or, in other words, the greater
the refractive power of any substance the greater also will
be the force required to excite undulations in the less elastic
medium diffused through it. Hence, as the effect of the
same force acting upon a resisting medium is proportional
to the direction in which it acts, being at its maximum when
the line of the force is perpendicular to that of the resistance,
and at its minimum when the angle of inclination is upon the
point of vanishing, it must be clear, that light falling obliquely
upon a transparent surface will exert less power in producing
the effects of refraction than if it fell perpendicularly ; so that
when the rays of light fall very obliquely upon a highly-
refractive substance, their effect will be too feeble to excite its
condensed vibratory medium into undulations, and therefore
the rays will simply pass by it, producing at its border the
effects of interference of light.
This is precisely what takes place when oblique light is
employed to illuminate objects possessing a very high refrac-
tive power; whilst rays falling nearly perpendicularly upon
the same objects, and thus acting upon them in a direction
the most favourable for producing the effects of refraction,
penetrate, as it were, their substance, and render their structure
apparent in all its detail.
Though there are these two classes of objects, one requiring
for their illumination oblique rays, and the other nearly per-
pendicular ones, yet the majority of compound organs require
both kinds of light. Many of them are structures which, though
they may appear most beautiful under direct illumination,
will, by oblique light, be made to reveal something in their
composition which would have remained concealed without
this light. .
Structures, if examined properly, should be subjected to a
kind of microscopic analysis, in order that nothing in their
composition may be overlooked.
Having shown some of the advantages of the present
methods of illuminating microscopic objects, | will consider
some defects in these methods, which have been in a great
measure overlooked, and also the best way of obviating them.
This will be best done by carefully observing the effects of
12 ON THE ILLUMINATION OF TRANSPARENT OBJECTS.
different modes of illumination upon those microscopic objects
whose precise form and optical properties are known.
For this purpose I will first describe the appearances pre-
sented by microscopic globules of mercury of different sizes
when illuminated by Gillett’s condenser and Wenbam’s para-
boloid.
Such globules can easily be obtained by condensing the
vapour of boiling mercury upon a piece of glass, and then
causing some of the particles to run together, with the point of
a needle.
If one of these globules, about 1-300th of an inch in
diameter, be examined by a lens of half-inch focus, and illu-
minated by Gillett’s condenser, all rays coming from other
sources being completely cut off, and the light admitted
only through the smallest aperture of the revolving diaphragm,
it will present, when the margin is in focus, a circular, darkish
surface with an obscure ill-defined light in the centre; but
when the nearest surface is brought into focus, the central
spot of light will become distinct and well defined. If the
diaphragm be revolved, so as to bring under the condenser
the larger apertures, the size of the central spots of light will
gradually increase in proportion to the size of the apertures.
If, now, one of the stops be brought under the centre of the
condenser there will be seen on this globule, in the middle
of the illuminated circular space, a distinct image of the
stop, which can be recognised by the cross-bar which joins the
circular disk to the edge of the opening; and these can further
be shown to be the image of the parts just mentioned by
revolving the condenser, when they will be seen to move
and to change their direction and position according to that
of the condenser, If there be several globules of different
sizes in the field of view, every one of them will have an
image of the stop uponit. Of course in proportion as the glo-
bules are more minute, the images will be less recognizable,
and on those about 1-1000th of an inch in diameter they can be
distinguished only as a very minute circular spot with a dark
point in its centre. Globules much smaller than these
present only a minute point of light in their centre; and the
smaller, those about 1-15000th of an inch, appear entirely
dark. However, when higher magnifying powers are em-
ployed, an image of the stop can be distinguished on globules
1-4800th of an inch in diameter, If any of the globules
have been a little compressed by the piece of thin glass
placed upon them, to keep them from dust, so that their
spherical figure is destroyed, no image will be formed on
them; but the flattened central space, when the stop is under
ON THE ILLUMINATION OF TRANSPARENT OBJECTS. 13
the condenser, will be faintly illuminated ; if the place of the
stop, however, be occupied by one of the apertures, it will
be very brightly illuminated. Such are the appearances of
globules of mercury under the higher power of the mi-
croscope. But if they are examined by a lens of lower
power—one-inch focus, with one of the larger stops under
the condenser—they will appear on a dark ground, as when
illuminated by Wenham’s paraboloid. There will be a well-
defined ring of light around each globule, and at its centre an
image of a stop; the only difference in their appearance as
illuminated by these two instruments being this, that when
the latter is employed, the light is a little brighter, and that in
the place of the image of a stop in the centre of the globules
there is avery distinct one at the end of the paraboloid, and of
the cross-bar placed within the tube to support the central disk,
which can be seen to move and change its direction when the
instrument is made to revolve.
( To be continued.)
Paper on the Discovery of Quinine and QurntpinE (8. Quinine)
in the Urine of Patients under medical treatment with the
Salts of these mixed Alkaloids. By W. Biro Heraratn,
M.D., Bristol.
Ir has long been a favourite problem with the scientific pro-
fessional man to trace the course of remedies in the system of
the patient under his care, and to know what has become of
the various substances which he might have administered
during the treatment of the disease.
Whilst some of these remedies have been proved to exert
a chemical change upon the circulating medium, and to add
some of their elements to the blood for the permanent benefit
of the individual, others, on the contrary, make but a tem-
porary sojourn in the vessels of the body, circulating with the
blood for a longer or shorter period, but being eventually
expelled and eliminated from it at different outlets and by
various glandular apparatus.
Some of these substances being more or less altered in
chemical composition, in consequence of having been sub-
jected to the various processes of vital chemistry during their
transit through the system; whilst others, having experienced
no alteration in their constitution, but having resisted all the
destructive and converting powers of the animal laboratory,
have been by various means again separated from the ex-
14 HERAPATH ON THE DISCOVERY OF QUININE, &c.
cretions by the physiological and pathological chemist, in
their pristine state of purity.
It has recently been somewhat more than a conjecture that,
in common with others of the vegetable alkaloids, quinine may
be included in the latter class of remedial agents ; and several
methods of discovering its presence have emanated from dif-
ferent scientific observers. It has been occasionally traced in
the urine of patients suffering from intermittent fever, to
whom large doses of quinine have been necessarily admi-
nistered. However, the nature of the tests hitherto employed,
and the various processes adopted, require large quantities
of the fluid for examination, and the imperfection of the
evidence resulting from the experiment still throws consi-
derable doubt upon the value of the conclusions arrived at.
It is merely necessary to allude to tannic acid and tincture
of iodine as the usual tests employed, both being very far
from efficient means of detecting minute quantities of quinine
in organic fluids.
Having been struck with the facility of application and the
extreme delicacy of the re-action of polarised light, when
going through the series of experiments upon the sulphate of
jodo-quinine (Phil. Mag., March 1852, and September of the
same year), I determined upon attempting to bring this
method practically in use, for the detection of minute quan-
tities of quinine in the excretions or animal fluids.
After more or less success by different methods of experi-
menting, I have at length discovered a process by which it is
possible to obtain demonstrative evidence of the presence of
quinine, even if in quantities not exceeding the 1-100,000th
part of a grain; in fact, in traces so exceedingly minute that
they would be perfectly inappreciable by any other process.
The same method (by a slight modification) has also enabled
me to prove the fact, that quinidine escapes from the system
by the kidneys in an unaltered state, which, as far as | am
aware, has not hitherto been observed, although it might bave
been almost assumed, from the great analogical resemblance
existing between these alkaloids.
The subject furnishing the urine for examination was a man
suffering from tetanus, in consequence of an injury to the
great toe. Amputation was performed at the Bristol In-
firmary by Mr. Morgan. The patients name was R. Alex-
ander. My pupil kindly procured the specimen for me.
The tetanic symptoms were at first treated by the exhibition
of 5 grains of the disulphates of quinine (and quinidine),
with half a grain of canabis indica, every three hours. He
consequently took 40 grains of the mixed disulphates in the
period of 24 hours.
HERAPATH ON THE DISCOVERY OF QUININE, &e. 15
The urine had a greenish-yellow appearance, and, upon
standing, it deposited a brownish-yellow sediment; the urine
possessed a slightly acid re-action, and had a Sp. G. 1-032.
The sediment examined by the microscope showed prisms
and lozenges of uric acid, together with amorphous urate of
ammonia.
The deposit treated upon the field of the microscope with
ammonia instantly became changed ; the crystals of uric acid
were rendered more clearly defined in consequence of the
solution of the amorphous urates. The phosphate of ammonia
and magnesia was subsequently deposited upon the slide as
a cloudy mass when examined by the unassisted vision, but
as a magma of very minute radiating acicule when magnified
60 diameters.
The fluid urine was cautiously decanted from the amorphous
and crystalline deposits.
(A) Half a pint of this urine was treated with liquor
potasse until decidedly alkaline; it was then repeatedly agi-
tated with pure washed ether; the ethereal solution having
had time to separate by repose, was carefully removed by a
pipette ; and having been transferred to a counterpoised test-
tube, it was evaporated to dryness in a warm-water bath; the
residue weighed 0-79 grain after being kept at 212°, until no
further loss of weight occurred.
(B) A magma of phosphates and adherent alkaloid still
remained above the urinous substratum; this was also re-
moved by a pipette, and transferred to a porcelain capsule ;
evaporated to dryness at 212°, and this residue exhausted by
ether, the ethereal solution evaporated to dryness by a warm-
water bath as before, and the residue dried at 212° gave ‘61 gr.
additional alkaloid.
Therefore -79* + -61°— 1:4 grains of alkaloids were ob-
tained by these two operations from the 8 fluid ounces of urine.
Now, to determine if it contained quinine, the following
process was followed :—
Test fluid—A mixture of 3 drachms of pure acetic acid,
with 1 drachm of alcohol, and to these were added 6 drops of
diluted sulphuric acid (1 to 9).
One drop of this test fluid is to be placed on a glass slide,
and the merest atom of the alkaloid added; time given for
solution to take place; then, upon the tip of a very fine glass
rod, a very minute drop of tincture of iodine added: if quinine
be present, the first effect is the production of the yellow or
cinnamon-brown coloured compound of iodine and quinine,
which shows itself as a small circular spot, whilst the alcohol
separates in little drops, which, by a sort of repulsive move-
16 HERAPATH ON THE DISCOVERY OF QUININE, &c.
ment, drive the fluid away: after a time the acid liquid again
flows over the spot, and the polarising crystals of sulphate of
iodo-quinine are slowly produced in beautiful rosettes ; this
experiment succeeds best without the aid of heat.
To render these crystals evident, it merely remains to bring
the glass slide upon the field of the microscope (having 2-inch
objective and lowest power eye-piece), with the selenite stage
and single tourmaline beneath it: instantly the crystals assume
the two complementary colours of the stage; red and green,
supposing the pink stage is employed ; or blue and yellow, pro-
vided that the blue selenite is made use of—all those crystals at
right angles to the plane of the tourmaline producing that tint
which an analysing plate of tourmaline would produce when
at right angles to the polarising plate; whilst those at 90° to
these educe the complementary tint, in the same manner as
the analysing plate would have done if it had been revolved
through an arc of 90°. :
This test is so ready of application, and so delicate, that it
must become the test for quinine.—( Vide Pl. I. figs. 1 and 2.)
Not only do these peculiar crystals act in the way just related,
but they may be easily proved to possess the whole of the
optical properties of that remarkable salt of quinine, so fully
described by me in the Phil. Mag. for March, 1852; and the
chemical analysis of which was published in the number for
September of the same year. In fact, these crystals are per-
fectly identical with the sulphate of iodo-quinine in every
respect.
To test for quinidine it is merely necessary to allow the
drop of acid solution to evaporate spontaneously to dryness
upon the glass slide (before and without the addition of
iodine), and to examine the crystalline mass by two tour-
malines crossed at right angles, and without the selenite
stage ; immediately little circular disks of white, with a well-
defined black cross very vividly shown, start into existence.
should quinidine be present even in minute quantities. Fig. 3.
This fig. was drawn from a slide prepared by the author from
the urine of the same patient ; about 1-20th part of a grain of
the etherial extract was used by him in the manner described.
This is generally the case if “ hospital quinine ” or that of
the British Alkaloid Company has been employed: these
drugs severally contain a very large per centage of quinidine ;
the former at least 50, the latter about 20 per cent. But
Howard’s di-sulphate of quinine scarcely contains 5 per cent.
of quinidine, according to my experiments. These substances
are easily separated, in consequence of the much greater solu-
bility of the di-sulphate of quinidine in cold water, thus—
HERAPATH ON THE DISCOVERY OF QUININE, &c. 17
One part of di-sulphate of quinine requires 740 parts water, at 60°.
One part of di-sulphate of quinidine requires 340 parts water, at 55°.
so that the latter salt is more than twice as soluble as the
former.
If we employ the selenite stage in examining this object,
depicted at fig. 3, we obtain one of the most gorgeous ap-
pearances in the whole domain of the polarising microscope
—the black cross at once disappears, and is replaced by
one which consists of two colours, being divided into a cross
with a red and a green fringe, whilst the four intermediate
sectors are of a gorgeous orange yellow: these appearances
alter upon the revolution of the analysing plate of tourmaline.
When the blue stage is employed, the cross will assume a
blue or a yellow hue, according to the position of the ana-
lysing plate.
These phenomena are analogous to those exhibited by cer-
tain crystals of boracic acid, and also by the circular disks of
salicine (prepared by fusion*), the difference being that the
salts of quinidine have more intense depolarising powers than
either of the other substances; and the mode of formation
effectually excludes these from consideration. Quinine pre-
pared in the same manner as the quinidine has a very dif-
ferent mode of crystallization; but it occasionally presents
circular corneous plates, also exhibiting the black cross and
white sectors, but not with one-tenth part of the brilliancy,
which of course readily enables us to discriminate the two.
Having shown in my previous papers that none of the
vegetable alkaloids, when treated with sulphuric acid and
iodine, possess the power of forming crystalline compounds
of similar properties, and these artificial quinine tourmalines
being pre-eminent in their action on light, it follows that the
existence of these crystals is a demonstration of the presence of
quinine.
It has also been proved by me, that quinidine (6 Quinine)
cannot produce them, therefore we perceive that this alkaloid
passes out of the system without experiencing any elementary
change.
One subject is worthy of remark: the patient was taking
40 grains of the di-sulphates of quinine (and quinidine) ; there
were found 1:4 grain of alkaloids, which would be equivalent
to 1884 of the di-sulphate; and if the patient voided three
pints of urine in 24 hours, we should only account for 11°304
grains of the remedy employed, leaving a deficiency of 30
grains nearly, either to be assimilated by the body or to be
* T am indebted to my friend Mr. John Thwaites for this fact.
VOL, IT. Cc
18 HERAPATH ON THE DISCOVERY OF QUININE, &c.
destroyed in its transit through the vascular system, or lost
from other causes.
It would be interesting to undertake a series of experiments
to determine whether other excretions of the patient contain
this remedy, and also to discover what length of time elapses
after ingestion, before all evidence of its elimination by the
kidneys ceases : this being done, we may be in a position to say
what the medical equivalent of quinine may be ina given disease.
On the Binocutar Microscope. By Prof. J. L. Ripe tr.
Univ. La., New Orleans. Read before the American
Association for the Advancement of Science July 30, 1853 ;
Cleveland Meeting. (Communicated for the London Quar-
terly Journal of Microscopical Science, by the Author.)
Ir is proper to premise that some brief notices of the bino-
cular microscope (devised in 1851, constructed in 1852),
have already appeared in Silliman’s ‘Fowunal and elsewhere.
I now desire to submit a few remarks and explanations to the
members of the Association ; and at the same time to exhibit
different forms of the instrument, so that the members inter-
ested in the microscope may form a definite opinion of the
value and utility of the improvement.
The following diagram (fig. 1) will serve to illustrate the
method first dened antl put in practice. It shows as a longi-
tudinal section of the position of the objective and the prisms
for producing binocularity.
O, represents the object to be seen.
ie the objective combination, always brought as Dear as practicable to the prisms.
A, A’, two isosceles rectangular prisms of fine glass, in contact by edges somewhat ground away.
The light entering the prism A through the "objective, suffers internal reflection on the
hypothenuse A, and emerges from the prism in the direction of B. Entering the prism B,
it is restored to its original direction. So likewise that part of the luminous pencil entering
the prism A’, emerges nearly parallel from the prism B’. The prisms B and B’ are adjustable
to different distances apart, and have likewise an axial adjustment in the plane of the
section represented; the first, that they may be made to correspond to the interval between
the two eyes of the observer; the second, that the direction of the rays, travelling from
each point of the object, through the prisms, may be such as will seem to the observer
natural and unconstrained,—and with clear coincident fields.
ON THE BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE. 19
In the smaller instrument before you this arrangement is
observed. Used without eye-pieces, it gives a stereoscopic
and perfectly satisfactory result. This instrument was con-
structed for a dissecting microscope; I use it with lenses
whether plain, doublets, or achromatics, from 4 inch to 3 inches
focal length.
The image is erect and orthoscopic. Objects can be viewed
as opaque or transparent, and there is attached to it a flexible
pipe, connected with a delicate cylinder and piston, which, in
one respect, is made equivalent to a third hand. ‘Tightening
a screw, and taking the ivory termination of the flexible tube
in the mouth, the focal distance of the instrument can be
varied at pleasure with the breath. In very minute dissec-
tions, where the two hands are simultaneously employed with
hook and needle, { have found this method of holding a focus
of the greatest utility and convenience.
If over B and B' single oculars be placed, the binocular
vision is found to be pseudoscopic ; that is, depressions appear
as elevations, and elevations as depressions. With erecting
or double eye-pieces, analogous to those of the terrestrial tele-
scope, the vision again becomes orthoscopic.
On this account, I prefer to reserve this form of instrument
for use without eye-pieces, in the manner explained, and to
construct the compound binocular microscope ona plan which
I will soon explain.
Binocular Magnifier.—\ have found that for the magnifying
glasses, used by artists and naturalists,—glasses having a
focal length of one or two inches and more, a less com-
plex and more economical arrangement can be adopted,
namely :—
The reflecting surfaces A A’ and B B (fig. 1) can be sub-
stituted by pieces of common looking-glass, or plate glass
silvered. The first surface reflections are too faint to interfere
materially with distinct definition.
The two mirrors of the pair, on each side of the nose, are
hinged together on the principle of the parallel rules. The
whole arrangement is mounted something like a pair of spec-
tacles, while the requisite lenses are adapted to be centrally
attached when required, I regard the binocular magnifier as
supplying a great desideratum to lar ge classes of persons pur-
suing a great diversity of callings.
The effects, so often prejudicial to vision, of inordinately
using one eye are thus avoided.
A perfectly natural relief, or definition of bodies in depth,
as well as in extension, is thus attained.
Binocular Compound Microscope.—In the larger instrument
7 oe
c2
20 _ ON THE BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE.
before you, only two prisms are used for subdividing the
light after its passage through the objective, and for directing
the luminous pencils to the separate oculars. In this case
orthoscopic vision is produced by the ordinary single oculars.
The light suffers one instead of two reflections, as in the in-
strument before described. The arrangement of the prisms
is shown in section below.
Fig. 2. The internal reflection takes place
; upon the two long sides, which are in
opposition at a small angle, which
admits of adjustment in the plane of
the section shown, the lower termina-
tion always remaining in contact. The
light through the objective, which im-
pinges upon a, is that part of it which
enters the prism, refracted to the left,
so that it meets with the reflecting
surface 6. Suffering total reflection it
emerges from the surface c, where,
from the necessary identity of the
immergent and emergent angles, it is
refracted to the right, so as exactly to
compensate for its previous refraction
to the left. This implies that the
o, the object to be seen. i
1, the objective, above and near Upper and lower angles of the prism
to which is shown the two prisms. are equal.
In the instrument before you, these equal angles are 45°,
The ray of light, in pursuing the path a, b,c, suffers a minute
chromatic dispersion, inasmuch as by the refraction and dis-
persion at a, the red, violet, &c., will be found somewhat sepa-
rated at c; thereafter, in travelling in the direction c d to the
ocular, the red and violet will move in parallel paths, so that
no further dispersion will occur. Upon a close scrutiny into
this matter, I find that it does not practically lessen the
sharpness of definition, unless eye-pieces of unusually high
power be made use of. The minimum limit of angular
definition, perceptible by the human eye, is about 45 seconds
of a degree (45"). The extreme dispersion occasioned by the
prism as above, may be kept handsomely within this limit ;
this can be shown both by calculation and experimental de-
monstration. By making the equal angles of the prism
85° or 86°, so that the immergence and emergence shall be at
right angles to the glass planes, this theoretical dispersion
can be avoided. But practically, in this case, the usefulness
of the prism would be destroyed by the interference of light
directly transmitted through, without reflection.
ON THE BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE. 21
Prisms with equal angles of 60° will probably be found as
appropriate as any,
It would be improper to consume much of your time in
explaining the mechanical details of this instrument. The
following sketches will assist you to comprehend the essential
peculiarities of a plain, firm, comparatively simple stand, and
with all the most important adjustments.
Fig. 3 represents a side view of the instrument. The stage
is immovable, being firmly
supported, so as not to
spring sensibly under con-
siderable and sudden pres-
sure: it extends 6 by 4
inches,
The optical parts are
supported by a stout tri-
angular gun- metal bar,
bearing rack- work, and
moving up and down by a
cogged pinion, terminat-
ing in large milled heads,
one of which is shown at
E. For the convenience
of changing objectives, the
arm carrying the optical
apparatus has at P nearly
a half revolution, so as to
carry it off the stage. The
prisms are at the bottom
of a brass box at A. One
of the oculars is seen, as
fitting into an adjustable
tube C. A small rectan-
gular, equilateral prism is
so mounted in a brass cap
as to be slipped at pleasure over the eye-glass. This
little prism is adjustable in the plane of the drawing, on an
axis transverse to the plane, so as to erect the image seen,
and at the same time allow of its being viewed at any inclina-
tion between verticality and horizontality, which may be con-
venient to the observer. It will be seen that the prism at A
has the effect of erecting the image in one plane, while the
small prism at D can be placed so as to erect it in the plane
precisely tranverse. Thus the movement upon the stage will
be seen through the instrument to be natural or erect ; a con-
dition essential to the convenient manipulation or dissection
22 _ ON THE BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE.
of a microscopic object. M represents the position of a con-
cave mirror or other apparatus for illuminating transparent
objects. Two small mirrors will sometimes be found more
satisfactory than one large one, as the operator can then easily
secure a good light to each eye, which is sometimes difficult
with a single mirror.
Fig. 4 exhibits a back
view ; the common letters,
or letters common to both,
referring to the same parts
as in fig! 3. ThusCC are
the adjustable tubes into
which the oculars fit.
These tubes are hung upon
axes, so that their inclina-
tion to each other may be
varied ; and the whole ar-
rangement slides at plea-
sure, horizontally, in order
to adapt the distance to
the eyes of different ob-
servers. BB are milled
heads of screws for the
adjustment of the inclina-
tion of the prisms, as ex-
plained in connexion with
fig. 2. R isa brass tube
surrounding the box in
which plays the triangular
cun-metal supporting bar,
before explained. Concen-
tric with R, and movable
thereon, is N, a short brass tube carrying the illuminating
apparatus.
Let the observer using the instrument carefully illuminate
the object to be seen; then, after adapting the lines of vision
to the natural requirements of the pair of eyes, duly alligning
and superposing the corresponding images, and carrying ren
into corresponding parts of the two circles of light, as de-
fined by the diaphragms of the oculars ; and, lastly, regu-
lating the focal position of the object in reference to the
objective, all of which can be readily accomplished by the
various adjustments: let him now place two good eyes of
equal power in the proper position near the eye-glasses, and a
magnificent field will present itself to his sight. He seems
to look through a circular window or port-hole—say two feet
Fig. 4.
ON THE BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE. 23
off, and a foot in diameter ; ten to twenty inches beyond which
his microscopic objects, perhaps seemingly hung in mid-air,
stand out in all the boldness and perfection of relief, and defi-
niteness of position in width and depth, which he has been
accustomed to realize without glasses in the natural objects
around him.
It does not appear to him that any glass, or other artificial
medium, is interposed between his eyes and the objects seen.
The vision fatigues him no more than does a landscape, or the
inspection of the implements and objects on the table before
him. maculata
8 oe mesolepta 38. 5 Scotica
9 - interrupta 39, 95 affinis
10 > Tabellaria 40, cuspidata
ig if 5 gibba 41, Himantidium gracile, Kiitz.
12. ps gracilis 42, 5 bidens, W.Sm.
13. a lata 43. 5 pectinale, Kutz.
14. alpina 44, 5 Arcus, Kiitz.
15. Navicula serians 45. = majus, W. Sm.
16. pa rhomboides 46. 55 undulatum, Ralfs
ive BS ovalis 47. Tabellaria fenestrata, Kiitz.
18. a dicephala 48, + ventricosa, Kiitz.
19. ne firma 49, Epithemia turgida
20. ” angustata 50. Pe gibba
21. Gomphonema acuminatum 51. Eunotia gracilis
22. » var. coronatum ey Ae tetraodon
23. $3 Vibrio 538. <3 Diadema
24, oe capitatum 54. Synedra capitata
25. Amphora ovalis 55. oS bieeps
26, Stauroneis Phoenicenteron. 56. gs “6 var. B recta*
Qiks 5 gracilis 57. Fragilaria capucina, Kiitz.
28. hs linearis 58. Orthosira nivalis, W. Sm.
29. anceps 59. 3 orichalcea, W. Sm.
30. Cymatopleura elliptica 60. Nitzschia sigmoidea.t
With respect to the new form previously described, Mr.
Smith has proposed, since my former paper was written, to
call it, provisionally, EHunotia incisa (No. 61), the notches
which it exhibits forming a very well marked character. The
figures formerly given of the two modifications or varieties of
this form not being satisfactory, I here give such as will better
indicate their true character.t My reasons for including the
two forms together are, first, that both invariably exhibit the
notches ; secondly, that the number of striz appears to be the
“same in both, while the general aspect undoubtedly is so; and
thirdly, that many specimens occur in which one apex is
narrow, as in fig. 1, while the other is rounded, as in fig. 2.
I would add a remark with respect to a point which appears
* T have added this variety as it was noticed in the former paper.
+ This species was accidentally omitted from the former list.
{ These figures will be given in the next number of the Microscopical
Journal.
26 GREGORY ON THE DIATOMACEOUS DEPOSIT OF MULL
characteristic ; that while the form No. 1 is quite symmetrical,
No. 2 very rarely, if ever, is so, one end being always broader
than the other. From the greater width of No. 2, the striz
are much more easily seen in that form than in No. 1.
Since my paper was written, I have detected this form in
one more deposit, besides the present one and that mentioned
in my former paper as said to be from the banks of the Spey ;
namely, in the-Bergmehl of Lillbaggsjon in Lapland. It is
not so abundant there as in the Mull deposit; and while, in
the latter, No. 1 is the more frequent-form, in the former, the
Lapland earth, No. 2, is more common.
1] shall now give a list of those additional forms observed
by me, in a careful study of several different portions of the
deposit, which can be readily referred to figures in Mr. Smith’s
Synopsis. These are—
62. Pinnularia nobilis 78. Surirella linearis
63. + viridula * 79. Cymbella Ehrenbergii
64. 43 cardinalis 80. Epithemia rupestris
65. Navicula tumida 81. % ocellata
66. 9 gibberula 82. 7s Sorex
67. 5 Semen 83. Eunotia triodon
68. - obtusa 84, 8 diodon
69. Gomphonema dichotomum 85. Synedra Ulna
70. oe constrictum 86. Cocconema lanceolatum
71. Stauroneis dilatata 87. 55 cymbiforme
72. Tryblionella marginata 88. “3 Cistula
73. Cymatopleura Solea 89. Nitzschia Amphioxys
74. Surirella splendida 90. Cyclotella Kiitzingiana
(x 33 nobilis 91. < antiqua
76. ‘ minuta 92. $5 Rotula.
dvs “5 Craticula
Of the above 27 forms, the only ones which do not entirely
agree with Mr. Smith’s figures are those I have termed Navicula
obtusa and Epithemia Sorex. The latter is nearer in form to
EF. Musculus, but as that is a marine form, I have preferred
the other name, provisionally. In my specimens this form is
very scarce, but may be found more abundantly in others.
As to N. obtusa, the form so named by me, of which I give
figs., Nos. 3 and 4, is rather more like J. affinis, but is one
half larger than either of the two as figured in the Synopsis. -
As, however, LV. obtusa is said to occur in the Lough Mourne
deposit, and as I find there the form here figured, precisely
as in the Mull earth, and no other resembling it, 1 have chosen
the name J. obtusa in the mean time. It is clearly distinct
from all the Naviculz figured in the Synopsis, except perhaps
the two just named.
We have thus 88 distinct Diatomaceous forms (whether in
all cases true species or not, is a matter for future decision) in
v/s. 2% ate ee ee
:
:
.
GREGORY ON THE DIATOMACEOUS DEPOSIT OF MULL. 27
this remarkable deposit. The study of it has led me to think
it probable that several forms, at present separated, will have
to be united; but our knowledge of Diatomaceous forms and
of their modifications is not yet sufficient to enable us with
certainty to classify them all. There is nothing, therefore, to
be done, but to describe and accurately to fisnve, all such
forms as appear distinct, and we shall thus in time me able to
trace out the relations among them. This very deposit
appears to me rich, not only in distinct forms, but in modi-
fications of these, in several cases exactly intermediate between
the figures of recorded species. To this part of the subject I
shall return at a future time ; for the present, I confine myself
to mentioning the forms which agree with the published
figures.
It will be observed, that 27 species and 2 genera, Cocco-
nema and Cyclotella, have already been added to the former
list. But I am quite sure that the number is not yet exhausted,
for I have observed several well marked forms, which I cannot
securely refer to any of those figured in the Synopsis, and
which may probably, therefore, prove to be new to oe
Among these are one or two Pinnularig; one or two Navicule
one, perhaps two, Synedre ; one Nitzschia, possibly two; one
which | take to be a Melosira, but for want of the 2nd volante
of the Synopsis I cannot compare it with figures of the
British species. The same remark applies to the genus
Himantidium, of which Mr. Smith identified 6 well marked
species, but of which, or of some allied forms, I have reason
to think two, perhaps three more are present. I shall here-
after describe and figure all such doubtful forms.
For the present, 1 shall conclude with the description of a
very distinct and well marked species of Pinnularia, on the
specific character of which no doubts can be entertained, and
which is therefore new to Britain, if not to science. This
form I early noticed, but it was not till I had compared it with
the figures in the Synopsis that I felt sure of its being different
from all the forms in that work, as well as from all figures of
Pinnularie known to me. In the Mull deposit, it occurs in
all the different portions I have yet examined, but invariably
very widely scattered, so that a good slide, rich in forms,
seldom yields more than one or two individuals, and occa-
sionally contains none at all. Hence, and from its small size,
it is apt to be overlooked, except in a very minute and careful
search. It is of course impossible for me to say whether this
form have been already described as occurring in foreign
countries, but as yet I have seen neither figure nor description
to which it can be referred. I would propose, therefore, pro-
28 GREGORY ON THE DIATOMACEOUS DEPOSIT OF MULL.
visionally, to name it Pinnularia hebridensis ; and if any of
your readers should recognise it as one already named, of
course the earlier name must be adopted.
Pinnularia hebridensis.—V. elliptical, narrow, almost rect-
angular, with rounded ends, sometimes very slightly con-
stricted in the middle, and sometimes very slightly acuminate
at the apices. F. V. rectangular, with the corners slightly
rounded. Length, from *00125 to +0025. Costa strong,
distant, radiated at the middle, not nearly reaching central line,
10 to 11 in -001. Habit stout, notwithstanding its narrow-
ness, so that it seldom occurs fractured. The figures 5 and 6
will give some idea of its aspect.
The small size, for this is one of the smallest Pinnularia,
combined with the strong distant costa, at once distinguish
it from all those figured by Mr. Smith. I find in the late
edition of Pritchard’s ‘Infusoria,’ a description of Staur-
optera scalaris, Ehr., which has some points of agreement
with the above, such as the small size and the distant costae.
But the figure of the valve (Prichard, pl. xv., fig. 10) is very
much broader, and the number of costa is said by Ehrenberg
to be 12 in 1-1200, which is = 14 in ‘001, whereas my form
has usually 10 only, sometimes only 9°5. Besides this it has
not the pseudo-stauros which marks the genus Stauroptera of
Ehrenberg, and the nature and form of the nodules and
median line correspond exactly to those of Pinnularia alpina,
while the arrangement of the costa is also very similar to
what is seen in that species, only on a very small scale ; the
form, however, is quite different.
I have only to add that, hitherto, I have been unable to detect
the presence of this form in any other deposit which I have
had an opportunity of examining; and that if any of your
readers can throw light on the subject, or has observed any
other well marked species in the Mull deposit, I shall feel
deeply indebted to them if they will make known their
observations. I shall also be happy to supply observers with
the material for their researches.
( 29°)
TRANSLATIONS, &c.
On Cutaneous Diseases dependent upon Parasitic Growths.
By Dr. B. Guppen. Abstracted from the ‘ Archiy fiir
Physiolog. Heilkunde,’ Heft II. 1853.
Porrigo appears under numerous external forms, to which
special names have been assigned by many authors, and which
have in fact been distributed in different classes, as if they had
no mutual connexion. They all, however, have one common
characteristic by which, as respects their origin, they are dis-
tinguished as a group from other cutaneous diseases; this
characteristic is the existence in them of Fungi, which were
discovered by Schonlein (in Porrigo lupinosa), and their pre-
sence subsequently confirmed by all observers.
‘“*‘ We shall show, by a series of observations, that the me-
dium, in which these Fungi find their nutriment, is the normal
epidermis, and that those spots in it, which are more especially
favourable for the reception of foreign particles, are, almost
exclusively, the situations in which the vegetable formations
germinate. From the borders of the organic life of the epi-
dermis we shall trace the progressive growth of the parasites
to the site of their development—the cut?s—and in thus tracing
them shall be able to explain all the phenomena which occur
in Porrigo, whether as the direct effect of the devouring
parasitic growth, or as the consequence of the reaction set up
on the part of the cutis in opposition to it. We shall, more-
over, find reason to be convinced, that the Fung?, when trans-
planted into a perfectly healthy man, take root ; and ultimately
prove, that with their removal, in simple cases, the entire
disease is cured.
“ We will consider the two factors of our disease—Fungus
and skin—in the first instance apart, although not without
reference to their mutual relations :—-
‘“‘T. Oval, transparent corpuscles, presenting sharp, dark
outlines, and whose length and transverse diameter vary very
much in proportion to the abundance of their nutriment, con-
stitute the primitive form of the Fungus we are considering.
In the air they readily dry up, but again swell out with con-
siderable rapidity on the addition of water, although they do
not burst. No nucleus is visible in these corpuscles. Whilst,
not unfrequently, especially at a later stage, ‘‘ chlorophyll-
granules” of a more or less yellow colour are developed within
them, from a differentiation of the fluid contents ; and at the
30 GUDDEN ON CUTANEOUS DISEASES.
same time the outlines become paler. They vary, also, con-
siderably in number, size, and shape. When they occur
isolated, they present a deceptive resemblance to nuclei, and
I fancy it is they which have been described as such by Fuchs
and Bennett.
“On the above described vesicles, there are developed, for
the most part at the ends, but not unfrequently also on the
sides, one or perhaps two bulgings, which increase in size,
become constri¢ted at the base, sprout out again in a similar
way, and constitute eas eo dichotomously branched rows
of cells. In the meanwhile the older cells do not remain
stationary. They grow, and, occasionally with a diminution
in their width, increase in length, the outlines become pale,
owing to the flattening the constrictions are removed, and tne
moniliform strings are transformed into elongated, round fila-
ments which continue to undergo greater and greater attenua-
tion. At the same time they are capable of propagating,
throw out spores on the sides, but ultimately becoming imper-
ceptibly minute, and quite colourless, are lost in a molecular
detritus.
‘“‘ This is the mode of growth of the Fungus, when it is in no
way interfered with, And the correctness of the exposition
will be most readily shown by the assiduous examination of
the root-sheaths of the hairs, but most convincingly when the
Fungus in its earliest stages is successfully brought under the
microscrope. Circumstances, however, will, of course, pro-
duce many varieties.
“In the common form, upon examination of the crumbling
substance of the scabs of Porrigo lupinosa, it is well-known
that the cells are seen to be scattered and separate, or only
united by two or three together into short series In most
cases, perhaps, this is owing merely to the preparation, for the
less pressure and crushing is employed, and especially when
very fine vertical sections are made, from scabs not too old, the
more numerous and the longer are the rows of cells brought
into view. Specimens also are not rare, in which the individual
cells remain in contact with each other at the angles. Never-
theless, I would not altogether deny the occurrence of a spon-
taneous separation. ‘The supposition that such an occurrence
does take place, is supported both by the readiness with
which the cells may be separated, and also by the capability
of each when isolated to propagate itself independently. This
capability, of which I have satisfied myself by the examination
of individual specimens, and the observation of preparations
in which, among elongated pale cells, several rounded, yel-
lowish, sharply defined ones appear, as it were, intercalated,
GUDDEN ON CUTANEOUS DISEASES. Sl
or, in the reverse case, where among some of the latter kind
one or two of the former sort are interposed—proves that each
cell is an individual plant, the development of which under
favourable circumstances proceeds to the production of a my-
celium such as has been described.”
The author then proceeds to give a lengthened description
of the hairs and follicles, and to point out their correspond-
ence with the nails and their bed, but this it is needless to
transcribe. From the nature of the fungus and from con-
siderations drawn from the formation of the hair follicles, he
deduces the following conclusions :—
“‘ J. The more dry the skin, the more secure is the person
against the invasion of the parasite.
“2. With a similar condition of the epidermis, healthy and
diseased persons are equally disposed to the attack; different
morbid conditions coming under consideration only so far as
they increase or diminish the conditions favourable to the
growth of the fungus.
“© 3. No part of the skin is, under all circumstances, entirely
_ secure against these plants, but the hair follicles, and especially
those on the head, are peculiarly adapted for their reception
and propagation.”
The author therefore denies that there is proof of the scro-
fulous nature of Porrigo, and that its appearance is always
preceded by a scrofulous exudation, and is of course still
more opposed to the extraordinary assertion of Neukrantz of
the identity of tubercle and Favus, as well as to its having
any direct connexion with several other forms of strumous
disease, with which it has often been associated.
Simon states, that, in Favus, he never observed the Fungus
extending to any distance within the hair follicle, in which
Gruby also agrees with him. Whilst the latter observer in
the hairs of the beard noticed between the root-sheath and the
shaft, Fungi, the spores of which were minute, commonly
round, and the myce/ium furnished with granules. He desig-
nates this form, analogous to his Porrigophyta, under the name
of Mentagrophyta. He also saw Fungi in Alopecia circum-
seripta of the scalp. In his Phyto-alopecia the hair at its point
of exit from the follicle is surrounded with a sheath composed
of the fungi which extend to the height of 3-13/” up the
shaft, and thence spread themselves over the neighbouring
hairs. They consist of myce/ium threads and spores. The
latter are tolerably minute, the round gs's¢- ss's0'" ;_ the oval
troo-rtoo” long. In his Rhizophyto-alopecia the fungi are
said to be developed in the root of the hair itself, to grow
within its medulla and to occupy its interior. They consist
32 GUDDEN ON CUTANEOUS DISEASES.
only of spores of about the same diameter as the oval ones of
the Phyto-alopecia and form for the most part moniliform
strings, lying parallel with the axis of the hair, and causing
the hairs to become grey and thick, and from the loss of their
elasticity to be easily broken. Fungi in the interior of the
hair are also described by Malmsten (Miller’s Arch. 1845).
Dr. Gudden then describes a case of favus which he treated
first by the removal of the scabs by soap and water, and
afterwards by the application of a mixture of olive oil and
croton oil followed by blistering with cantharides, and in
which he at first thought he had obtained a cure, but was
disappointed by seeing, after about 12 days from the healing
of the vesicated surface, the disease reappear in the form of
minute yellowish rings around each hair, which rings as
shown by the microscope were composed of the fungus. The
only part of the scalp which remained free from the growth
was about the vertex where the hairs had been removed during
the suppuration caused by the blister over the extent of about
13 square inch.
When once acquainted with the appearance of the hair-
sheaths with the Fungi within them in Porrigo lupinosa (Favus),
the author says that a look is sufficient to show the identity,
with the latter, of the parasitic growth, found also in the hair-
sheaths in Porrigo furfurans and other forms of Porrigo (not
Porrigo decalvans, in which the author was unable to detect
any parasitic growth). In these forms of Porrigo the fungus
appears, from one reason or another, to be limited almost
wholly to the root-sheath of the hair, and can only be detected
when the root-sheath is extracted together with the hair. In
ordinary cases where there is no inflammatory action present,
the sheath does not usually come away with the hair when the
latter is plucked out and the parasitic growth is therefore not
to be seen, but Dr. Gudden states that by rubbing the part
with croton oil so as to excite some degree of inflammation
around the hairs, the root-sheath will come away and within
it the fungoid growth will be readily perceived. The detec-
tion of the fungus i is facilitated by immersing the scurfy scales
together with the adherent hair follicles, removed from the
scalp i in Porrige furfurans, in oil of turpentine, which acts more
slowly in rendering the fungus transparent, than it does upon
the horny tissue of the epidermis, &c.
The various forms of Porrigo depend upon the individuality
of the skin, and this is proved not only by the identity of the
Fungus in the different forms, but also by their frequently
observed coexistence, and the transitions from one form to
another in the same individual.
GUDDEN ON CUTANEOUS DISEASES. a
The diagnosis, however, is, in all cases rendered certain by
the finding of the Fungus as above described. Pityriasis,
which is also caused by a parasitic growth, is an entirely
different disease, and its fungus, as the author shows in a sub-
sequent chapter, is not to be confounded in any way with that
of Porrigo. The contagious property of Porrigo is shown to
depend upon the Fungus alone: in proof of which the author
describes numerous experiments made by himself and others.
The cure proposed by the author, and which appears to have
been successful in his hands, consists, first, in the loosening
of the hair-sacs by the use of croton-oil frictions and the
after application of an oil-poultice, and subsequently the
plucking out of the hairs by means of tweezers, a prolonged
and not very pleasant occupation, as it requires to be done
with extreme care. Whether his plan possess any advantages
over the old one of a pitch cap, this is not the place to
decide ; it appears, however, that the disease cannot be cured,
in the form of Favus at all events, without the eradication of
the hairs together with their root-sheaths.
On a Species of Firarta found in the Blood of the Domestic
Doc. By MM. Grusy and O. Detaronp. Abstracted
from the ‘ Comptes Rendus. Tom. xxxiv. p. 9. 1852.
AFTER noticing that several observers — Schmitz, Baer, Va-
lentin, Vogt, and Remak, from 1826 to 1842—had indicated
the existence of Filarie, Monostomata, Distomata, and Infu-
soria in the blood of Frogs, of certain Fishes, and of some
Mollusca, the authors proceed to state that, in the year 1843,
they were the first to announce the discovery of entozoa,
of the genus Filaria, living in the blood of certain domestic
dogs, and circulating with the globules of that fluid in all the
vessels. Since that communication to the Academy, MM.
Erdl and Mayer, in 1843; Hyrtl, Gros, and Ecker, in 1845 ;
Chaussat and Wedl, in 1848; and M. Guérin Méneville, in
1850, have established the fact of the presence of Hematozoa
in the blood of the Field-Rat, of the Black Rat, of several Birds,
and Fishes,—of the Crab, the River Mussel, the Earth-Worm,
and the Silk-Worm. The present memoir contains more particu-
larly the researches to which the authors had devoted them-
selves for the last nine years relative to the worm living in the
blood of certain domestic Dogs. The results at which they
arrived may be shortly stated in their own words as follows :—
1. The number of microscopic Filarig inhabiting the blood
of certain dogs may be estimated approximately at from
VOL, UL. D
34 GRUBY AND DELAFOND ON THE DOMESTIC DOG.
11,000 to about 224,000. The mean number, deduced from
twenty dogs, was more than 52,000.
2. The microscopic Filarie, having a diameter less than
that of the blood discs, circulate in the most minute capilla-
ries where the blood discs can find entrance. A drop of
blood taken from these vessels, it does not signify at what
part of the body, nor at what season of the year, contains these
minute Hematozoa.
3. The chyle and the lymph of dogs, whose blood contains
microscopic Filarie, present none.
4. Nor do any of the secretions or excretions.
5. Nor in the dissection of twenty-eight dogs of different sorts
and ages, and whose blood was known to hana been verminous
for periods varying from several months to more than five
years, and made with the utmost care, were any Filarie@ ever
discovered in any of the tissues. Their proper habitat seems
to i exclusively in-the blood-vessels.
The authors calculate, from the examination of 480 dogs,
a the blood in about oan or five per cent. is verminous.
7. It is so more frequently in old and adult dogs than in
young ones.
8. The verminous condition seems to be irrespective of
race, sex, or general habit of body.
9. Even when most abundant, this condition of the blood
does not seem to interfere with the instincts or muscular force
of the animal.
10. Nor is the constitution of the blood itself altered.
11. Transfusion of verminous blood, deprived of fibrin,
into sound animals, was not followed by any result. But,
12. When unaltered verminous blood was thus injected,
Filarie were found living in the animals experimented on, for
more than three years, or until their natural death.
13. Filarie, transfused with defibrinated blood into two
Rabbits, lived in the blood of those animals for 89 days; after
which time none could be found.
14. Ina similar experiment with six Frogs, two of which
already had #?/arie in their blood, the canine Filarie@ lived
for eight days, during the whole of which time the blood discs
of the Dog appeared unaltered among those of the Frog. On
the ninth and tenth days the Dog’s blood discs haying become
changed, the Filarie had disappeared, and tne Frogs died of a
scorbutic malady, (!)
15. Injected together with the blood into the serous cavities
or cellular tissue of Dogs, in good health, the Filarie@ could
not live in their new domicile.
16. A verminous Dog, of one race, with a female not so
0
GRUBY AND DELAFOND ON THE DOMESTIC DOG. 35
affected, of another, had offspring of which those belonging to
the paternal race were verminous, and the others not.
17. When the conditions were reversed, so was the result.
18. But the Filarig in the blood of the descendants could
not be detected till the dogs were five or six months old.
The authors have also succeeded in finding in the vermin-
ous blood of a dog which died in consequence of its being fed
exclusively on food composed of gelatin, large worms, visible
to the naked eye. They found six, of which four were females
and two males, and they were lodged in a large clot occupy-
ing the right ventricle of the heart. ‘The worms were white,
from 0-5 to 0°75 inch long, and from 0-039 to 0-058 inch in
diameter. They propose for this Hematozoon, the name of
Filaria papillosa hematica canis domestici.
Onthe Existence of SpERMAtozorps in certain Freshwater ALG.
By Dr. H. Irztcsoun. Abstracted from the Annales d.
Sciences Nat. Tom. xvii. p. 150.
Hiruerto, among the Algae, the spores of which exhibit
spontaneous movements (Alg. Zoosporées, Thur.), the genus
Cutleria was the only one known to possess “ antheri-
dia:” this genus, however, belongs to the group of Phzo-
sporées ( Thur.), whilst those noticed by M. Itzigsobn, as pre-
senting spermatozoids, all belong to the Chlorosporées ( Thur.).
On the other hand, the active corpuscles, contained in the
“ antheridia,” either in Cutleria, or in the Fucacex, very
closely resemble the spores, properly so called, of those Alga,
and, except in their cilia and their motility, have no analogy
with the long known spermatozoids of Chara, of the Mus-
cinez, and those of the Ferns, and Equisetacee. Should M.
Itzigsohn’s observations prove to be correct, the Algae will
present three distinct types of antherozoids:—1. Ciliated
and motile zoospores (sporomorphes ciligeres et mobiles) ; 2.
those of the Floridew, also resembling spores, but in which
the presence of cilia and the existence of motility are still
disputed points; 3. lastly, the vermiform antherozoids, with-
out cilia, but very active, forming the subject of M. Itzigsohn’s
communication, which is in the form of a letter to Mr. L. R.
Tulasne.
*“ The object of my communication,’ he says, ‘* is to an-
nounce a discovery which I have recently made, of the ‘ spi-
rozoids’ (spiralfiiden) of the freshwater Algae.” ‘“ My re-
searches have been especially directed to Spiroyyra areta,
Kiitz. About the time in which the well-known phenomenon
pb 2
36 ITZIGSOHN ON SPERMATOZOIDS.
of conjugation is observed in this Conferva, the band-like
endochrome of some of the filaments becomes condensed into
quaternary globules. These minute spheres are at first of a
bright green colour, which afterwards becomes paler, and
finally turns into a greyish white. They frequently exhibit
very distinct movements within the tube in which they are
contained, and this motion becomes much more active when,
from any cause, they have escaped from the parent cell. If
one of these utricles be gently crushed between two glasses
a mucous material is seen to escape, from the midst of which,
after the lapse of a quarter or half an-hour, are disengaged an
infinity of spiral filaments, each of which was originally con-
tained in a parent cell. ‘These spirozoids are for the most
part agglomerated or grouped into minute rounded masses, to
which I propose to give the name of ‘ spermatospheres.’ At
the end of eight to fifteen days, should they have been pre-
served alive, the spirozoids have become much longer and
larger, having at the same time retained the faculty of per-
forming the most active movements. I have not, however,
hitherto been able to discover any cilia, nor even an appreci-
able terminal enlargement. ‘The development of these bodies
within parent cells appears to me an indisputable fact; there
can, therefore, be no question as to their not being Vibriones.
*¢ Long ago I observed the formation of spermatosphéres in
Vaucheria; in that genus they frequently occupy distinct
compartments of the filaments of which the plant is consti-
tuted, and are very large. M. Karsten has published a figure
of them in the ‘ Botanische Zeitung ;? but he is wrong in
regarding them as a morbid product of the Vaucheria. In
form, the ‘ spermatozoids’ of Cladophora glomerata, on the
contrary, are in all respects analogous to those of the Spz7ro-
gyre. My observations upon this interesting subject are not
yet concluded, although I feel fully assured of the exactitude
of the results now transmitted. Spermatospheres are found
also in Closterium and Gidogonium.” M. Itzigsohn concludes
by saying, ‘‘it is manifest that the generation of spermatozoids
in Spirogyra, Vaucheria, and other analogous Alga, casts
considerable light upon that which takes place in the Lichens
and Fungi.”
Note on the Muscutar Srructure in Patupina Vivipara, and
other GastTERopopa, by Lerynie.
Accorpine to Leydig (S. and K. Zeitsch., Vol. ii., p. 191),
the structure of the muscles in Helix, Bulimus, Caracolla,
Paludina, and other gasteropoda, is the following :—The
ee SS
a Pink ahha it Ne) i Ai at
LEYDIG ON MUSCULAR STRUCTURE. 37
special elementary tissue of the muscles is a tube which is
derived from a successive series of coalesced cells. The nuclei
of these cells are, even in full-grown animals, to be seen in
many of the muscles, occurring in some more numerously than
in others; thus they are abundant in the muscular tubuli of
the heart in Paludina, where they are 0-004” long, and
besides this, in the red-coloured portion of the oviduct; they
are rare again in the muscular tubuli of the foot. The form
of the primitive muscular tubuli is always more or less cylin-
drical and slightly compressed ; the former shape is seen in
the muscular tubuli of the fleshy body of the excitant organ,
the latter.in those of the foot. Moreover that they really are
of a tubular nature, is convincingly shown when suitable
transverse sections are treated with acetic acid, by which the
contents are dissolved, or at least rendered more transparent,
only the membrane of the tubes remaining. Sra Vid. OLO7~ We BLATT
cee
fose
TOON ce
cencerecer
fAEteeleccee€ NLOUCOCE:
n teter 000:
Taffen West, ad nat. sculp
JOURNAL OF MICROSCOPICAL SCIENCE.
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE I. VOL. II.
Figs.
1 .—Four papille from the point of the finger ; the largest containing a
tactile corpuscle with its nerves, while the others possess capillary
loops. Acetic acid added—a, Nerves. 6. Neurilemma. c. ‘* Nu-
clei.” d. Capillaries.
2.—A papilla from the finger of a Tahitian, with a small tactile corpuscle.
Letters as above. Acetic acid added.
3. 4. 5.—Termination of nerve-fibres against tactile corpuscles. Caustic
soda added. 600. ~
6.—Extremity of one of the papille at the base of a Frog’s tongue, the
epithelium being stripped off.
7.—A nerve, consisting of a single, dark contoured fibril in its neurilem-
ma, from the human finger.
8.—Portion of the wall of a Pacinian body from the human finger,
9.—Section perpendicularly through one of the ridges on the beak of a
Duck.—J. Horny layer of epidermis. m. Mucous layer. 7, Derma.
p. Pacinian bodies.
10. A single Pacinian body of the same.
Diagrams.
A.—Of a Tactile corpuscle.
B.—Of a Pacinian body.
C.—Of a Savian body.
D.—Of the ‘“ Muciparous Canals” of Fishes.
E.—Of a Vibrissa of a Rat.
PLATE II.
Illustrating Dr. Herapath’s Paper on Quinine in the Urine.
>
;
4 7
* aa
*
f-
= ro
"
> “y's
+ -—; ¥
Pe?
ye
* -
% “w
a | “ i = ‘.
i
bs ;
' S
Pi
a
.
Ss
FA 3
‘
Ls
; ‘ = /
P.
Py :
.
sz ‘ ’
i
Z
ee He idiyin +t
i
JOURNAL OF MICROSCOPICAL SCIENCE.
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE I. VOL. II.
Figs.
L .—Four papilla from the point of the finger ; the largest containing a
tactile corpuscle with its nerves, while the others possess capillary
loops. Acetic acid added—a, Nerves. b. Neurilemma. c. ‘‘ Nu-
clei.” d. Capillaries.
2.—A papilla from the finger of a Tahitian, with a small tactile corpuscle.
Letters as above. Acetic acid added.
3. 4. 5.—Termination of nerve-fibres against tactile corpuscles. Caustic
soda added. 600. ~
6.—Extremity of one of the papilla at the base of a Frog’s tongue, the
epithelium being stripped off.
7.—A nerve, consisting of a single, dark contoured fibril in its neurilem-
ma, from the human finger.
8.—Portion of the wall of a Pacinian body from the human finger.
9.—Section perpendicularly through one of the ridges on the beak of a
Duck.—J. Horny layer of epidermis. m. Mucous layer. m. Derma.
p. Pacinian bodies.
10. A single Pacinian body of the same.
Diagrams.
A.—Of a Tactile corpuscle.
B.—Of a Pacinian body.
C.—Of a Savian body.
D.—Of the “‘ Muciparous Canals” of Fishes.
H.—Of a Vibrissa of a Rat.
PLATE II.
Illustrating Dr. Herapath’s Paper on Quinine in the Urine.
Mic Journ LAL L4 1
‘THE aed. Toffen Weert, se Ford & West, inp 54 Hatter Garden
eae 5 ee
ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS.
Some Observations on the Ittumination of TRANSPARENT
Oxpsects. By Georce Rainey, M.R.C.S., Demonstrator
of Anatomy and Microscopic Anatomy at St. Thomas's
Hospital.
(Continued from page 13.)
I may observe, that 1 was rather surprised to see these
images on globules of mercury even as large as 1-70th of an
inch in diameter, especially as they occupied a part of the
globule exactly opposite to that on which the light coming
directly from the condenser fell. The illumination of this
part of a globule cannot be attributed to radiated light, as
none of the rays coming from below can reach it, and a mere
image on a reflecting surface cannot be supposed capable of
absorbing light, and therefore it cannot radiate it
I may observe also that I found considerable difficulty in
determining the cause of this fact, chiefly because the different
circumstances under which it was examined gave such con-
tradictory results. I first thought that an image was formed
in the microscope which was reflected upon the upper surface
of the globule, which I afterwards found to be only partially
correct. My friend Dr. Bristow suggested the probability of
its being a reflection from the lower surface of the object-glass,
which was also in part correct; but as neither of these sup-
positions satisfied al] the conditions under which these images
were seen, I made the following experiments with a view to
simplify, and therefore to facilitate, the examination as much
as possible.
I removed all the lenses from Gillett’s condenser, and em-
ployed only the diaphragm with the flat side of a mirror, when
I found, on examining globules of mercury with achromatic
lenses of different magnifying powers, that images of the stops
were formed as before, though very much more minute, and
much less perfect. Hence I concluded that the appearances
above described, although much exaggerated by condensing
lenses, are not entirely produced by them.
I next examined with a simple lens, of about one-inch focus,
globules of mercury illuminated by Gillett’s condenser, and |
found that when they were not covered by a piece of thin glass
no image was formed upon them, but when they were covered,
the thin glass being 1-200th of an inch above them, that a dis-
tinct image of the stop was seen upon their upper surface.
Hence in this instance, no doubt could exist as to the cause
of the image, as it could only have been produced by the reflec-
VOL, Ul. F
66 ON THE ILLUMINATION OF TRANSPARENT OBJECTS.
tion of the rays proceeding from the source of light, and im-
pinging obliquely upon the under surface of the cover back-
wards upon the upper surface of the globule, the figure of the
stop being occasioned only by the quantity of light which it
intercepted, and thus prevented from falling upon the glass,
- and consequently from illuminating the globule.
I next substituted for the simple lens achromatic lenses of
one and two inch focus, and the result was precisely the same ;
that is, when no cover was placed upon the object there was
no image, but when it was, there was a distinct one. In all
these cases the cover was 1-200th of an inch from the object :
if this distance be increased beyond a certain limit, images
will not be formed on the globules. The greatest distance for
perfectly flat glass is about 1-30th of an inch; but if the glass
be convex and the globule be placed beneath the centre of its
convexity, the distance is very much increased, the amount of
increase depending upon the degree of the convexity of the
glass cover,
I then examined an uncovered globule of mercury with a
lens of 1-4th of an inch focus, on which I could perceive two
imperfect and distorted images of the stop of the diaphragm.
They were of different size, and did not appear to be exactly
upon the same plane; the smaller one was the nearer and
seemed to be much darker than the other. As in this case
the distance of the object-glass from the object was less than
1-30th of an inch, I concluded that the glasses composing it
had reflected the images on the elobule, especially as there
were two images, in the same way as the glass cover had
done in the experiment with the simple lens and the low
powers.
Lastly, I substituted a half-inch for the quarter, and the
result was the same as when the latter was used, excepting
that one of the two images was very distinct and permanent,
whilst the other one was fugacious, appearing and disappear-
ing with the slightest movement of the head. The distance
of this lens from the object exceeded the 1-30th of an inch,
the limit at which images are formed on flat glass; but as it
did not exceed the limit at which images are formed on convex
glass, | concluded that these images were reflected by the
glasses composing the objective, in the same way as when the
quarter of an inch lens was employed, especially as two images
were apparent.
The inference, then, to be drawn from these experiments
is, first, that the image of the source of light is larger with
condensing lenses than with a plane mirror; secondly, that
when low powers are used to examine covered objects the
ON THE ILLUMINATION OF TRANSPARENT OBJECTS. 67
images are produced by the reflection of the rays coming from
the source of light, and falling obliquely upon the cover,
backwards upon the object; but that, when high powers are
used, those coming near to the object, the lenses themselves
reflect the images on the object.
But the formation of images like those above described is
not confined to opaque metallic globules, since all transparent
substances of a globular figure are well known to have the
property of reflecting the images of objects thrown upon them
by a reflector. However, the explanation just given does not
apply to transparent but only to opaque globules. Among
transparent bodies I have particularly observed this fact in
some minute spherical calcareous bodies which were found on
the capillaries of the brain; also in globules of oil, provided
they are not too much flattened; in air bubbles, starch
granules, spherules of glass, &c. &c. There is one circum-
stance respecting all transparent globular objects worthy of
notice, which is, the position of the image onthe globule. If
a globule be of a refractive power greater! han that of the
medium in which it is examined, the image of the source of
light will be seen on its anterior surface, or a little in front of
it: if these conditions are reversed it will be seen on its pos-
terior surface, or a little behind it. Hence, if globules of oil
be examined in water, the image of the stop of Gillett’s con-
denser will be seen on their anterior surface, whilst, on the
contrary, if globules of water be examined in oil, the image
will be seen on their posterior surface. If a minute spherule
of plate-glass be examined in water, the image of the stop will
be seen on its anterior surface, but if the same spherule be
examined in oil of cassia it will be seen behind it; whilst if
the spherule be examined in Canada balsam, which has nearly
the same refractive power as glass, no image will be visible.
This fact furnishes the means of distinguishing one bedy
from another by its refractive power, and is particularly ap-
plicable to very minute particles. If, for example, there were
suspended in water very minute spherules of calcareous matter,
such as those I have mentioned, which look more like air than
anything else, and globules of air, these would be readily dis-
tinguished by the position of the image of the stop, the former
having the image on its anterior surface, the latter on its pos-
terior.
As the distinctness of these images will depend upon the
degree of transparency and homogeneousness of the bodies on
which they are formed, and as their form will be very much
influenced by the greater or less perfection of the spherical
figure of the surface which reflects them, the strange appear-
F2
68 ON THE ILLUMINATION OF TRANSPARENT OBJECTS.
ances which, from this cause, may mask and disfigure the
true characters of microscopic objects, will be almost endless.
And it must be remembered that these defects are common
to all kinds of illumination of transparent objects in some
degree or other.
Notwithstanding these defects, from which I have shown
that the most modern methods of illumination are not free, we
have in the latest improvements the means, not only of ren-
dering them of but little account, but of converting them into
advantages as useful aids in microscopic analysis.
In the experiments on the globules of mercury it was ob-
served that when a number of globules were in one field of
view, an image of the stop of Gillett’ s condenser was seen on
all of them. AN it must be further observed, that as all
these appearances are secondarily the reflection of only one
magnified image of the stop, which can be seen by a low
power, situated on a plane posterior to that on which objects
are visible, and exactly in the axis of the microscope, only that
globule whose axis coincides with that of this image can have
upon it a perfectly symmetrical figure of the stop; upon all
the others this image will be distorted, the degree of distortion
being proportional to the remoteness ‘of the globule from the
axis ob tle microscope.
This applies equally to all objects, transparent as well as
opaque. Hence we see, that all appearances of an object
which are not the same when it is placed in the centre
of the field of view as when it is placed near its margin
are spurious. It must be remembered that the difference of
focus, although never so slight, consequent on removing the
object to different parts of the field, must be taken into con-
sideration, and that when the object is removed from one part
of the field to another each position requires a fresh focus.
I will give one example. If one of the pale shells of the
guano be illuminated by Gillett’s condenser, the smallest stop
being under the lenses, and examined by a lens of one-eighth
focus, it will present a reticulated appearance, the true nature
of which is not very evident ; however, as thus illuminated,
the meshes will present different appearances, according to the
focus at which they are seen, and these appearances will vary
as the object is being removed from one part of the field to
another, showing them to be the reflection of something
situated in the axis of the microscope. If, now, the object is
so focused that the dark spots in those meshes which are
situated in the centre of the field is made as distinct as
possible, and the condenser is rotated, the spots occupying
these meshes will be seen to move, mad be recognisable as
the images of the stop of the diaphragm of the condenser.
ON THE ILLUMINATION OF TRANSPARENT OBJECTS. 69
The appearance, although much less distinct, will be pre-
cisely the same as that presented by the compound cornea of a
very minute insect, when examined under the same circum-
stances. Hence the true structure of such shells as these is
manifestly lenticular, that is, each space is filled up by trans-
parent material in the form of a convex lens.
I might give many other examples, but this will probably
suffice to show to what use the facts which I have mentioned
may be applied. The use of Mr. Gillett’s condenser in this
kind of analysis might be extended, if something more charac-
teristic than a stop were placed in one of the perforations of the
diaphragm, as, for instance, a small cross.
I will now conclude this paper by some observations upon
dark-ground illumination, as shown by Mr. Gillett’s condenser,
and Mr. Wenham’s paraboloid.
If a globule of mercury, illuminated by Gillett’s condenser,
with one of the stops under the condensing lens, be examined
by a very low power—a one or two inch lens—it will have
the appearance of a dark disk surrounded by a circle of light,
and if it be covered with thin glass, there will be an image of
the stop at its centre, but not otherwise. In this case the
object is seen on a dark ground, which is the magnified image
of the stop interposed between the object and the light, and
thus all the central rays of the illuminating pencil are cut off;
and, as the rays which are thrown immediately upon it are
considered to have a degree of obliquity given to them by the
margin of the stop, too great to allow of their entering the
microscope, the object is thought to be rendered visible only
by the light which it radiates as if it were self-luminous. As
this mode of illumination is precisely the same as that with
the paraboloid, [ will defer the further consideration of ra-
diated light until the action of that instrument is explained.
For this purpose it will be necessary to repeat the exa-
mination of the globules of mercury, when illuminated by the
paraboloid, first when uncovered, and afterwards when covered
with a piece of thin glass, situated about 1-200th of an inch
from the object. In the first case the globules will appear to
be surrounded with a circle of light, in which the cross-bar
contained in the tube of the paraboloid, or eny other object
reflected upon the tube by the mirror, can be seen. In the
second case there will be two circles of light—an external one,
which is the same as that just described, and an internal one ;
the latter is the image of the end of the paraboloid reflected
upon the mercury by the glass cover. The cross-bar and
other objects are also seen, as in the first case.
I may observe that in all these experiments I have not
thought it necessary to notice the various appearances pro-
70 ON THE ILLUMINATION OF TRANSPARENT OBJECTS.
duced by the reflection of different parts of the microscope,
as the extremity of the object-glasses, &c., upon the objects,
as these can be easily recognised.
Now, according to the theory of the illumination of. micro-
scopic objects by radiated light, “all objects, either trans-
parent or opaque (excepting white), absorb some of the rays
of light falling upon them,” and are rendered visible by the
portion which they. radiate. Hence Mr. Wenham observes,
‘that no rays from the source of light should enter the object-
glass by passing through or around the object, which must
be illuminated by very intense light, thrown on it, in all or in
opposite directions, at an angle exceeding the aperture of the
object-glass, so that the light which enters the microscope
should be that which radiates only from the object as if it were
self-luminous.”
Asa great part of the luminous appearance presented by
the covered globule of mercury has been shown to be due to
the light first reflected from the glass parabola upon the glass
cover, and then by the latter upon the upper surface of the
globule, that much of the appearance cannot be the effect of
radiated light. ‘The glass cover having in this instance served
the purpose of a Lieberkiihn, has made the object appear
in a false light; and as nearly all microscopic examinations
are made on covered objects, the paraboloid is in this respect
defective, and the error must always be allowed for. It is
true that all objects are not spherical, and, therefore, do not
possess the property of reflecting perfect images, yet they will
derive some portion of the rays by which they are illuminated
from the reflection of the source of light upon them, in the
same way as if they were globular.
With respect to the illumination of uncovered objects, ex-
periment is SNELL at variance witha leading postulate of the
radiated-light theory, which is, that no rays from the source
of light passing around the object enter the object-glass ; for
if this were true, the image of objects reflected by a plane
mirror up the tube of the paraboloid could not be seen by a
two-inch lens of 12° angle of aperture.
This will be best understood by referring to the adjoining
diagram, in which A is to represent the paraboloid, B a com-
pound microscope, CD an object-glass of two-inch focus and
12° of angular aperture. Now, suppose (m, 7) a ray of light
coming from a part of the window-frame, or from close to the
outer side of the cross-bar within the tiiba of the paraboloid,
to be thrown upon the point (x) of the parabolic reflector, it
will be so reflected as to pass through the focus (f), and con-
tinuing in the direction (n, f, g), it cannot, under the conditions
specified, enter the microscope, and consequently the part
ON THE ILLUMINATION OF TRANSPARENT OBJECTS. 71
from which it emanated would not be visible. But these are
not the sole conditions : for, suppose a globule of mercury to be
placed at f, then it is very easy. to see how this same ray
(n, f ), by being reflected in the direction f, ¢ c, and making the
angle of gelleation equal to the angle of incidence, would pass
through the objec t-glass, CD, and form an image of the point
from eich it had proceeded, according to the common laws
of refraction ; and it is in this way the object is seen. Now,
as what is fae with respect to this ray applies equally to
every other ray thrown by the parabola upon the margin of
the globule, we may conclude that
it is the light which is reflected
from its entire circumference which
produces the appearance of the cir-
cle of light before described ; and
so also if there were any number of
globules, each would be surrounded
by, a ring of light reflected from
it in the same manner.
But if we suppose any other
substance, possessing in a much
inferior degree the property of re-
flecting light, to be situated in am
place of the globule of mercury, i
will be SMerainntedl 3 in the same way
by the rays concentrated upon it
by the parabolic reflector, which
rays it will reflect also according to
the same law; and such an object
would no more be seen by radiated
light than the picture of a portion
of the window-frame on the upper
surface of a globule of quicksilver
would be. This explanation of the
manner in which objects are seen
as illuminated by the paraboloid,
is equally applicable to the same
objects when illuminated by Gillett’s condenser, and ex-
amined by a low power. I may further add that this ex-
planation is in accordance with the simplest laws of optics,
that it agrees in every respect with experiment, and that it
assumes no endowment of material substances with proper-
ties which they are not well known to possess.
Greta)
On a Microscope adapted for AnatomicaL DEMONSTRATIONS 5
and on a Brnocutar Microscorr. By M. Nacuet, of Paris.
ALL micrographers have felt the difficulty of defining the
nature and situation of an object in the field of a microscope
so as to make it ¢ appar ent to several persons. I need not ex-
plain that this arises from the number of different objects
visible at the same time, and often also from the moving of
the objects themselves in fluids, particularly infusoria, which
it is impossible to show in the same state in which one has
observed them oneself.
These difficulties are experienced still more in the demon-
stration of microscopical dissections ; for the observer, to avoid
losing considerable time, exhibits only the result of his opera-
tions, and not the method by which he arrived at it, though
that is also very important. The problem then has been, how
to enable two or more persons to observe at one time the same
object. 1 believe I have resolved this difficulty by the con-
struction of the instrument represented in fig. 1, with which
(Se ie
two persons looking through the eye-pieces, C ©’, obtain each
an erected image of the object : the division of the pencil of
light formed by the objective, A, is accomplished by a prism,
P, fig. 2, the section of which is an equilateral triangle; the
image reflected upon the face a emerges normally upon the
face b, that reflected upon 5 also emerges upon the face a;
there is thus formed on the right and left of the instrument an
image erected in a certain sense; if upon the transit of these
MICROSCOPE FOR ANATOMICAL DEMONSTRATIONS. (EE
rays the prisms, B B' fig. 1, are placed, similarly to the sepa-
rating prism, but so disposed that their reflecting surfaces are
perpendicular to the central prism, the object Swall then be
completely erected on each side, which is a considerable ad-
vantage for the demonstrating of dissections; moreover, the
two observers can place themselves on the same side of a table,
for the eye-pieces are brought nearly into the same plane as
regards the prisms B DB’, and are placed at a very convenient
apeitnuion for avoiding fatigue to the head. If the two
have not the same focus, one is first adjusted by the pinions
and screws, and the other by drawing Fig. 3.
out and pushing in the tube carrying
the oculars. If a vertical view be de-
sired, the screw-heads I) D’ have only
to ba. turned and the prisms B B’ to be
revolved a quarter round, to obtain an
effect exactly opposite to the preceding
one, that is to say, that the images are
reversed as in an ordinary microscope,
for the faces of B BY, fig. 1, becoming
parallel to those of the central prism,
destroy the first erection caused by it.
It will be seen that by leaving B in-
clined and by bringing B’ into the per-
pendicular, a person looking i in C will
have an erected image, whilst another
looking vertically in C’ will have a re-
versed image.
The parallelism of the oculars CC’,
when they are ina vertical plane, brings
to mind Professor Riddell’s valuable
method of simplifying theconstructionof
binocular microscopes, for if the prisms
74 ON A BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE.
B B’ are brought towards the central prism, as in fig. 3, the
oculars C C’ are placed so as nearly to suit the ae
between the eyes.
Fig. 4 shows sufficiently well the course of the rays, and
requires no further expla-
nation ; I shall only remark
that the rays, a b a’ b’, al-
ways emergingnormally on
the terminal faces, there is
no chromatic dispersion ;
and the superior angle of
the prism being very acute,
and the surfaces perfectly
even (which is not difficult
of execution), the loss of
light is almost inappreci-
able. There isa great ad-
vantage attached to this
arrangement in the im-
possibili ity of pseudose opic
effects arising, as in Pro-
fessor Riddell’s last and
definite arrangement, or in
Mr. Wenham’s very inge-
nious refracting prism. When the distance between the oc -ulars
requires to be modified, the screws V V’ are used for moving
the lateral prisms nearer or further off at pleasure.
The phenomena of complementary colours produced by
polarization can be examined with this instrument in the most
simple manner; and with regard to crystals, it is certainly one
of the most beniwtifal spectacles to behold a crystal in relief,
appearing tinged with complementary colour to the single eye,
while to binocular vision it becomes white, as if it were not
seen under polarized light.
Fig. 4.
On the Uttimare Structure and RELATIONS of the MALPIGHIAN
Boptgs of the SpLEEN and of the Tonsituar Fotiicies. By
Tuomas Houxtey, F.RS.
Tue first account of those peculiar whitish corpuscles, disco-
vered by Malpighi and to be met with, more or less distinctly
marked, in the spleen of every animal, which at all satisfies
the requirements of modern satan science, was given by
Professor Miller, in his Archiv. for 1834. Miller dexoribes
with great accuracy the mode in which these bodies are supplied
~
ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE MALPIGHIAN BODIES. i)
by minute arteries, and explains that they are, in fact, out-
growths of the adventitious tunic of those arteries. He states
that, by means of fine injections, he found that “the arterial
twigs sometimes passed by the side of the Malpighian bodies
without giving off any branches to them—sometimes went
straight through the whole body or a part of it, in which case,
however, no portion of the arteries terminated inthem. These
fine arterial twigs appear less to pass through the middle of
the corpuscles than to run on their walls and then to leave
them. When an arterial twig divides into many minute
branches in the Malpighian body, which never takes place
upon its surface, but always in the thickness of its walls, these
arterioles pass out again to be distributed as very minute
branches in the surrounding red pulp: in fact, the ultimate
termination of all the finest penicellate arteries is in this red
substance. From all this I have become convinced that the
white bodies, as mere outgrowths of the tuniee adventitiv, have
no relation with the finest ramifications of the arteries.”
With regard to another important point,—whether the
Malpighian bodies are hollow or solid—Professor Miiller’s
statements are less definite. In the commencement of his
article he affirms, in opposition to Malpighi and Rudolphi,
that they are solid, but at the end he qualifies this opinion :
“1 was long of opinion that the white bodies are not hollow,
but merely filled with a white pulpy substance, which might
indeed be pressed out of them, but was not distinctly defined
from the walls of the bodies. Further observations recently
made, however, have instructed me that the white granular
substance which is contained in the Malpighian bodies is too
fiuid, while on the other hand their walls are too solid, not
to oblige us to regard them as a kind of vesicles with tolerably
thick walls. The white clear fluid (breiige) matter which they
contain consists for the most part of equal-sized corpuscles,
which are about as large as the blood-corpuscles—not however
flat, like these, but irregularly globular. These corpuscles
present exactly the same microscopic appearance, and are of
the same size, as the granules of which the red substance of
the spleen is composed.” Pp. 88, 89.
Although the Malpighian bodies have been the subject of
frequent and repeated investigations since 1834, I think that
more has been done to confuse than to improve the above (in
its general outlines) very accurate account of their structure.
Giesker, in a work which I have not seen (Splenologie, 1835,
cited by both Henle and Kdlliker), appears to have been the
first to diverge from Miiller’s views. He states that there is a
delicate membrane investing the proper membranes of the
76 ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE MALPIGHIAN BODIES,
Malpighian bodies in which arterioles ramify—and thus the
latter never enter the Malpighian bodies at all (Henle, Allg.
Anat. p. 1000) ; and Kolliker, Gerlach, and Sanders (On the
Structure of the Spleen, Annals of Anat. and Phys. 1850),
agree with Giesker on the latter point.
In the meanwhile, however, Giinsburg (Zur Kenntniss des
Milz-gewebes, Miill. Arch. 1850) had confirmed and extended
Miiller’s observations with regard to the distribution of the
vessels in the Malpighian bodies. He says, p. 167, “ Their
framework is a vascular plexus. The larger vessels (cylinder)
are longitudinally triated, in consequence of the regular
arrangement of the nuclei upon their walls, the smaller are
simple tubes.” These observations were made on persons who
died of cholera.
In January, 1851, Dr. Sanders read a paper ‘ On the con-
nexion of the minute Arterial Twigs with the Malpighian
Sacculi in the Spleen,’ before the Edinburgh Physiological
Society, in which he describes a peculiar method of prepa-
ration of the pig’s spleen, whereby arterial twigs may be de-
monstrated ‘ passing diametrically across the area of the
sacculi.’ ‘ Stains of blood also, often in linear arrangement,
indicating capillaries, were seen in the interior of the sacculi.”
Kolliker (¢ Mik, Anat.’ and ‘ Handbuch,’ 1852), while denying
the entrance of the arterial twigs into the Malpighian bodies,
states that he had just succeeded in once observing a network
of fine capillaries in those of a cat, and he supposes that they
will hereafter be discovered in other animals. Finally,
Mr. Wharton Jones speaks doubtfully of having observed a
single capillary tube in the Malpighian bodies of the sheep.
(On blood-corpuscle-holding cells.— Brit. and For. Med. Chir.
Review, 1853), The existence of a special continuous mem-
brane investing the Malpighian bodies is affirmed by Ecker,
Gerlach, Kolliker, and Sanders. On the other hand, it is
denied by Henle (Allg. Anat. 1001), and by Wharton Jones
Lee,)
With regard to the contents, Miiller’s statements, as we have
seen, waver. Henle, Gerlach, Kolliker, and Sanders say that
they are composed of corpuscles suspended in a fluid. ‘The
quantity of the latter is however, according to Kolliker, small.
I may now proceed to communicate the results of my own
observations upon the structure of the Malpighian bodies in
Man, the Sheep, Pig, Rat and Kitten, and I will arrange what
I have to say under the three heads of—1. The distribution of
the vessels of the Malpighian bodies. 2. The structure of
their substance (so-called contents), or the Malpighian pulp.
3. The structure of their peripheral portion, or so-called ‘ walls.’
ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE MALPIGHIAN BODIES. 77
l. The Distribution of the Vessels of the Malpighian Bodies.
In all the animals above mentioned, I find it very easy to
demonstrate, in almost every case, that one or more minute
arterial twigs enter and frequently subdivide in the substance
of the Malpighian body, making their exit on its opposite side,
to terminate, finally, by breaking up into minute branches in
the pulp. Indeed, it is so easy to convince oneself of this
fact, if a thin section of a fresh spleen be examined under the
simple microscope, that it is difficult to understand how two
opinions can exist upon the subject. The method I have
adopted is simply this: to such a section I add some weak
syrup, so as to retain the colouring matter in the blood-cor-
puscles contained in the vessels, and thus to have the advantage
of a natural injection; then, I either trace out the vessels into
the Malpighian bodies with needles, under a 41-inch lens; or,
placing a glass plate over the section, I apply a gentle and
gradual pressure, just sufficient to render the bodies transparent.
It is then easy, by sliding the plate with a needle, to cause
the bodies to roll a little upon their axes, and thus convince
oneself, by the relative positions which the vessels and the
bodies assume, that the former do really pass through, and not
merely over, the latter. In Plate III. (figs. 1,2, and 7) I have
represented the ordinary modes in which the arterial twigs are
disposed in the Malpighian bodies of the sheep (figs. 1, 2)
and of Man (fig. 7). It should be observed, however, that the
Malpighian bodies have by no means always the well-marked
oval outline which is here represented. On the other hand
they are very frequently diffuse and irregular, sending out
processes along the efferent and afferent twigs,
The application of a high power, either to the compressed
Malpighian body, or to one which has been torn out with
needles and its vessels isolated, fully confirms the results ob-
tained by the previous methods. In Man, the structure of the
minute arterial twigs within the bodies does not differ from that
which they possess elsewhere (fig. 7). Both the transversely
(smooth-muscular) and longitudinally fibrous coats are well
developed, neither being in excess; and the addition of acetic
acid produces a clear line external to the former, representing
the innermost portion of the tunica adventitia, which passes
into, and is continuous with, the Malpighian pulp. The
artery, therefore, is not only surrounded by, and in immediate
contact with, the indifferent tissue of the pulp, but the latter,
as Miiller pointed out, is really the representative of a part of
its tunica adventitia. In fact, the indifferent tissue so com-
pletely forms an integral constituent of the coat of the artery,
that I could not, in any way, obtain the latter free from it.
78 ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE MALPIGHIAN BODIES.
In the Sheep, the arterial twigs have precisely the same
relation to the Malpighian pulp, but the intimate structure of
their walls is different, the circularly fibrous layer becoming
almost obsolete, while the longitudinally fibrous coat acquires
proportionally increased dimensions, and takes, at the same
time, the structure of organic muscle. In the small arterial
twigs of 1-800th inch in diameter, represented in fig. 3, the
cavity of the vessels did not occupy more than one-third of
their diameter, and,. like the efferent ramuscules, unless they
contained blood, they resembled mere trabecule, consisting of
organic muscle.
"The yescels within the Malpighian hates are, however, not
arterial ramifications only: I find that there invariably exists,
in addition, a tolerably rich network of capillaries connecting
the arterial ramuscules. These capillaries are vessels of
1-1000th to 1-3000th of an inch, or even less, in diameter,
which can hardly be said to have parietes distinct from the
surrounding indifferent tissue of the pulp (figs. 3 and 8) ; unless
they are filled with blood, indeed, they are not distinguishable
with certainty; and in ‘the figures 2 and 7,1 have, there-
fore, only represented those fragments of the capillary network
in which blood corpuscles were clearly distinguishable, their
colouring matter being retained by the syrup. After the
addition of water, it is often impossible to recognize the capil-
laries at all; but using syrup, I have readily enough seen them
in all the animals above mentioned.
It may then perhaps be fairly concluded that, in mammals,
the Malpighian bodies are traversed by minute arteries, and
contain, in addition, a network of capillaries.
2. The Structure of the ‘ Contents” or Pulp of the Malpighian
Bodies.
Almost all writers have agreed in stating that the interior
of the Malpighian bodies is filled by a liquid, consisting, as
KGlliker says, of a small quantity of fluid with a large propor-
tion of corpuscles. However, I have been quite unable to con-
vince myself of the existence of any fluid matter at all in the
interior of the perfectly-fresh Malpighian bodies of any of the
animals 1 have examined. On the other hand, the Malpighian
pulp appears to me to be as solid as any other indifferent tissue,
e. g., that which constitutes the lowest layer of an epidermis
or epithelium, or as the most superficial portion of any dermal
structure. It is, indeed, like these, soft and capable of being
crushed into a semifluid substance, which becomes diffused in
any surrounding liquid, like mud in water; but that it isa
soft solid and not a fluid, results, [ think, from what I have
ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE MALPIGHIAN BODIES. 79
stated with regard to the difficulty of completely detaching it
from the arterial twigs.
The essential structure of the Malpighian pulp appears to
me to be that of every other indifferent tissue which I have
yet examined; it consists, in fact, of a homogeneous, trans-
parent, structureless matrix, or periplast, containing closely-set
rounded or polygonal vesicular endoplasts: these vary in dia-
meter from less than 1-5000th inch up to 1-2500th, or a little
more, and contain usually one to three, but frequently many,
minute granules* (fig. 4). On the addition of acetic acid, the
periplast often becomes granular and less transparent, while
the endoplasts are rendered darker and more sharply defined,
undergoing a certain wrinkling. There are neither cell
cavities nor cell walls distinguishable around these endoplasts,
and therefore the Malpighian pulp cannot be said to be
composed of ‘nucleated cells ;? resembling, in this respect,
all the primary, unmetamorphosed tissues with which | am
acquainted.
True cells are, however, to be met with here and there in
the Malpighian pulp. There is first to be observed a clear
area, as of a cavity, surrounding an endoplast ; the periplast
forming the outer limit of this clear area then acquires a more
distinct definition (fig. 5), and becomes recognizable as a cell-
wall, from the remaining periplast. Such complete cells
measure from 1-2500th to 1-1500th of an inch in diameter.
A further change is undergone by the periplast within and
around some of these cells ; granules are deposited, which are
sometimes minute and colourless, sometimes, on the other
hand, have a deep-red colour and a considerable size, consti-
tuting the well-known ‘ pigment-globule-cells’ of the spleen ;
but I may remark, that I have never been able to observe any
blood corpuscles in such cells.
If the Malpighian pulp be pressed out or torn with needles,
it is very readily broken up and diffused through the surround-
ing fluid. We then find in the latter free endoplasts—endo-
plasts surrounded by definite cell walls and cell cavities—and
granule and pigment cells, corresponding with the elements
which were observed in the uninjured tissue. That the free
cells were not primarily independent structures, but have
simply resulted from the breaking up of the periplast along
its lines of least cohesion, is evidenced, in a yery interesting
* These therefore correspond with the “‘ nuclei” and “ nucleoli ” of authors.
The reasons for not so denominating them are contained in an article ‘On
the Cell Theory’ (‘ Brit. and For. Med. Chir. Review, October 1853’). I
may observe that I know of no tissue better calculated to illustrate the
view which I have there taken of Histogenesis, than the Malpighian pulp.
80 ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE MALPIGHIAN BODIES.
manner, by such forms as are represented in fig. 6, where two
cells may be observed still connected by a bridge of peri-
plastic (or as it would here be called, in the language of the
cell theory, ‘ intercellular’) substance, while the outline of a
single isolated cell is still irregular and granular, from the
adhesion of particles of the periplast of which it once formed
a portion. Such bodies as these are quite undistinguishable,
structurally, from pus, mucus, or colourless blood corpuscles.*
3. The Peripheral portion, so-called “Wall,” of the Malpighian
Body.
In the human spleen, the Malpighian bodies cannot be said
with any propriety to possess walls. Their structure remains,
as we have described it, up to their junction with the sur-
rounding red pulp. At the line of junction, a somewhat more
condensed tissue, which breaks up, like a great deal of the red
pulp, into spindle-shaped bodies, and those fibres with one-
sided endoplasts, described by Kolliker, may be found; but
this tissue belongs as much to the red pulp as to the Mal-
pighian body.
In the Sheep, on the other hand, I find, to quote Mr. Whar-
ton Jones’s words, that—
‘* Examined with a low magnifying power, the Malpighian cor-
vesicles present the appearance of thick-walled, glandular vesicles,
with contents. . The thick walls are not defined and homogeneous,
but are, on examination with a high power, found to be composed
of nucleated fibres and nucleated corpuscles, similar to those of the
red pulpy substance, between which, indeed, and the exterior surface
of the Malpighian corpuscles there is no very distinct line of de-
marcation other than is produced by the condensation of the wall of
the Malpighian corpuscles and the absence in them of coloration.”
In addition to this, however, I find upon the exterior of the
Malpighian bodies in the Sheep the mesh-work of pale fibres,
(fig. 2, d’,) like very young elastic tissue, or the fibres of the
zonule of zinn, to which Kolliker and Sanders have referred ;
and I have occasionally met with such fibres in the interior of
the bodies themselves, traversing the Malpighian pulp. They
appear to me to belong to the original tunica adventitia of the
arteries. The existence of any distinct structureless limitary
* The above account of the structure of the Malpighian bodies is
essentially identical with that given by Mr. Wharton Jones, 1. c. pp. 34, 35,
but was drawn up before I had the good fortune to become acquainted
with his article. He describes the wall of the nucleated cells as being
“not very smooth,” and the periplast as a “ diffluent intercellular sub-
stance,” whence I presume that I may,quote him as an authority for the
absence of fluid in the Malpighian bodies.
ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE MALPIGHIAN BODIES. 81
membrane may, I think, be very decidedly denied ; and with
regard to the “granular membrane, the internal surface of
which is lined by a layer of large nucleated cells, while free
nuclei or corpuscles, with a homogeneous or granular plasma,
fill its interior” (Sanders, 1. c., p. 35); all I can say is, that I
cannot give any opinion as to what it may be, never having
met with a Malpighian body presenting any such structures.
It may be said, then, that the Malpighian bodies of the
mammalian spleen are not closed follicles, and have no
analogy whatever to the acini of ordinary glands, but that they
are portions of the spleen, everywhere continuous with the
rest, but distinguished from it—a, by immediately surrounding,
and as it were replacing, the tunica adventitia of the arteries ;
b, by containing no wide venous sinuses, but, at most, a net-
work of delicate capillaries; and c, by being composed of ab-
solutely indifferent tissue, 7. e. of a structureless periplast with
imbedded endoplasts—or of a tissue in which the periplast
has undergone no further metamorphosis than that into cell-
wall and rudimentary fibre.
For a demonstration that each of these propositions holds
good of the Malpighian bodies in the other three classes of the
Vertebrata, I must refer to. Remak’s very able essay, ‘ Ueber
Pigment-kugel-haltige Zellen,’ in Miiller’s ‘ Archiv.’ for 1852,
and to Leydig’s recent ‘ Untersuchungen iiber Fische und
Reptilien,’ in which ample evidence of the fact will be found ;
and my limits oblige me to allude, with equal brevity, to
another important doctrine which many recent writers have
maintained, but which is especially enunciated and illustrated
by Leydig, namely—that there is no line of demarcation to be
drawn between the spleen, the lymphatic glands, Payer’s patches,
and the glandule solitarie, the supra-renal capsules, the
thymus, and the pituitary body, but that these form one great
class of glands characterized essentially by being masses of
indifferent tissue contained in vascular plexuses, and which
may therefore well retain their old name of Vascular Glands.
The primary form of these is represented by the solitary
gland of the alimentary canal, which is nothing but a local
hypertrophy of the indifferent element of the connective tissue
of the part, and possesses no other capsule than that which
necessarily results from its being surrounded by the latter.
A number of such bodies as these, in contiguity, constitute,
if they be developed within a mucous membrane, a Payer’s
patch; if within the walls of the splenic artery and its ramifi-
cations, a spleen; if within the walls of lymphatics, a lym-
phatic gland ; if in the neighbourhood or within the substance
(as in Fishes) of the kidney, a supra-renal body ; if in relation
VOL, If. G
82 ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE MALPIGHIAN BODIES.
with a part of the brain, a pituitary body.* All these organs
agree in possessing nothing that can be called a duct. To
those, however, which are in relation with mucous membranes,
KGlliker has already justly shown (‘ Handbuch’ and ‘ Mikr.
Anat.’) that the ‘follicular’ glands of the root of the tongue
and the tonsils must be added; the former of which possess
rudimentary, and the latter a tolerably perfect, system of
ducts, formed by diverticula of the mucous membrane,
around which the elements of the vascular gland are arranged,
though they are not directly connected with them. I can
fully testify to the general accuracy of K@lliker’s account of
the structure of the tonsils; but I must add that I have been
unable to find ‘ closed follicles’ either in Man or in the Sheep;
and, on the other hand, that the indifferent tissue of the so-
called ‘follicles’ is permeated by a network of capillaries,
which have exactly the same relation to the indifferent tissue
in which they are imbedded, as in the Malpighian bodies
(figs. 9, 10). So far as its structure is concerned, in fact, the
tonsil exactly represents a lymphatic gland, developed around
a diverticulum of the pharyngeal mucous membrane; its
‘ follicles’ precisely resembling the ‘alveoli’ of the latter, in
being constituted by imperfect septa of rudimentary connec-
tive tissue, containing a solid mass of indifferent tissue,
traversed by capillaries.
Can this series of ‘ vascular glands with false ducts,’ as they
might be called, be extended by any further addition? I ven-
ture to think that it may, and that no one can thoroughly
comprehend the structure of the tonsils without perceiving, at
once, that there is but a step from them to the liver. A mass
of indifferent tissue contained in a vascular plexus and ar-
ranged around a diverticulum of mucous membrane, is a
definition which would serve as well for the liver as for the
tonsil ; it is, further, perfectly in accordance with that theory of
the relation of the biliary ducts to the hepatic substance, which
is due to Dr. Handfield Jones, and which all recent researches,
both anatomical and physiological, tend to confirm, viz., that
the liver is essentially a double organ, consisting of two ele-
ments, an excretory and a parenchymatous, different homolo-
gically and functionally. It seems odd that, from being a sort
of histological and physiological outcasts, the Vascular Glands
should turn out, if this view be correct, to be the most import-
ant and extensive class of organs in the whole body, claiming
the gland par excellence, the liver—as one of their family.
* TI purposely abstain from including in this series the thyroid and
pineal glands, because I think it certain that the for mer, and probably, the
latter, have a different import.
( 83)
On the ManuractureE of Larcx AvairaBLe Crystats of
Surpuate of LIopo-Quintne (Herapathite), for Ovvicar
Purroses as ArtirictaL TourmauinEs. By Witiram Birp
Herapatu, M.D., Bristol.
Havine been repeatedly applied to by various parties for the
details of my process for the manufacture of these useful crys-
tals, I have been induced to enter into numerous experiments
to obtain greater certainty in the results, and to study the con-
ditions necessary for the production of broad foliaceous plates.
Permit me to make the formula known to science, together with
the precautions necessary for adoption to secure the crystals
when obtained, and to mount them so as to be available as
polarisers or analysers for the microscope, or even to enable
us to perform all the experiments in the polariscope.
The success which I have obtained is so great, that there is
no doubt tourmalines and Nichol’s prisms will be soon com-
pletely superseded by these new crystals, since the scarcity of
the one and the difficulty in manufacturing the others render
them very costly apparatus. But a little practice in the follow-
ing process will soon enable any one to make them large
enough for every purpose ; and so superior are they in power
to the best tourmaline, that two plates scarcely thicker than gold-
leaf may (by a slight modification of my formerly published
method) be rendered totally impervious to light when they are
crossed at right angles.
[Herewith are enclosed two marvellously thin plates of con-
siderable size ; one being six-tenths of an inch long and three-
tenths of an inch broad, the other the same length but
one-tenth of an inch broader. Upon crossing them you will
perceive that they are optically perfect as polarisers, and as
useful as plates of tourmaline for which you would be charged
four guineas each plate. I have succeeded in getting much
larger ones by the same process and equally good.* |
The materials employed are the same as before, the chief
modification being in the proportions of the ingredients, and
the care taken in the method of crystallization.
It is necessary to procure pure disulphate of quinine, and for
this purpose none approaches so thoroughly to the standard of
absolute purity as that manufactnred by Messrs. Howard and
Kent.
I dissolve it in pyroligneous acid, having a specific gravity
of 1:042, and dilute the solution with an equal quantity of
* We have examined Dr. Herapath’s crystals, and have no hesitation
in pronouncing them equal to any polarising arrangement we have ever
employed.—Eps., Mic. Journ.
G2
84 ON THE MANUFACTURE OF CRYSTALS OF SULPHATE
proof-spirit, made by adding rectified spirit of wine, spec.
grav. 0'837, to equal bulks of distilled water.
The spirituous solution of iodine is made by dissolving
40 grains of iodine in 1 fluid ounce of rectified spirit of wine.
I can, after these explanations, give the formula.
Take of disulphate of quinine 50 grains,
pyroligneous acid, 2 fluid ounces,
proof-spirit, 2 fluid ounces,
spirituous solution of iodine, 50 drops ;
eseolee: the disulphate of quinine in the pyroligneous acid
mixed with the spirit; warm the solution to 130° Fahr., and
directly add the solution of iodine by drops, agitating the
mixture from time to time.
This formula gives to the mother-liquid, after crystallization
at 52° Fahr., a specific gravity of 0-986, which appears highly
favourable to the deposition of the majority of the crystalline
production, and yet allows only the very broad and thinner
plates to float—thus getting them perfectly free from all inter-
fering and adhering plates.
It is necessary to perform this operation in a wide-mouthed
Florence flask or matrass, and to take care that the temperature
is maintained for a little time after the addition of the iodine,
so that the solution should become perfectly clear, dark,
sherry-wine colour ; then set it aside to crystallize, under the
following conditions :—
Ist. It is essential that the apartment should be tolerably
equable in temperature, about 45° or 50° Fahr., as a slight
variation in the temperature produces currents in the crystal-
lizing fluid which destroy the parallelism of the crystals, and
of course negative all the efficiency of the manufacture ; anda
greater rise, if only to 60° Fahr., redissolves the thinner plates.
2nd. It is equally necessary that the liquid should be kept
in a perfect state of repose during the whole act of crystalliza-
tion—even the common vibration of the apartment must be
counteracted, for the same important reason as the last.
The best method to adopt is one which my friend Mr.
John Thwaites employs, namely, to suspend the flask by the
neck with strong twine, and attach this to a similar string
stretching across from one wall of the apartment to the other.
This certainly gives the most uniform results, and offers other
advantages.
The plan I had usually employed was to set aside the flask
on the steadiest support to be found, a wall, pillar, or table;
and imbed it on a feather, cotton, or tow pillow, to act as
a non-conductor, and at the same time destroy vibration.
drd. It is also necessary that the surface of the fluid should
99 39
OF IODO-QUININE FOR OPTICAL PURPOSES. 85
not be exposed to too rapid evaporation, as the temperature
would fall too quickly, and various currents and intestinal mo-
tions would result; therefore the flask or matrass answers
better than the evaporating dish.
4th. It is also decidedly an advantage to have a_ broad
surface in proportion to the depth of liquid; the reason
being, that the thinner and most easily reached plates form on
the surface, and float there until the time arrives to remove
them ; and the greater the surface, the more numerous are the
plates.
5th. These broad plates are not always formed; but if
after six hours none make their appearance, it is merely neces-
sary to apply a spirit-lamp to the bottom of the flask and
warm the liquid to dissolve all the deposited crystals, then add
a little spirit and a few more drops of iodine solution, and
again wait for crystallization.
6th. Supposing that we obtain a crop of these broad floating
plates, which generally occurs under the aforementioned con-
ditions, we permit them to remain from twelve to twenty-four
hours to complete their disc and fill up all crevices, &c., and
to attain a sufficient degree of thickness; for if too thin, they
do not stop the red or purple-violet rays, as Haidinger has
beautifully shown and admirably explained (vide Phil. Mag.,
Oct. 1853, and Poggendorff’s Annalen, for June last). If the
crystals are allowed to remain too long in their mother-liquid,
we run the risk of loss and injury ; for after some time a dis-
solving or disintegrating action appears to occur, and con-
siderable disappointment is occasioned. I have lost several
batches of beautiful and magnificent plates from inability
to secure them at the nick of time.
Having by these means obtained the object of our best
Wishes, it now remains to secure the prize. This requires
a little patience and a tolerable amount of care; the following
plan is the most ready, and requires but little practice and
a steady hand to insure success.
The first stage of the process is to procure a table as near as
possible to the crystallizing spot, furnished with the following
apparatus :—
1, A gallipot or small mortar, to hold the flask on as a support.
2. A supply of perfectly clean circular glass discs, small
enough to pass down the neck of the flask with ease.
3. A glass rod of sufficient length to descend to the bottom
of the flask, if necessary.
4. A little marine glue or sealing-wax.
5. A spirit-lamp and matches.
6. A quantity of blotting-paper cut in strips about an inch
86 ON THE MANUFACTURE OF CRYSTALS OF SULPHATE
wide and two inches long, and also a folded sheet of the same
to act as a pad or support.
Now remove the flask with the greatest amount of care from
its attachment to the horizontal string; this is best done by
holding the perpendicular twine in the left finger and thumb,
at the same time cutting the upper end of it with a pair
of scissors to avoid all disturbance. It will now swing easily
and steadily, and may be carried and gently deposited upon its
gallipot support. Then attach the edge of one of the circular
glass discs to the end of the glass rod by a little of the wax or
marine glue, and let it, when cold, be carried flatly down the
neck of the flask, which should be very gently inclined, as
nearly horizontally as possible, to admit of this’ being easily
accomplished. Having selected the largest crystalline plate,
pass the glass circle gently beneath it, raise the plate by
depressing the hand, and the little crystalline gem is at once
caught on its surface.
If this operation be neatly accomplished, it appears spread
out as a thin uniformly-coloured film upon the glass; if any
black patches appear, they are occasioned by the accidental
crossing of some interposed crystals, or from some on the
under surface of the glass disc. These last must be at once
wiped off by the blotting-paper, the others will sometimes float
out upon raising the edge of the glass disc to a perpendicular
position; if they are near the edge, they may sometimes
be gently drawn out from under the large crystal by a
little dexterity on the part of the operator; frequently there
are no such precautions necessary.
Now rapidly dry the plate by imbibing all the fluid most
scrupulously by blotting-paper. This must be done without
touching the crystalline surface, for the least contact destroys
its beauty, symmetrical arrangement, and optical usefulness.
Having done so, let it dry by exposure to the air in a cool
room, say at 40° to 50°; this is to prevent resolution and
disintegration of the crystal in its own mother-water, a little of
which must remain attached after all our care.
It is sometimes necessary to float them on, or dip them for
an instant only in a little cold distilled water, somewhat imbued
with iodine. This serves two purposes; it removes all
mother-liquid, and prevents crystals of sulphate of quinine
subsequently forming and interfering with the perfect
polarization of the new tourmaline, as every crystal of this
substance interposed between the plates would, of course,
rotate the polarized beam as far as its influence extended, and
depolarize it. ‘The iodine acts also in preventing the solution
of the new crystals in the water. They must again be dried
OF IODO-QUININE FOR OPTICAL PURPOSES. 87
by imbibition and by exposure to air, as before, and then
placed under a cupping-glass, having a watch-glass, with a few
drops of tincture of iodine in it. This gives adecidedly black
tone to the field ; and, if the crystal were before too thin to
obstruct all the light, and thus give a red or purplish violet-
tint, its power of polarization will be very materially improved
by following the above simple directions.
It is essential in iodizing the plate that the exposure to the
vapour be not too long continued ; the time necessary will, of
course, depend on the temperature of the apartment; about
three hours at 50° Fahr., being generally necessary. The
reason of this precaution will be at once evident upon making
the experiment, for the crystals assume a rich golden yellow
colour, both by reflected and transmitted light; the field will,
therefore, when the two plates are parallel, be intensely yellow,
a most objectionable colour for the examination of objects.
The crystals have lost the power of stopping the yellow rays,
and the complementary relation of the body to the superficial
colours appears to be lost also—a very remarkable fact.
The rationale of the periodizing process appears to be
the addition of as much iodine to the crystal as will be suf-
ficient to communicate the exact complement of yellow to
neutralize the red and blue rays of the purple “ body-colour.”
These rays are now absorbed by the plates as they would be
by yellow glass.* If too much iodine be added, an intense
yellow light becomes transmissible when the crystals are
parallel, and the plate becomes rotten and brittle, and will be
almost certainly destroyed in mounting, even if it be exposed
to the air for some time before attempting to do so; by which
process the superadded iodine again volatilizes, clearly showing
that no chemical union could have existed.
Having so far prepared the “ artificial tourmalines,” it
merely remains to cover them by another plate of thin micro-
scopic glass, interposing some highly refractive cement or
varnish between the two plates.
Several cements offer themselves to our notice, but some
selection is necessary. Canada balsam is one of the best:
however, in using this it is necessary to have it very fluid,
and not to employ much heat in the process ; in fact, I believe
it best to use it so as to be fluid at the ordinary temperature,
I have found, however, that it appears to attack the crystals
and dissolve out the iodine. In order to correct this destruc-
* T have since found that yellow glass has no effect in absorbing these
red or violet-red rays—the only absorptive media which I have found
possess any power in stopping them, are, copper solutions, glass charged
with copper, or a thin crystal of sulphate of copper.
88 ON THE MANUFACTURE OF CRYSTALS OF SULPHATE
tive tendency, it is essential to saturate the fluid Canada
with iodine, at the ordinary temperature. ‘This is best done
by warming some small quantity of the balsam in a test-tube
or thin bottle, and dropping into it some crystals of iodine,
agitating them well together by a glass rod: giving time to
cool, and the excess of iodine to subside, it is fit for use. It is
merely necessary to take a small drop of this fluid on the end
of a glass rod, place it on the larger and clean glass circular
disc, then invert thé disc, carrying the crystal upon it, press
the two together gently and steadily with the finger or a glass
rod, or piece of stick, taking great care hot to use much force,
in case the circles or crystal may sustain injury. Now remove
all the extra Canada balsam from around the edge, and expose
the little apparatus to the air, so that the balsam may become
dry; it is then fit to mount in the brasswork of the micro-
scope in the same manner as a tourmaline,
I have found it best to employ an ethereal solution of
Canada balsam in this process, made by dissolving the hard
old balsam in washed pure sulphuric ether, afterwards adding
a little iodine to it as before. This dries more rapidly,
hardens quicker, and move perfectly than the usual fluid
Canada, and it does not attack the crystals—a very great ad-
vantage.
These directions may appear very prolix, tedious, and
excessively troublesome ; but, however, when set in practice,
the whole opération resolves itself into the utmost simplicity ;
habit soon reconciling oneself to the routine, and the different
precautions appear to offer themselves unconsciously to us as
we proceed. I have frequently prepared a dozen good tour-
malines in an hour, as far as the catching and drying part
of the operation ; the others, of course, require longer time,
but for these we must wait, and occupy ourselves with some
other stages of the same process.
When it is absolutely necessary to obtain a perfectly black
field with a total stoppage of all the incident rays (upon
*“‘ crossing’ the two crystals), it is much the better plan to
employ a thicker plate of this substance: such a crystal will
be generally found in the flask at the bottom of the mother-
fluid. There is more trouble requisite in obtaining perfect
plates, free from all intervening crystals, but the experi-
menter is generally repaid in the end by the perfection of the
polarizing medium,
When the selenite stage is employed, the thinner and violet-
coloured crystals are far preferable to those which give a black
tone to the field; as the colours are more brilliant and the
flood of transmitted light much greater, so that we are enabled
OF IODO-QUININE FOR OPTICAL PURPOSES. 89
to use a less illuminating power. I am not in the habit of
using an achromatic condenser with my polarizing apparatus,
which probably accounts for some discrepancies in the results
of observations made by different experimenters upon the
same crystalline plates: those crystals which will transmit
the violet rays when strongly illuminated will not do so when
the instrument is used in daylight, or with a plane instead of a
concave mirror, and without the achromatic condenser.
If it be necessary to obtain a most decidedly black field, the
violet rays may be readily absorbed by interposing a thin
plate of sulphate of copper beneath the polarizing plate of
Herapathite and the source of illuminating power.
The author has recently employed a plate of this substance,
1-20th of an inch thick, cut on a hone, polished and mounted
between two plates of thin glass in Canada balsam, as a
means of correcting the defects of the thinner plates of his
new tourmalines*—this substance possessing the power of
absorbing the violet rays of the spectrum in a pre-eminent
degree. In order to succeed in this experiment it is neces-
sary that the sulphate of copper should be inclined at a certain
angle to the plane of primitive polarization, as it is a sub-
stance possessing two neutral axes or planes of no-depolariz-
ing power ; the position of which may be easily found, and
their direction marked upon the support, so that the interven-
ing plate may be always inserted at the angle of its greatest
activity.
Professor Stokes has lately, in a letter to me, suggested the
employment of a glass Jaden with the oxide of copper as a
means of attaining the same end : having, therefore, prepared
a boracic glass, coloured by the black oxide of copper, I have
used it effectually as an absorbent medium for counteracting
the violet-red colour of the polarized beam. But although it
offers great and manifest advantages when the new tourmalines
are crossed at right angles, yet, upon revolving the superior
crystal, and therefore bringing the two plates into a parallel
position, we have a blue colour in the field, which must
assuredly alter the colours of depolarizing media: it is, how-
ever, a very agreeable light to work by, as the intense yellow
of gas-light is much mellowed down and counteracted by it.
This corrective medium would be inadmissible when the
selenite stage is employed, as the tints would be materially
changed by its absorptive agency.
The mode of making this glass is simply to dry powdered
biborate of soda in a crucible by the heat of an ordinary fire ;
again reduce the effloresced mass to powder, and mix it with
* A solution of the sulphate or nitrate of copper in water will equally
succeed in producing a black field.
90 GREGORY ON THE NEW FORMS, &c.,
a small quantity of the oxide of copper, such as is generally
used in organic analysis, then introduce the mixture into a
platinum crucible, and with a steady, long-continued heat,
thoroughly vitrify it, pour it out upon a flat slate, clean
metallic, or Wedgwood-ware surface, and press it while still
soft into a flattened plate. Upon cooling, a portion must be
quickly ground down on a hone, polished, and then mounted
in Canada balsam between glass: the unmounted boracic glass
may be kept for any length of time in turpentine without change,
but in the air it effloresces, and becomes opaque and useless.
There is not the least doubt that, before long, these splendid
and useful crystals will be offered for sale by opticians at
as many shillings as tourmalines now cost pounds, and cer-
tainly of equal value and practical utility—in my own opinion,
of even greater, for less light is lost by these than by any of our
polarizing apparatus at present in use.
I have invariably used, in this description, the original
terms employed by me, namely, “ artificial tourmalines,’ ° and
“¢ crystals of sulphate of iodo-quinine.” Professor Haidinger’s
term of “ Herapathite” is certainly a highly complimentary
one to myself; but as it does not give either an idea as to the
optical properties or chemical characters of the substance in
question, it does not appear to me so suitable as those I origi-
nally attached to them.
.
Notice of the New Forms and Varieties of Known Forms occur-
ring in the Diaromacrous Eartu of Muti; with Remarks
on the Cuiassirication of the Diaromacez. By Wi ii1am
Grecory, M.D., F.R.S.E., Professor of Chemistry in the
University of Edinburgh.
Tue two notices which have already appeared in the Journal
have made known the occurrences, in this deposit, of about
ninety distinct forms, of which two were noted as being new
to science. But the continued and diligent examination of it,
which I have carried on during my residence abroad last sum-
mer, has led to results so much more remarkable, that I have
to beg of the readers of the ‘ Journal’ to regard those papers
as merely introductory to a more satisfactory and complete
account of this interesting deposit. This I shall now attempt
to give; but the limits of this paper, and of the illustrative
plate, will not allow me to complete it at this time, and a
large portion of my materials must therefore be reserved for a
subsequent number of the ‘ Journal.’
My observations have been made on a very large number of
OF THE DIATOMACEOUS EARTH OF MULL. 91
excellent slides ; and the method of search which I have found
to answer best is the following, which I briefly notice here,
because, by a slight alteration in the usual mode of keeping
notes of what is seen, it is easy afterwards to find any required
object, by the help of these notes alone :—
I always begin, then, the examination of a slide at the right-
hand side, and carry it on by successive vertical sweeps, the
first and all the odd numbers being downward sweeps (appa-
rently, really upward), and the even numbers upward ones. I
find this a great help to the memory. If in the first sweep I
notice nothing remarkable, it is simply recorded thus | 1 |.
If I see in it a peculiar or very fine specimen, I note this
after the number, prefixing certain abbreviated signs to show
whether it be above, or below, or near the middle horizontal
line, or near the top or bottom of the sweep. Thus, | 1. Bm,
P. latestriata 8. V. fine. N b, S. Craticula | signifies that in
sweep 1, below the middle line (really, not apparently), I find
a fine S.V. of the new Pinnularia, and near the bottom, a Suri-
rella Craticula. Having made the first sweep, I now shift to
the second, and the extent of shift is, as nearly as possible,
half a diameter of the field. I use for searching, either Ross’s
1-4th or Smith and Beck’s 1-5th, with the 2nd eye-piece.
This high power is necessary on account of the numerous
small forms; of course I note the object-glass used, or by
means of the draw-tube make the field of the 1-4th equal to
that of the 1-5th. I go on in this way over the whole slide,
noting every remarkable form, and as the number of sweeps
varies, according to the diameter of the cover, from 60 to 80
and upwards, it is easy to see that the exploration of a full
slide is a matter of considerable time and labour. But the
notes, being once made as above recommended, serve not
only as a record of the remarkable contents of the slide, but as
a means of finding any object. If the object be in a sweep
near the right side, say in 4, I make four shifts from the side
onwards, and move up or down according to the record, and
am sure to find the object instantly. If it be further on, I
look for some very conspicuous object, such as a fine P. alpina,
&e., not far from it (with a low power), and, replacing the
high power, count the shifts from that; or with the high
power I take the first striking object in that part of the slide,
and, referring to the notes, use it as a point of departure. I
may, however, in every case, count from the beginning or end
of the sweeps, that is, from the right or left sides of the slide,
and if the shifts have been well made, the object is always
very soon found ; and if not, it must be very near, on one side
or the other, and by trying a little, it is sure to appear.
92 _ GREGORY ON THE NEW FORMS, &c.,
There is really no more trouble in keeping the notes in the
above-described way than in any other. But in the case of
any very remarkable form, which requires further examination,
I move to the nearest edge of the circle, and note carefully
any marks there, by which I can find the object in a moment,
at any time. If there are no marks there, I look on the
opposite side, or on one of the two other sides, and if
none have marks naturally, which very rarely happens, I
place a spot of ink, and note it. In this way my notes
serve as finders, without the annoyance, incidental to the
finders recently proposed, of having continually to change the
object-glass. At the same time, the application of a scale to
one side of the slide, as recommended in a recent number of
the ‘ Journal,’ answers well for finding single objects, although
its use is too troublesome to allow it to be employed in a case
like the present, where hundreds of forms have to be marked.
I have just said that the exploration of a single slide de-
mands both time and labour to no small extent; and I must
add, that a single exploration, however careful, is never suf-
ficient. A second or a third will invariably detect interesting
or even new forms, overlooked on the first, as 1 have very
often experienced.
And this leads me to remark, that the results hitherto ob-
tained from a careful exploration of the Mull deposit have been
such as to convince me ihat none of the known deposits have
yet been fully investigated. Indeed, few are willing to devote
to them the time and labour necessary for this purpose. At
the suggestion of the Rey. Mr. Smith, therefore, I propose to
examine all the fossil Diatomaceous deposits I can procure,
which I the more readily undertake because, being lame, and
unable to walk far, I cannot attempt the collection, personally,
of living species. I beg therefore to mention that I shall feel
extremely grateful to observers for any portions of such de-
posits, from any part of the world, which they can spare for
examination ; and that I shall be happy to supply them with
the Mull deposit, which it will soon, I fear, be impossible to
obtain in situ, as I understand a great part of it has been
removed in the course of agricultural improvements, and em-
ployed as manure. I have, fortunately, sufficient for micro-
scopical purposes.
I proceed now, in the first place, to lay before the reader a
list, corrected to the end of November, 1853, of the known
forms which I have detected in the Mull deposit. In the
second place, | shall briefly describe some of the new forms
which have occurred, leaving the remainder for the next part
of this paper; and thirdly, I shall notice certain striking
OF THE DIATOMACEOUS EARTH OF MULL. 93
varieties of known and figured forms, in which the deposit is
remarkably rich. I shall conclude with remarks on the classi-
fication and nomenclature of the Diatomacez, on which sub-
ject the study of this deposit promises to throw much light.
As the first volume of the ‘Synopsis’ of the Rev. Mr. Smith
is, or ought to be, in the hands of every student of the Dia-
tomacez, I shall adopt the names employed in that work, in
order to facilitate reference. The ‘Synopsis’ is the only
work on the subject, so far as I have yet seen, in which the
figures are really calculated to assist the observer. In
organisms, such as the Diatomes, in which the markings con-
stitute essential characters, and in which, also, the number of
forms having a great general resemblance, and differing only
in small but important particulars, is very great, nothing short
of the utmost attainable accuracy in the figures is of the
smallest value. The attempt to find one’s way through the
labyrinthine mass of Diatomaceous forms, in the absence of
actual specimens of all the described forms, by the help of
the kind of figures often given, is an utterly hopeless one.
Such figures actually tend to confuse the young observer.
But the beautiful figures of Mr. T. West, in the ‘ Synopsis,’
as I can testify from ample experience, are precisely such as
the student requires for his guidance. ‘They combine minute
accuracy in form and markings with a very remarkable and
very rare quality, that, namely, of presenting to the eye the
true general aspect or character of the forms, a point of the
utmost importance, because many species, and even genera,
are easily recognized by their aspect alone. There is nothing
at all to be compared to these figures, for practical utility,
anywhere to be found: on the contrary, in some works, not
only are the markings inaccurate, or altogether omitted (evi-
dently because inferior objectives have been used), but the
character or general aspect of the surface is often so entirely
missed that the reader fails to recognize forms with which he
is familiar. Although the ‘ Synopsis ” is not yet completed,
it fortunately happens that most of the genera occurring in
the Mull deposit are treated of in the volume already pub-
lished ; and of course, where I can refer to figures so accurate,
it is unnecessary to figure the species about to be enumerated.
I shall only, therefore, give figures of such forms as are new
or newly distinguished, or such as exhibit important varieties
not figured in the ‘ Synopsis.’
The following is the list of forms observed and identified
with species figured or to be figured in the ‘ Synopsis,’ and in
the order of that work. Those marked with a are so abundant
as to be characteristic of the deposit ; f is attached to such as,
94
GREGORY ON THE NEW FORMS, &c.,
although less abundant, are frequent, and occur in every slide ;
r indicates such as are less frequent, or perhaps rather scarce,
but may usually be found ; while rr denotes that the form is
hitherto of extreme rarity in the deposit.
ike
eee turgida, f
f Zebra, r
Argus, 7
ocellata, Tr
rupesttis, 7
a gibba, f
ventricosa, Tr
: Eunotia gracilis, f
» triodon, r
3 tetraodon, a
> Diadema, a
» bigibbas a
. Cymbella Ehrenbergii, rr
e cuspidata, f
55 affinis, f _
5 maculata, a
- Helvetica, a
Scotica, a
: Amphora ovalis, 7
20. Cocconeis Placentula, Ri
21 nA flexella (Thwaitesii),f
22. Coscinodiscus excentricus, rr
23. Cyclotella Kiitzingiana, f
24, 8 Rotula, 77
25. antiqua, 7
26. Surirella iseriata, f
27. PD linearis f
28. a splendida, rr
29. nobilis, 77
30. a Craticula, rr
31. p minuta, 77
32. ovata, 77
33, 55 constricta, 77
34 Brightwellii, 7
» UB ry: Dlionella mar ginata, 77°
36. 6 angusta, f
37. Cymatopleura apiculata, /
38. e Solea, 77
39. $5 elliptica, 7
40. Nitzschia Amphioxys, 7
41. 3 sigmoidea, 7
42, = Sigma, 77
43. 2 linearis, f
44, 5 minutissima.
45. Navicula rhomboides, a
46. 5 serians, @
47. ss dicephala, f
48. > affinis, f
49. yD ovalis, f
50 = firma. 7
bili Fi gibberula, 7
52.
ot
95.
101.
102. Himantidium Arcus, @
Navicula angustata, 7
qn obtusa, 77°
a Semen, rr
5 Crassinervia, 7
ss tumida, 77
= pusilla, 77
inflata, Tr
’ Pinnularia major, a
s viridis, @
> acuminata, a
= oblonga, a
4 divergens, @
as acuta, @
of interrupta, @
3 Tabellaria, f
a mesolepta, f
5 nobilis, f
» _gibba, f
”? lata, f
» alpina, /
a radiosa, 7
= viridula, 7
a gracilis, 7
cardinalis, 77r
stauroneiformis at
" Stauroneis Phenicenteron, a
+ gracilis, a
” anceps, f
5S dilatata, 77
x) acuta, 77
linearis, r
. Pleurosigma attenuatum, 7
. Synedra | biceps, a
E » var, B, recta, f
5) radians, f
> Wiper
capitata, 7
» Wancherie, ? r
delicatissima, Tr
Cocconema lanceolatum, 7
“- cymbiforme, f
7 Cistula, f
ns parvum, /
Gomphonema coronatum, a
#s acuminatum, f
- tenellum, 7
PP dichotomum, f
z capitatum, Si
4 constrictum, f
Vibrio, f
OF THE DIATOMACEOUS EARTH OF MULL. 95
103. Himantidium majus, a 112. Tabellaria fenestrata, a
104. 5 pectinale, a 113. > ventricosa, f
105. e bidens, a 114. a5 flocculosa, f
106. =A undulatum,a@ | 115. Diatoma vulgare, r
107. 4 gracile, a | 116. Melosira varians, r
108. Fragilaria capucina, f aig 3, arenaria, 77
109. Odontidium Tabellaria, rr | 118. Orthosira nivalis, a
110. Denticula tenuis (?), 7 | 119. 5 aurichalcea, @
111. Tetracyclus lacustris, rv
The predominance of the forms marked a, and the frequency
of most of those marked f, give its peculiar character to this
deposit. Perhaps the group of the Himantidia, all of which
are most abundant, constitutes the most striking feature. But
several Pinnularia, the two first-named Navicule, several
Eunotie, the Tabellarie, the Orthosire, Synedra biceps, and
Gomphonema coronatum, are all very prominent. Of the
Pinnularig, P. major is found in very fine specimens and of
great frequency, but P. divergens (?) is the most abundant, and
exhibits numerous and interesting varieties. In some portions
of the earth very fine specimens of P. lata and P. alpina occur
frequently. Jam not aware that the latter beautiful species,
which is rare in the living state, has yet been observed in any
other deposit. Some specimens of it, as well as of P. lata,
attain to twice the length of those figured in the ‘Synopsis.’
Having now noticed those forms which agree with the
species in the ‘ Synopsis,’ 1 have next to mention those which,
although known abroad, are not given as British species in
that work, and such as appear to be altogether new. As most
of them, so far as they are now to be mentioned, are figured on
the accompanying plate (Pl. 1V.), perhaps the best way will be
to notice them briefly in the order in which they occur in the
plate, being that of the ‘Synopsis.’ I should add, that several
of the figures are also varieties of forms already mentioned,
Fig. 1. This is apparently a modification of Epithemia
Argus, and calls for no special remark.
Fig. 2. This represents a valve of an Epithemia, not very
rare in the deposit. It differs both in form, aspect, and
markings from £. rupestris, when we compare the same
parts, and I am disposed to refer it to E. gibberula, Ehr., so
far as I can judge from the separate valves, which have
not yet occurred united. 120, r.
Fig. 3. These figures show a few of the forms of Eunotia
bigibba? which I have introduced into the foregoing list
because | believe Mr. Smith now admits it as a distinct form.
It varies most remarkably in length and in the form and pro-
portions of the dorsal prominences, which in some cases seem
to be blended into one ; but, in all its variations, the square
96 GREGORY ON THE NEW FORMS, &c.,
apices are constant, and at once distinguish it from Himanti-
dium bidens. (P1. IV., fig. 20.) In some individuals, there are
two ventral as well as two dorsal prominences. (I use the
terms dorsal and ventral merely to designate the convex and
concave sides.)
Fig. 4. These figures represent the new form, which Mr.
Smith, to whom I pointed it out, has named Hunotia incisa.
One shows the more frequent, probably the typical form, with
acute apices ; ; another, the variety £, with rounded apices,
which is also broader; and a third exhibits an intermediate
form, with one acute taudl one obtuse apex. All have the
notches, close to the terminal puncta, from which the spe-
cific name is taken. The striae are fine, 44 in 001”, and
require good object-glasses, with careful adjustment, to render
them visible, especially if in balsam. Those on £, however,
are more readily seen from its breadth. I find this form, in
balsam, an excellent test-object for ascertaining the adjustment
and the general performance of an object-glass. Ross’s 1-4th
and Smith and Beck’s 1-5th, if duly adjusted, bring out the
strie perfectly, even without ‘the condenser. I see aiat this
species resembles in form Himantidium Veneris, Kiitz; but
the latter, as figured, has no trace of the notches, nor of stria,
and Professor Kiitzing, to whom I sent a portion of the de-
posit, regards mine as a new form. This species must be
added to ‘those above named as being most abundant, and cha-
racteristic of the deposit. I have detected it in a deposit
labelled from the banks of the Spey, in that of Lillhaggasén
in Lapland, and in that of the Liineburg heath; but it has
not yet been observed in the living state. (I may state here
that the two last-named deposits, although widely distant in
locality, exhibit a perfect agreement in the nature and relative
proportions of the species. I shall take an early opportunity
of describing a form which I find in both, but of which I can
see no mention in any work on the subject.) 121, a.
Fig. 5. The next form is either a Cymbella or a Cocconema,
these genera, when fossil, being undistinguishable, if indeed
they are really distinct. It is abundant in the deposit, and the
reader, on comparing it with the figures of Cymbelle and
Cocconemata in the ‘Synopsis,’ all of which occur along
with it, will see that it differs from all. It approaches nearest
to Cymbella Helvetica, but is much shorter, and also broader,
in proportion, and is very permanent and uniform in these
characters. It is possibly a variety of that species, but one
which certainly ought to be figured. Regarding it, for the
present, in this light, I shall not give it a separate name.
122, f.
OF THE DIATOMACEOUS EARTH OF MULL. 97
Fig. 6. This is a very remarkable and puzzling form. It
has the form of a large and broad Navicula serians, with the
strong median line and large central punctum of that species ;
but it has also bars resembling those of Surirella craticula (qu.
canaliculi?), and beneath these fine, but very distinct, cross
strie. There are also indications of longitudinal lines. This
strange medley of characters makes it very difficult to class it
properly. For the present, I shall consider it as Suriredla
eraticula, with abnormal or sportive development of the
median line and central punctum, and some variation in form.
Fig. 7. These three figures represent a Tryblionella, frequent
in the deposit, which would appear to be a form of T. angusta.
It is in some cases narrower than the figure given in the
‘Synopsis,’ and in all these the apices are more acute and
more produced. It also occurs shorter and broader. There
are individual specimens still shorter and broader than the left-
hand figure here given. The striz are very fine, and, I rather
think, are more numerous than Mr. Smith states them to be in
T. angusta.
Fig. 8. This is Navicula affinis, as it occurs in the deposit,
perhaps nearer the typical form than that figured in the
‘Synopsis.’ It will be seen that in size, as well as form and
aspect, it approaches to WV. firma, and should, perhaps, form
but one species with it.
Fig. 9. This is a remarkably long and narrow Pinnularia,
which appears to me distinct from all others, It is of delicate
aspect and very fragile, has a strongly-developed median line,
and sides parallel, except just at the apices. The strie are
radiate in the middle, and distinct. Its form and aspect, as
well as the much finer striation, and the very delicate margins,
seem to me to distinguish it from P. acuta; but even if it bea
variety of that species, it is so marked a one, that it requires
to be named, I therefore propose for it the provisional name
of P. tenuis. 123,
Fig. 10. This is a remarkable small capitate Pinnularia,
which is perhaps allied to P. mesolepta, but differs from all the
figures of that species which I have seen. The sides are slightly
undulated, the striz very delicate, and the rounded heads are
of almost the same width as the very narrow body, giving it a
peculiar aspect. It never exceeds, and frequently falls short
of, the size here shown. (In all the figures the power used is
400 linear.) I propose to name this form P. undulata. P.
mesolepta also occurs in the deposit. The present form is
at once distinguished by its much smaller size, and very
much finer striation, from the latter, as figured in the
VOL, II. H
98 GREGORY, ON THE NEW FORMS, &c.,
‘Synopsis,’ as well as from another somewhat analogous form,
Navicula nodosa, Kitz. 124, f.
Fig. 11. This is a small Pinnularia, with very distinct striz.
There are several forms nearly approaching it, which want of
space prevents me from figuring at present. This one may be
supposed to have some relation to P. gibba, but is, certainly,
not gibbous. The others, which I hope to figure hereafter,
are still more distinct from P. gibba; and, on the whole, I
am satisfied that they, or some of them, ought to constitute a
new species, to which I would give the name of P. parva.
125, f-
Fig. 12 represents a very elegant Pinnularia, which is,
perhaps, allied to P. radiosa; but yet, as may be seen by
referring to the ‘ Synopsis,’ has a different character, almost
intermediate between those of P. radiosa and of P. peregrina.
I figure it, that it may be compared with those in other forms,
but do not venture to.name it as certainly distinct, 7.
Fig. 13. This is the new species described by me in the last
number of the ‘Journal’ as Pinnularia Hebridensis. But
as Mr. Smith, before seeing my form, found it living at Gras-
mere in August last, and has named it P. latestriata, I adopt
his name as the better of the two. It exhibits two varieties:
one, the type, as I believe, elliptico-lanceolate ; the other more
linear, and frequently very slightly constricted in the middle,
as in fig. 13, 6. The coste, 10 to 11 in ‘001", are divergent,
not reaching the middle line. It is very remarkable that this
beautiful species should have been detected living so imme-
diately after I had found it in this deposit, and that, in fact,
it must have been thus observed by Mr. Smith, even if I had
not noticed it in the Mull earth, where it is rather scarce. In
the gathering made by Mr. Smith, at Grasmere (which has
yielded two other new and beautiful forms), this Pznnularia, so
long overlooked, is the most frequent of all the Pinnularie
present. I am informed that it has since been found living
near. Ipswich, a neighbourhood so well searched that one
would have thought so marked a form could not have escaped
notice. These facts strongly confirm what I have above said
in regard to the necessity of strict exploration, and prove that
it is not only the fossil deposits, but also the gatherings of
living forms, which have been imperfectly studied. 126, r.
Fig. 14. This is a very pretty small form, either a Navicula
or a Pinnularia, which does not agree with any figures known
to me. Its form is broadly elliptical, with acute but not pro-
duced apices. The striz are distinct and radiate. It is, pos-
sibly, a form of P. gracilis, but differs very much from that
OF THE DIATOMACEOUS EARTH OF MULL. 99
species, as figured in the ‘Synopsis,’ or as it occurs in the de-
posit. It may be called, if new, NV. or P. exigua. 127, r.
Fig. 15. These figures represent some of the varieties of Pin-
nularia divergens. Y-ven the typical form, in this deposit, varies
considerably from that figured in the ‘ Synopsis,’ being sinaller,
and having about 21 coste in ‘001 instead of 11, as in that
figure. It farther occurs broad and elliptical, without terminal
constriction ; with parallel sides, and very narrow, and in many
cases with a very slight but perceptible constriction in the
middle. These varieties are seen in the figures, but there are
many more. I may here mention that the normal form, which
is not here figured, although in shape and arrangement of
markings wonderfully close to the figure in the ‘ Synopsis,’
yet differs from it so materially in the number of stria, that I
am led to doubt if it be truly P. divergens. Ifa distinct species,
then this species will include not only that normal form, and
the four varieties here figured, but also P. stawroneiformis
(fig. 16), and, as I have reason to believe from the occurrence
of forms to be hereafter figured, P. interrupta, W. Sm. also.
Fig. 16. This figure represents P. stauroneiformis as it often
appears in our deposit. There are other modifications, which,
as mentioned in the last paragraph, may have to be united to
fig. 15.
Fig. 17. This figure represents a new species of Stauroneis,
which is not figured in any work I have seen. Its form is
nearly rectangular, the stauros distinct, not reaching the mar-
gin, the striz so delicate that it is very difficult to see them.
I name it S. rectangularis. 128, r.
Fig. 18. This is a large Gomphonema, which was included
under G. acuminatum, but appears to have been recently dis-
tinguished. J cannot ascertain whether this be the form called
G. Brebissonii ; but as it has not yet been figured, I give it.
It is supposed by some to be merely the sporangial frustule of
G. acuminatum. This is a point I am unable to decide.
129, f.
Fig. 19. This I consider to be a Gomphonema not yet de-
scribed. It is so abundant in the deposit as to be one of the
characteristic forms. It seems to stand between G. tenel/um
and G. Vibrio; its strie are finer than in most species of Gom-
phonema. It is possible that it may be a Pinnularia, and with-
out the F, V., which, as I do not yet know, it is not easy to
pronounce. But it has so much the aspect of a Gomphonema,
that I shall consider it as such, and propose for it, in the
meantime, the name of G. Hebridense, from its abundance in
the deposit. 130, a.
Fig. 20. This is one of the forms of Himantidium Arcus, at
H 2
100 DIATOMACEOUS EARTH OF MULL.
least I conjecture it to beso. It is possible, from the character
of the stria, that it may belong to H. majus.
Fig. 21. These figures represent several varieties of Himanti-
dium bidens, in which the two dorsal prominences are seen, as
the valve lengthens, to sink, and finally to disappear, leaving
a nearly straight line. But the apices never vary. The
modifications of this, as of all the Himantidia in the deposit,
as well as of Kunotia bigibba and Pinnularia divergens, above
figured, are quite endless.
Fig. 22. These are remarkable, I believe, sporangial frustules
of Odontidium tabellaria, B.
I have now noticed all the figures in this plate ; and, adding
to the former list such of those now mentioned as are dif-
ferent, we have in all 130 distinct forms in these two lists.
But this is not all, for I have not been able to figure or de-
scribe at this time a considerable number of forms still unde-
termined, several of which I believe to be new. These must
be reserved for another occasion. Moreover, I have now to
mention a few species which I have not introduced hitherto,
because they are not here figured, and do not occur in the
‘ Synopsis,’ unless as included under other names. Thus I have
observed—
131. Navicula trochus, new to Britain, rr.
132. Navicula levissima, new to Britain, rr.
133. Navicula apiculata, one of the new forms lately found
at Grasmere by Mr. Smith, rr.
134. Cocconema gibbum, f, new to Britain, at least not in
the ‘Synopsis.’
135. Eunotia Camelus, Kiitz: this, although not in the
‘ Synopsis,’ [cannot but regard as a distinct form, f.
136. Eunotia depressa, Kitz: the same remark applies to
this form as to the last, f.
137. Himantidium exiquum, Bréb: this is certainly distinct.
138. Orthosira punctata: this is another new form, observed,
I believe, living, by Mr. Smith, who showed it to me. I had
seen it in the deposit, but had neglected it, not having seen
any good figures of Orthosire, rr.
I should now proceed to make some remarks on the classifi-
cation and nomenclature of the Diatomacez, but must post-
pone these to the next number of the ‘ Journal,’ when I shall also
describe the remaining forms. Some, I believe, will have to
be added to each of the divisions of this paper, but chiefly to
those new as British species, or new to science. I cannot,
however, conclude without expressing my obligations to Mr.
West, for the trouble he has taken in producing the very beauti-
ful figures in the Plate.
(012)
TRANSLATIONS, &e.
On a Substance presenting the Chemical reaction of CELLULOsE,
found in the Bratn and Sprnat Corp of Man. By Rupoter
Vircuow. (Sept. 4, 1853.) Virchow’s Archiv. B. VL,
Hl, p: 139.
Ir is well known that Carl Schmidt * was the first to discover
in the Ascidians the presence of a principle previously known
to exist only in plants, viz. cellulose, and to show that it was a
constituent of the animal tissue. The researches of Kolliker
and Léwig,t of Schacht,t and of Huxley,§ have established
this important fact. The occurrence of this substance, how-
ever, was limited to a comparatively very low class of the
Invertebrata, and the further discovery made by Gottlieb, in
Euglena viridis, viz. that this infusortum contains paramylon,
a body isomerous with starch, also had reference only to a
creature in the lowest class of the animal kingdom.||
Nothing of the kind, on the other hand, has been known
as existing in the vertebrata, and it is only since the
discovery by C. Bernard—that the liver produces sugar—that
we have had reason to suppose that substances belonging
to the amylum series may also have a representative.
From histological considerations, it had struck me that the
umbilical cord of man presented a great resemblance in
structure to the cellulose tissue of the Ascidians (Wurzb.
Verh. 1851. Bd. II., p. 161. note), and I was only the more
confirmed in this notion by Schacht’s observations, so that
I have since directed my researches with care to the subject.
But in many instances this was in vain, as, for instance, in the
ova of Amphibia and fishes, the remarkable vitelline plates
of which I described (Zeitsch. f. wiss. Zoologie. 1852. Bd.
IV., p. 240).
* ‘Zur Vergleichenden Anat. d. Wirbellos.’ Thiere, 1845, p. 61.
+ ‘ Ann. d. Sci. Nat.,’ 1846, p. 193.
~ ‘Mull. Archiv.,’ 1851, p. 176.
§ ‘Quart. Journ. Micr. 8.,’ vol. i. p. 22, 1853.
|| The pertinacity with which German naturalists cling to the animal
nature of Euglena, we must confess, is very surprising to us, who are
equally satisfied that it is as much a subject of the vegetable kingdom as
the motile zoospores of any Alga, such as Volvow, Hydrodictyon, Proto-
coccus, &¢.
102 VIRCHOW, ON CELLULOSE, FOUND IN THE
I was more fortunate, when a short time since, I directed my
attention to the so-termed corpora amylacea of the brain, upon
the precise nature of which, contrasted with the other kinds of
amyloid bodies in man, I had not previously arrived at any
accurate notion. (Wurzb. Verh. 1851. Bd. II., p. 51.) It
was now apparent that these bodies assumed a_ pale-blue
tinge upon the application of iodine, and upon the subsequent
addition of sulphuric acid, presented the beautiful violet
colour which is known as belonging to cellulose ; and which in
the present instance appears the more intense from the con-
trast with the surrounding yellow or brown nitrogenous sub-
stance.
I have repeated this experiment so often, and-with so many
precautions, that I regard the result as quite certain. Not
only have I instituted comparative researches in different
human bodies, and in the most various localities, but I have
also noticed the action of the reagents under all possible
conditions. The experiment is best made in the mode
adopted by Mulder and Harting, with regard to vegetable
cellulose (vide Moleschott ‘ Physiologie isl Stoffwechsels,’ p.
103), viz., by causing the action of diluted sulphuric acid to
follow that of a watery solution of iodine. The iodine solu-
tion should not be too strong, for the observation may then be
impeded by its precipitation; and, on the other hand, care
must be taken that the iodine exerts due action upon the sub-
stance. Owing to the volatility of the iodine, and its great
affinity for animal substances, its action is usually very un-
equal, so that the border of the object and not the centre may
be penetrated by it; or perhaps, of spots in close contiguity,
one will contain iodine and the other not. It is, consequently,
always advisable to repeat the application of the iodine
several times, but to avoid the addition of too much. Upon
the subsequent addition of sulphuric acid, if the action have
been too powerful, the result is a perfectly opaque, red-brown
colour. The most certain results are obtained if the sulphuric
acid be allowed to act very slowly. In fact, I have procured
the most beautiful objects in allowing a preparation covered
with the glass to remain undisturbed with a drop of sulphuric
acid in contact with the edge of the covering-glass for 12
to 24 hours. Under these circumstances, the most beautiful
light violet-blue was occasionally presented. Lastly, I would
just intimate that accidental mixtures of starch or cellulose may
readily happen, seeing that very light fibres or minute particles
from the cloths with which the object and covering-glasses
have been cleaned, may very easily be left upon them, which
would afterwards exhibit the same reaction as the above.
BRAIN AND SPINAL CORD OF MAN, 103
Every precaution having been taken, the following results
will be obtained :-—
1. The corpora amylacea (Purkinje) are chemically different
from the concentric-spherical corpuscles, of which the brain-sand
ts composed, and with which they have hitherto usually been
confounded. The organic matrix of the brain-sand granules
is obyiously nitrogenous ; it is coloured of a deep yellow, by
iodine and sulphuric acid. This is true not only of the sabu-
lous matter in the pineal gland and chorioid plexuses, but also
of that of the Pacchionian granulations and of the dura mater,
as well as of the dentate plates in the spinal arachnoid. Inall
these parts I have, in general, nowhere obtained the blue re-
action, except in a few spots in the pineal gland. It would,
therefore, for the future, be convenient to restrict the name of
* corpora amylacea’ to the bodies containing cellulose.
2. These bodies exist, so far as I have at present found,
only in the substance of the ependyma ventriculorum and its
prolongations. In this I include especially the lining of the
cerebral ventricles and the transparent substance in the spinal
cord described by Kolliker, as the substantia grisia centralis
(Mikrosk. Anat. Bd. II. 1, p. 413). With respect to the
cerebral ventricles, I have already repeatedly stated, that
I find them to be lined throughout with a membrane belong-
ing to the connective tissue class, upon which rests an epithe-
lium. This membrane contains very fine cellular elements,
and a matrix sometimes of more dense, sometimes of softer
consistence, and is continued on the internal aspect without any
special boundary between the nervous elements. In the deeper
layers of this membrane, and in immediate contiguity with the
nerve fibres, the cellulose corpuscles are found most abund-
antly, and they are also especially numerous where the epen-
dyma is very thick. They are consequently very abundant on
the fornix, septum lucidum, and in the stria cornea in the fourth
ventricle. In the spinal cord, the substance corresponding to
the ependyma lies in the middle, in the grey substance, in
the situation where the spinal canal exists in the fetus. It
there forms evidently a rudiment of the obliterated canal,
such as it presented in the obliteration of the posterior cornu
of the lateral ventricle, which is so frequently met with. In
a transverse section of the cord, it is easily recognised as a
gelatinous, somewhat resistant substance, which may be
readily isolated. Its cells are much larger and more perfect
than those of the cerebral ependyma. This ependyma spinale
forms a continuous gelatinous filament, which extends to the
Jilum terminale, and might therefore, perhaps, be most suitably
described as the central ependymal filament. In it the cellulose
104 VIRCHOW, ON CELLULOSE, FOUND IN THE
granules are also found, though, as it would seem, more
abundantly in the upper than in the lower portion. In other
situations | have sought for these bodies in vain, and in par-
ticular | have been unable to find them in the external cortical
layer of the cerebrum, or anywhere in the interior of the cere-
bral substance.
3. Since, from the experiment of Cl. Bernard, who pro-
duced saccharine urine by wounding the floor of the fourth
ventricle in the Rabbit, there appeared to be reason to
conclude that the existence of cellulose was connected with
that phenomenon, I sought for it also in Rabbits, but in vain:
I found in that situation both in the fourth, and the third, and
in the lateral ventricles, a very beautiful tessellated epithelium
with very long vibratile cilia, but no cellulose.
4. The cellulose granules, therefore, appear to be every-
where connected with the existence of the ependyma-substance
of a certain thickness, and might perhaps be regarded asa
constituent of it. They occur of excessively minute size,
so that the nuclei of the ependyma scarcely correspond with
them. Can they be formed out of the latter? The larger
they are the more distinctly laminated do they appear. But
there is never any indication in them of a nitrogenous admix-
ture, recognizable by a yellow colour. The centre only is
usually of a darker blue, and consequently perhaps more dense
than the cortical lamine.
5. As to an introduction of these bodies from without, such
a supposition is the less probable because a similar substance
is nowhere else known. We are acquainted with a series of
varieties of vegetable cellulose, but the substance now in ques-
tion appears to be distinguished above all by its slight power
of resistance to reagents, seeing that concentrated acids and
alkalies attack it more powerfully than is usually the case
with the cellulose of plants,
6. In the child I have as yet sought for it in vain, so that
like the “ brain-sand,” it appears to arise in a later stage of
development, and probably may have a certain pathological
import.
Since writing the above, Professor Virchow has repeated
and confirmed his observations, and ascertained in addition
that similar bodies also occur in the higher nerves of sense.
He found them most abundantly in the soft grey interstitial
substance of the olfactory nerve, less frequently in the acoustic,
although the observations of Meissner (Zeitsch. f. rat. Med.,
N. F., Bd. IIL, pp. 858, 363), would indicate a proportion-
ately great disposition to their formation in that situation.
Rokitansky appears to have seen them in the optic nerve, and
BRAIN AND SPINAL CORD OF MAN. 105
from an oral communication the author has learned that
K6lliker has found them in the retina.
Having already stated that the ependyma is continued with-
out special limitation among the nervous elements, the author
goes on to observe that it is now apparent that there is a con-
tinuous extension of the same substance in the interior of the
higher nerves of sense. From a series of pathological
observations, he concludes that a soft matrix referrible mainly
to connective-tissue substance, everywhere pervades and con-
nects the nervous elements in the centres, and that the
ependyma is only a free superficial expansion of it over the
nervous elements. ‘The opinion, that the epithelium of the
cerebral ventricles rests immediately upon the nervous
elements, appears to have arisen from a confusion of this
interstitial substance with the true nerve-substance.
The isolation of the corpora amylacea in larger quantity, in
order that they should be subjected to chemical analysis, the
author has not yet succeeded in effecting. Nevertheless it
seems impossible to entertain any doubt as to their cellulose
nature. No other substance is known which affords the
same reaction; and although the author has examined the
most various animal tissues, and has accurately investigated,
particularly, the concentric corpuscles occurring elsewhere, as
in the thymus in tumours, &c., nothing of the same kind has
presented itself.—( Sept. 25, 1853).
An abstract of the above observations also appears in the
‘Comptes Rendus,’ for the 26th Sept., 1853, p. 492, but con-
taining nothing additional.
Being desirous of verifying the above observations, I
have examined the brains of one or two individuals ; and, as
my results differ in some respects from those of Professor
Virchow, I will here briefly state them, leaving a more
detailed account of the matter to a future opportunity,
my observations at present having been too scanty to justify
the expression of any settled opinion. The first case I exa-
mined was that of a young man who died of the consecutive
fever of cholera, after an illness of five or six days, during the
whole of which period, the renal secretion was completely
suppressed. What I noticed in this case, was :—
1. The enormous abundance of the corpora amylacea in cer-
tain situations, as the ependyma ventriculorum, particularly on
the septum lucidum, and more especially also on the choroid
plexuses, upon gently scraping the surface of which a fluid
was obtained containing these bodies in the most surprising
quantity.
106 VIRCHOW, ON CELLULOSE, FOUND IN THE
2. That they existed in immense abundance in the olfac-
tory bulbs and in the superficial parts of the brain, both
cortical and medullary, contiguous to the tract of the olfactory
nerves. But scarcely any part of the cerebrum and cerebellum
could be examined, at all events towards the surface, without
meeting with some or more ; and they occurred abundantly in
the very middle of the cerebellum. Their distribution, how-
ever, was very irregular, inasmuch as they abounded in some
spots and were nearly, if not altogether wanting, in others. I
could find none in the corpora striata, where they seemed to
be replaced by “ brain-sand,” of which more will be said
afterwards.
3. The cerebral substance, in immediate contiguity with
the corpora amylacea, appeared quite natural.
4. The corpuscles were starch and not cellulose, and pos-
sessed all the structural, chemical, and optical properties of
starch, as it occurs in plants, as the following few details will
show :—
They were of all sizes, from less than a blood-disc up to
1-500th inch or more—generally more or less ovate, but many
irregular in outline, and apparently flattened, as all the larger
kinds of starch I believe are. Many of the larger ones showed
the appearance which, in starch, has been erroneously described
as indicative of a laminated structure; whilst in others this
appearance under any mode of illumination certainly did not
exist. ‘The point that would correspond with the so-called
nucleus of a starch-grain was, unlike that of most kinds
of starch, central, and consequently the laminated marking was
concentric to the grain, which is rarely the case in the starch
of plants. This apparent lamination depends, as I believe,
upon the same circumstances as in other starch (videTrans. Micr.
Soc., Quart. Journ., vol. i., p. 58), that is to say, upon the corru-
sation of a thin sacculus. That this was the case I satisfied
myself by the use of sulphuric acid and of Schultz’ solution
(chloride of zinc and iodine), in the mode described in my
paper above quoted. By these means, but more readily and
conveniently by far by the latter, the corpora amylacea could
be seen to unfold into empty, flaccid, thin-walled, blue
sacculi, six to eight times larger than the original grain.
Their structure thus appearing to be identical with that of
starch, the identity of their chemical composition was ren-
dered evident with equal facility. Simple watery solution of
iodine coloured them deep blue, which ultimately became per-
fectly black and opaque. They were soluble after swelling
and expanding in strong sulphuric acid, and by heat; and,
moreover, they acted upon polarized light in the same way as
BRAIN AND SPINAL CORD OF MAN. 107
starch does. Some of the smaller grains exhibited a dis-
tinct and sharply-defined black cross, of which the lines
crossed at angles of 45° in the middle of the grain, but in the
majority, there was only a single dark line in the long
diameter of the grain, and which seemed always to correspond
with an irregular fissure or hilus, as it might be termed, in
the same direction, which was presented in a great many of
the grains, and seemed to be the indication of a partial inrol-
ling of them, as in the starch of the horse-chestnut. This
longitudinal fissure was not unfrequently crossed by a shorter
one at right angles. When the covering-glass was closely
pressed, the grains were easily crushed, breaking-up in ra-
diating cracks around the margin ; and sometimes, when thus
compressed, a concentric annulation would become evident,
which was before inapparent.
In the corpora striata, as I have mentioned above, I could
find few or no starch-grains, but here an appearance presented
itself which seems to be connected with their formation.
Many particles of sabulous matter or crystalline corpuscles of
the ordinary “ brain-sand,” were met with, all of which, instead
of lying like the starch-grains, in the midst of unaltered nerve-
substance, were lodged in irregular masses of what appeared a
fibrinous or immature connective tissue-substance; and, in
this instance, upon the addition of iodine, each mass of crystals
was found to be immediately surrounded by an irregular thick-
ness of a transparent matter, which was turned not blue, but a
light purplish pink by that reagent —a substance, in fact,
closely resembling in that respect the very early condition of
the cellulose wall; for instance, in Hydrodictyon,—an imma-
ture form, as it may be termed, of cellulose.
In a second case, that of an old man—dead of chronic dysen-
tery, and who died comatose —I found the ventricles distended
with about three ounces of clear fluid. The surface of the
ependyma throughout all the continuous cavities was studded
like shagreen with minute transparent granulations, which on
microscopic examination, appeared finely granular and homo-
geneous, or sometimes faintly fibrillated. In this case there
were, I think, no corpora amylacea in the ependyma (at least I
found none), nor in the central substance of the brain: a few
were met with in the peripheral portions, especially on the
summits of the hemispheres, and still more in the much-deve-
loped Pacchionian granulations, and there commingled with
other concentrically-laminated bodies, which formed botryoidal
masses imbedded in a stroma of immature connective tissue :
thee bodies, which might, to distinguish them, be termed the
‘ chaleedonic corpuscles,’ were rendered yellow by iodine. In
108 ON THE IRRITABILITY OF CILIATED CELLS.
this case also, I did not notice the quasi cellulose-deposit
around the particles of ‘ brain-sand,’ but in several instances
I saw minute amylaceous particles (coloured blue by iodine),
contained in cells which they only partially occupied.—GeEo.
Busx.
Notr.—In the ‘ Comptes Rendus,’ No. 23, (Dec. 5, 1853,) are some further
observations on the “‘ Animal Substance analogous to Vegetable Cellulose,”
by R. Virchow, in which he announces the discovery of corpuscles present-
ing the same reaction’ as the corpora amylacea of the brain, in the Mal-
pighian corpuscles of diseased human spleens—in the condition termed
“waxy spleen ” (Wachsmilz). :
On the Irritability of Ciutarep Crtis. By Rup. Vircuow.
(Virch. Archiv.) Vol. VI. Part I., p. 183. 1853.
Amone the many extraordinary circumstances with which the
phenomenon of ciliary motion is surrounded, it has not been
the least, that we have scarcely been acquainted with a proper
excitant of it. Whilst we were able to call the contractile
substances into activity by mechanical, physical, and chemical
agencies, the founders of the doctrine of ciliary motion,
Purkinje and Valentin, could, as regards the cilia, find nothing
but means to impede or destroy it. And the influence of
mechanical agitation, the only means by which they had seen
the failing vibration again become more vigorous, was doubted
by Sharpey. Can it be said, therefore, that the ciliary sub-
stance is wholly and entirely ‘different from the other contrac-
tile substances ?
A short time since, in examining a human trachea, I chanced
to hit upon the discovery of a chemical excitant for the cilia.
Upon the addition of a solution of potass to an object in which
the ciliary movements, which were at first very lively, had begun
to slacken, I noticed a renewal of the motion in every part, and
that it lasted until the parts were destroyed by their solution
in the caustic menstruum. I have since repeated this experi-
ment under various conditions, and always with the same re-
sult. In a trachea from a human body, in which the ciliary
movements had quite ceased in places, and was universally very
faint, and in which the ciliated epithelium itself was readily
destroyed upon the mere addition of water, I was still able
to recal the phenomenon in great intensity, by the appli-
cation of the potass-solution, although but for a short time.
In better preserved and more recent mucous membrane, on
the other hand, the revival of the motion could be maintained
for a pretty considerable duration.
I have usually allowed a microscopic preparation, in which
ON THE IRRITABILITY OF CILIATED CELLS. 109
I had ascertained the existence of ciliary motion, to remain in
contact with water until the motion ceased. Not unfrequently
I was obliged to wait until large clear drops appeared on the
surface of the cells between the cilia, which indicated the
commencement of the splitting up of the contents. Under the
prolonged action of the potass-solution, isolated cilia would
first begin, here and there, to exhibit irregular, jerking move-
ments. By degrees, more and more would begin to move, but
in such a way that their movements were in opposite direc-
tions, and showed no correspondence either in direction or
amount, But gradually the phenomenon acquired more and
more regularity, force, and uniformity, until at last the rapid,
rhythmical, sweeping movement of whole series of cells would
be seen to be restored.
That we have, in this case, to do with a chemical influence,
is clear; but that the entire phenomena of the motion cannot
be the result merely of the corrosive action of the alkali, is
evident from the perfect correspondence in the course of the
phenomena with what is seen when the movements are spon-
taneous. It is only when the action of the potass is too
powerful and rapid that the excitation is seen to be limited to
a short, active agitation of the cilia, which is immediately fol-
lowed by the solution of the substance ; and, in this case, it has
very much the appearance as if it were the sudden swelling up
of the substance in conjunction with the consequent undula-
tion of the fluid which produced the motion. But even in
such instances as this, it may be satisfactorily shown, by
comparison with other similar minute corpuscles, that a
moment of activity exists, in which the contractile substance
produces a movement independent of the swelling up, and
of the currents.
Soda acts in the same way as potass; whilst the effect
of ammonia, which at once causes chemical decomposition,
is quite different. Nor havel been able to find any other sub-
stance having the same effect, although I would by no means
preclude farther researches, my own inquiries having been too
restricted to decide the matter. When the long list of
chemical substances with which Purkinje and Valentin (De phe-
nomeno gen. et fundam. motis vibratorii continu, Vratisl. 1835,
pp. 74—76) have unsuccessfully experimented, is surveyed,
no great hopes certainly can be entertained; and I consider
myself particularly fortunate in having chanced at once to hit
upon two substances overlooked by those careful observers.
Nor indeed can they be justly blamed for this oversight, when
it is considered that they had tried fifty different reagents, and
each in six different degrees of concentration.
110 ON GERMINATION OF THE SPORES OF UREDINEZ.
No further proof, perhaps, is requisite, to show, that the sub-
stance of the vibratile cilia, from their irritability, as proved in
the above-described experiments, approximates the contractile
substance of the muscles (syntonin, of Lehmann).
On the Germination of the Spores of the Urepinrx. By M.
L. B. Turasne. Extracted from the Comptes Rendus.
Tome xxxv. June 1853.
Tue author had previously shown that the spores of the
Uredineew, like the pollen-grains of phanerogamous plants,
had a variable number of pores, from which afterwards tubular
filaments arose, apparently analogous to those which are the
first result of the germination of the spore of a fungus.
In addition, he has proved that the so-called Mcidiolum
exanthematum (Unger), may, very probably, be correctly re-
garded as equivalent to the spermogonia of the other fungi, so
that in all probability it is not a sexual. According to new
researches the germinal filaments of the spores do not all
retain the simple, continuous condition, which was formerly
assigned to them, and probably do not represent the commence-
ment of the true mycelium.
When sown, the spores of cidium Euphorbia sylvestris,
D. C., did not retain their continuity, but were subdivided into
four or six unequal-sized cells, by means of transverse septa ;
there then appeared upon each of these cells, and particularly
of the upper ones, a lateral short process (spicula), which soon
supported an obovate and rather oblique tubular process.
These tubes were the last vegetative effort of the spores; they
became free (?), and produced only very slender filaments.
Upon the separation of these bodies, the jointed tube from
which they arose is emptied, and, like the spores, is destroyed ;
so that this sacculus or filament represents a sort of promy-
celium, a vegetation which intervenes between the primary
spore or fruit, and those lesser follicles which are either
secondary spores, or rather, perhaps, the only true and actual
producers of the mycelium.
The same thing takes place in Puccinia, the spores of which
are capable of germination while yet upon the parent plant.
The spores of Puccinia graminis throw out tubes by which
they lengthened two or three times, divide into cells, and
again produce reniform spores, which soon germinate. It is
exactly the same in Phragmidium incrassatum. Link.
ON GERMINATION OF THE SPORES OF UREDINE®. 111
The Podisomata, also belonging to the Uredinew, throw out
from their two-sided fruits (sporidia) as many as eight tubular
processes, crossing each other in pairs and superimposed one
upon the other, which invest the fungus with a sort of pile;
each of these produces several obovate spores, which may be
collected in vast quantity.
In several Uredinee (U. Rose suaveolens, Tussilaginis
crassum), the tubular processes are capable of branching, and
bear a still closer resemblance to a normal, fungoid mycelium.
The spermogonia of the Uredinez are highly aromatic. It
is to them that is due the odour of Uredo suaveolens, &c.
M. Tulasne has not yet accurately investigated the germi-
nation of the spores of the Ustilaginew. The elongated cell,
which proceeds from the spores of Ustilago antherarum, Tal.,
is probably analogous to the secondary spores of Acidium and
Puccinia.
In Ustilago receptaculorum, Fr. organs, without doubt analo-
gous to these secondary spores, are produced from a slightly-
developed promycelium, consisting only of a few cells, but
resembling that of Meidium Euphorbia sylvestris, D.C.
On the Structure and Vital Properties of the ConrrRAcTILE
SusstancE of the Lowest Anmmats. By Professor Arex.
Ecker. Abstracted from Siebold and Kolliker’s Zeitsch.,
vol. 1., p. 218, pl. 18.
TuesE observations relate principally to the nature of the
substance of which the body of the Hydra viridis is composed,
but the conclusions are applied also to many other of the
lower animal forms. It is stated that the entire body of the
Polype consists of a homogeneous, sometimes clear, sometimes
granular, soft, extensible, elastic, and contractile substance,
which is reticulated with clear spaces, containing a more or
less clear fluid. Ecker denies that cellular structure is found
in any part of the animal, of which structure Corda and Baum-
girtner would make it entirely to consist. The three layers
which are presented in the body and arms of the Hydra, are in
immediate connexion, and are distinguished: 1. The external—
by the presence in it of the thread-cells and the greater rare-
faction of the tissue. 2. The middle—by the green granules
and a less broken-up tissue: and 3. The innermost layer
by the brown excretion-granules, and during digestion by
112 ECKER, ON STRUCTURE OF THE LOWEST ANIMALS.
various absorbed matters, oil-drops, kc. From this similarity
in the structure of the three layers, it is probable they are all
equally contractile; though it is perhaps the middle layer in
which this property resides in greatest activity.
This contractile substance above-described, from its want
of definite form, cannot, according to Ecker, be termed mus-
cular. It is distributed throughout the whole body, and not
formed into filaments or fasciculi; nor any more is the sensi-
tive substance yet ‘collected into nerves, but must be assumed
to be dispersed through the whole body. ‘The one is always
most intimately connected with the other, as the investiga-
tion of all the lower animal forms teaches us. It is not until
nerves are developed, that even scattered muscles are assigned
for any given purpose in the economy. Muscles are not
possible without a connecting nervous system.
The author then proceeds to show the exact similarity
between the contractile substance of the Hydra and that of
other lower animal forms—such as the Infusoria and Rhizo-
poda. The properties of this substance in its simplest form
are seen in the Ameeba, the body of which, as is known,
consists of a perfectly transparent, albumen-like, homogeneous
substance, in which nothing but a few granules are imbedded,
and which presents no trace of further organization. ‘This
substance is in the highest degree extensible and contractile ;
and from the main mass, are given out, now in one part and
now in another, perfectly transparent rounded processes,
which glide over the glass like oil, and are then again merged
in the central mass. There is no external membrane. In
the body of the Amoeba there occur, besides the granules,
clear spaces with fluid contents, which are sometimes un-
changeable in form, and sometimes exhibit rhythmical con-
tractions. Exactly the same particulars are exhibited in the
other Infusoria.
Thus it is evident that the body of the Infusoria is always
formed of a sometimes perfectly homogeneous and trans-
parent, sometimes minutely granular, soft, elastic, and con-
tractile substance, which is more or less extensively pene-
trated by spaces containing fluid. This substance was
termed ‘ sarcode” by Dujardin. Ecker proposes to call it
*‘ amorphous contractile substance.” The clear spaces are
termed by Dujardin “ vacuoles.”
The contractile substance is, according to Dujardin, in-
soluble in water, though gradually destroyed by it (in dead
Infusoria); soluble in alkali, though not so readily as albu-
men; coagulable by alcohol and nitric acid.
perl AS ste! mo
ECKER, ON STRUCTURE OF THE LOWEST ANIMALS. 113
Having satisfied himself of the identity of the contractile
substance of the Infusoria with that of the Hydra, the author
goes on to inquire whether the same substance occurs in other
of the lower animal forms? He believes that Quatrefages
is in error when he describes muscles in Synhydra and Eleu-
theria, explaining the appearances noticed by that author, in
accordance with his own views. Reaching the Anthozoa,
however, and the Bryozoa (Polyzoa), we find abundantly
undoubted muscular fibres. In the Rotifera and Tardigrada
the contractile substance is perfectly homogeneous, soft,
without the least trace of further organization, and exactly
like the “ sarcode,” with which it furthermore corresponds in
the circumstance that in the dying animals it forms “ vacuoles.”
This substance forms sometimes (as in the Rotifera) at the
anterior extremity, wart-like, ciliated masses, sometimes in
the interior (especially evident in the Tardigrada) muscle-
like strings, of definite and permanent form and arrangement,
which have been actually described by Ehrenberg and
Doyere as muscles. But in the definition of a tissue it is
necessary to consider, not the external form, but its histologi-
cal relations. A perfectly homogeneous, soft, structureless
substance cannot be called “ muscle,” without a complete
change in the idea of the latter, and connecting the term merely
with contractility. This substance (in the Tardigrada) ap-
pears to form a well-marked transition from the amorphous
contractile substance, such as we find in the Hydra, to the
true muscular substance.
As in this instance the transition from the ‘‘ amorphous
to “ formed” contractile substance is shown in different
animals in an ascending scale, it remains to inquire whether a
similar transition also takes place in one and the same animal.
That this is the case would appear to be proved by Dujardin’s
(‘Observ. au Microscope,’ p. 78, Pl. V., fig. 3, 10, 11) observ-
ation of the very early appearance of amorphous contractile
substance or sarcode in the ovum of higher animals. He saw
in the yolk of the egg of the Zimaz, which has no vitelline
membrane, that the diaphanous substance, surrounding and
holding together the vitelline granules, exhibited movements
exactly like those of Ameceba.
In the larve of Insects again, even after they have escaped
from the egg (as, for instance, in Chironomus), the muscles
consist of a perfectly homogeneous, non-fibrillated, very
contractile substance, precisely resembling the so-called
muscles of the Tardigrada, whilst at a later period these
same muscles exhibit distinct transverse striation. It would
VOL. II. I
39
114 ECKER, ON STRUCTURE OF THE LOWEST ANIMALS.
appear, therefore, from this and the former observation, that
the amorphous contractile substance, both in the animal
kingdom and in separate individuals, gradually passes into the
** formed,” that is, into muscle.
Accurate chemical examination of the two forms of con-
tractile substance is highly desirable ; it may, in passing, be
observed, that both are hardened by carbonated alkalis. In
the next place, a comparative history of the development of
the muscular and of the amorphous contractile substance is
a necessary requisite; and, lastly, an experimental inquiry
into their vital properties, particularly into their behaviour
under galvanic excitement, which would show whether very
different substances possess the contractile. property, or
whether this property, with a varying histological condition,
is not connected with a determinate chemical constitution.
The following are the forms in which the contractile sub-
stance is met with :—
1. A transparent, homogeneous, structureless substance,
reticulated with clear spaces, contractile in all directions, and
continuous throughout the whole body, or even constituting
the greater mass of it; no nervous system. ‘ Amorphous
Contractile Substance.” (Infusoria; Hydra; Hydroida.)
2. A transparent, homogeneous, structureless substance,
non-fibrillated, but divided into isolated, muscle-like portions.
An appearance of nerves. (Systolida; young Insect larve.)
3. A substance composed of fibres, and contractile in the
direction of these fibres. ‘* Formed contractile substance, or
muscular substance.”
4. Contractile cells, leaving out of the question the Gre-
garina and the ciliated cells, the appendages of which are
contractile, appear to occur only in the embryonic condition.
(Planaria; Heart-cells of the embryo in Alytes and Sepia;
Caudal vesicle of the Limax embryo.)
With respect to the last observation, if the author, by con-
tractile cell, means a cell with a wall distinct from, and of a
different material to, its contents, his assertion may be
correct, except in as far as it applies to certain unicellular
animals—and which will constitute a large exception. But if
under the same name the so-termed “ protean cells,” of which,
in fact, the substance of most, if not all, sponges is mainly .
composed, he is manifestly greatly in error in limiting their
occurrence so closely as he does. Similar cells, as has been
pointed out by Mr. Huxley, abound in the tissues of the
Meduse (in which are also found distinct striated muscular
fibres) ; in Hydra itself ; and in many other instances, not only
ECKER, ON STRUCTURE OF THE LOWEST ANIMALS. 115
in the lower, but even in the higher animals, for the protean
changes of form have been observed even in the white cor-
puscles of the human blood. The zoospores, again, of many
of the lower Alga may be said to be composed of the same
protean substance, and many, if not all, of these may be
regarded as unicellular—applying that term in a general
sense, and not restricting it merely to those organisms which
present a distinct wall. These monadiform spores, or gonidia,
are, in fact, well named by Cohn primordial cells, by which
he means cells composed wholly of vegetable protoplasm,
which in its essential nature seems to differ little, if at all,
from the “ sarcode ” or “* amorphous contractile substance ” of
the animal kingdom.—G. B.]
( 116 )
REVIEWS.
ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE MuscuLar Fieri AND THE MUscULARITY
oF Ciuia. By Dr. Barry.
Dr. M. Barry’s “dominant idea” is a twin spiral; and, in-
spired by this perverse and pertinacious spirit, he has again
presented us with a repetition of his views with respect to the
structure of the muscular fibre and vibratile cilium, in an
attempt to assign the ‘ Main cause of discordant views on
the Structure of the Muscular Fibril,” together with some
“Further Remarks on the Muscularity of Cilia,” in the
November number of the ‘ Philosophical Magazine.’
The latter paper, it is needless to say, states that every
cilium is a twin spiral ; and, to confirm this discovery, there is
a wonderful figure of a cilium from the gill of the common
Oyster. This monstrous object appears to be partly of the
nature of plant and partly animal, having roots whereby it
grows, and the faculty of ‘ spinning-up after threads” ‘ by
its twisting and untwisting.” It is not, however, very clear
how this primitive “ jenny” performs this task, nor are the
threads, as their name would imply, to be regarded as the tail
of the creature, but rather, if it had one, are they to be consi-
dered as its lead.
The paper then proceeds to give a notice of a model in
lead-wire of the muscular fibril, which Dr. Barry has pre-
sented to various colleges in this country, and to the Univer-
sity of Prague, we presume, for the edification of his sole
disciple, Professor Purkinje. This model, which is intended
to afford a complete elucidation of the mode of action of
striped muscular fibre, will doubtless be found extremely
useful to the venerable Professor, and to any others who may
hereafter be misled into a belief in the inventor’s doctrine.
But Dr. Barry has omitted to give a model to explain the
mode of action in the contraction of unstriped and smooth mus-
cular fibres, and in that of amorphous contractile substance.
Professor Purkinje has also been gratified with the presenta-
tion of the model of a young cilium, and at the same time
with this information :—“ From analogy, it appears extremely
probable that the heart arises, in like manner, out of the
nucleus of a cell, being originally such a double spiral as
in the cilium aforesaid. If so, the spiral form of the heart
may be explained by the continued division of what was ori-
ginally a double spiral fibre.”
DR. BARRY, ON MUSCULAR FIBRIL. 117
It is satisfactory to find that Professor Purkinje has not
kept this information to himself, but had the consideration to
put it into German for the benefit of his compatriots. How
they will have received it, it is not very difficult to surmise.
The former paper of those here cited assigns as the ‘‘ main
cause of the discordant views” respecting the structure of
things in general, and especially of muscle, entertained by Dr.
Barry on the one side and the rest of the world on the other,
the fact, “‘ that observers, in their endeavours to reach the ulti-
mate structure of the muscular fibril, have actually gone too
far. Not content with the examination of the mature fibril,
they have arrived at what almost defies the microscope—its
embryo [whose ?], mistaking and delineating for the fibril a
row of quadrilateral particles, the mere elements thereof; mis-
taking for the chain, as it were, a row of half-formed links
destined to compose it.” ‘I cannot,” he very properly goes
on to say, ‘‘ wonder that in a row of quadrilateral particles no
one could discern my twin spirals,—” nor, we conceive, can
any one. He maintains, therefore, in the first place, “‘ that it
was impossible for them to agree with one another; and
secondly, as our attention was directed to two different things,
that it was still less possible for any of them to agree with
me. Hence, a main cause of discordant views on the “ struc-
ture of the muscular fibril.”
This extraordinary declaration requires no comment ; but we
would remark tlat not only in 1842 did Dr. Barry particu-
larly recommend muscle from the tail of the very minute Tad-
pole (4 to 5” long.), and has all along maintained the existence
and asserted the demonstrability of what he calls a coiled fibre
in the blood discs (concerning which, see Microscopical
Journal, Vol. Il., p. 257, 1842), beyond which one need
scarcely go in search of the phantom ; but actually on the page
immediately preceding that from which the above assertion is
taken, he expressly and far more truly says, ‘in order
thoroughly to understand the structure of this tissue, it is
essential to see it in its most incipient state, and patiently to
follow it through every stage, for,’ as he properly observes,
at that early period its elements are very large.”
We have no purpose of discussing a question, which ought
long ago to have been consigned to the limbo of oblivion, and
notice this paper merely to admonish our readers that they
must not expect to find in it any additional evidence or reason-
ing in support of Dr. Barry’s singular views. The reasoning
being of a character of which the congruity between the two
quotations above given may serve as a sample; and the facts
consisting merely of some diagrammatic figures of muscular
118 DR. BARRY, ON MUSCULAR FIBRIL.
fibre taken from preparations which had been preserved in
weak spirit or glycerine for three or four years. The author
also cites a very curious conclusion at which Dr. Allen Thomp-
son had arrived, from the inspection of some of the well-known
thread-cells of an Actinia, viz., ‘‘ that if these double spiral,
prehensile filaments of the Actinia are contractile, they may
fairly be used as an argument in favour of Dr. Barry’s views.”
That is, Dr. A. Thompson is of opinion that the structure (in
this case altogether mistaken) of one tissue can be employed
in demonstration of that of another with which it*has no rela-
tion whatever.
But, that these unfortunate thread-cells should be brought
into the argument at all is not a little surprising to us, who
remember with what triumph they were received in Edin-
burgh, as an undoubted proof of the correctness of Dr. Barry’s
views, on the supposition, mirabile dictu ! in that city of natu-
ralists, that they weré portions of muscular fibre! We were
promised, at the same time, some specimens to the same effect
from the Lobster or some other Crustacean, which, however,
does not as yet appear to have been caught.
BEITRAGE z0R Myxko.oaie (Contrisutions To Myconocy). By Dr.
GrorGE Fresenius. First and Second Parts, with 9 Plates. Frank-
fort, A. M., 1852. (With Plates.)
Dr. Fresenius commences his work with an expression of
regret that Mycology has up to the present time been so little
studied; and he attributes the neglect partly to the unsight-
liness (unscheinbarkeit) of the objects of the study. We
think, however, that the charge of unsightliness is one which
cannot be maintained against fungi in general. The Agaricus
muscartus, with its brilliant crimson pileus and snowy gills,
the Agaricus rutilans with a cap of more sober crimson and
gills of the richest yellow, the Agaricus psittacinus, or Par-
roquet Agaric, varied as the plumage of the bird after which
it is named ;—these, and many others which might be men-
tioned, fairly rival flowers in beauty. In fact, a well-arranged
group of Agarics, Clavarias, &c., gathered from the first wood
into which the botanist may wander, would form as pretty a
decoration for a lady’s boudoir as any bouquet from the green-
house. Those persons therefore who, without troubling them-
selves with scientific details and distinctions, look only to the
external charms of the productions of nature, would find ample
employment in searching out the beauties of the Fungi. We
find them assuming the forms of clubs, mitres, bowls, cups,
FRESENIUS, ON MYCOLOGY. 119
stars, and even of birds’-nests, and lanterns ;* and their colour
is as varied as their shapes, and growing as they principally
do, upon the mouldering remains of other organisms, they seem
intended, as Mr. Lee has happily expressed it, to deck even
decay and ruin with beauty.
To the microscopist the study of the Fungi affords oppor-
tunities for the use of the highest powers of his instrument,
and for the exercise of the utmost of his manipulative skill.
The organs of fructification, even in the largest plants, are so
minute as to render careful preparation and the aid of a good
microscope indispensable for their examination, and the struc-
ture of many of the more minute genera is so imperfectly un-
derstood, and the opinions of mycologists with regard to them
so much at variance, that a vast field is open for elucidation
and discovery.
With this introductory recommendation of the Fungi, we
will proceed to notice the contents of the work before us,
which will be found full of interest. It contains particular
descriptions, accompanied in most instances by plates of about
eighty different kinds of Fungi.
The first genera which the author discusses are Mucor and
Ascophora. He differs from Link, Wallroth, and others, in
regarding Ascophora and Mucor distinct, stating that his late
observations have convinced him of the propriety of their
being united in one genus, and he thinks there is no real
ground for considering the genus Rhizopus as distinct either
from Ascophora or Mucor. He alleges that the construction
of the sporangium is precisely the same in all three genera,
and that the mode of its disruption does not, as has been sup-
posed, distinguish Ascophora from others of the Mucoroidee.
He has not, however, made any remarks as to the difference
in the arrangement of the spores. In Rhizopus they are con-
catenated, which may afford sufficient ground for generic dis-
tinction.
Five different species of Botrytis are described and figured
in this volume, and of these five, three afforda striking instance
of the diversities of opinion amongst mycologists, to which we
have referred. Dr. Bonorden, in his “ Handbuch der All-
gemeinen Mycologie,’? states that he considers the Botrytis
plebeja of Fresenius to be Botrytis elegans ; Botrytis interrupta,
Fres. to be Botrytis bicolor, and with regard to the third,
Botrytis furcata, he is unable to come to any decision.
The following remarks on the flocci of the Hyphomycetes
* The Diamphora bicolor, a minute Brazilian fungus, has the appearance
of two small lanterns attached to a forked branch.
120 FRESENIUS, ON MYCOLOGY.
may be usefully extracted. The appearances referred to will
be familiar to those who have paid any attention to the micro-
scopic examination of moulds :—
“‘ In diagnoses and descriptions we often meet with the expression flocei
cequales, in opposition to flocci strangulati, or with the expression articulé
alternt constricti, alterni compressit. This characteristic, however, is of
such frequent occurrence amongst those hyphomycetes which have passed
their earliest stage of growth, that it is hardly worth mentioning in any
particular case. The ftocci are almost universally compressed, and they
are twisted in a manner which gives them a jointed appearance ; they may
have septa or they may not. In the former case the compressed cells
stand in regular alternation, one over another, cutting each other at right
angles,* so that we see the surface of one cell and the edge of the adjoining
one. In order to observe this appearance, the object must be examined
dry.”
We may add here, that all moulds should be examined dry
in the first instance, as the spores are immediately dispersed by
contact with water. They should then be moistened in order
to enable the observer to ascertain the mode of attachment of
the spores.
The author ridicules, and as it appears to us with some
reason, the frequent use by mycologists of the expression,
“ spore insperse.” He says—
** What would be thought of a botanist who, in giving the generic
character of a phenogamous plant, were to say that its seeds, after being
shed, remain hanging, partly about the stem and partly about the leaves ?
and yet can it be said that the expression ‘ sporce dein floccis inspersce” im-
plies anything else ?”
The Asterosporium (Hoffmanni?), of whicha figure is given
in this work, is peculiar, from the form of its spores, which
have four conical rays proceeding from them ; the rays do not
lie in one plane, but diverge in different directions from the
middle point of the spore. The author says that the spores
have been compared to a man-trap. The man-trap, however,
must have been of foreign construction, as there is no resem-
blance to the English form of this (now illegal) instrument.
[It is somewhat singular that Chevallier, in his “ Flore des
environs de Paris,” took upon himself to deny the existence of
this plant, and to state that its supposed existence originated
in an optical delusion ; and yet Dr. Fresenius remarks that it
does not require the assistance of a modern achromatic micro-
scope to discern the peculiar formation of the spores.
We extract the following remarks upon the genus Dis-
C0SIA I— ;
* “Tn planes at right angles to one another ” would have been a more
nearly correct expression, although ‘not mathematically accurate, a com-
pressed cell not being strictly a plane.
FRESENIUS, ON MYCOLOGY. 121
‘* Much confusion has arisen from the circumstance that in the observa-
tions hitherto made, oil-drops have been mistaken for spores, and spores
for asct ; thus Libert, in speaking of the genus Diéscosia, talks of ascidia
fusiformia and sporidia globosa. Corda, who had not examined the plant,
adopted this diagnosis, and Bonorden has lately attributed to the genus
the possession of round spores and ase7, and moreover has inaccurately
united it with Dothidea. It is evident that the whole subject must be re-
examined, and that it is unsafe to rely upon the early observations.”
One of the most striking plants described by Dr. Fresenius
is the Peziza macrocalyx. 'Vhe family of the Pezize is a very
interesting one. It is so numerous, also, that specimens of one
kind or another are to be met with in every locality. The
Peziza virginea, a minute plant, the cup of which is of the
purest white, and fringed with hairs which are frequently
tipped with dew-drops, is a most beautiful object under a
2-inch glass. It is so common, also, that there is no difficulty
in procuring specimens. The Peziza calycina (pulchella ot
Greville), which we have frequently met with in the neigh-
bourhood of London, is also fringed with white hairs, but the
interior of its cup is of a bright yolk-of-egg yellow. The
Peziza xanthostigma, forms little golden dots upon fallen
branches in moist woods, and there are many others too
numerous to mention of equal beauty. The Peziza macro-
calyx here described is peculiar from its large size and from
its mode of growth. It is found in pine-woods, sometimes
solitary, sometimes in groups of as many as four or five
together. The cup is buried nearly to its middle in the
earth. The sporidia, it is said, spring out actively upon the
plant being shaken. This latter circumstance, however, is
not peculiar to Peziza macrocalyx, but is common to other
Pezize. We have seen the sporidia of Peziza macropus
rising like a white cloud from the surface of the hymenium,
looking as if some fairy were burning incense in the hollow
of its beautiful cup.
At the close of the volume we find some interesting observa-
tions upon the peculiar red spots which are occasionally seen
upon articles of food, and which Dr. Fresenius, in common
with most other observers, considers to be of vegetable origin.
These spots (called by the Germans Blut im Brode) have been
the subject of much difference of opinion amongst scientific
men. Ehrenberg attributes the appearance to an animalcule
which he calls Monas prodigiosa; Montagne considered the
spots to be Alga, of the genus Palmella; Dr. Sette, of Padua,
expressed his opinion that the substance was a fungus, and
called it by the somewhat unpronounceable name of Zooga-
lactusa imetropha.
A late writer in the ‘ Gardener’s Chronicle’ is of opinion
122 FRESENIUS, ON MYCOLOGY.
that the matter in dispute is a fungus allied to the yeast
fungus or Torula cerevisie, as it was formerly called, which
latter fungal is now supposed to be only a myceloid state of
the common mould Penicillium glaucum.
We have lately had an opportunity of examining a fragment
of bread affected in this manner, which has been kept for several
years. It has the appearance of having been soaked in plum-
juice ; and our observations of it under the microscope, so far
as we have yet been able to carry them, accord in the main
with those of the author. The latter procured some potatoes
which were affected with these red spots, and he gives an
account of his experiments and observations, from which the
following is an extract :-—
“T took four boiled potatoes and placed them in a drawer, having pre-
viously rubbed two of them slightly here and there with the red substance.
After about twenty-four hours, the two potatoes which had not been
rubbed, and which had not been in immediate contact with the other two,
were affected with fresh spots of the red substance, whilst the spots upon
the two which had been rubbed had increased in extent. ‘The spots
showed themselves in the form of irregular groups of blocd-red drops of
different size, which in some places were distinct, and in others had run
into one another. The individual bodies of which the spots consist are
mere molecules, their diameter varying from 1-2000th to 1-4000th of a
line. They are mostly round, occasionally oval, and sometimes slightly
constricted in the middle by way of preparation for increase by division
into two small round cells. By far the greater number of them, when
brought under the microscope in a drop of water, remain at rest; they
lie close together in large numbers; when they are more dispersed in
the fluid they have a motion which is not distinguishable from ordinary
molecular motion. When the drop of water moves they are carried me-:
chanically over the stage like other molecules, and when this motion
ceases, they remain at one spot in a sort of quivering state until a fresh
current carries them in another direction. * * * *
If the eye is kept carefully upon a part of the stage where the small bodies
are thinly dispersed, it will be observed that they passively follow the
current of the water, nor, when the current has become sluggish, or has
even altogether ceased, are individual bodies ever seen to detach them-
selves from the group and take a contrary direction, which real monads
would do with great activity.”
With this extract we must conclude our notice of this
interesting book. We strongly recommend such of our
readers as have good instruments and time at their command
to turn their attention to the subjects treated of init. We
can assure them from experience, that they will find the study
a most engrossing one, and the objects of it not unsightly ; and
their assistance may render good service to Mycology, by
helping to dispel some of the mists and clouds which still
envelope many parts of this most interesting science.
(°9923° 2)
BorantcaL LETTERS TO A Frienp. By Dr. F. Uncer. Translated by
Dr. B. Paun. London, Highley.
Noruine distinguishes our age more than the tendency that
exists on the part of those who cultivate Science to diffuse its
truths as widely and extensively as possible. The age of con-
servation in science is over, and the dream of those who would
confine it to our universities, colleges, or royal societies, is for
ever dispelled. Much as we are indebted for this condition
of things to the practical sagacity of Englishmen, and can
boast of a large popular scientific literature in our own lan-
guage, we have yet to offer a large meed of praise to the pro-
fessors of science in the German universities, for their attempts
to teach beyond the limits of their college walls, and to gain
an audience amongst the hitherto despised Philistines. To
Humboldt, Liebig, Schleiden, Buff, Moleschott, Schacht, we
are indebted for treatises tending to diffuse a knowledge of the
highest truths of science, and to these we may now add the
name of Unger. These Botanical Letters are an indication of
the progress of botanical science. Let any one compare the
manuals and introductions formerly put into the hands of
students with this volume, and they will see how great has
been the advancement in correct observation and generaliza-
tion within the last few years. Instead of the mere dry de-
tails of the forms of the organs of plants, we are introduced to
a knowledge of their intimate structure and the laws of their
developement ; instead of an absurd comparison of plants and
animals, and rude guesses at the functions of the former from
a study of those of the latter, we have the physiology of the
plant, established upon observations made upon its own struc-
ture alone. ‘To all who have attended to the study of the
physiology of plants it is known, that the use of the micro-
scope, and that alone, has produced this change and tended
to this advancement. ‘The structure of organised bodies and
their functions can no longer be studied without this instru-
ment ; and it is only as it is skilfully used that we can expect
to attain a true knowledge of the laws which govern the ex-
istence of organised beings.
In noticing Dr. Unger’s work, we can only refer to the
more especially microscopical department of his work ; and
here, as in all others, he has displayed the knowledge of one
who has faithfully kept up with the progress of science, and
has a claim to be heard as a teacher. We give two extracts
as examples of the style and matter of the work. Our first is
from the history of the developement of the plant.
** Let us now examine, somewhat more minutely, this production of
building-stones by the plant. As we have already seen, these building-
stones of the plant are, properly speaking, not solid homogeneous masses,
124 UNGER’S BOTANICAL LETTERS TO A FRIEND.
but variously-shaped membranous utricles, vesicles, etc., filled with soft
substances and liquids of all kinds. Each vesicle which is employed in the
building up of the plant is, without exception, formed in the interior of an
already-existing cell : when its formation is complete, it is al once pushed
out, and laid in the place which it is destined to occupy. Neither windlass
nor pulley is requisite ; the whole operation takes place so readily, and, as
it were, spontaneously, that we may well be astonished that such a thing
is possible. We will now examine how this is accomplished.
“« First, the old cell swells up considerably, increases in circumference,
erows ; but it must be remembered that it is not a mere growth that takes
place here. As in a pregnant animal, new cells are formed in its body ;
when these have advanced so far in developement
as to possess all the organs requisite for their
independent existence, they are set at liberty ;
and the mother-cell, which, during. the continuance
of these processes, not only devotes the whole of its
contents to the formation of the brood of daughter-
cells, but likewise suffers a diminution of its mem-
branous envelope in consequence of the progressive
enlargement, continues in a kind of dream existence,
and ‘is at last entirely consumed. Fig. 12 repre-
sents a remarkably large bag-shaped cell from the
seed-bud of the biennial (crepis biennis). It is
situated between parenchymatous cells which do not
any longer enlarge. This mother-cell contains five
secondary cells, of which the uppermost is further
developed than the others. The daughter-cells ori-
ginate, therefore, altogether at the cost of the
mother-cells: their existence involves the death of
the latter. Something very analogous is presented
in the propagation of certain insects ; the pregnant
animals gradually increase in size to such an extent
that they appear more like bladders. All the organs,
all the functions of the mother, are directed to the
production of her young, and after their birth there remains scarcely any-
thing more than a dry, rent membrane. May not, therefore, the forma-
tion of cells by the plant likewise be termed a generation ? And what else
is the entire plant formation, with its myriads of cells, than the result of a
continued generation of its elementary parts ?
“* After this insight into the progressive developement of the stones, how
different becomes the aspect of the masonry of the plant perpetually being
renewed, and, as it were, growing out of itself! Here all kind of analogy
with architectural operations ceases ; we are unacquainted with any work
of human hands or human invention which is even in the remotest degree
similar to the building up of the plant temple. It is an invisible hand
which inscribes upon its walls words as mysterious as those once written
in the palace of Belshazzar. Nevertheless, we will follow up the formation
of the cell still further.”
The author then proceeds to describe the further develope-
ment of the cell, and subsequently the tissues which it forms.
In the concluding chapter he again recurs to the functions of
the cell, and some of those recondite properties it possesses,
of the nature of which we have yet but an indistinct notion.
_ “When the uninjured cell is observed in full operation, as it appears in
its youth, no difference can yet be detected between its contents and
——OOOoee
UNGER’S BOTANICAL LETTERS TO A FRIEND. 125
boundary ; but in the content itself, there very soon appears a vital centre,
produced in the form of a tiny vesicle. This leaflet, named nucleus,
causes, very soon after its first appearance, a remarkable separation of the
half-liquid contents. A tough, liquid, granular substance, detaches itself
from the residue, which displays a more watery nature. This, called proto-
plasm, unites itself as well to the vital centre as to the periphery, and thereby
binds both together with many radiating, simple, and branching threads.
“Tt is a charming spectacle to observe in the so-far perfected cell, the
active flow of this vital sap from the centre to the periphery and back.
“The most manifold motions, even in the most
opposite directions, are seen in close proximity in Fig. 37.
the same thread-currents. All is activity and
motion in this protoplasm ; uevertheless, the
remaining part remains motionless, and is only
here and there drawn into the current of the
stream. ‘These streams are moved by no pulsat-
ing veins ; there is no pumping apparatus which
forces them from the centre of the cell and back
again. This marvellous substance, this self-
moving wheel, is a protein substance, consisting
of the same nitrogenous compound that is present
in every animal.
‘* In some instances (but, as far as our experience
yet extends, only in the lower
plants,) the developement of
this protoplasm advances be-
yond the exterior boundaries.
“It is not a mere motion of
the liquid mass which goes on,
but a developement of half-solid
thread-like processes, capable of
performing other motions than
those of circulation. When
such cells are set at liberty by
the opening of the mother-cells
in which they have been formed, they com-
mence motions entirely independent of the latter,
and when they are in water, swim about freely
in it.
“ Fig. 37 isa young plant of Vaucheria clavata,
Agdh, at the period of the ripening of the fruit ;
that is, when the first
germ-cell is pushed os D
out. B is the germ- 5 Si ae
cell after being de- Pom Se
tached from the i pi ao
3 re %
mother-cell, and float- ue Gl :
ing freely. The ex- 0 --N) \ ;
tremely delicateciliate ‘~~ | ie Sard
processes of the mem- ice
brane by whose vibra- ra al So
tions the motion is kine ey.
effected are shown at Leta
C, magnified a thou-
sandfold. They will be seen to be of equal size, and to cover the whole
surface of the egg-shaped cell. D is a group of young germinating plants
of the same kind, less highly magnified.
“The thread-like cilia upon their surface serve at this time the purpose
126 UNGER’S BOTANICAL LETTERS TO A FRIEND.
of rudders, in the same way as the cilia and hairs of infusoria. Neither
the form, the chemical nature, nor the power of contraction, without which
the ciliate or quivering motion would be inconceivable, distinguish these
vegetable cells from analogous animal forms, and, to connect them even
still more closely with the latter, dots of colour present themselves as
indications of organs sensitive to light.
“ But this burst of life in the plant-cell is of short duration, and ceases
in the ciliate swarming cells sooner than in others. After a short time
these feelers, with which they strive to penetrate further into the exterior
world than by the roots, are drawn in, the cell again becomes smooth, and
cellulose is soon depositéd upon its surface, which renders the incarceration
complete. The vigorous play of motions does indeed continue for a longer
or shorter period, even under the rigid envelope of the cell-membrane, and
it is at this time especially that the reproduction of the cell goes on by the
formation of new vital centres; but this last spark of life is soon extin-
guished, and the victorious forces of molecular attraction, aflinity, &c.
reduce the cell gradually within the domain of inorganic nature.
“¢ Nevertheless, it appears that the manifestation of this vigorous vital
action is reserved to only a few cells in the body of the plant, although not
for its entire duration, at least for some time. These are the reproduction
cells. While all permanent cells are capable of manifesting their higher
nature only in the motion of their juices, the reproduction cells break
all the bonds which govern the former, and, even although only for a few
moments, enter into the most unrestrained activity.
Fic. 38. “In some series of the vegetable king-
in a G dom, in which, as we have seen, the duality
of sex does not appear to be fully deve-
loped, such reproductive cells become
swarming cells in other series; the one
reproduction cell does not acquire such a
degree of freedom, but the second one
moves the more unrestrictedly, extended
lengthways, as spermatozoids, whose mo-
tions are far from being understood in respect
to their relation to fructification (fig. 39).
“A, fig. 38, represents a spermatozoid
of Asplenium septentrionale, detached from
the mother-cell in which it was formed,
and moving rapidly in water by means of
the ciliw. It is magnified x 1200-fold. B, spermatozoids of Hqwisetum
arvense, magnified x 500-fold. C, a spermatozoid just escaping from the
mother-cell.—( W. Hofmeister.y”’
From these extracts it will be seen how well Dr. Paul has
performed his task of translation. The work is illustrated with
numerous carefully executed woodcuts, and, like the series to
which it belongs, is cheap and very creditably got up; and
we know of no better general introduction to the biology of
plants than these Botanical Letters of Dr. Unger.
ANATOMISCH-HiIsTOLOGIScHE UNTERSUCHUNGEN UEBER FIscHE UND
Reprinien. Von Dr. Franz Leypia. (ANaTomican axpd Histono-
GICAL OBSERVATIONS UPON FisHES AND Reprites. By Dr. Franz
Leypic), BeRuin, 1858. }
We have more than once had occasion (‘ Quar. Jour. of
Micros. Science,’ Nos. [V., V.) to refer to the labours of Dr.
LEYDIG, ON FISHES AND REPTILES. 127
Leydig, who has done more than any one, of late years,
towards extending our knowledge of histology to the lower
Vertebrata and to the Invertebrata.
His essays are characterized not only by the accuracy and
elaborateness of their details, but by their breadth of view and
the extensive knowledge of Anatomy and Physiology which
they indicate. We are acquainted with no more important
contributions to the departments of Zoology with which they
are concerned than his Memoirs on JLacinularia; on the
larva of Corethra ; on Argulus ; on the anatomy and develop-
ment of Paludina ; and on the so-called muciparous organs of
Fishes, which have appeared in Miiller’s Archiv, and in
Siebold and KoOlliker’s Zeitschrift, in the course of the last
five or six years. Of equal value are his ‘ Contributions to
the Microscopical Anatomy and Development of the Sharks
and Rays,’* published as a small independent work, in 1852 ;
followed up in the present year, by that now under notice.
Dr. Leydig must be a hard, as well as an able worker ; for
his present effort is more considerable than any which have
preceded it, and assuredly does not fall below them in scien-
tific value or interest.
It is divided into two sections; the first of which treats of
the histology of the Sturgeon, the second, of that of reptiles
in general.
Dr. Leydig’s book requires and deserves careful study, and
we must be satisfied with drawing attention to a few of the
chief matters of novelty and interest which it contains.
Verifying Ecker’s discovery, that the pituitary body of
fishes is a vascular gland, he finds that in the Sturgeon, the
pineal gland is of a similar nature, resembling the thyroid,
however, rather than the other vascular glands.
As might have been expected, from the zoological position
of the Accipenserida, the ‘ muciferous’ tubes and ampulle of
the Sturgeon, are intermediate in structure between the corre-
sponding organs of cartilaginous and osseous fishes.
A new light is thrown upon the nature of the supra-renal
capsules by Leydig’s discovery, that in Sturgeons, and other car-
tilaginous fishes, Batrachia, and Reptilia, they belong to one
series of organs with the so-called ‘ axillary hearts ;’ with
certain peculiar appendages, discovered by Leydig, upon the
ganglion of the sympathetic ; and with the fatty-looking yellow
bodies on the blood-vessels and in the kidneys themselves.
In Plagiostomes, in Chimera, and in the Sturgeon, the net-
* “ Beitrage zur Mikroskopischen Anatomie und Entwickelungsge-
schichte der Rochen und Haie.’ Leipzig, 1852.
128 LEYDIG, ON FISHES AND REPTILES.
works of the hepatic cells lie within canalicular cavities in a
kind of connective tissue, by which they are supported.
Leydig considers this to be evidence that the liver essentially
resembles other glands; a conclusion to which, however, the
evidence he adduces would not lead us.
The author’s investigations into the structure of the spleen
of fishes and reptiles are of the highest importance: they
fully confirm Remak’s views, and tend to the conclusion that
the difference between a spleen, a Peyer’s patch, and a lym-
phatic gland, is but one of degree; while they greatly extend
our knowledge of the relations between the blood, vascular, and
lymphatic systems.
The position and anatomical characters of the Thymus and
Thyroid glands are determined for fishes and many reptiles.
Histologically they invariably present the same differences as
in man.
Leydig doubts the existence of cecal terminations in the
tubuli urinifer? of fishes. His inquiries into the development
of the genito-urinary system of Amphibia and reptiles are of
the utmost value, and tend to clear up many difficulties in the
morphology of these organs, not only in these but in the
higher Vertebrata.
Our space prevents us from further analyzing Dr. Leydig’s
work ; but we trus twe have said sufficient to justify the high
opinion of its merits which we have expressed.
Der Baum. StTupIEN uBER BAu unD LEBEN DER HOHEREN GEWACHSE.
Von Dr. H. Scnacut. Berlin, 1853.
We have already noticed Dr. Schacht’s previous works on the
microscope as applied to botanical subjects, and his more im-
portant one upon the Plant-cell—and have again the pleasing
task of directing our readers’ attention to another from his
indefatigable pen—which, like the former, contains a vast
amount of matter interesting especially to the microscopic
observer.
Like the previous works by the same writer, the present is
the result in great measure of independent research, and is
therefore the more interesting and useful, and contains the
results of valuable investigations which were made during a
prolonged residence in the forests of Thuringia.
It gives a considerable series of detailed, recent inquiries
respecting the germination and growth of Forest trees, the
anatomical conditions of the wood, the formation of cork and
bark, on the structure and growth of the leaves and roots, on
the formation of branches and of the buds, and lastly, on that
of the blossom and fruit of most of our common useful trees.
~~ a
( 129 )
NOTES AND CORRESPONDENCE.
, ye LE SSI R Se oe eh
On the best Form of Micrometer for the Microscope. — In
the ‘Journal’ for October last, page 51, is a paper signed
H.C. K., on the best form of Micrometer for the Microscope,
in which Mr. Quekett and myself are said to have disparaged
the use of the cobweb micrometer in advocating that of ruled
glass. As Mr. Quekett’s time is fully occupied, perhaps you
will allow me to make a few remarks. The author is correct
in saying that, ‘‘ as faras regards manipulation, one form of mi-
crometer is just as simple as the other,” but the statement
that 1-1000th of an inch is a common amount of error in the
ruled glass can only be explained by supposing that the
printer has omitted a cipher in the denominator of the frac-
tion ; for the mean of nine observations on such glasses could
at best only reduce the error to 1-9000th of an inch—a quan-
tity wholly inconsistent with the accuracy which he advo-
cates. ‘The error in a carefully-ruled glass rarely amounts to
1-10,000th of an inch, and therefore the plan of finding the
value of the cobweb micrometer by a mean of several observa-
tions will give a sufficiently near approach to absolute ac-
curacy ; but it does not seem to strike H. C. K. that the same
means are equally applicable to the glass micrometer when
placed in the eye-piece.
In stating that 1-800,000th of an inch can be read by
a cobweb micrometer and a 1-8th object glass, I assumed that
the eye-piece was of Ramsden’s form, that the screw had 100
threads in an inch, the divided head 100 divisions, and that
the body of the microscope was 10 inches long. Messrs.
Powell and Lealand I believe use a negative eye-piece and a
shorter body, and they may probably have adopted a coarser
screw, but the reading still appears to exceed the power of
observation four times, and justifies the assertion that the
readings (not the measurements) of such an instrument are
** unnecessarily fine.”
The finest eye-piece micrometer that I use is ruled to the
1-250, and with the 1-12th object-glass reads 30-1000ths
of an inch. Now, as one-third of a division is easily esti-
mated, the power of reading approaches very near to the limit
of observation ascertained “by H. C.K. Let us suppose that
an error of 1-1000th of an inch, or one-fourth of a division (an
amount that should never be tolerated), exists in such a micro-
VOL, II. Kk
130 MEMORANDA.
meter, it will only affect the measurements made with the
1-12th object-glass to the 1-120,000th of an inch—a quantity
scarcely appreciable, and much less than the errors which are
unavoidable in determining the value of the readings, even
when a mean of more than nine observations is taken.—H. C. K.
seems to have forgotten that, when a micrometer is applied to
the magnified image in the eye-piece, its errors are diminished
in proportion to the amplification effected by the object-
glass.
The inquiries for a cheap form of microscope, which I con-
stantly hear, make me think that the ‘difference between 4/.
and 17. for an adjunct to the instrument, would in many
instances be a serious obstacle to the use of any means of
minute measurement; and it is with the view of placing these
means within the reach of all observers that I have advocated
ruled glass. I cannot admit that I have disparaged the more
expensive instrument, having merely asserted that the meh
ings obtained by it are far beyond the power of observing
and that, therefore, it is not so very superior to the trad
form as a appears to be. Its superiority consists principally
in this—that there is nothing between the object-glass and
eye-piece to injure the definition; whereas the ruled glass
produces a perceptible (though very slight) deterioration in
the sharpness of the image, and therefore to that extent dimi-
nishes the accuracy of observation.
To induce observers to make accurate measurements,
which is the aim both of H.C. K. and myself, it is not
sufficient to place an instrument in their hands, they must be
taught to use it with little trouble. The following directions,
which are applicable to every form of eye-piece micrometer,
will tend to promote that object.
Having screwed on an object-glass, lay a micrometer on the
stage, and get a distinct view of it. Apply the eye-piece
micrometer; and taking the divisions on the stage, which
occupy the middle third of the field, draw out the draw-tube
until the corresponding reading in the eye-piece amounts to
some convenient decimal number, or at least can be readily
translated into one by a simple mental process, such as multi-
plying or dividing by a single figure. Then examine the
divisions on different parts of the stage micrometer, and if you
please, on different micrometers. Should they be found to
differ, which they probably will in a trifling degree, adjust the
draw-tube on that part of the scale which gives the mean
value. The draw-tube being graduated, the point at which it
now stands, with the reading indicated, should be entered on
a card in a line with the object-glass used.
MEMORANDA. 131
If the fine focal adjustment moves only the object-glass, as
is usually the case, it should be placed about midway during
this operation, that its subsequent movements may have as
little effect as possible in altering the reading.
The adjustment for the thickness of covering glass, which
all objectives of large aperture must have, changes the value
of the eye-piece micrometer so much that it requires a special
provision. The method which I adopt is to adjust the draw-
tube in two positions—one when the object-glass is arranged
for an uncovered object, and the other when screwed to
the full extent of its motion. ‘These two positions of the
draw-tube being entered on the card, it is easy to set it so as
to correspond with any intermediate point that the lens may
be adjusted to.
When this has been done for each object-glass, the opera-
tion of measuring is an exceedingly simple one. Draw out
the tube to the point corresponding to the object-glass in use,
and the measurements are at once obtained in decimals of an
inch, without the trouble of referring to a table of values. By
this means the micrometer above mentioned (250 in the inch),
when inserted into a negative eye-piece, is made to read
5000 with the 4-10, 10,000 with the 1-4, 20,000 with the
1-8, and 30,000 with the 1-12th object-glasses. By merely
multiplying the first of these numbers by two, and dividing
the third and fourth by two and three respectively, the mea-
surements are at once set down in decimal fractions. —Grorce
JACKSON.
Strnctmre of Anacharis alsinastrum.— [n the last Number of
the ‘ Microscopical Journal,’ appeared an interesting account
of the rotation in the cells of the new water-weed—Anacharis
alsinastrum. Mr. Lawson there pointed out the particular
cells in which the current may readily be seen, viz., the
elongated cells around the margin of the leaf and those of the
midrib. On examining the leaf with polarized light, these
cells, and these alone, are found to contain a large proportion
' of silica, and present a very interesting appearance. A bright
band of ‘light encircles the leaf and traverses its centre. The
teeth-cells at the edge of the leaf do not contain silica, but are
firmly planted upon the silica band : this evidently gives great
support to their clinging property. In fact the leaf is set as it
were in a framework of silica.
As the silica is only found in the cells in which rotation is
visible, may not its deposition be in some way connected with
the circulatory movement? The large amount of silica will
account also for the brittleness and weight of the plant, which
x. 2
132 MEMORANDA.
sinks to the bottom of the water on being cut, and does not
float like other water-weeds. The large proportion of silica
may also render ‘ the pest,” a useful manure for some kinds
of land.
The specimen sent with this communication has been
boiled for a few minutes in equal parts of nitric acid and
water: by this means a portion of the vegetable tissue has
been got rid of, and the silica rendered more distinct, without
at the same time destroying the form of the leaf.—FERa@usoN
Branson, MD., Sheffield.
Rotation in Anacharis.—In an extract given in the ‘ Micro-
scopical Journal’ (vol. il. pp. 54, 55), from my paper in the
‘Scottish Florist,’ on the ‘* Rotation of the Cell-sap in
Plants,” a remark occurs which may be inexplicable to your
readers. In describing the movements seen in the cells of
Anacharis alsinastrum, it is stated, ‘‘ The arrows show the di-
rection of motion.” -1 do not suppose that any reader of the
Journal will be so inexperienced as to look for arrows in the
plant’s cells; but it may be as well to mention that the remark
applied to a wood-cut which appeared in the ‘ Florist,’ but
was not repeated in the ‘ Microscopical Journal.’ I may also
take this opportunity to add to the observations quoted, that
while nuclei are generally found in the cells of Vallisneria
and Chara, which exhibit rotation (and in Chara the nucleus
is also in motion), there are no nuclei to be seen in the cells
of Anacharis, at least 1 have not met with any.—G. Lawson,
7, Hill Square, Edinburgh.
Binocular Microscope. — Since the publication of the last
‘ Journal’ which contains the papers of Professor Riddell and
myself on the ‘ Binocular Microscope,’ I have received so
many inquiries relating to this instrument that I feel myself
called upon to make some further remarks on the subject, as I
find that many are under an erroneous impression of its utility
and effectiveness.
At the request of some members of the Council of the
Microscopical Society, I was induced to bring forward the sub-
stance of my experiments, and at the time my paper was read
these were still in progress; for this reason, such information
as related to the effects of the instrument was somewhat inde-
finitely expressed, and allowed different observers to form
their own judgment of its merits. This has tended to some
extent to place the matter in a false position, which has
no doubt been confirmed by the rather glowing account which
the American Professor gives of the performance of his micro-
scope in page 23 of the last Journal, and the description of
MEMORANDA, 133
the formidable aspect that our innocent wheel animalcule
bears when viewed by his own instrument.
The binocular microscopes up to the present time have
done but little else than afford a glimpse of the splendid and
substantial appearance that nearly all microscopic objects may
be expected to bear when the instrument is brought near to a
state of perfection; but this remains to be effected, for all the
attempts that have been made have failed in giving that
degree of definition and distinctness which can alone satisfy
the eye of a microscopist. This arises from reasons that I
shall now briefly enter into :—
First, as regards a system of prisms for bisecting the
emergent pencil close behind the objective: in every way
that this has hitherto been carried out, the object is seen with
only half the object-glass, and therefore the undue prepon-
derance of oblique pencils thus obtained in the formation of
each image is the cause of very unsatisfactory vision even of
the easiest tests. If the minutie of structure cannot be seen
with each eye separately, they will not be rendered visible by
using them both together.
When the principle of the dividing prisms is directly
followed, some improvement may be expected by using
object-glasses which will give an equally-distinct image, with
every portion of their acting surface. I believe the construc-
tion of such objectives to be within the pale of possibilities,
as I have tried some (by traversing a small stop over the back
lens) which approach near to the desired standard. Such a
glass would also be of a superior quality for all the general
purposes of observation. Where two prisms are employed for
dividing the pencil behind the object-glass, some of the most
valuable portion of the surface of the latter, straight across the
diameter, is lost at the junction of the prisms. M. Nachet
has most ingeniously remedied this defect, by using only one
isosceles prism for splitting the pencil in both his binocular
and duplex microscope.
If, instead of equally dividing the diameter of the object-
glass, we can obtain a further portion past the centre both
ways, or say two-thirds of the diameter in each eye, we should
still have stereoscopic vision combined with greatly improved
definition, for the objective would bear to lose the one-third
portion without materially injuring its defining power. I have
not yet discovered any optical contrivance that will effectually
accomplish this: it appears to be almost a mathematical im-
possibility,
If a modification of the double-image prism were to be
placed close behind the object-glass, having a sufficient sepa-
134 MEMORANDA.
rating power to bring the object into each eye, both images
would be alike and would consequently produce binocular but
not stereoscopic vision; but the latter might be obtained by
cutting off some portion of the opposed sities of the separated
pencils : I think that this experiment is worthy of a trial. I
also believe that the loss of light arising from double re-
fraction might be supplied by increased intensity of illu-
mination.
I am convinced that a perfect result can never be obtained
by bisecting the pencil behind the object-glass, unless it is
improved in the way that I have above referred to. On the
other hand half of the top lens of the eye- piece may be cut off
without losing sight of the markings on test objects, or other-
wise materially j injuring the definition; but the greatest objec-
tion to separating the images there, is the contraction of the
field, which is caused by reasons I have explained in my
paper.* I am now seeking a remedy for this evil with some
prospect of success. | have abandoned all attempts at
making a binocular microscope with two objectives, as I
found that I could not get even a pair of 14s to bear upon
the object together.
Having now stated distinctly ‘that the binocular microscope
is at present far from being a perfect thing, and in what diree-
tion greater perfection is to be sought for, I trust that others
will fal their ingenuity in effecting improvements; for even as
it now is, all must agree, on seeing the magnificent perspec-
tive of some objects (par ticularly living and infusorial) that is
obtained through its means, that no efforts should be spared in
attempting to improve it. In this country I have worked at it
almost single-handed, and have found the subject teeming with
practical difficulties to an unusual extent; for which reason I
think it is of importance that the instrument should be
benefited by the ideas of others, in particulars of construc-
tion wherein I may have been found deficient.—F. H.
WENHAM.
Gn Measuring the Aperture of Object-glasses; and Remarks on
their Adjustment.— [he usual method of measuring the angle of
aperture of object-glasses, suggested by Mr. Lister, and
figured and described in Quekett’s ‘ Treatise on the Micro-
scope,’ is sufficiently accurate for all apertures up to 100° or
thereabouts, and I think for general usefulness cannot be
superseded ; but within the last few years the aperture of our
highest powers has been increased to such an extent as to
* See ‘ Quart. Journal of Micros, Science,’ for Oct. 1858, p. 9.
*
MEMORANDA. 135
render their measurement by means of this instrument in some
respects unsatisfactory. I have therefore to propose an addi-
tion which will enable us to obtain a more definite result.
On measuring an object-glass of very large aperture (say
170°) by the usual method, the extreme light becomes very
faint, and disappears so gradually as to render it difficult
to define the boundary between light and darkness, and
any interior reflection from the rim of the stop, &c., may
readily be mistaken for aperture. I have now before mea
1-12th in which light appears visible up to near 180° when
measured by the ordinary means. In this glass every precau-
tion has been taken to prevent internal glare: it is provided
with two stops, and the whole of the inside of the tube black-
ened with smut lacquer; yet with this object-glass I can see
through moderately thin glass. As it would be impossible to
accomplish this with such an aperture, I consider it is a suffi-
cient proof that there is something radically wrong in the
method of measurement.
It occurred to me that it would be preferable to obtain
a distinct image of a distant object through the microscope,
and then to rotate it horizontally (taking the focus of the ob-
Ject-glass as the centre of motion), and stopping at the point
when the object appears bisected, or half of it, is observed at
both extremes, the range passed through will represent the
angle of aperture. This will also have the advantage of show-
ing the state of correction of the oblique pencils, by the degree
of distortion appearing in the object, when seen at the exterior
of the pencil of rays.
By the mode of measurement hitherto practised, the extreme
light may appear sufficiently strong; but there is no means of
judging at the same time whether this is consistent with
a definite image or is really indicative of effective or well-cor-
rected aperture.
There are several optical contrivances which would give an
image of distant objects through the object-glass, but I have
preferred the one here to be described because it does not in-
terfere with the instrument commonly used. It consists
simply of a biconvex lens of about one-quarter of an inch
focus, set in a tube made to fit over the top of the lowest
power Huygenian eye-piece, in a similar manner to that
which Mr. Ross supplies with his microscopes, under the
name of an examining-glass. The single lens should be in
such a position that its focus is coincident with that of
the emergent pencil from the eye-piece. As the focal distance
of the latter will vary with every different power of object-
136 MEMORANDA,
glass employed, and also with the distance of the object, the
single lens must have a sliding adjustment.
Having fixed the single lens over the eye-piece of the ordi-
nary instrument for measuring apertures, with the object-glass
to be tried, attached, place a candle in front in the direction of
the axis of the tube at the same level, and at a distance vary-
ing from three inches to as many feet, according to the power
of the object-glass employed, the highest requiring the candle
to be very close, in order that the image may be of a sufficient
size to be readily seen; next adjust the single lens by means
of the sliding tube till the flame of the candle is most
distinctly visible, then set the instrument at zero, and move it
bodily round till the wick or centre of the flame is exactly bi-
sected, and when this occurs again, on moving the index alone
in the opposite direction the number of degrees passed through
will indicate the aperture. If the object-glass is a good one,
the image of the flame when seen at the extremes of the aper-
ture suffers a remarkably small degree of distortion; but
when this appears considerable, I have ascertained by direct
experiment that the performance of the glass is improved by
reducing the diameter of the stop, and so cutting off the
exterior or unsuitable rays. I think that it will be easy
to judge what portion of these are serviceable in assisting the
definition, merely by the appearance of the flame at the
extremes.
With this*method of testing aperture, it is not absolutely
necessary to be possessed of a special instrument for the pur-
pose ; for if the single lens is fitted over the lowest eye-piece
of the ordinary microscope, and two candles be placed in
front of the object-glass, and moved asunder till the half of
each flame is cut off, a line drawn from the focal point to the
centre of each flame will represent the angle of aperture.
The axis of the microscope and the two flames should be in
the same plane.
It is perhaps not generally known, that the position of the
glasses for adjustment makes a considerable difference in the
aperture (sometimes to the extent of 15° or more), this being
always at a minimum when at the mark “ uncovered.” This
fact should of course be remembered in measuring apertures.
The 1-2nd and 1-4th may be placed midway between the two
ranges, but the 1-8th and 1-12th should be taken when at the
mark ‘ covered,” as we most generally use them when near to
this point.
I have only lately used this method of testing the aperture
of object-glasses, and therefore do not pretend to say that a
MEMORANDA. 137
better may not be found; but I have for a long time been of
opinion that the ordinary mode is insufficient, and trust that
some attention will be given to the subject.*
There is one very important point which I have seen almost
totally neglected by some of the most experienced observers—
I refer to the adjustment of the object-glass for the aberrations
caused by the various thicknesses of glass used for covering
different objects ; for in order to obtain correct definition it is
quite as necessary that this should be attended to as the focus-
sing of the objective itself, and, unless performed with
particular nicety, the late improvements that have been made
in the way of increasing the aperture will be rendered worse
than useless, not only in the highest powers but in the lower
also. For instance, I have a very fine 4-10th, made by Smith
and Beck, with a working aperture of 90°, which will not
well show the markings on a severe test object such as the
P. angulatum, until it is brought to the exact point of adjust-
ment: they then become very distinct, almost instantaneously.
I mention this because many suppose that in a power as low
as this, an adjustment is not at all requisite.
The majority of observers with the microscope, generally
content themselves, before screwing on the object-glass, with
placing the vernier at the mark “ covered,” or in such a place
between the two extremes as they think may chance to be the
right one. But this practice is not to be depended upon, for
even admitting it to be possible that a correct judgment may
be acquired as to the thickness of the glass cover and the cor-
responding position of the adjustment, the latter oftentimes
requires to be altered for different parts of the same object,
for, frequently, the covers are not of uniform thickness, and
various portions of the structure under view may be more
or less deeply immersed in Canada balsam or fluid. The
chief use of the marks “ covered” and “uncovered” are, to enable
us, by turning to the right or left, to see in which direction the
lenses are either separated or brought closer together.
Although very easy in practice, there is some difficulty
in giving any definite rules for effecting the adjustment of
object-glasses with certainty and despatch ; but when the indi-
cation of being out of adjustment can be clearly seen, one
hour’s practice will be more instructive than pages of descrip-
tion. For an uncovered object no directions are required ;
* Since writing the above, I have been informed by Mr. De La Rue,
and subsequently by Mr. Ross, that a similar method of measuring aper-
tures to that here described has been used by Professor Amici for some
years past, but I am not aware whether it has ever been published.
138 MEMORANDA.
all that is necessary is to set the glass to this mark, which our
first opticians are always very particular in placing correctly.
The following may serve as a guide for adjusting the
object-glass for a general object that is covered. Select any
dark speck or opaque portion of the object, and bring the out-
line into perfect focus, then lay the finger on the milled head
of the fine motion, and move it briskly backwards and for-
wards in both directions from the first position. Observe the
expansion of the dark outline of the object both when within
and when without the focus. If the greater expansion or coma
is when the object is without the focus, or furthest from the
objective, the lenses must be placed further asunder, or
towards the mark “uncovered.” If the greater coma is when
the object is within the focus, or nearest to the objective, the
lenses must be brought closer together or towards the mark
“covered.” When the object-glass is in proper adjustment, the
expansion of the outline is exactly the same both within and
without the focus.
On the Podura and other marked tests, we may learn to ad-
just from a different indication. If the dots have a tendency
to run into lines when the scale is placed without the focus,
the glasses must be brought closer together. On the con-
trary, if the lines appear when the object is within the focal
point, the lenses must be further separated.
I may state generally, that if there is a difference in the
expansion of ‘the coma surrounding an object when quickly
brought equally within and without the focus, the glass is not
in adjustment. This is more remarkable under opaque illu-
mination, but most particularly with my parabolic condenser,
which requires the object-glass to be very accurately adjusted ;
for if not so, the whole field of view sometimes seems filled
with a kind of haze, and the outline of the object surrounded
with a thick chromatic border, both of which immediately
disappear when the adjustment is perfect, and leave the field
intensely black.
The foregoing remarks apply only to our first-rate object-
glasses, for if unskilfully constructed, or badly corrected, but
little improvement can be derived from the adjustment.
I have for a long time objected to the mechanical method,
by which all our opticians apply their adjustment, as there is
oftentimes excessive friction, and that to such an extent as to
endanger the centering of the object-glass, or to risk the dis-
placing of the object in the endeavour to make use of it; and
the range between ‘‘ covered” and “ uncovered” is performed
in from one to two revolutions of the external collar. For this
reason the motion is too slow, and the contrast between good
MEMORANDA. 139
and bad not sufficiently immediate to insure an accurate and
quick adjustment. I think that the practical inconveniences
of working this adjustment prevent its being more generally
used by observers. As a remedy for these evils, I have al-
ways constructed my own object-glasses with an adjustment
of the following description: instead of moving the outer lens
to or from the others, as hitherto, | make the former a fixture,
and move the two inner combinations, which slide easily in the
interior of an accurately-bored external tube, similar to a pencil
within a pencil-case. The motion of the inner tube and its
lenses is effected by means of a pin fixed thereto, and first
passing through a longitudinal slit in the outer fixed tube,
and then in an inclined slit cut in an are of 120° in the
circumference of an exterior revolving milled collar ; the whole
range of adjustment being thus performed in one-third part of
a revolution. I consider that this plan has these advantages :
the front lens (which magnifies more than the others together),
being fixed to the outer tube, retains the same distance from the
object, which is, consequently, not entirely lost sight of during
the adjustment, as in the other cases where this lens is move-
able. The motion is performed with scarcely any friction,
and the step from good to bad or better definition, is so imme-
diately palpable that the right point of adjustment can be hit
upon very readily. I can generally adjust my own glasses in
a few seconds, whereas 1 sometimes most uncomfortably
spend several minutes in wrenching round the adjusting
collars of our professional makers, to obtain the same result.
—F,. H. Wenuao.
Note to Mr. Huxley’s paper on ‘the Corpuscula Tactus ”’
in the preceding Number. My communication was in type
before the publication of the last part of Siebold and Kol-
liker’s ‘ Zeitschrift fiir Wissenschaftliche Zoologie’ (Band. V.
H. 1), which contains two important memoirs on the Pacinian
bodies, the one by Dr. Franz Leydig (who deserves to be
better known in this country as one of the ablest histologists
of Germany), ‘ Ueber die Vater-Pacinischen K6rperchen der
Taube; the other, by Professor Kolliker, ‘ Einige Bemer-
kungen iiber die Pacinischen Kérperchen,” Leydig points
out several new localities in which he has met with Pacinian
bodies in birds, particularly the interosseous spaces of the
fore-arm and leg. His description of the structure of these
bodies agrees very closely with that which I have given, but
he lays a greater stress upon the transverse striation of the
middle substance, and describes a narrow cayity in the middle
of the so-called “central capsule,’ which he shows to be, as I
140 MEMORANDA.
have stated, otherwise solid, and which he regards as the ex-
panded termination of the nerve itself. He further points out
that his observations on the termination of the nerves in the
invertebrata are in accordance with Wagner's doctrines, and
takes occasion to explain at greater length his views respecting
the analogy of the Pacinian bodies with the follicular organs
and mucous canals of fishes.
Professor Kolliker admits that what he and Henle had pre-
viously named the “central cavity” of the Pacinian body in
mammalia is solid, but still maintains the existence of a fluid
between the outer layers, at least in the cat. He further
points out that, in the mammalia at any rate, the central mass
is not the expanded nerve fibril. He considers that the Paci-
nian body of birds is essentially different from that of mam-
mals; a conclusion which is, I think, strongly opposed by the
comparison of young mammalian Pacinian bodies with those
of birds.
I must also express my regret that, having overlooked a
paper by Dr. Waller, in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions’ for
1848, I neglected to mention him as the original describer of
the oe Se of the nerves in the papille of the frog’s
tongue.—T. H. H., December, 1853.
Stirrup’s Microscope.—I am particularly interested in the
inquiry after a microscope, by a Thomas Stirrup, of the date,
if | remember rightly, of the early part of the 17th century.
May I beg your kind assistance, to make an editorial in-
quiry in your next Number, whether any of your subscribers
or readers possess the apparatus in question, and to solicit the
name and address of the possessor ?
About January, 1851, one was sold by auction in Stoke
Newington, to a broker, as I have been credibly informed ; he,
again, states, that he disposed of it to a medical gentleman, in
Bayswater, but here all trace of it has been lost—F. G. 8.
Is Coal a Mineralogical Species*—The question of the
nature of coal having recently excited so much scientific in-
terest, we give insertion to the following note.*
It has long been a vexed question w ith mineralogists as to what should
be regarded as a mineralogical species, there being many difficulties in draw-
ing an exact definition ; ‘they are unanimous, however, in regarding a
cry ystal as the true natural-history individual ; but as minerals more fre-
quently occur in a massive state, they have extended the idea to those
homogeneous bodies which exhibit the same chemical constitution through-
out their mass. From the time of Wemer to the latest works on
* See also, for further information, article “ Coal,” in English Cyclo-
pedia.
MEMORANDA. 141
mineralogy, Coal, though never found otherwise than in a massive state,
has been classed in all systems as a mineralogical species. Glocker, in his
Synopsis, the latest attempt at a precise systematic arrangement of the
Mineral Kingdom, divides Coal into three species—the non-bituminous or
Anthracites, and the bituminous, including two species, the Black Coals
and Brown Coals, or Lignites. In his arrangement of the varieties there
is a gradual passage from turf and semi-fossilized wood to the most perfect
forms of coal.
Professor Quekett has examined, by the aid of the microscope, a vast
number of sections of coal from various localities, as well as the Torbane-
hill mineral; and in concluding his paper at the last meeting of the Micro-
scopical Society, December 21st, he proves, that whilst the Torbanehill
mineral is a resinous-looking body, nearly homogeneous, and devoid of
vegetable structure, Coal, on the other hand, is almost entirely made up
of woody fibre, and not homogeneous in aspect, the interstices between
the fibres being filled with a resinous body similar in appearance to the
Torbane mineral. Having examined many varieties of coal taken at ran-
dom from Professor Quekett’s- extensive series of horizontal and vertical
sections, I come to the conclusion, that Coal is nothing more than fossil
wood mineralized by bituminous or resinous matter; and that it holds the
same relation to such bodies as wood opal does to Opal, and is, in fact,
similar in character to any organic remains mineralized by silex, carbonate
of lime, or other substances. Viewed in this light, Coal has no claim to a
place in any Mineral System as a species; if this be admitted, it will
prove the necessity of submitting massive minerals to microscopical ex-
amination, before their true character can be acknowledged, and before they
can be admitted into any natural-history classification.
The Torbane mineral seems, from the homogeneous nature of its struc-
ture, to have greater claims to a position in a Mineral System ; and, so far
as our present knowledge as to its other characters extends, is probably a
mineral species sui generis.
As it is well known that some minerals contain a vast amount of
extraneous matter in mechanical combination, for example, the so-called
Fontainebleau Sandstone, which consists of rhombohedral crystals of
Caicite greatly impregnated with sand, may not the Torbane mineral be a
true mineral species, whilst ordinary coal is the same, mechanically mixed
with woody matter? Under the microscope, the eye cannot detect any
difference between the matter of which the Torbane mineral is composed,
and that which occurs between the interstices and pores of the woody
fibres of coal. I incline, however, to the former opinion, that coal is
nothing but a fossil wood ; therefore, not a mineral species.—S. HIGHLEY.
Rainey’s Light Moderater.—Several persons haying ap-
plied to me desiring to know where they can obtain the
apparatus described in the last Number of the ‘ Quarterly
Journal of Microscopical Science,’ for moderating the inten-
sity of artificial light, I shall be obliged if you will have the
goodness to say in your next Number, that the apparatus in
question, can be obtained of Mr. Ross, optician, at a mode-
rate cost.—GerorcE Rainey.
( 42.)
PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
Microscoricat Society. October 26th, 1858.
George Jackson, Fisq., President, in the Chair. A paper by Dr.
Hobson, of Leeds, “* On the Development of Tubular Structure
in Plants,’’ was read.
Tue author stated, that the object of this paper was to afford a
practical illustration from Nature herself, in proof of the reality of
that which has hitherto been but a theory in histology. For this
purpose the structure of the hairs growing on the spurred petal of
Viola tricolor, or Heartsease, is described as seen under the
microscope, each hair affording in itself examples of the three pro-
cesses considered by the author as requisite for the formation of tube.
A linear arrangement of united cells was described as forming
the first stage. In the second, or transition stage, the passage from
cell into tube was shown, which was considered as produced by the
progressive change by absorption of the axis, or primary point of
union of the cells with each other, constituting the hitherto imper-
vious state of hair. The third stage was described as consisting of
the tubular condition of the tube itself, gradually and continually
increasing during the life of the plant by the absorption of cells.
Thus in one and the same tube, and at the same moment, a beautiful
example of Nature’s simple mode of formation of tubular structure
may be exhibited in this instance, consisting of a perfect cone.
A paper by R. S. Boswell, Esq., on Actinophrys Sol, was read
(Transactions, vol. ii., p. 25).
A paper by Tuffin West, Esq., on the disease affecting the vine
and other plants, was read.
The following gentlemen were elected Fellows of the Society :-—
Dr. Alphonse Normandy ; E. E. Lloyd, Esq.; F. George, Esq.
November 23.--George Busk, Esq., in the Chair. A paper was
read by the Chairman, On the Avicularian and Vibracular Organs
of the Polyzoa (see Transactions, vol. ii., p. 26).
A paper was read by Professor Quekett, On the Microscopical
Structure of the Torbanehill Mineral, illustrated with numerous
specimens and diagrams,
T. D. Dyster, Esq.; Dr. E. Smith; J. B. Bevington, Esq. ;
Conrad Loddiges, Esq.; J.A. Beaumont, Esq., were elected Fellows.
December 21.-—George Jackson, Esq., in the Chair. The con-
clusion of Professor Quekett’s paper was read (Transactions, vol.
ii., p. 84). Dr. Bristowe and W. Travis, Esq., were elected
Fellows.
PHYSIOLOGICAL SECTION OF THE LONDoN Mepicau Socrery.
In the absence of any Society in the metropolis, for the discussion
of purely physiological subjects, the London Medical Society have
determined to set aside one evening in the month, for the discussion
of physiological subjects. Three meetings have been held this
a
PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES. 143
Session, and papers by Mr. Edwin Lee, Dr. E. Crisp, and Dr.
Snow, have been read. These papers have been on subjects not
necessarily involving the use of the microscope, and, therefore, not
demanding further notice from us. We make no doubt, however,
that this section of the London Medical Society will be made sub-
servient to the increase of our knowledge of the functions and struc-
ture of organic beings, by the aid of microscopical research, and we
hope to be often called upon to report its proceedings.
Royau Society oF EDINBURGH.
Tuesday, December.—Sir Thomas Brisbane in the Chair. Pro-
fessor Traill read a paper on the Torbanehill ‘ Mineral.’ He
gave a detailed account of the local situation and geological position
ofthe mineral in question; but these did not seem to supply any
evidence as to the true nature of the substance. There could be
no doubt but that it occurred in a coal formation, although he con-
sidered this as no argument in favour of its being coal, as many
other minerals are found under exactly similar conditions. He then
gave a description of the substance, dwelling particularly upon
those points which seemed to distinguish it from household coal and
cannel coals: in its colour it was stated to differ, as well as in its
scratch, changing colour and not being lustrous. Its thin edge,
when held betwixt the eye and a candle-flame, was shown to trans-
mit light. It also possessed very considerable elasticity, causing
the hammer to rebound, and differed in its fracture from ordinary
coals. Specimens were handed round the room to illustrate the
various statements made by the learned Professor, who also threw
a block of the substance into the fire, to show that it did not burn
like ordinary coal, but produced a bright flame, never going into a
red heat, such as would render it suitable for the cooking of meat
and other culinary operations. He also lighted a piece of it at a
candle, showing that it burned freely in this way, with a bright
flame, and produced a large quantity of smoke, the carbonaceous
matter being deposited in part upon the piece itself. Organic
structure had been traced in the substance, but he did not deem this
of much importance. His various researches led him to the con-
clusion that it was not a coal, nor a parrot-coal, nor asphaltum, nor
a bituminous shale, to which it nearly approached, but a distinct
mineral, for which he proposed what he considered to be the most
appropriate name— Bitumenite.
Professor Gregory stated, that he did not consider the substance
in question similar to a bituminous shale, as the bitumen could not
be extracted from it by any solvent with which he was acquainted.
He did not see any chemical evidence for regarding it as differing
from coal.
Professor Fleming contended that the substance, which he pre-
ferred to call the “ Boghead gas coal,” was a coal, and a candle
coal. What is a candle coal? asked he, and why does it get that
name? Because it burns like a candle, which this substance does.
And what is a parrot-coal, and why does it get that name? Because
144 PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
in burning it makes a noise, “ chatters like a parrot ;” and the block
burned in the Royal Society’s grate demonstrated that the so-called
mineral did the same. He did not consider it a mineral at all. It
was not formed of certain elements in certain proportions, but
varied much in different specimens; and from these and other
considerations, it was not a mineral but a rock; and it did not
differ more from coal than the Craigleith sandstone did from the
Hailes sandstone, or the Redhall did from the Granton, or the
sandstone of Salisbury Crags did from all four. With respect to
structure, he had seen specimens of fossil wood wherein the slightest
trace of organic structure could not be detected under the micro-
scope.
Professor Bennet exhibited drawings, from the microscope, of true
coal, and the substance in question. The latter exhibited markings,
which he believed were regarded by the botanists engaged in the
inquiry as cells. Now, they wanted the character of cells. The
vegetable cell consisted of—1, a central nucleus; 2, a primordial
utricle ; 3, a proper cell-wall ; with also included granules. Now,
these appearances he could not find in any specimens of the
substance submitted by him to the microscope. It was of great
importance, he considered, to determine whether the markings
shown in his drawing were cells or not, because the whole question
hinged upon it, and if they were cells, then this substance showed a
structure so profuse in cells as to be unparalleled in any other
instance of coal.
Dr. Greville stated, that although the markings in the drawing
looked very like cells, still he was not prepared to say that they
were cells in their normal condition. They might have been once
cells, and become altered.
Professor Balfour entered at length upon the question in its
botanical bearings. There could be no doubt but that organic
structure, both vascular and cellular, occurred in the disputed sub-
stance. He alluded to the opinions of Quekett and others who had
examined it with this view, and thought that it was wrong to draw
any argument against the substance being coal, from the fact that
the structure seen was not of a certain kind; coal might be formed
of coniferous wood, in other cases it might not. We know well
that various plants differing from the Conifere—the Stigmarias and
others—occurred in the coal formations, and it was but reasonable
to suppose that these contributed to the coal deposits, as well as the
Conifere. It was impossible, therefore, to set limits to the kind of
structure to be found. As for finding the nuclei and primordial
utricles of cells, we could not expect that. So far from the Tor-
banehill mineral being distinguished in general appearance from
some kinds of coal, he had placed specimens of it and of certain
kinds of coal, side by side, before a very competent authority, who
could not decide which was the one and which the other. On the
whole, therefore, he was satisfied that it was vain to attempt to draw
any distinction between the Torbanehill substance and coal.--Con-
densed from the “ Commonwealth.”
TRANSACTIONS OF MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE II.
ta Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.—Avicularium of Notamia bursaria.
1.—Avicularium in the closed state.
2.—Avicularium open, exhibiting the tactile (?) brush.
3.—Avicularium viewed in front, to show an opening below the beak.
4,—Avicularium in the early stage of developement.
5.—Closed avicularium, more magnified, showing the muscular structure
and the internal organ.
Figs. 6, 7, 8.—Avicularium of Bugula plumosa.
6.—In the closed state.
7.—Open, showing the tactile (?) brush.
8.— Open, to show the diaphragm.
Figs. 9, 10, 11.—Avicularium of Bugula avicularia.
9.—Open, to show the tactile (?) brush (more magnified).
10.—Two avicularia grasping each other.
11.—One partially open (less magnified).
12.—Avicularium of Scrupocellaria scrwposa.
13.—A small vermicule captured by two avicularia in Scrupocellaria
scrupost.
14.—Avicularium of Bugula plumosa, in the early stage of developement.
DESCRIPTION OF PLATES III, IV., & V.
Illustrating Professor Quekett’s Papers on the Torbane-hill
Mineral.
PLATE III.
Fig.
1.—A section of the yellow variety of the Torbane-hill Mineral, as seen
under a magnifying power of 130 diameters.
2.—A section of the dark variety of the Torbane-hill Mineral, as seen
under a power of 130 diameters. The yellow circular masses exhibit
a radiated structure; they form the combustible portion of the
mineral, whilst the dark matter is the earthy ingredient.
3.—A section of the Torbane-hill Mineral, in which a specimen of Stig-
maria ficoides is imbedded : every part of this plant can be readily
distinguished from the mineral by its rich brown colour. Mag-
nified 6 diameters.
4.—A portion of the same specimen magnified 50 diameters, showing how
easily the smallest portion of vegetable tissue can be distinguished
from the substance of the mineral.
5,—A section of the Torbane-hill Mineral, through which a thin layer of
coal ran, which may be readily recognised by its brown colour.
The yellow particles of the mineral in contact with the coal are of
more or less oval figure.
6.—The powder of Torbane-hill Mineral, showing the yellow bituminous
particles, and fragments of vessels.
7.—Ash of the Torbane-hill Mineral.
PLATE IV.
1.—Transverse section of the Brown Methil Coal.
2.—Longitudinal section of the same.
3.—Transverse section of the Black Methil Coal.
4,.—Longitudinal section of the same.
5.—Transverse section of the Lesmahagow Cannel Coal.
6.—Longitudinal section of the same.
PLATE. WV.
1.—A section showing the Mineral and Coal in juxtaposition ; magni-
fied 3 diameters.
2.—Representations of the comparative sizes of the transverse sections of
the brown elongated cells from various Coals, drawn by means of
‘the camera lucida, by Dr. Adams, 70 diameters.
3.—Chippings of Newcastle Coal, showing dotted woody tissue.
4,—Ash of common domestic Coal, exhibiting the remains of a transverse
section of wood.
5.—A longitudinal section of Coal from Lochgelly, showing its identity
with a similar section of wood, from a drawing in the possession of
Dr. Adams.
6.—Ash of Coal, exhibiting portions of siliceous cuticle and other frag-
ments of vegetable tissue foreign to the coal.
7.—Powder of Breadisholme Coal, from a drawing by Dr. Adams.
trina Moor pe SEEIBE Of.
as
7H
_
rit Vi
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE IV.,
Illustrative of Dr. Gregory’s Paper on the Diatomaceous Earth of
Mull.
Fig.
‘wea variety of Epithemia Argus.
2.—A valve of Epithemia gibberula ?
3.—Seven varieties of Hunotia bigibba, Kiitz.
4,.— Eunotia incisa, n. sp.
4 8.—Variety 8, with rounded apices.
b. Front view.
5.—A Cymbella, qu. ? a variety of C. Helvetica? or an. sp. ?
6.—Remarkable variety of Surirella Craticula.
7.—Tryblianella augusta. Three modifications.
8.—Naviceula affinis
9.—Pinnularia tennis, n. sp.
10.—Pinnularia undulata, n. sp.
11.—Pinnularia parva, n. sp. ?
12.—Pinnularia, uncertain, allied to P. radiosa or P. peregrina.
13.—Pinnularia latistriata, n. sp.
13 8.—Var. 8, with front view.
14,—Pinnularia exigua, n. sp. ?
15.—Pinnularia divergens? four varieties.
16.—Pinnularia stauroneiformis.
17.—Stauroneis rectangularis, n. sp.
18.—Gomphonema Brebissonii? un. sp. ?
19.—Gomphonema (?) Hebridense, n. sp.
20.—A variety of Hemantidium Arcus, or possibly of 7. majus.
21.—Remarkable sporangial pustules of Odontidium Tabellaria,
JOURNAL OF, MIGROSCOPICAL SCIENCE.
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE III.
Fig.
1, 2,3, 4, 5, 6.—From the Malpighian body of the Sheep.
7, 8.—From that of Man.
9, 10.—From the Tonsil of Man.
The letters have throughout the same signification.
a. Afferent vessel.
b. Efferent vessel.
c. Traversing vessel.
¢. Capillaries.
d. Line of junction between Red Pulp and Malpighian body.
d’. Fibrous meshwork.
e. Red pulp.
J. Malpighian pulp.
g. Endoplasts.
h. Periplast.
HW’. Cell-wall,
7. Epithelium of the tonsil cavity in the section fig. 9; a vascular
papilla is seen extending nearly to its surface.
LLU TM
c
FEL adwnat delt, Tuff Wat oc
‘Ford A West: Imp Hatton Ganien
¥
oe
7 a : |
‘ : Ks
, ‘ a -
a —
,
ws
5 i
4 a
1 =
z Ee
wie
of
Z
Vol Ll.
OT Sout
Sei
ait .
Ford & West imp London.
ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS
On the Turory of the Ittumtnation of OBsects under the
Microscope, with relation to the ApErtuRE of the Oxpsect-
GLass, and Properties of Licur; with Practical Methods
for special differences of Texture and Colour. By F. H.
WENHAM.
Havine on a former occasion written a paper published in
the ‘Transactions of the Microscopic Society for March, 1850,’
entitled, ‘On the [llumination of Transparent Microscopic
Objects on a new Principle,” I should deem it an intrusion
for again appearing on the same ground were it not for the
reason that I have since that time effected some improve-
ments, and it has become evident that the theory of the sub-
ject was too briefly explained in my first communication to
give a general idea of my meaning in the way that I had
wished to be understood. As I have no predilection for a
theory that does not bear upon a practical result, in that which
I bring forward | shall endeavour as much as possible to sup-
port it by experimental facts.
I have had the major part of this memoir by me for
some time past, and intended to have sent it to the last
Journal, but by chance Mr. Rainey made a communication
on the same subject, and [ have waited to learn the results of
his investigations. As I do not agree with this gentleman in
the inferences that he has drawn from observed facts, and the
hypothesis that he has assumed is contradictory to the theory
that experiment ‘has led me to adopt, I find it necessary to
make some comment on the contents of his paper. In so
doing, I wish it to be understood that I do not question
the accuracy of his observation in noting phenomena; but as
it is oftentimes the fate of deductions of this character to be
overturned by a few practical facts, I trust that he will take
my remarks in good part, as they are made without the
slightest feeling of personality, and for the mere sake of
arriving at the truth.
Mr. Rainey first states, that when the P. angulatum is
seen with a 1-8th of 150°, and illuminated with either the
plain or concave mir:or, or an achromatic condenser of small
aperture (no matter how intense the light may be), “ but
little more than the mere outline of the object will be visi-
ble.” This is true, and arises from the circumstance, that the
angle of the illuminating-pencil is not sufficient to develop
VOL. I. M
146 WENHAM, ON THE THEORY OF THE
the full aperture of the object-glass, for I shall show that the
latter is dependent on the angular pencil of the illuminator.
The author next proceeds to give a reason why the mark-
ings which cannot otherwise be seen on test objects are ren-
dered visible by very oblique light: he attributes this to the
structure being composed of parts of different density and
refractive power, which cannot be distinguished from each
other by central or direct light; but when this is thrown on
obliquely at a certain angle, “total reflection” will take place
from the denser portions of the objects (meaning the mark-
ings), while the lighter or least refractive parts will transmit
the rays, consequently the one will appear dark and the other
light. I may state with reference to this supposition, that
light when incident at any degree of obliquity on diaphanous
refracting bodies with parallel sides, cannot be made to suffer
total reflection, either externally or internally, and admitting
that an accidental or prismatic formation of the object did
allow of total internal reflection, and even supposing that the
difference of angle for producing this effect could be as great
as between water and glass, or as 48° 36" to 41° 49", on
increasing the obliquity of the rays only seven or less degrees,
the markings would again become invisible, for all the light
would then be reflected. I have never found this to occur,
nor can I conceive how the generality of difficult tests can
possess such a mirror-like consistency as to bring this law
into uniform action; and therefore, from these and other
causes, I cannot admit that this theory is at all tenable: my
own demonstration will rest on more simple grounds,
Attempts have sometimes been made to draw the undulatory
theory of light into the subject of microscopic illumination,
but without any substantial reason, as it has in reality very
little or nothing to do with it. One of the few instances in
which its effects are palpably seen is in the case of two lines
being blended into one, when the object-glass has not suffi-
cient separating power; but to avoid this it is only necessary
to proportion the aperture of the objective to the difficulty of
the test. I expect soon to be in a position to exemplify this
practically. I conclude these short remarks on this head
by stating, that I make a distinction between this and the
interference or inflection of light, for the latter sometimes
affects the definition of objects, under direct illumination, very
materially, and one of the methods that I have to describe
affords an effectual remedy.
Mr. Rainey has given a lengthened series of observations
on the appearance of a globule of mercury, when illuminated
either with my paraboloid or Gillett’s condenser. I do not con-
ILLUMINATION OF OBJECTS UNDER THE MICROSCOPE. 147
sider that a globule, as being strictly opaque, is at all suited
for testing an illumination intended for transparent objects,
for however well it may show whether there is any light
reflected, either from the brasswork, front of the object-lens, or
thin glass cover, I cannot call to mind any ordinary object in
which this takes place to such an extent as to create a false
appearance. In reference to this Mr. Rainey says, “ The
glass cover having in this instance served the purpose of a
Lieberkiithn, has made the object appear in a false light ; and
as nearly all microscopic examinations are made on covered
objects, the paraboloid is in this respect defective, and the
error must always be allowed for.” My own experiments
have led me to a conclusion in direct opposition to this; and
what is here pointed out as a defect is the very thing that is
required for improving the definition ; for, as I shall presently
explain, many transparent objects require their upper surface
to be illuminated at the same time that the light is trans-
mitted through them. I have for a long time used a special
appliance to the parabolic condenser for effecting this desi-
deratum.
Mr. Rainey also brings forward the appearance of a globule
of mercury when illuminated with the parabola as an example
to show the fallacy of the ‘radiated light theory ;” but I do
not see that it at all affects the question, simply because it is
one of those few substances that is incapable of radiating
light, and therefore, under such circumstances, can only be seen
by the direct reflection of incident rays from the luminous
source ; or, to make myself better understood, I will observe
that the surfaces of mercury, highly-polished speculum metal,
silver, or steel, are colourless and invisible, and from the fact
of nearly all the light being reflected and none absorbed, are
capable of receiving what is technically known as “a black
polish,” which term is very descriptive. We may also give
an exquisite degree of polish to a speculum of gold or brass,
but in these part of the incident light will be absorbed and
radiated in every direction, for on viewing the reflecting sur-
face from any position we may see the metal by its colour;
and, as a rule, any speculum that shows a symptom of this is
not at all suited to its intended purpose, for the surface
should be so invisible as to give the appearance of looking
into space. I should mention here, that refracting transparent
bodies, such as oil-globules, air-bubbles, &c., if colourless, are
incapable of radiating light, and therefore must be seen by the
refraction or internal reflection of the rays from the source of
illumination, and therefore cannot be brought forward as evi-
dence against this theory.
mM 2
148 WENHAM, ON THE THEORY OF THE
I have thought it necessary to comment at some length
upon Mr. Rainey’ S paper, as it is by far the most elaborate
that has appeared on microscopic illumination, and I am de-
sirous of divesting the subject of all unnecessary complexity ;
for I will suppose the microscope itself, when in perfect ad-
justment for spherical and chromatic aes as an instru-
ment that in its action upon objects differs so little in principle,
from the effect of viewing with the naked eye, that all the
combination of lenses may be considered for the time as
forming part and parcel of that organ.
If in adopting this simple view of the case we do not in-
fringe upon Nature’s laws, why should not the illumination
of the object itself be directed by the same rule ; and reviewing
the endless variety of forms and differences of structure, that
we require to investigate by the naked eye, and by considering
the position in which habit directs us to hold or place these
for the purpose of causing the light to impinge upon them in
the most proper direction for ascertaining their configuration
and colour, to endeavour, as far as practicable, to apply a
similar natural mode of throwing the light upon the micro-
scopic object, in all instances where it is of a like contexture.
There are chiefly two circumstances to be considered which
prevent this principle from being directly applied in all cases
to the illumination of objects under the microscope. The
Fig. 1. first is that the effec-
tive aperture of the
object-glass in a
great measure de-
pends upon the angle,
size, and form of the
illuminating-pencil ;
and, secondly, cer-
tain appearances per-
taining to the pro-
perties of light are
developed or ren-
dered visible by the
magnifying power of
the instrument itself.
The annexeddiagram
will serve to explain
the first of these con-
ditions: a, fig. 1, is
the object-glass ; bb,
the extreme rays of
he aperture ; c, the mirror; dd, rays reflected therefrom.
ILLUMINATION OF OBJECTS UNDER THE MICROSCOPE. 149
Suppose a test object, such as the P. angulatum, to be placed
in the focus of the object-glass, and illuminated as thus de-
scribed, but little else than a mere outline will be seen, and the
vision will be rendered rather worse than better by increasing
the intensity of the light. The non-appearance of markings
in this instance arises from the fact that the cone of light from
the mirror has an angle only sufficient to cause a portion of
the aperture of the object-glass to operate effectively, or the
object is seen with the central portion only; for on viewing an
object by intercepted light, with the intention of obtaining the
maximum effect of aperture, all rays converging from every
angle of the objective, and bearing upon the object, should be
directly opposed by rays emanating from the luminous
source ; or, in other words, that the angular aperture of both
the object-glass and achromatic condenser should be the same.
The next consideration is, when the object is illuminated
under the conditions exemplified by fig. 1, what becomes of
the excess of aperture, or such rays from the objective as are
not opposed by the luminous source, or, so to term it,
‘looking into darkness,” as those from lb to d'd’? There
can be no doubt that this portion of the aperture gives a com-
paratively feeble image, arising from the radiations from the
object ; but this does not assist the definition under these cir-
cumstances, and cannot blend with the visible image because
the central direct light is so intense in comparison as com-
pletely to drown the faint image formed by the exterior por-
tion of the aperture of the object-glass.
It now remains to be shown how this radiated image may
by itself be rendered visible. Unscrew the object-glass
without disturbing the other arrangements, and paint an
opaque patch of Indian ink in the centre of the front lens,
with a camel’s-hair brush, of a diameter corresponding to the
space d'd’. Replace the objective, and it will be found that
the patch has obscured nearly all the rays emanating directly
from the mirror, and the object will then be seen entirely by
the exterior portion of the aperture, and rendered visible by its
own radiated light.* The markings now become developed
by the apparently paradoxical fact of destroying an operative
portion of the object-glass; but on considering fig. 1 it will
show that instead of seeing the object with a less area of the
objective, we are seeing it with a greater; for in the first
example the central portion only came into operation, and in
* I have adopted the term “ radiated light” in microscopic illumination,
merely because it is descriptive and convenient, and as a distinction from
light that is simply reflected from polished surfaces, though in other
respects not perhaps philosophically correct.
150 WENHAM, ON THE THEORY OF THE
the second the circumferential. I have found Smith and
Beck’s 4-10th of 90’ a very convenient glass for trying this
experiment; and by carefully centering the patch, I have ob-
tained good definition of the object with a perfectly-black field ;
so completely can the stop be made to cut off the direct rays
from the source of light
It is decidedly preferable to place the patch on the pos-
terior lens of the combination, as its larger size renders the
manipulation more’ easy. In my experiment it was about
1-20th of an inch in diameter. ‘Those who are apprehensive
of causing damage to an object-glass by trying this, may some-
times obtain an approximate effect by holding the point of a
needle just over the object when in the centre of the field of
view. It is due to Mr. Lister to mention, that in his paper
on the “ Achromatic Object-glass,” published in the 120th
volume of the ‘ Transactions of the Royal Society,’ he observes
that “some objects are even better seen when the central rays
are obscured.” I have not brought forward this fact because
1 think it is at all probable that any improvement can ever
be obtained, either in the definition or illumination of objects,
by stopping out the central pencil of the object-glass, but
because the experiment affords a happy illustration of the
relation that the angle of the illuminating-pencil bears to the
aperture of the object-glass. In fig. 1, I have shown the con-
cave mirror in use, and therefore the light is, to some extent,
convergent ; “but with the plain mirror, all the foregoing effects
are quite as, or even more, palpable.
In the illumination of objects by polarized light, when
under view with high powers, for the purpose of obtaining
the maximum effect, it is also requisite that the angle of aper-
ture of the polarizer should be the same as the object-glass,
each ray of which should be directly opposed by a ray of
polarized light. As this circumstance has received but little
attention, [ will offer a few remarks on the polarizing con-
denser. This instrument is merely an ordinary achromatic
condenser of large aperture, close under the bottom lens of
which is placed a plate of tourmaline, used in combination
with a superposed selenite or not, as required. The effect of
this arrangement is in some cases very remarkable, bringing
out strongly colours which are almost invisible by the usual
mode: it is most useful for small bodies, such as the bitumen
granules of the Torbane-hill mineral, &c.
To obtain a greater quantity of light, I would recommend
that the iuminating lenses should be of the same diameter as
a half-inch object-glass of large aperture, for it is oftentimes
a fault with the achromatic coficeneer that these are too small ;
ILLUMINATION OF OBJECTS UNDER THE MICROSCOPE. 15]
for it should be remembered that in all condensing arrange-
ments the intensity of the light as much depends upon the
diameter of the lenses as their angle of aperture. The reason
why this instrument has not received more universal adoption
has been the scarcity and expense of good and large tourma-
lines; but now that Dr. Herapath has made the valuable
discovery of producing them artificially, and the liberal manner
in which he has published all the details of their manufacture
to the world, will no doubt be the means of causing the
polarizing condenser to come more into use,
Before quitting the subject of direct light, I will make one
or two remarks on the known methods of obtaining it. The
plain and concave mirror, or right-angle prism, are the most
generally useful for glasses of low power and small aperture:
in principle these are so well known as to need no comment ;
but for objectives of large aperture there is no instrument
better adapted to its intended purpose than Gillett’s con-
denser, for its series of stops allows us to enlarge or diminish
the angle of the illuminating pencil, and therefore possesses
the valuable property of causing the effective aperture of the
object-glass to be reduced or increased, on the principle just
explained, to suit the description of object under view, thus
in a great measure correcting the false appearance caused by
large apertures in objects of bulk.*
I will now proceed to show the effect of oblique illumina-
tion, and the dependence of the aperture of the object-glass
on its direction.
If the concave mirror be moved slowly sideways from the
axial line of the microscope as shown in fig. 1, the intensity
of the light will gradually diminish, and after a certain time,
the striz or markings of the object (which is supposed to be
the P. angulatum as before) will become more and more
visible, and increase in distinctness, till the least obliquity
of the illuminating pencil is in a direction a few degrees
within the extreme angle of the aperture of the object-glass ;
ee, fig. 1 represents the mirror in this position. The external
rays, f, are shown to enter the objective, but the remaining
portion of the reflected cone of light to f’ passes the exterior
of the aperture without entering.
Every microscopist is familiar with the effect of this expe-
riment, but not with the cause, which may be explained on
precisely the same principle that I have exemplified by the
objective with the central patch. The axial position of the
mirror shown in fig. 1, as I before mentioned, does not permit
* For explanation of which see my Paper on “ Binocular Vision,” ‘ Quart,
Journal of Microscopical Science,’ Oct. 1853. No. 5.
152 WENHAM, ON THE THEORY OF THE
the markings to be seen, because the intense light, and small
angle of illumination, allows only the centre or a small
portion of the aperture of the object-glass to act effectively.
But on moving the mirror aside from the axis of the micro-
scope, a part of the light illuminating the object at length
begins to pass the extreme of the angle of aperture of the
objective, and as the field becomes more obscure, the mark-
ings on the object itself increase in distinctness, simply
because a corresponding portion of the aperture of the object-
glass is called into action in collecting the radiations.
In the position of the mirror, e e, fig. 1, nearly the whole
of the object-glass will be effective, as it will collect the
radiations from the object from every angle within its aperture,
and no portion of the latter will be annulled by the predomi-
nance of the intense rays from the luminous source. Practically
it is found that there is a precise but different angle of illu-
mination required for every aperture of the object-glass, in
order to give the maximum of distinctness; or that will even
at all develop the markings on difficult tests. For if we
continue to increase the angle of the mirror, e, e, the object
first acquires a pearly appearance, and is afterwards seen in a
dark field known as “ Reade’s back-ground illumination,”
and is then rendered visible with a full aperture, entirely by
its own radiations; but the markings have again become in-
distinct or disappear altogether, showing that it is needful
to allow a small portion of the light from the source of illu-
mination to pass into the object-glass, and through the object,
that the striae may either be rendered more visible by the
rays that they intercept, or that the field shall be partly
luminous.
There is one peculiar phenomenon attendant upon oblique
illumination at certain angles in one direction, and may be
described as a double image, or kind of overlying shadow,
having in some instances markings equally distinct with those
on the object itself. This appearance has been termed the
“ diffracting spectrum” among men of science. ‘Taking the
name to be descriptive, | sought for an explanation in the
known laws of the diffraction of light, but these did not
account for it, for on this theory I attempted to find the clue
in vain. I have since traced the cause entirely to the mutual
dependence of the angles of illumination and aperture, de-
tailed in this paper. One image is caused by the radiations
from the object entering one portion of the object-glass, and
a different one by the object being directly seen by intercepted
light with the other extreme of the aperture, thus giving the
appearance of a double image. ° In proof of this, hold a card
ILLUMINATION OF OBJECTS UNDER THE MICROSCOPE. 153
over that side of the front lens of the objective which receives
the light from the luminous source, and one image will dis-
appear: on reversing the card, so as to cut off the other
extreme, the first image will appear again, and the second
vanish.
The “ diffracting spectrum” may also be produced at
pleasure, in an object illuminated by direct light, and seen
with a large aperture, by holding a needle or horse-hair
before the front lens, so as to split the pencil into two parts.
The above misnomer led me somewhat astray, as is oftentimes
the case in matters of science, where terms are applied to
phenomena that are not understood, but I have no doubt
that the explanation that I have here given is the true one;
if necessary, I could adduce further proof, but any one
desirous of testing it will find other corroborative facts,
It is well known that besides the detriment to the definition
of the object, caused by the double image just described,
there are other errors created by oblique light from one side
only, such as blending a series of dots into lines, &c. I sug-
gested about four years ago, that these defects should be
neutralized or “ counteracted by a pencil of light of similar
form and intensity thrown on the object at the same angle
from an opposite direction.” To effect this, I proposed that
two of Nachet’s prisms should be placed oppositely, under-
neath the stage of the microscope, with a dark well between
them: this led me to the discovery of the principle of throw-
ing the light on the object circularly, and preventing “ the
central direct rays” from the illuminator from entering the
object-glass, by means of a dark well or stop, as illustrated by
my parabolic condenser. My paper on this subject was pub-
lished in vol. iii. of the ‘Transactions of the Microscopical
Society, March 1850,’ but I regret that an insufficient detail
of the principles involved, and a want of care in the expres-
sion, should have given rise to some insidious misconstruction ;
but as a proof of the utility and correctness of my theory, I
have only to mention the many applications of it that have
since that time come into general use, in the way of adapting
central stops to the achromatic condenser, single and com-
pound lenses, &ce.
There are some appearances connected with oblique illu-
mination, on closely-lined glass micrometers and tests, which
would occupy too much space to enter upon here; but on a
future occasion, I will make this the subject of a separate
communication, as [ shall soon have in hand an apparatus that
will illustrate the changes of prismatic colours, with different
angles of illumination and vision.
154 WENHAM, ON THE THEORY OF THE
I have now to treat of such methods of illumination as do
not interfere with the aperture of the object-glass, or affect the
properties of light, and are, therefore, so simple in their
action as to allow us to consider the microscope when in
use as forming part of the eye, and to judge of the quality
and direction of the light required by a consideration of the
simple laws of nature, comprised in the illumination of all
surrounding bodies of comparative form and texture.
The first relates to ordinary opaque illumination, by merely
condensing the light on the object, either by means of a
Lieberkiihn’s lens, or side reflector: this is too simple to need
any comment, and is mostly used for objects that are nearly
destitute of transparency, and therefore cannot be seen in any
other way.
The next is “ Reade’s background illumination,” in which
the light is thrown under the object in such a direction as to
avoid or pass by the aperture of the object-glass, and give a
black field. The structure under view, if large, must possess
a sufficient degree of transparency to allow the light to enter
into its substance, and be diffused or radiated therefrom in all
directions. This method is but little used, on account of the
light being feeble and partial, and because shadows are thrown
in one direction.
When the stop of my parabolic condenser is raised, so as
to obtain a black field, it is nothing more in principle than
the ‘ background illumination” carried round the circle, and
the object, though transparent, is rendered visible by the
operation of the same laws which enable us to see an opaque
substance. I will therefore make use of the same illustration
as on a former occasion. Lay a black wafer upon a sheet of
white paper, and hold the wing of a fly a small distance above
it; this evidently appears to be transparent, though no light
passes directly through it into the eye. ‘The object also shows
an iridescent play of colours, from the decomposition of the
light thrown upon its surface by the surrounding hemisphere.
The Jast is a condition that I have found wanting in my
paraboloid, for if we illuminate with it such objects as
feathers, foot of a diamond beetle, of scales, &c. by artificial
light, instead of brilliant colours, the surface will have a dull
leaden aspect.
I have endeavoured to imitate the effect of the vault of the
universe, by the method shown by fig. 2: @ a, is the parabolic
condenser, b b, the glass slide upon which the object is
mounted ; this also serves to support the hemispherical re-
jlector, cc: the top of this is cut away so as to leave an
opening of sufficient size to admit the nozzles of any one of
ILLUMINATION OF OBJECTS UNDER THE MICROSCOPE. 155
the object-glasses. It will be seen that when the centre of the
hemisphere and focus of the Fig, 2.
parabola are coincident, the
light passing the object being
incident at right angles on the
spherical surface, will be re-
flected directly back again,
and so illuminate the upper
surface of the latter. The
reflector that I have used is
made of silver; but I propose
to construct them of a zone
cut from a blown-glass bulb,
of about one inch in diameter,
silvered by Drayton’s process, .
and cemented into a brass cup with electrical cement. I be-
lieve that Lieberkiihn’s might be made in the same way, as they
would then have the advantage of not being liable to tarnish,
and would bear to be wiped. I have found the upper
reflector just described to answer its peculiar purpose ; and
before quitting this head, | must express my desire of divesting
the principle of all complexity, by again stating, that the
parabolic condenser is merely a modification of opaque illu-
mination applied to transparent objects, and that it gives a
degree of intensity to the light not obtainable by any other
method.
When strictly opaque bodies of minute size, such as shells,
grains of sand, calcareous particles, &c. are illuminated, even
without the upper reflector, they are seen after the usual
manner of all opaque objects. On the other hand, when such
substances as show colour only when exhibited as transpa-
rencies, such as bits of clear and well-polished stained glass,
are placed over the paraboloid, they will be quite invisible ;
but if the surface be greasy, or covered with dust, the colour
of the glass may be known by similar coloured radiations
from these particles.
When we take a small object into the hand for examination,
without any direct appeal to the reasoning faculties, a sort of
instinct usually guides us to hold it in one of two positions,
either against a dark body, or over a sheet of white paper, as
may be most suitable for the development of the structure or
colour of the substance. The first of these conditions is
already imitated, in its application to the microscope, by the
parabolic condenser, by means of which the light is thrown
on the object “from every azimuth,” as Mr, Shadbolt has
aptly termed it.
156 WENHAM, ON THE THEORY OF THE
The second position, which gives such delicate vision of
some substances, does not appear to have been truly consi-
dered in its relative application to the illumination of micro-
scopic objects. It is true that in the place of the mirror, a
plaster-of- Paris, or enamel plate, has been applied, for obtain-
ing the effect of a white cloud, and used either with or without
interposed condensing lenses; but this does not quite answer
to the conditions above referred to, for the rays diffused from
a sheet of paper will pass, from every angle and direction,
through the under surface of the object, and if this is held
close, not only is the light more intense, but some portion of
it must enter at very oblique incidences. The first step
towards obtaining a corresponding effect in the microscope is
to lay the slide on a sheet of clean white paper, and to throw
a strong light upon it through and around the object, by
means of the bull’s-eye lens. In some instances, this gives a
very good result, but if the object is large, it casts a shadow
upon the paper, which mars its whiteness; it is therefore
better to employ a small enamel or plaster-of-Paris disc in
the place of the common dark well: this can be lowered suffi-
ciently to cause the shadow to recede from the field of view.
A thick black line should be drawn across the white disc,
which may in certain cases be brought directly under some
objects, by turning the supporting arm sideways; this will
sometimes be found materially to assist the development of
their structure: some tests acquire a pearly appearance from
the oblique radiations from the enamel surface.
The method just explained gives some promise, but can
only be used well with the lowest powers, and even with
these, it is scarcely possible to condense the light on the disc
sufficiently strongly. The close proximity of the highest powers
to the object prevents the disc from being illuminated in this
way ; it is therefore necessary to use a diffusing film of partial
transparency, in order that it may be lighted from underneath.
I have had much difficulty in finding a material that will
diffuse light well, and yet be microscopically structureless ;
for example, finely-ground glass diffuses transmitted light, but
the grey appearance is caused by the contrary prismatic effects
of an aggregation of bright fractures, which however minute
they may be, are singly still larger than many of the objects
to be viewed, so that instead of the illumination being a
diffused, it may chance to be an oblique chromatic one.
I have tried various kinds of enamel, but the best material that
I have yet found is unbleached or yellow bees’-wax ; this con-
sists of numberless minute spherules which disperse the light
very effectually.
ILLUMINATION OF OBJECTS UNDER THE MICROSCOPE. 157
The method of applying this is as follows: select two
circles of thin glass about one-quarter of an inch in diameter,
and place a shaving of the wax between them, then warm the
whole slightly, and compress the wax, till on looking through
it the flame of a candle just begins to appear visible. The
disc is then to be mounted in a piece of tube, of a size suffi-
cient to cause it to slide easily over the top of the ordinary
achromatic condenser, so that the film may be adjusted exactly
in its focus. When the apparatus is fitted in place, throw the
light through the full aperture of the condenser, by means of
the concave mirror, and bring the intensely-bright spot of
diffused light thus formed, close under the object, by the rack
and pinion: thus, for a trifling expense, a most useful and
simple illuminator may be procured; but there is still much
improvement to be expected, from the discovery of a better
diffusing material than bees’-wax, but this I have not up to
this time succeeded in finding.
The methods of illumination last described serve to show
some objects which cannot be seen with the paraboloid,
though others are equally well displayed with both. The
effect of diffused light is to give a greater depth or perspective
to the object, or a more just appreciation of distance between
particles, or superimposed tissues, together with an agreeable
softness, and an entire absence of the interference caused by the
decomposition of direct light, which is known to act so preju-
dicially to the definition of some objects illuminated in the
ordinary way. ‘There is also another fact worthy of notice: it
is observed how difficult it is to examine glass tubes, without
our being deceived by direct reflection or refractions, but if we
illuminate sponge-spicules (which are literally minute glass
tubes) with diffused light when under the microscope, we get
rid of these refractions, and they appear perfectly smooth, and
their tubular structure is quite evident, for the diffusing film
answers a similar purpose to the ground-glass shade or cap of
the kaleidoscope which prevents the direct refraction of light
from taking place, through the enclosed broken pieces of
coloured glass.
I will suggest, that perhaps in some cases another diffusing
dise, perforated and placed over the object, might be of adyan-
tage, so as to enclose it in a kind of luminous tent.
In conclusion, I must state, that I have carried the foregoing
subject to a greater length than I had previously intended, and
yet omitted some curious facts relating to illumination througn
coloured media, as possessing no great amount of practical
utility, for monochromatic light was originally suggested for
the purpose of remedying a defect in the objective; but as
158 HEPWORTH, ON THE FOOT OF THE FLY.
these are now made so as to be incapable of decomposing
compound light, all such methods must consequently be con-
sidered obsolete.
In advocating the principle of copying from natural effects,
in the application of illumination to microscopic objects, I
believe that I have advanced nothing that is preposterous, but
flatter myself that I have already made some successful ad-
vances in this direction, and I am of opinion that by keeping
this point in view ‘in effecting improvements, good will result
from it in that department, where the microscope is most use-
fully employed in the examination of all ordinary objects, and
if the binocular microscope should eventually approach to
perfection, and thus enable us to combine natural vision with
natural illumination, it will give to objects an appearance of
reality of which we can at present form but little conception.
And, finally, as all the observations here detailed are the
result of direct experiment, I advance them with confidence ;
and if I have brought forward but little that is novel, I
venture to hope by the explanation that I have given of the
relation that angles of aperture and illumination bear to each
other, that I have cleared away some part of the fog that has
prevented this portion of the subject from being in many
instances more clearly understood,
On the Structure of the Foor of the Fry. By Joun Hrp-
worTH, Esq., Surgeon.
Havine paid some attention to the structure of insects, I have
carefully examined the fly’s foot (Musca domestica, &c.), and
finding much misapprehension on the subject still existing (in
arecent popular publication), I thought a few remarks might
not be uninteresting to some of the readers of this Journal,
and lead to a further investigation by some one more expe-
rienced in these matters than myself. Some months after |
had arrived at my conclusions I met with the following remarks,
some of which come nearer my own ideas than anything I
have yet met with: —
‘“¢ Another interesting peculiarity observable in the domestic
fly arises from the structure of its feet, enabling it to walk
with the greatest facility, not only upon upright surfaces, but
also upon the ceilings of rooms, back downwards, without its
position being disturbed in consequence of being contrary to
gravity. Much diversity of opinion has taken place amongst
naturalists upon this curious subject ; and even in the latest
works we find the matter still fornting a “ questio vexata.”
HEPWORTH, ON THE FOOT OF THE FLY. 159
Dr. Derham, in his ‘ Physico-Theology,’ speaking of the
means whereby insects maintain their position upon smooth
surfaces, states that “divers flies and other insects, besides
their sharp-hooked nails, have also skinny palms to their feet,
to enable them to stick to glass and other smooth bodies by
means of the pressure of the atmosphere, after the manner as
I have seen boys carry heavy stones, with only a wet piece of
leather clapped on the top of a stone.” Gilbert White, of
Selborne, adopted Derham’s opinion, adding that, although
the flies are easily enabled, from their lightness and alertness,
to overcome the weight of air in warm weather, yet that in the
decline of the year this resistance becomes too mighty for
their diminished strength, and we see flies labouring along,
and lugging their feet in windows as if they stuck fast to the
glass, and it is with the utmost difficulty that they can draw
one foot from another, and disengage their hollow caps from
the slippery surface.
This opinion, which has been entertained by the majority
of entomologists of the present day, has acquired additional
weight by the elaborate investigations of Sir Everard Home,
undertaken at the suggestion of Sir Joseph Banks, with the
assistance of that (then) unrivalled microscopic artist, M. Bauer,
and published in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions’ for 1816.
The suckers, of which several kinds of flies possess three to
each foot, are attached beneath the base of the claws, and are
of an oval shape and membranous texture, being convex above,
having the sides minutely serrated, and the under concave
surface covered with down or hairs. In order to cause the
alleged vacuum, these suckers are extended ; but when the fly
wished to raise its legs, they are brought together, and folded
up as it were between the hooks. Messrs. Kirby and Spence
have likewise adopted this opinicn, considering it as ‘* proved
most satisfactorily.” Other authors of no mean repute have,
however, entertained a different opinion, and have entirely re-
jected the idea of a vacuum being produced. Thus Dr. Hooke
describes the suckers as palms or soles, beset underneath with
small bristles or tenters, like the cone teeth of a card for work-
ing wool, which he conceives gives them a strong hold upon
objects, having irregular or yielding surfaces ; and he imagined
that there is upon glass a kind of smoky substance, penetrable
by the points of these bristles. The same opinion is also
given by Shaw in his ‘ Nature Displayed ;’ and more recently
Mr. Blackwall has considered that the motions of the fly are
to be accounted for upon mechanical principles alone ; thus,
upon inspecting the structure of the parts of the suckers, “it
was immediately perceived that the function ascribed to them
160 HEPWORTH, ON THE FOOT OF THE FLY.
by Dr. Derham and Sir E. Home is quite incompatible with
their organisation. Minute hairs, very closely set and directed
downwards, so completely cover the inferior surface of the
expanded membranes, improperly denominated suckers, with
which the terminal joint of the foot of flies is provided, that it
cannot possibly be brought into contact with the object on
which those insects move by any muscular force they are
capable of exerting; the production ef a vacuum between
each membrane aid the plane of position is, therefore, clearly
impracticable, unless the numerous hairs on the under side of
these organs individually perform tlie office of suckers; and
there does not appear to be anything in their mechanism which
in the slightest degree countenances such: an hypothesis.
When highly magnified, their extremities, it is true, are seen
to be somewhat enlarged ; but when they are viewed in action
or in repose, they never assume a figure at all adapted to the
formation of a vacuum.” Moreover, on enclosing a house-fly
in the receiver of an air-pump, ‘it was demignkiaatad to the
entire satisfaction of several intelligent gentlemen present that
the fly, while it retais its vital powers unimpaired, cannot
only traverse the upright sides, but even the interior of the
dome of an exhausted receiver; and that the cause of its re-
laxing its hold, and ultimately falling from the station it
occupied, was a diminution of muscular force, attributable to
impeded respiration.” Hence Mr. B. is induced to believe
that insects are enabled to take hold of any roughness, or
irregularity of surface, by means of the fine hairs composing
the brushes, the most carefully-polished glass not being found
free from flaws and imperfections when viewed in a favour-
able light with a powerful lens. A still different opinion has
been maintained by other authors upon this subject, who,
setting aside all idea of a vacuum, have conjectured that the
suckers, as they have been termed, contain a glutinous secre-
tion, capable of adhering to well-cleaned glass; thus, Abbé
de la Pluche states, that when the fly marches over any
polished body, on which neither her claws nor her points can
fasten, she sometimes compresses her sponge, and causes it to
evacuate a fluid, which fixes her in such a manner as prevents
her falling, without diminishing the facility of her progress ;
“« but it is much more probable,” he adds, ‘that the sponges
correspond with the fleshy balls which accompany the claws
of dogs and cats, and that they enable the fly to proceed with
a softer pace, and contribute to the preservation of its claws,
whose pointed extremities would soon be impaired without
this prevention. Notwithstanding the ridicule which has been
thrown upon this opinion in a “eGo entomological work, it
HEPWORTH, ON THE FOOT OF THE FLY. 161
appears, from still more recent investigations, to be the best
founded of any hitherto advanced. Thus, an anonymous
writer has published an account of various experiments and
examinations upon this subject, which appear satisfactorily to
prove that it is not by the application of extremely small
points to invisible irregularities on the surface of glass that
the pulvilli or suckers are attached, but by simple adhesion
of the enlarged ends of the hairs, assisted by a fluid that is
probably secreted there ; and the author is, therefore, reduced
to refer the effect to molecular attraction only. It is also
stated that when the foot is detached, a distinct fluid trace will
often be left by each individual hair, the spotty pattern thus
left on the glass appearing to be of an oily character, for if
breathed on it remains after the moisture is evaporated. The
contrary opinion, although contained in a review of Mr. Black-
wall’s Memoir, above noticed, was evidently written in igno-
rance of the subsequent observations of that author contained
in the appendix of the volume in which it appeared, and in
which several facts are stated, which appear “quite inex-
plicable, except on the supposition that an adhesive secretion
is emitted by the instruments employed in climbing ;” and it
is subsequently affirmed that careful and repeated examina-
tions made with lenses of moderately high magnifying powers,
in a strong light, and at a favourable angle, speedily convinced
Mr, Blackwell that his conjecture was well founded, as he
never failed to discover “ unequivocal evidence of its truth.”
— fistory of Insects, London, 18385.
In general the foot of the fly is described as being com-
posed of two hooks and two flaps, or hollow cups, which act
as suckers. Rymer Jones, in his ‘ General Outlines of the
Animal Kingdom,’ 1841, says, “The house-fly is furnished
with a pair of membranous flaps, which, under a good micro-
scope, are seen to be covered with innumerable hairs of the
utmost delicacy ; these flaps, or suckers as they might be
termed, adhere,” &c. In the publication alluded to in the
commencement, September Number, 1853, the writer says,
** In addition to the two hooks upon the last joint of the foot,
we of tenmeet with flaps or suckers, Kc., which,” he goes on
to say, ‘are beset with long stiff hairs, to keep them from
dust and injury.” The flap varies in form in different species
from an irregular circle to that of an irregular triangle, and,
viewing it from one side, it is somewhat thicker at its base
(near its attachment), the under surface being, when isolated,
convex, but perfectly flat, as a whole, when applied to a
surface of that form. It appeared to be composed of an
upper and under layer of areolar tissue, or something similar
VOL. It. N
162 HEPWORTH, ON THE FOOT OF THE FLY,
to it, between which a bundle of tubes, along with the fasci-
culi of a large muscle, pass; these are placed at its base,
and (sometimes protected by a coat of mail, formed by long
scales overwrapping each other, as a Wienevnal blind, or in
alternate ones, as the scales on a fish, &c., but more frequently
wanting) expand in a radiated form ; each tube, as it passes
along with its fellows on each side, gives off a number of
tubules alternately with them; these dip downwards from
the under surface, and become expanded into trumpet-shaped
extremities, the flap becoming thinner and thinner as it
approaches its margin, which sometimes terminates in an
irregularly serrated edge, and at others by finely-pointed
hairs. ‘The fly has the power of attaching itself to smooth
surfaces by these trumpet-shaped extremities, and also of
secreting a fluid from them when vigorous, and has occa-
sion to make extra exertions ; but in a partially dormant state
(the best for making observations), it does not appear to be
able to give out this secretion, although it can still attach
itself; indeed this fluid is ae essential for that purpose:
when it is secreted, it is deposited on the glass with great
regularity. I have often attempted to preserve these mark-
ings, by applying colouring matter whilst they were moist ;
but have not yet succeeded, The tubules are often seen pro-
truding from under the margin of the flap in a semiarch-like
form, giving it a fringed appearance. ‘The foot of the male
Dytiscus is a type, not only of many of the beetle tribe (not
aquatic), but of the whole of that of flies possessed of flaps. The
first joints of the tarsus of the anterior legs of this insect are ex-
cessively dilated, so as to form a broad circular palette (fig. 1,
Plate V.). On examining the inferior surface of this expanded
portion, it is seen to be covered with a great number of suck-
ing cups, two or three (three in the specimen, fig. 1, a, b, b)
being larger than the rest, but they form collectively a won-
derful instrument of adhesion. Fig. 1, ce, represents the small
suckers ; fig. 2 and 3, the same enlarged, as they appear when
mounted, and viewed with a power giving about 225 diame-
ters. Fig. 4 (50 diameters) is the foot of a rather large fly,
which shows the parts so well, that I have chosen it; it isone
which appears to subsist on pollen, and is found on umbel-
liferous plants. The parts are too obvious to require a de-
scription. I would remark that the edges of the flaps have
got turned in mounting, which shows the suckers more dis-
tinctly. Fig. 5 (550 diameters), an enlarged view of the
portion of Fig. 4, a. Fig. 5, 6, appearance of the under
(through the upper) layer of the flap, showing the points
from which the tubules are given off. Fig. 6 back, Fig. 7
DR. ALLMAN, ON THE STARCH GRANULE. 163
front, and Fig. 8, 9, side views, when isolated and at rest.
Fig. 10 foot of horse or gad fly, seen from above. Fig. 11,
the under surface of a fly’s foot, as presented to the eye when
in action. The outlines of the sketches have been taken with
the camera lucida.
Linear Inch.
The length of tubules from the under alae es 8
of the flap, vary from - - T2059 TE0
Distance of rows - - - - sta 10 qahss
Expanded ends at rest (being much raed Nas
when inaction - - x a 3000 © To000
Thickness of shaft of tubules = Ags 80 Shas
REMARKS on the INVOLUTION THEORY of the STARCH GRA-
NULE, and on the probable Structure of this Bedy. By GEo.
James ALLMAN, M.D., M.R.I.A., Professor of Botany in
the University of Dublin.*
Iv is now about twenty years since Fritzsche published the
results of a series of careful and elaborate observations on the
structure of the starch granule.j Fritzsche examined starch
obtained from the potato and from several other plants, and
concluded that the granule was composed of a series of layers
of entirely similar composition, surrounding a minute central
body or “nucleus,” whose behaviour under certain circum-
stances rendered it probable that it differed chemically from
the surrounding layers : he maintained that in the formation
of the starch granule these layers are deposited one over the
other from within outwards, and that the peculiar concentric
striz visible in the granule indicate the surfaces of contact of
the layers.
In this view Fritzsche places himself in direct opposition to
Raspail, who had just asserted that the starch granule was a
vesicle consisting of an external thin wall, insoluble in water,
and enclosing soluble contents, and that the striae were merely
superficial markings.
Since the publication of Fritzsche’s memoir, which must be
considered as the basis of all the knowledge we at present
possess on the structure of the starch granule, numerous
observers have applied themselves to the investigation of this
body, and have advanced very different and often contradictory
views as the result of their inquiries. So great, however, are
the difficulties by which the subject is surrounded, that, so far
* Read at a meeting of the Royal Irish Academy, Jan. 9, 1854, and
communicated by the Author.
+ Poggendorff’s Annalen, 1834.
164 DR. ALLMAN, ON THE STARCH GRANULE.
as the structure and genesis of the granule are concerned, our
positive knowledge can scarcely be said to have advanced a
single step beyond the condition in which it had been left by
the memoir of Fritzsche.
Amid the different conflicting statements* respecting the
structure of the starch granule, there has recently been ad-
vanced a view which at first sight appeared to lead to most
important results, as giving us an entirely new and unexpected
conception of this difficult question.
M. Martin,} of Vienna, desirous of observing the changes
which take place in potato starch during the action of hot
water, contrived a simple expedient by which these changes
could be watched under the microscope through the whole
course of their progress. From observations thus conducted
he arrived at the conclusion that the phenomena which occur
during the action of hot water on the starch granule consist
essentially in an evalution or unrolling of a compressed vesi-
cle ; that the starch granule, therefore, in its natural condition,
is really a vesicle compressed into a disc-shaped body, and
having its edges rolled inwards upon themselves, while the
concentric striz indicate the coils of the sort of volute thus
formed.
This theory, presenting as it does an exceedingly elegant
and attractive view of the subject, and appearing to be the
result of careful observation, naturally excited much interest.
In the third Number of the present ‘ Journal’ is a valuable
paper on the starch granule by Mr. Busk: in this paper,
accompanied by beautiful figures, the author details a series
of interesting and accurate observations, which he believes
tend to confirm in all essential particulars the theory of
Martin. Instead of observing the granules under the action
of hot water, in the way done by Martin, Mr. Busk adopts the
more easy process of acting on the granule by strong sul-
phuric acid, and watching the successive stages through which
it passes during the continued action of the acid. The effect
of the sulphuric acid is very similar to that of hot water, and
whatever conclusions are derivable from the one method of
experimenting seem equally to follow from the other.
Notwithstanding, however, the accuracy which it is impos-
sible to deny to the observations of the German and English
naturalists, I have been led, after carefully repeating their
experiments, to arrive at an entirely different conclusion, and
* For an analysis of the more important views concerning the structure
of the starch granule, I may refer the reader to Mr. Busk’s paper in the
third number of this Journal.
+ Philosophical Magazine, April 1852.
DR. ALLMAN, ON THE STARCH GRANULE. 165
it is chiefly with the hope of eliminating from the already
too-complicated history of the starch granule, a new element
of confusion which the theory of Martin appears to me to have
introduced into it, that I publish my own researches on the
subject.
If potato starch,* exposed for three or four weeks to the
action of a solution of iodine, formed by mixing about equal
parts of water and the common tincture of iodine, and a few
of the deep indigo-blue granules, be then placed on a slip
of glass under the microscope, and wetted with a drop of
dilute sulphuric acid (about three parts strong acid and one
water), the granules will immediately begin to swell, but
much more slowly and to a less extent than in the case of un-
iodinized granules. When the swelling consequent upon the
action of the acid has ceased, many of the granules may be
seen with several of their lamellz beautifully dissected from one
another, exhibiting frequently considerable intervals between
the layers, and demonstrating, in the most complete manner,
the composition of the granule out of a series of concentric
shells (Pl. VI., figs. 1, 2). The condition thus produced seems
to be due to the iodinized granule not admitting of a suffi-
ciently-uniform expansion of all its parts at the same time, so
that some of the layers tear themselves away from the others.
It frequently happens that some of the external layers will
become ruptured, and by then peeling off like the coats of
a bulb, will render the structure still more evident (fig. 2).
The mode of operating just described is perhaps the most
certain in causing the detachment of the layers from one
another, but the same phenomenon may be produced by other
means. Payenj has figured the exfoliation of starch granules,
which, after being exposed to a high heat without moisture,
were then wetted with water; and Schacht§ describes a
similar effect from the action of a solution of iodine in chlo-
ride of zinc. If the starch be exposed to heat upon a metallic
plate till it has acquired a light-brown colour, the strie will
be observed in many of the granules, when examined under
the microscope, to have become even more distinct than
before the operation of the heat, while the spot corresponding
* The observations contained in the present paper are to be understood,
except when otherwise stated, as having been made upon the starch of the
potato. I have examined, however, very many varieties of starch, and in
no case has anything been seen to invalidate the views here taken.
+ It seldom occurs that more than four or five distinctly separated shells
become visible in this experiment ; each of them, however, must be sup-
posed to be composed of a greater or smaller number of primitive lamellz.
f Mémoires sur les Développements des Végéteaux.
§ Die Pflanzenzelle.
166 DR. ALLMAN, ON THE STARCH GRANULE.
to the nucleus of Fritzsche will have become much enlarged,
and is now plainly a cavity filled with an aeriform fluid. If
to these granules, first moistened with a weak solution of
iodine, in iodide of potassium, so as to tinge them of a dight-
bine colour without destroying their transparency, the dilute
sulphuric acid be applied, a very beautiful detachment of the
lamelle will generally take place (figs. 3, 4).
Some other effects produced by heat upon the starch granule
may here be mentioned, as they would seem to throw addi-
tional light upon its structure. Let potato starch be placed in a
small quantity of water, and exposed to heat until the moment
that the whole assumes the condition of a thick paste. Ifa
minute portion of this paste be now removed on the point of a
needle from the sur pface of the mass, and placed ina drop of water
on the stage of the microscope, it will be found to consist chiefly
of granules, on which the action of the hot water has apparently
but just commenced. In these (figs. 5, 6) a slight enlargement
of the entire granule has taken place, the concentric striz are
still very visible, the central cavity has hecome much enlarged,
and now presents several radiating offsets, which are directed
towards the thick end of the granule, while numerous delicate
strie may be seen passing off from the cavity in the same
direction, and intersecting the various lamella. It is plainly
in the course of these striz that the offsets from the cavity
take place: these offsets are simple fissures passing through
the lamella; and the whole structure, now described, indicates
the existence of definite lines of cleavage at right angles with
the lamelle.
There is another mode of examining the starch granule
which also tends to throw light upon its structure. By mixing
the starch with gum-water, as originally practised by Raspail,
and more recently by Schleiden, and allowing the mass to dry,
we may, by means of a sharp razor, cut off very thin slices:
these slices will contain sections of the granules passing
through many different planes. When placed in water under
the microscope, the cut surfaces may generally be seen to pre-
sent, with various degrees of distinctness, a greater or smaller
number of concentrically curved lines, each returning into
itself. If the divided granules be weakly iodinized, and
treated with the dilute sulphuric acid, they will swell up in
the same way as the perfect granules, and some of the sections
will then be seen to have opened into a large central cavity,
rendering the vesicular nature of the swollen granule a matter
of absolute certainty (fig. 7).
The observations now recorded leave in my mind no doubt
whatever of the formation of the starch granule out of a series
DR. ALLMAN, ON THE STARCH GRANULE. 167
of independent lamellz in the form of hollow shells included
one within the other. Another question of importance re-
mains to be determined, namely, whether all these lamelle are
in every respect similar to one another, chemically and physi-
cally, from the most external to the most internal.
In no case can there be detected any difference between
them in their behaviour towards iodine. All parts of the
granule, from the circumference to the centre, appear to be
similarly acted on by this reagent. While, however, the
starch granule is thus most probably chemically identical,
from its surface to its centre, there is, on the other hand,
reason to believe that a decided physical difference exists be-
tween the outer and the inner lamelle.
The united action of sulphuric and acetic acid on the gra-
nule is very remarkable, and the following experiment seems
capable of throwing much light on this question. Let the
granules, after being tinged of a pale blue, by a weak solution
of iodine in iodide of potassium, be placed upon the glass
stage, and treated, in the way described above, with the dilute
sulphuric acid. They will immediately present the pheno-
mena characteristic of the action of sulphuric acid, and will
swell to many times their original size. After the action of
the acid has continued for about a minute, let a drop of strong
acetic acid be applied, and the whole covered with a bit of
thin glass. On now examining the preparation under the mi-
croscope, a remarkable change will be seen to have taken
place. The swollen granules will continue to present a_per-
fectly even outline, but in their interior may be seen a wrin-
kled membrane, which has detached itself, more or less, from
the more external parts of the granule. The granule is now,
in fact, most distinctly seen to be a vesicle, from whose walls
the internal structures have detached themselves. These
structures, by the continued action of the acetic acid, become
more and more contracted, and will at last be frequently seen
as a small irregular mass, lying like a nucleus upon the wall
of the vesicle, and giving to the latter almost exactly the ap-
pearance of a nucleated cell. Figures 8, 9, 10, 11, exhibit
different appearances of the granule under the action of the
acetic acid, as seen in the starch of the colchicum autumnale.
It is here plain that the corrugated membrane consists of a
certain number of the internal lamella which have been acted
on by the acids in a different way from what takes place in the
external ones, and we have thus a proof of a decided difference
between the outer and inner lamella. This difference is doubt-
less merely physical, and probably depends on the different
ages of the lamella. It sometimes happens that a second ap-
168 DR. ALLMAN, ON THE STARCH GRANULE.
plication of the acetic acid is necessary for the success of the
experiment, and if the granules have been too long exposed to
the action of the sulphuric acid before the application of the
acetic, the characteristic effect cannot be produced. The ex-
periment is most striking in its result on the small and middle-
sized granules. Though the acetic acid is the more certain
and decided in its action, yet a very marked distinction be-
tween the internal and external portions of the granule will
be frequently manifested, by the addition of cold water just
after the action of the sulphuric acid.
It has been already stated, that when the starch granule
is exposed to a high heat, as in the process of roasting,
the spot corresponding to the ‘nucleus’ of Fritzsche, becomes
distended into a cavity of considerable size. Now, if the
granules with the central cavity thus distended, be placed in
water, the water will be rapidly absorbed until it fills the
cavity; and if a drop of acetic acid be then added, the con-
tents of the cavity will immediately assume a granular condi-
tion, while the rest of the granule remains unaltered. The
granules taken from the surface of the paste, already described,
frequently exhibit a similar granular condition of the contents
of the cavity, even without the application of any reagent.
This granular matter is coloured blue by iodine, and its
occurrence would seem to indicate that starch in an amorphous,
or, at least, non-lamellar state, constitutes the proper contents
of the nucleus of Fritzsche, which must itself be viewed as a
minute cavity.
It now remains to examine the phenomena presented by
potato starch during the action of hot water, and of certain
mineral acids, with the view of determiming whether these
phenomena may not admit of some other explanation than
those offered by Martin and Busk ; for if the account just given
of the structure of the granule be the true one, these observers
must have misinterpreted the appearances.*
When I first repeated the experiments of Martin and Busk,
I must confess that | became an entire believer in the theory
of involution, so distinctly did the granules appear to develop
themselves under the microscope by a process of unfolding.
My adhesion was especially given to the modification of
Martin’s views advocated by Busk, who maintains that the
evolution of the granule consists athe in an unfolding of
plates, or ruge, than i in the unwinding of rolls. During some
further observations, however, on fie starch granule, certain
facts presented jhemedives which did not admit of explanation
in accordance with the involution theory, and I am now fully
convinced that the phenomena presented, admit of quite a dif-
DR. ALLMAN, ON THE STARCH GRANULE. 169
ferent explanation from that given by the advocates of inyo-
lution.
I believe that the appearances, referred to a process of
unrolling or unfolding, depend upon the different degrees of
rapidity with which the various parts of the granule expand
under the action of the reagents. Confining ourselves to the
action of sulphuric acid, as being the most easily observed,
and being in all essential points exactly the same as that of
hot water, we shall find that the immediate action of the acid
is to cause a swelling up of the external parts of the granule.
Now this expansion does not take place uniformly ; and during
the first moments of the action, a great number of delicate
rugee may be witnessed, which generally surround the granule
in regular and very pretty wavy rings. These ruge now
rapidly become deeper, then fewer, larger, and more irregular,
and then all at once disappearing, the granule has become
greatly increased in size, and lies as a smooth, or slightly cor-
rugated vesicle, on the object-holder of the microscope. All
these stages go on so rapidly, that it is exceedingly difficult to
follow them. Most of them are represented in Mr. Busk’s
paper, and they so exactly resemble a process of unfolding of
plice as very naturally to lead the observer to refer them ta
such a process. It appears to me, however, quite certain,
from repeated and careful observations, that there is no un-
folding as a primary phenomenon, but that certain parts of
the granule being more speedily acted on by the acid than the
neighbouring parts, swell out into prominent ridges, leaving,
of course, furrows and depressions between them, which, in
their turn, respond to the action of the acid, and now unfold
themselves from between the ridges. While the process of
unfolding, therefore, may, to a certain extent, be viewed as
real, it depends on a condition which is only a secondary phe-
nomenon, belonging exclusively to the granule after it has
undergone certain alterations induced by the action of the
acid.
The appearances just described are best seen in the larger
granules : in the smaller ones, the well-developed and regular
rugz, which, in the larger, show themselves during the first
moments of the action of the acid, are not generally produced ;
but immediately after the application of the acid, the smaller
granules will for the most part be seen to present, in one spot,
a deep depression, caused by the more rapid distension of the
surrounding parts ; and this depression itself, receiving imme-
diately afterwards the full action of the acid, will roll out-
wards, and become more and more shallow as the granule
continues to expand, while the latter, after passing through a
170 DR. ALLMAN, ON THE STARCH GRANULE.
series of figures, which may be compared to watch-glasses of
various depths, will ultimately lie as a smooth spherical
vesicle on the stage of the microscope. This is the simplest
case of the phenomenon under consideration ; and as it is well
adapted to illustrate its real nature, | have given a series of
figures, semi-diagramatic, of the successive stages of the pro-
cess (figs. 12—17).
The view now taken is entirely borne out by the fact that
when the sulphuric acid is applied so dilute that its action on
the granule is very slow, or when the granule, by the prolonged
action of iodine, has become less sensitive to the operation of
the acid, a gradual swelling of the whole granule, without any
appearance of plice, may be witnessed. But a fact, which
appears to me at once fatal to the involution theory, is the
following :—the larger granules may easily be crushed by
slight pressure between two slips of glass, and if the pressure
has not been too great, it will then be seen that many of the gra-
nules present deep fissures, opening upon the surface, and
thence radiating towards the centre. Now, when these granules
are treated with sulphuric acid, the fissures will be found in the
swollen granule to retain exactly their original position and
continuity, whereas it is evident that if they had been formed
in a membrane rolled up in accordance with the theory of
Martin, or even deeply plicated, as maintained by Busk, each
would now present itself in the unfolded granule as a series of
interrupted slits ; unless, indeed, it had passed through the
whole thickness of the involutions, a circumstance which,
though it may possibly be allowed of some of the fissures,
cannot be admitted of all.
A subject of much importance in the physiology of the
starch granule, and of especial interest in its bearing upon the
very difficult question of the genesis of this body, is the order
of deposition of the lamella. Whether are the new lamellee
deposited on the inner or on the outer surface of those pre-
viously existing ?
The data we possess, for coming to a satisfactory conclusion
on this point, are at present very imperfect. It appears to
me, however, that the structure of the granules, as attempted
to be demonstrated in the present paper, is more in accordance
with the centripetal than with the centrifugal order of deposi-
tion. It will be recollected that while the external lamelle
resist the action of certain reagents, the internal easily yield to
them ; now, since there appears to be no difference in chemical
constitution between any of the layers, we can only attribute
this difference in the behaviour of the layers to a less degree
of solidity in the internal ones, a condition which is most
DR. ALLMAN, ON THE STARCH GRANULE. 171
easily explained by supposing these to be of more recent depo-
sition. When we consider, moreover, the probability that the
central cavity contains starch in a fluid or amorphous condition,
the weight of evidence appears so far in favour of the gradually-
increasing growth of the granule from the circumference to-
wards the centre. But there is another strong argument in
favour of this view—the behaviour of the small granules under
the united action of sulphuric and acetic acid is in all
essential particulars precisely the same as that of the larger
ones. Now no one will deny that the small granules are, for
the most part, at least, only a young state of the larger ones ;
and it would therefore follow, if the centrifugal theory were
the true one, that the external layers of these young granules,
after becoming internal by the deposition of new layers on the
outside of them, had lost their original physical characters,
and were no longer able to offer the same kind of resistance as
formerly to the action of the reagents, a circumstance which
seems so improbable, that it cannot be admitted without fur-
ther proof.
It will be stated in opposition to the theory of centri-
petal growth, that this would require the constant distension
of all the layers which lie external to the new ones. This
objection, however, appears to have but little weight; we
have already seen the great distensibility of the lamella under
the action of hot water, mineral acids, and other reagents ;
and there is no reason to suppose that the very slow disten-
sion which the centrifugal deposition would require, may not
take place while the granule is contained in the cells of the.
living plant, and surrounded and permeated by the fluids of
the cell. That the lamellae admit of rapid imbibition of fluid
is evident from the phenomena already described as occurring
when the granule is plunged into water, after being exposed
to an elevated temperature until its central cavity becomes
distended, without the exposure being sufficient to effect a
chemical change; and even in granules which have been
simply dried at a low temperature, a marked increase of size
may be observed when they are moistened with water.
An observation originally made by Fritzsche of the occa-
sional occurrence of a compound granule, consisting of two or
more simple granules, each with its own lamella and so-called
nucleus, but the whole surrounded by common lamella, would
seem at first to decide the point in favour of the external
deposition of the new layers. It is obvious, however, that
the appearance presented by these abnormal granules may be
just as well explained by supposing the granule, originally
single, to have gone on up to a certain time forming layers in
172 DR. ALLMAN, ON THE STARCH GRANULE.
the ordinary way, and that subsequently in the interior of the
granule, by some abnormal influence, two centres of deposi-
tion took the place of the original single one.
The growth of the granule may be probably thus ex-
plained: the materials for its growth are absorbed from the
surrounding cell contents through the previously existing
lamella, and thus conveyed into the central cavity. ‘The con-
tents of this cavity are fluid or amorphous; and the perfect
amylum is subsequently deposited from them in layers on
the walls, each layer pushing outwards those which had pre-
ceded it. It is true that this only attempts to explain the
growth of the granule, its origin is still unaccounted for, and
must remain so till increased light is thrown by new observa-
tions on this difficult question.
From the facts mentioned in the present paper the following
conclusions would seem to follow :—
1. That the starch granule consists of a series of lamella in
the form of closed hollow shells, included one within the
other, the most internal enclosing a minute cavity filled with
amorphous (?) amylum; that the concentric striz visible in
the granule indicate the surfaces of contact of these lamelle ;
and that the so-called nucleus of Fritzsche corresponds to the
central cavity.
2. That while the lamellze appear to be all identical in
chemical constitution, yet the internal differ from the external
in consistency or other conditions of integration.
3. That the order of deposition of the lamellz is centri-
petal.
4. That while the starch granule is thus a lamellated
vesicle, it cannot be included in the category of the true vege-
table cell, from which it differs not only in the absence of a
proper nucleus,* but in presenting no chemical differentiation
between membrane and contents.
* Unless the obscure indications of such a body as recorded by Busk,
in the memoir quoted, p. 68, may be conceived to afford evidence of its
presence.
CPE?
TRANSLATIONS, &c.
On the DeveLorMENT of Srarcu. By H. Crier. (Abstracted
from the ‘ Botanisch. Zeitung.’) January 20th, 1854.
Tue following observations, the result of lengthened investiga-
tions, relate principally to the history of the development of
the starch granule, a subject which appears to have been,
hitherto, but little studied. '
Among the different kinds of starch which occur in larger
quantity, spherical granules with a central nucleus are the
most rare, whilst this form is the most abundant in the vege-
tating parenchyma, in the bark, and in the medulla. In these
situations the starch grains are seldom met with of any con-
siderable size; it appears and disappears with equal rapidity,
but when it occurs in these parts of a more remarkable form
and greater size, it affords very instructive information, as will
be seen below.
Although, speaking generally, no systematic characters are
afforded by starch, certain peculiarities, nevertheless, pervade
most plants in one and the same family. Thus, all the Ferns
examined by the author, present a clouded, indistinctly-lami-
nated, irregular form of starch-granule; all the Cyperacea, a
compressed granule, with large hollow nucleus, &c. Excep-
tions, in this respect, however, exist ; the Aroidez, for instance,
exhibiting every variety of form, except the compressed.
Moreover, the various forms occasionally pass one into the
other, so that cases occur in which it is impossible to say to
which category the plant belongs.
The cross of polarization always passes through the nucleus
of the granule, and is apparent in all positions of the latter; as,
for instance, even when a flattened granule is placed on the
edge, as in fig. 1, d (Plate VII.) The phenomena exhibited
under polarized light depend upon the amine ; and the cross
remains the same, whether the granule be hollow or appa-
rently solid, except that in the former case the centre is
wanting, The author adopts the view that the amine must
be regarded as surrounding the whole granule. Practically it
is difficult to prove this, although it is found that, in starch
having an excentric nucleus, the lamine immediately around
the nucleus are of uniform thickness throughout, whilst the
more exterior amine become thicker and thicker in one direc-
tion. Besides which, it may be remarked that, strictly speak-
174 CRUGER, ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF STARCH.
ing, the transverse stri@, presented in some kinds of starch,
never actually reach the border of the granule, but are thence
curved towards the nucleus. The tenuity of one side of the
lamine, in this case, appears to exceed the powers of our pre-
sent instruments.
Where the /amine are very irregularly deposited, one or
more additional branches are superadded to the four rays con-
stituting the cross of polarization.
With respect to the development of starch, the author states
that, according to Mohl’s Essay on ‘The Vegetable Cell,’ which
contains the most recent résumé he is acquainted with upon
the subject, the development of starch is unknown.
It may be regarded as a fact, which, by the concurrent ob-
servations of our best writers, has gradually assumed the form
of an empirical law, “that all new formation in the plant
proceeds under mediation of the protein substances.” The
author’s investigations on the subject of starch have served to
confirm this law.
One of the difficulties in the study of the development of
starch, resides in the circumstance that it is such a loose
secretion of the plant-cell. In the majority of cells contain-
ing starch, large and small, separate and aggregated, granules
occur, apparently representing all stages of growth, but with-
out its being possible to demonstrate this; as well as others
in progress of solution, In order to facilitate his labour, and
thus to attatm a more certain guarantee for his results, the
author felt it necessary to look out for plants im which the
granules were not too numerous in the cells, and in which
also, in the green cellular tissue, the formation of distinct and
thick Jamine in the starch might be observed. Plants of this
kind are afforded in various species of Costus, in Canna,
Dieffenbachia seguina, and Philodendrum grandifolium (?).
For the study of the compound starch, he found Batatas
edulis the most convenient, although other plants, for instance,
Carolinea princeps, would, perhaps, have been more so.
It was first requisite to determine whether Schleiden’s
opinion, according to which the outer lamine of the starch
granule are the young er orthe last formed, was correct ;
which turned out to be the case. But this answered only
half the question which the author had proposed to himself ;
the other was: Where and how are the outer damine formed ?
In Mohl’s paper, ‘On the Anatomical Relations of Chlo-
rophyll’ (Verm. Schrift. p. 349), he found indications upon
this point which were followed up. Mohl shows that chloro-
phyll and amylum almost always occur associated together,
and, moreover, that the chlorophyll appears before the amylum.
CRUGER, ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF STARCH. 175
Schleiden assumes the existence of colourless chlorophyll, on
what grounds the author is ignorant, to whom the fact appears
to be this:—the protoplasma, that menstruum universale, that
tinctura vitalis of the plant, acquires a green colour, under the
influence of light, owing to the formation of a resinous
material, which may be extracted by ether, &c., but without
losing its other properties, which relate to the life of the
plant, and the solution and formation of other substances.
The author regards this mucus, the protoplasma, as identical
with Mohl’s primordial sac. He has looked for the latter for
several years without being able to find it. Neither by alcohol
nor by acids has he ever been able, satisfactorily, to demon-
strate the existence of any membrane in the interior of the
cell. “ When a cell from the parenchyma of a ripe or nearly
ripe fruit, e.9., of Mangifera, Carica papaya, after it has been
treated with alcohol or acids, is placed under the microscope,
the matter at first appears quite clear, and a membrane sur-
rounding the coagulum, in the interior of the cell, seems to be
distinctly visible. But when an attempt is made, with the
needle, to render the supposed sac tangible, the thing assumes
quite a different aspect. The whole is resolved into mucous
filaments, or the like, and the sac disappears like a phantom.
[ have made similar experiments in the cells of the paren-
chyma, in the vegetating parts of Cactus, and other plants, re-
commended by Mobl, for the exhibition of the “ primordial
sac.”
The species or variety of Canna, which is cultivated in
Trinidad for the seeds, is distinguished from the other variety
yielding the “toloman,” or “ canna-starch,” by the circum-
stance that, in the cells of the rhizome, only a few, but very
large, starch granules, with distinct andnumerous lamina, are
developed.
Two species of Costus, C. spiralis and C. comosus (?), contain
long cylindrical, strongly-laminated granules of starch in the
cells surrounding the vascular bundles, and in that situation
in small number; whilst in the rhizome all the cells are
crammed full of starch.
Philodendrum grandifolium and Dieffenbachia seguina
present, in all parts of the stem, starch granules with well-
marked lamine and of very unusual forms, some being
branched.
In all these plants the younger cells contain only spherical
starch granules; and it cannot be doubted that the other
forms, met with in the older cells, derive their shapes merely
from the mode in which the later amine are deposited around
the originally spherical granule. Consequently, also, the
176 CRUGER, ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF STARCH.
minute spherical granules which occur in the older cells, to-
gether with the larger irregularly-shaped ones, represent
nothing more than lower stages of development.
Ail starch occurs seated upon the layer of protoplasma,
lining the inner wall of the cell, so long as the latter is
capable of further development, and so long as protoplasma
continues to exist in the cell. In every kind of starch in
which the damine are distinctly formed, and in which an ex-
centric and distinct nucleus exists, it may be remarked that
the nucleus is always situated at the point most remote from
that by which the granule is attached. This is readily ob-
servable in all cases in which there are not too many granules
in a cell, and where the cells of the tissue are sufficiently
large and transparent to allow of one or a few layers being
observed at once. The elongated cells, surrounding the vas-
cular bundles in the species of Costus above adverted to, are
eminently fitted for this object ; but when once the observer is
satisfied of the truth of the statement, he will find it suffi-
ciently confirmed in other plants where the observation is not
so readily made. Consequently, in uninjured cells, the starch
granules are found free only when they are old and the proto-
plasma has (entirely ?) disappeared from the cell, whether the
latter be more or less filled with the starch. In this case, one
granule by its development appears to detach the other from
the wall of the cell.
Now, if cells containing starch advanced just beyond the
lowest stage of development in one of the above-mentioned
plants are examined, it will be found that the granule, at the
end by which it is attached to the protoplasm or chlorophyll,
usually presents a layer of substance optically distinct from
the latter, and from the bulk of the starch granule itself. If
the preparation be treated with iodine, it will be observed
that this outermost layer of the starch granule is not coloured
blue, but, at the same time, that it does not so rapidly assume
a brown or yellow colour, or so deep a tint as the protoplasm
and chlorophyll. All granules of young starch do not present
this layer of the same thickness-—in some it being more, and
in others less developed ; and in many it is so thin as to be
visible only with difficulty, and not distinguishable without
trouble from the lines produced by the diffraction of light at
the border of the starch granule. This circumstance has
chiefly been the cause, perhaps, why it has not been previously
remarked in those kinds of starch in which the lamin@ are
deposited with tolerable uniformity on all sides. It should
be studied in plants in which thick and excentric lamine@ exist
in the starch grain.
CRUGER, ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF STARCH. 177
The author regards this layer as a substance on the point
of conyersion into starch, but which, as yet, does not possess
the property of becoming blue on the addition of iodine, and
still contains, moreover, nitrogen or a protein substance. He
adduces the following reasons for this conclusion :—When
young starch is treated with iodine it does not acquire so pure
a blue colour, nor nearly so rapidly as it does when older ;
and minute granules, which, without the reagent are optically
indistinguishable from starch grains, are either only coloured
yellow or remain uncoloured. It is known that starch is
coloured reddish by Millon’s reagent.
The above particulars being satisfactorily made out, the
varying thickness of the layers in different granules is readily
explicable. The layer of substance, which is destined imme-
diately to become starch, is at first gradually formed from the
protoplasm, and is not transformed into starch until it has
acquired a certain thickness. In this process, also, accidental
and individual diversities may occur, inasmuch as the completed
starch granules present nothing like perfect uniformity.
Now, what is this transitionary substance? Is it znulin ?
The little correspondence in the results of analyses appears to
indicate that inulin itself is a complex substance; does it
really contain no nitrogen? ‘The transitionary material does
not appear to be gum, as it is not seen to dissolve in water,
even after prolonged maceration. Does it contain nitrogen in
chemical combination, or only a protein substance, as an
element? These are interesting questions which offer them-
selves, and which will probably not be very soon answered.
In Batatas edulis, the author has investigated the develop-
ment of the so-termed “ compound starch-granule.” The
origin of this form of starch has been sought in the breaking-up
of the grain into smaller granules ; and this opinion has been
supported by the observation of granules presenting a fissure
in the middle and a nucleus at each end, and having external
lamine surrounding the whole, an instance of which kind is
shown in fig. 3, 0.
From the examination of the starch in the cells of the very
young stem of Batatas edulis, the author concludes that the
constituent portions of the compound starch granules are all
originally distinct, coalescing into the larger compound grain
after the disappearance of the transitionary substance above
described.
The development of the incised discs or nodular rods which
are found in the Euphorbia, in the proper vessels, as they are
termed, so far corresponds with what has been stated above,
that the granules in the young condition are also spherical.
VOL, I. 0
178 KOLLIKER, ON THE NUCLEAR FIBRES, &c.
The author has been unable to perceive /amine, or transition-
ary substance in these corpuscles, nor any cross of polariza-
tion. Moreover, from its reaction with iodine, he regards this
starch as a substance distinct from all other kinds.
It appears to him that starch in general is very far from
being a homogeneous substance. Besides the various density
of the lamine, the nucleus frequently encloses a substance
which, undoubtedly, differs in more than in optical properties
from the rest of the granule. That the lamine, even the
innermost, in passing from the fluid to the solid condition,—
a sort of crystallization,—may include foreign materials, is by
no means inconceivable, and it is even probable that the in-
cluded substance may again be removed from the perfect
grain.
The author then proceeds to show that what he has observed
corresponds, in the main, with Schleiden’s statements, and to
remark in strong terms upon the views of Kiitzing, who con-
siders the starch grain in the light of a cell.
The figures here given are selected from the more numerous
ones accompanying H. Criiger’s paper, but will be found
sufficient to illustrate all essential points in this disquisition,
which, so far as it extends, is undoubtedly a valuable contri-
bution to our knowledge of starch, and especially of its genesis
—a point which, since the discovery of the existence of that
principle, or one closely allied to it in various tissues of ani-
mals, is more than ever deserving of investigation.
On the DeveLtorMeEnt of the so-called ‘“‘ NucLeaR Fipres,” of
the “ Exvastic Freres,” and of the “ Connective Tissue.”
By A. Kéttrker. From the ‘ Verhand. d. Physik, Medicin.
Gesselsch. in Wiirzburg.’ Vol. iii., P. 1, p. 1. 1852.
1. Elastic Tissue-—The view quite recently propounded by
Virchow and Donders, that the so-termed nuclear fibres are
developed not from nuclez but from cells, is perfectly correct ;
but at the same time I cannot agree with these authors in regard-
ing all the fusiform cells which occur in embryonic connective
tissue, and which have been previously variously described, as
formative cells of the nuclear fibres, and in their denial of the
development of connective tissue from cells. Only the
smaller proportion of these fusiform cells have any relation to
the nuclear fibres, and they are readily distinguished from the
formative cells of connective tissue by their shortness, their
dark borders, their fine prolonged extremities, which never
KOLLIKER, ON THE NUCLEAR FIBRES, &c. 179
form a bundle of fibres, and their elongated, rodlike nucleus.
Many of these cells also present, not merely 2, but 3, 6, or
more delicate processes, when, without losing their elongated
general form, they exhibit the aspect of nucleiform cells.
In every situation where nuclear fibres subsequently occur,
these cells are met with, in embryos, at four months or even
earlier, and, in the tendons, ligaments, and fascia, still readily
admitting of being isolated, in the second half of feetal life;
and it is extremely easy to show that they form the so-termed
“nuclear fibres” and “nuclear fibre reticulated tissue,” by
the coalescence of their two or more numerous processes.
In very many places, as in the perimysium, the external
integument, the mucous membranes, fasciz, fibrous mem-
branes, all traces of the original composition from cells is
lost, and the so-called nuclear fibres, which I term fine elastic
Jibres, darstella, the well-known, everywhere uniformly wide,
solid fascie or fibrous reticulations ; whilst in other situations
the original enlargements of the cells remain more or less
manifest, as occasionally in the fascie and ligaments, and
especially in the cornea. In these cases a certain relation to
the nutrition of the organs composed of connective tissue, con-
cerned, may be ascribed to the remains of the cell cavities,
though, at the same time, it appears to me that it is going too
far when Virchow at once represents the nuclear fibres as a
system of cavities in the connective tissue subservient to
nutrition. Moreover the nuclei of their formative cells also
take part in the formation of the nuclear fibres, and indeed
frequently not altogether an unessential one, becoming trans-
formed when the cells coalesce into elongated rod-like cor-
puscles, in the neighbourhood of which the other parts of the
cell are occasionally more retracted. What is true of the
nuclear fibres applies also to the common elustic tissue. 1
showed, several years since, that in every situation where
elastic tissue exists in the adult, only nuclear fibres are present
in the infant at birth ; that consequently these two elementary
forms are connected, and the elastic fibres are developed from
a widening out of the nuclear fibres, which holds good also
for the elastic and fenestrated membranes, which are nothing
but metamorphosed elastic networks. This correspondence
in itself is necessarily almost sufficient to show, beyond doubt,
that the elastic fibres also proceed from cells; but that this is
the case is also shown by direct observation, in the lig-nuche,
in the arteries, and the superficial fascia of the abdomen, in
which situations the origin of primarily fine elastic fibres,
from fusiform cells, is everywhere pretty easy to be seen.
2. The connective tissue, in its two principal forms—the
o 2
L80 KOLLIKER, ON THE NUCLEAR FIBRES, &c.
close and the /ar—is developed in a somewhat different manner.
The lax connective tissue, as it occurs for instance in the sub-
cutaneous and submucous tissue, and in the large cavities
around the viscera, appears first in the embryo, in the form
of a transparent, soft, gelatinous substance. ‘This consists
essentially of fusiform, or stellate anastomosing cells, and of
a semi-fluid, clear pulp, lodged in the interstices of the cel-
lular network, but contains besides, in the latter, a certain
number of rounded cells of no definite character. I first
observed this gelatinous connective tissue in the substance
which is found between the amnios and the chorion, and at
first paid attention only to the anastomosing stellate cells,
which I denominated as “ reticular connective tissue.”
Subsequently I met with the same gelatinous tissue in the
enamel organ, and in this situation ascertained the presence
of a considerable quantity of albwmen and mucus, in the gela-
tinous substance, whilst at the same time Professor Virchow
described the Whartonian pulp as of the same nature, and
also discovered mucus in it. Upon farther pursuit of the
subject, it was soon obvious that gelatinous tissue of this kind,
which, moreover, Schwann had already briefly described, from
the orbit of a foetus, are very extensively distributed; in a
word, as has been already remarked, as a precursor to all large
masses of lax connective tissue without exception, and that its
further development everywhere proceeds in essentially the
same way, which is as follows:—The network of stellate cells
becomes gradually more and more close, whilst new cells which
arise in the gelatinous substance are continually joined to it,
and at the same time the reticulations are gradually converted
into bundles of fibres, which ultimately differ in no respect
from the common lax fasciculi of connective tissue. Whilst
this is proceeding, the pulpy substance is constantly consumed,
serving as it does as a cytoblastema for the formation of the
cells, which go through a varied course of development, accord-
ing to the various situations in which they are placed. Some
of them, in the way already indicated, pass into connective
tissue, others unite together, and are transformed into fine
elastic fibres, blood-vessels, and nerves, the majority lastly
produce within themselves and become fat-cells.
Thus, from the gelatiniform embryonic connective tissue
ultimately arises either common adipose tissue, or rather lax-
connective tissue, not containing fat. It is not, however, in
saying this, intended to be implied that the gelatiniform con-
nective tissue must necessarily go through these series of de-
velopment; on the contrary, it is much more disposed to
remain in a condition more or less allied to its original one.
KOLLIKER, ON THE NUCLEAR FIBRES, &e. 181
Thus, in the Whartonian pulp, even in the mature embryo,
we may always notice, still partially remaining, more unde-
veloped bands of connective tissue with an abundance of pulp
between them. Virchow has described this as a special
tissue, under the term of ‘‘mucous-tissue.’ I am not, how-
ever, able to perceive in it anything more than immature lax,
or gelatinous connective tissue, and believe that, notwith-
standing the presence of much mucus, the impossibility, by
boiling, of obtaining gelatine from it (Scherer), and the ab-
sence of distinct fibrils, there is no reason to distinguish it
from connective tissue; for, in the first place, as we have
seen, all embryonic, lax-connective tissue contains abundance
of mucus; and, secondly, as has been ascertained by Scherer,
always at first affords no gelatine; and, thirdly, also at first
presents no distinct fibrils, which, moreover, are very manifest
in the Whartonian pulp in many situations. Although, there-
fore, I cannot regard this pulp as anything but an embryonic
gelatinous connective tissue, [ am not disposed to assert, that
every reticulated tissue is at once to be considered as such,
much rather is it very conceivable that, besides the cellular
networks, which are conyerted into connective and elastic
tissue, other kinds exist. As such, I would just indicate the
reticulations formed of pigment cells in the choroid coat and
in the batrachia, the former of which also occur without pig-
ment, constituting a pale, fibrous network, which differs in its
chemical relations from connective tissue. As these networks
occur in the adult, neither they nor the networks which re-
semble them in general can longer be referred to the lax form
of connective tissue, however much they may resemble the
embryonic forms of that tissue.
The solid connective tissue of the tendons, ligaments, &c., is
formed, as was stated by Schwann, solely and exclusively out
of cells, without any perceptible connecting substance. If
the tendons of very young embryos are examined, nothing is
found in them but fusiform cells, some of which have refer-
ence to the formation of the elastic fibres of these organs,
whilst others constitute connective tissue. The latter are
considerably larger and paler than the formative cells of the
elastic fibres, contain larger oval nuclei, and present, when
they have attained only a slight increase in length, an undu-
lated prolongation of their enlarged extremities, a fibrillar
formation, which is constantly more and more distinct. When
these cells, which in various animals may be isolated, not
without some difficulty, have reached a certain completion,
they coalesce by their extremities, and form long cylindrical
fibres, which continue for some time to exhibit the original
182 KOLLIKER, ON THE NUCLEAR FIBRES, &c.
cell-bodies and nuclei, but subsequently are transformed into
uniform non-nucleated fibres, which soon exhibit their fibrils
with equal distinctness, as the perfect fasciculi of connective
tissue. The bundles of connective tissue, which are at first
very slender (0:002’”), attain their final completion by a con-
tinual growth in thickness and length, until at last the tendons,
after their elastic elements are also completed, no longer pre-
sent any traces of the embryonic conditions. The other
forms of solid connéctive tissue are constituted in precisely
the same way as the tendons, and in no portion of them does
the intercellular substance play any important part.
From the facts above stated, it is obvious that it is impos-
sible to comprise the connective tissue with that> of cartilage,
as was proposed first by Reichert. Although in many cases
the cartilages have a fibrous, collagenous matrix, it does not
follow that they should have any nearer relationship, because
the matrix of the cartilages differs entirely, genestically, from
the fibrous substance of connective tissue, and is not developed
From cells. Besides this, such a matrix is even necessary to
the constitution of the cartilaginous tissue, seeing that in the
reticular cartilages it is not collagenous, and in many cartilages
(Chorda dorsalis, gill rays of many fishes, aural cartilage of
certain mammalia) may even be wholly wanting. It is true,
nevertheless, that a certain parallel may be drawn (as Virchow
has done) between the cartilage-cells and the so-called forma-
tive cells, because (as I have already stated, before the
development of nuclear fibres from cells was known) in many
situations (particularly distinct in fibro-cartilages and where
fibrous parts adjoin cartilage) cells, which can scarcely be dis-
tinguished from cartilage cells, pass into nuclear fibres. This
resemblance, however, is imperfect, since the common forma-
tive cells of the elastic fibres do not resemble cartilage-cells
more than do any other cells of embryos, and in the situations
noticed depends more upon an analogous arrangement and
grouping of the cells, and on the absence of definite characters
in the boundary lines between the tissues in question. If
connective tissue be compared with bone, it is quite necessary
to distinguish between bones ossified out of cartilage and those
which are formed from a soft blastema. The former can be
regarded just as little as the cartilages, as analogous to the
connective tissue, whilst with respect to the latter the whole
question depends upon the histological position which is
assigned to the ossific blastema. If the fibrous part of it, as I
think I have observed, be really developed out of fusiform,
coalesced cells, it may be regarded as a kind of immature
connective tissue, in which case the compact bone-substance
KOLLIKER, ON THE NUCLEAR FIBRES, &c. 183
which arises from a tissue of this last ranks, as far as its
matrix is concerned, in the connective tissue, although it does
not approximate so closely to it as the spongy bone-substance
does to the true cartilage, since its cellular elements, or the
bone-cells, proceed from common indifferent formative cells
by a thickening of their walls, together with a formation of
bone canals, and can in no respect be compared with the
so termed nuclear fibres of the connective tissue.
This consideration, when further regarded, leads to the con-
viction, that in the comparison of the tissues, isolated par-
ticulars alone are insufficient for the entire history of their
development. However much many of them in their com-
pleted condition may resemble each other, so that, with the
means we have at our disposal, they cannot be distinguished ;
still it may not be possible to identify them, if their develop-
ment has taken place in a different mode. Thus, the common
fibrous connective tissue, which is formed from fusiform cells,
is not identical with fibrine which has become fibrillated, or
a minutely fibrous matrix in cartilage, and although all three
appear nevertheless to be chemically so much alike. Just
as little is an elastic network arising in a physiological way
from fusiform cells, or an elastic membrane, the same as an
elastic coat arising from a fibrinous exudation, or an elastic
membrana propria formed by a secretion from cells, or the
elastic basis of a reticular cartilage; and the same applies to
osseous tissue, which has proceeded from true cartilage, fibro-
cartilage (connective tissue with cartilage cells), a soft blastema
(immature connective tissue with ossifying cells), or from
organized fibrine with stellate cells—although in all these cases
it presents no considerable differences.
For a proper comprehension of the tissues, it is above all
things requisite to place together those which agree, in all
respects, in their genesis, form, chemical composition and
function, such as the transversely striated muscular fibres,
medullated nerve-tubes, the formed connective tissue, and the true
cartilages. To these succeed those which, alike at the com-
mencement of their development, afterwards separate, some
proceeding further in their metamorphoses than the others.
Examples of this kind may be seen in the non-meduillated and
medullated nerve-tubes, the transversely striated and non-striated
muscular fibres, and the muscular fascicul: of the lower ani-
mals, which correspond genetically with the former, the true
and the reticular cartilage, the true cartilage and sponyy tissue
of bone, the elastic networks and elastic membranes. Where
the genesis differs, but the after form or function, or the che-
mical condition, is each or all of them alike, the tissues may,
184 KOLLIKER, ON THE NUCLEAR FIBRES, &c.
perhaps, be placed together, and in certain respects be regarded
as coequal, though never as identical, Thus all collagenous
tissues may be placed together; and also the contractile fibres
containing protein, the elastic reticulated membranes, the eal-
cified tissues with canalicular systems, all fibrous connective
tissues; but notwithstanding, by this a perfect histological
correspondence is by no means expressed any more than is a
morphological identity, when organs, such as lungs and gills,
the jaw of a mammal with that of a ray, the wing of a bird
with that of an insect, are compared from a physiological point
of view or from that of the anatomy of the parts when com-
pleted. That such associations of the tissues are to a certain
extent justifiable, and even demanded by the requirements of
physiology, pathological anatomy, and organic chemistry, is,
moreover, at once intelligible ; and I here only expressly add,
in order to make myself plainly understood, that I have
regarded the genetic point of view as sufficient for a pure
anatomical conception, but not as alone holding good under all
relations and respects.
Besides this it also may be remarked, that it is quite pos-
sible that, in many situations in which our views and notions
at present render distinctions in the genesis necessary, perhaps
at a future time connecting links may appear and upset all
our systems. Thus I believe I am not wrong even now in
describing the connective and elastic tissues as belonging to
those between which transitions exist, and also the smooth and
transversely striped muscular tissue, the latter in as far as it
also affords isolated transversely striped muscle-cells. Perhaps
even, hereafter, a contractile connective tissue in an improved
form will be discovered as a connecting link between muscle
and connective tissue. Such and other possibilities cannot
seem strange to any one who knows that formative cells of the
same kind are the initial points of the most important physio-
logical organizations ; that consequently all tissues are, in the
beginning, alike. We shall even ultimately be inclined, when
we consider the substance which is present before the other
cells, and the frequently less distinct manifestation of the cells
in embryonic and pathological tissues, not to set up between
the parts developed from cells and mucoid substances such an
insurmountable limit as may appear to exist in the eyes of
many.
(0VEB5S?)
Contributions to the Knowledge of Curanrous Diseases, caused
by Parasitic Growths. By Dr. B. Guppen, From _ the
‘ Archiv fiir Physiolog. Heilkunde v. Vierordt.’ 1853.
Part III., p. 496. Pl. 2, fig. 1.
(Continued from p. 33.)
Il. Pityriasis versicolor.
Bateman, following Willan, describes four species under the
genus Pityriasis, two of which, P. capitis and P. rubra, vary-
ing according to their seat, consist merely in a morbidly
increased formation of the epidermis ; P. nigra is unknown to
the author, but P. versicolor, as was first noticed by Eichstadt
in Froriep’s Notizen, 1846, depends upon a parasitic vegetable
growth.
Pityriasis versicolor is an affection pretty widely distributed,
and is especially common among the poorer classes ; but is also
met with among those whose means allow them to enjoy the
most luxurious cleanliness. ‘The author has met with it fre-
quently in men, and, relatively speaking, more rarely in women,
but never in children. Its more common seat is on the trunk,
and especially on the chest. In a young man, whose chest was
habitually exposed, the middle of it was tolerably exempt
from the affection.
The spots of this eruption are of a dirty-yellow colour,
roundish, and usually of small size, or, from the coalescence of
several together, more or less irregular, and varying very much
in dimension. They are scarcely raised above the level of the
skin, the elevation being perceptible only to the touch. Their
surface is smooth ; but as the affection progresses, it becomes
rough, and scales off in no slight extent in a whitish scurf.
When the surface of the spot is peeled off, which is readily
done, that which is exposed is more or less moist.
Generally the minute round spots do not scale off: they are
smooth, and with very few exceptions, are perforated in the
centre by a hair.
To examine the nature of the disease, the cuticle, from
a part of the skin presenting a good many of these spots,
should be raised by means of a vesicant, and the bladder
removed as soon as possible. The portion of cuticle must be
spread out in the most suitable manner, upon a glass plate,
lying upon a dark ground, and the soft layer on its under sur-
face infiltrated with serum, removed by means of a hair-pencil.
With care this is readily effected, and nothing is left but the
superficial, thin, transparent, firm layer, together with the hair-
sheaths. In it, viewed from below, are seen, quite uninjured,
186 GUDDEN, ON CUTANEOUS DISEASES.
the foreign, whitish-yellow structures with the utmost distinct-
ness, and in the centre of almost each rises the whitish conical
radical hair-sheath.
At the same time, upon closer examination, a multitude of
extremely minute points are visible, which appear whitish by
direct, and opaque by transmitted light. These are the open-
ings of the sweat-ducts. Under the microscope they are seen
to be composed of thick, flat, closely-approximated, more or
less vertical, much-developed epidermis cells, containing yellow
pigmentary matter; and in order not to have to refer to them
again in the description of the fungous growth, the author here
remarks, that they are very resistant, and remain almost wholly
unchanged in the midst of the parasitic growth. Consequently,
in the microscopic investigation of the fungous expansion,
these orifices are seen enclosed in it, as opaque, usually
brownish-yellow, infundibuliform depressions. The spores
of the fungus are not unfrequently produced in great number
around their border, whilst the cavity itself seems to be less
favourable to their development, and is usually found to be
unoccupied by them.
In the above-described mode of preparing the epidermis, the
layers removed may be readily submitted to investigation.
Their cells—and this is a point upon which, as in Porrigo, the
author lays stress—present no abnormal conditions whatever.
The same may be said, and it is convenient here to notice the
fact, of the undermost layers of the hard, horny epzdermis which
are at all times free from the fungus.
The author now proceeds to the microscopic examination of
the spots themselves.
If a spot together with the portion of cuticle immediately
surrounding it be cut out of the prepared epidermis, and
placed under the microscope, and viewed, first from below
and then from above, it is evident, in the first place, that
it lies in the uppermost portion of the horny layer, and,
secondly, that it is composed of fungi. As regards the
fungus-layer itself, itis seen, pretty distinctly, to be constituted
of two layers, of which, the inferior and larger in circum-
ference, is composed of filaments, and the upper smaller one
mostly of spores; moreover, that its vertical thickness is
greatest in the neighbourhood of the hair follicle, where the
spores grow most vigorously, and least at the periphery,
where only isolated looped filaments are seen penetrating the
superimposed epidermis.
This disposition of the two kinds of fungus-formation may
be demonstrated with greater certainty in another way.
The epidermis is macerated from 24 to 48 hours in water, at
GUDDEN, ON CUTANEOUS DISEASES. 187
the common temperature. By this means the fungi are
softened, and the felt-like stratum formed by it is loosened
from the subjacent epidermis. It is to be carefully raised with
a curved cataract-needle, so that its connexion is not broken,
and placed under the microscope. It is true, spores alone
are never seen, although it is now more evident than before
that they lie principally on the surface ; and if the epidermis
upon which, after the removal of the little fungus-stratum,
a slight cloudiness remains, be then brought under the micro-
scope, it will be found that this cloudiness depends solely and
entirely upon the presence of fungoid filaments.
The filaments are about 1-600” in diameter, roundish, ser-
pentine, occasionally knotted, much branched, and interlaced.
They are transparent under a power of 300, either not at all
or but faintly yellowish, and having tolerably defined outlines.
The older they are, the smaller is their diameter, and the
fainter their contours.
The spores are produced at the end of a filament, occasion-
ally also at the side, and form racemes about 1-50’” in their
longer diameter, which are usually so dense that it is only at
the border that the individual cells can be distinguished. In
a few cases where these racemes consist of only a small num-
ber of spores, the author noticed that each spore was placed
upon a slender peduncle of the much-divided filament.
The spores are round, with tolerably defined outlines, and
have a diameter of about 1-500’. In most of them, a more
highly refractive corpuscle is perceptible, the size of which
varies still more than in the spores of the Porrigo-fungus,
sometimes being scarcely visible, at others nearly filling the
whole cell; occasionally it does not exist at all, and, in many
cases, is double.
The fungus-stratum is covered on its surface by a thin layer
of connected epidermis-cells; and among the fungoid fila-
ments and cells themselves are found fragments of cuticle,
together with a molecular detritus.
It was observed above, that almost every patch was _per-
forated in the centre by a hair, and that the spores were accu-
mulated, especially in the hair-sheath. If the hair follicles in
question, which may be easily removed from the epidermis
underneath by means of a needle, be examined, the spores
will be found extending deeply into them. Their number
is occasionally so considerable that the follicles present a
yellow colour, and if the fungus-stratum be detached by mace-
ration in the mode above described, it will exhibit on its
surface a conical mass of fungus enclosed in the contiguous
epidermic layer. The author was unable to observe any
188 GUDDEN, ON CUTANEOUS DISEASES.
alteration in the hairs themselves, unless occasionally that they
were a little thinned.
In the further progress of the growth, the spots enlarge and
begin to form a scurf on the surface, owing to the breaking
through of the epidermic layer of fungus. The whitish scales
under the microscope are seen to consist of epidermis-cells
and dried filaments of the fungus. The spots approach each
other, coalesce, form large or small islands, and, as has been
said before, may extend over the whole trunk. When the
fungi die, the yellow colour of the spots is removed by their
scaling off, and there remains for a longer time a smooth spot
containing rather less pigment than the surrounding epidermis.
Pityriasis versicolor is contagious ; but for the success of ex-
periments in inoculation with it, the cuticle should not be
removed.
The fungus enters from without, and invades localities
where the necessary conditions for its development are
present. It occurs in otherwise perfectly healthy persons,
and diseases can only so far have any influence, as they may
augment or diminish the condition favourable to its develop-
ment, whether directly or indirectly. But the fungus has its
seat in the uppermost horny layer of the cuticle, and avoids
the deeper, soft layer. Whence is explained, on the one hand,
the trifling reaction of the cutis, which is limited to a moderate
thickening of the epidermis, and the little variety in the
external aspect of the disease ; and, on the other, the immu-
nity of childhood.
Pityriasis versicolor, contrary to Porrigo, in which the
fungus finds its nutriment in the soft layers of the epidermis,
and is consequently especially incident to childhood, is a disease
of adults.
Dr. Gudden’s experiments in the cure of this affection,
based upon the above view of its nature, do not seem to have
been wholly satisfactory. The best results appear to have
ensued upon the use of vesicants; but relapses seem to have
almost invariably taken place after a time, in consequence, as
the author believes, of the impossibility of removing the hair
follicles to the bottom.
From the figures added by Dr. Gudden, the fungus would
appear to be referrible to the genus Mucor.
On the Propagation of the Oscitrarte. By Dr. Hermann
Irzigsoun. From the ‘ Botanisch. Zeitung,’ Dec. 16, 1853.
Tue definite form of the Oscillarie, and the processes attend-
ing their growth, as regards outward appearances, are well
ON THE PROPAGATION OF THE OSCILLLARIA. 189
known: their tenia-like, jointed structure; their contents
composed of phycochrom ; their motility; the frequently fringed
points of the filaments ; the continual subdivision into two of
their joints; their rapid growth; their spreading, &c. Pre-
mising that all this is known, I shall consider this definite
form as the starting-point of their developmental processes, and
proceed to indicate the relations of the other forms to it.
I shall select as an example the Oscillaria tenuis, Ktz., as
being that most abundantly met with, and affording subjects
of observation under all sorts of pseudo-forms (Leptothriz,
Phormidum, Symploca, &c.).
As they become older, the filaments of O. tenuis, at first
bluish-green, assume a more yellow-green colour, their contents
acquiring pretty nearly the hue of those of the UWlotriche.
The filaments break up into perfectly-distinct joints, which, at
first urceolate, soon become spherical. The minute yellowish-
green gonidia thus arising, gradually increase in size, become
motile, and present in all respects the aspect of Chlamydomonas.
They move by means of delicate cilia, and present in the in-
terior, usually in the centre, a clearer green spot, a sort of
vacuole, as I believe, which, if I do not err, has been taken by
others for an amylaceous granule, The contents of the gonidia
are still finely granular, and of a yellowish-green colour.
These minute Chlamydomonades (as I shall term them,
since no one has pointed out any morphological distinction)
gradually enlarge; a red eye-point becomes visible in them,
and, presenting a thousand intermediate forms, they grow into
perfect Euglene. ‘The minute vacuole visible in them from
the first, is, in all cases, still recognisable as a larger, clearer
space in the mature Huglena, when the latter is extended.
The finely-granular contents have become coarsely granular,
the eye-point {perhaps the first indication of a reflecting
spherule, having no further organization, for the purpose of
conducting the luminous rays, without the intervention of any
other medium than the fluid of the body of the Euglena to the
perception of the individual; thence, also, the red colour,
complementary to green; the eye-point in Euglena sanguinea,
on the other hand, is green!| has become larger, and of a
deeper colour, the filaments much elongated, and the move-
ments more suitable to the now extended shape of the body.
The uniform life of the Euglena, prolonged only by endos-
mosis, terminates, as regards the individual, after repeated
division, in the quiescent or “ protococcus-condition,” as it is
termed, with which we are already acquainted from the ob-
servations of numerous zoologists and botanists (wide, among
others, Cohn, on Stephanosphera). In this condition the
190 ON THE PROPAGATION OF THE OSCILLARIA.
Euglena constitutes a large motionless spore, or protococcus-
like globule, in which the eye-point gradually disappears ; the
gelatinous envelope surrounding, at a short distance, a large
number of green gonidia, which had constituted the granular
substance of the mobile Euglena.
After this prolonged quiescent condition, the common Euglena-
envelope ultimately dissolves, and the gonidia escape, either
singly, or still connected into aggregate masses, in the form of
motile corpuscles (the microgonidia of authors). Ifa number
of these remain conjoined, and move about with a rowing
kind of movement, their locomotion being governed by a com-
mon spontaneity, they represent a volvox-like colony, which,
perhaps, may even have been described as Volvox by authors.
The microgonidia of the Euglena, like those of all the alge
hitherto examined by me, are the motile parent-cells of extra-
ordinarily-minute spiral filaments. They are, at first, green,
gradually becoming pellucid, exactly like the spermatospheres
of Spirogyra, presenting a monadiform aspect. A peculiar
appearance arises when, in one of these aggregations of miero-
gonidia, many remain green, whilst the others have already
become clear as water, the mass then presenting, in fact,
the aspect of being composed of two kinds of animalcules.
Such or similar conditions would represent several species of
the supposed genus Uvella (atomus, glaucoma, bodo, &c.)
Each ultimately colourless microgonidium, then, by the
dissolution ef its minute gelatinous. envelope, discharges a
small motile-spiral filament. In these, we have not the large
spiral filaments of the Chare, Equisetacee, and Ferns. A\I-
though, in Selaginella, these filaments are excessively minute,
and visible only to the closest scrutiny (wide Hofmeister’s fig.
in his ‘Comparative Researches,’ Tab. xxvi., fig. 3), still in
Oscillaria tenuis they are, perhaps, yet more delicate. This
investigation is, of course, one of the most difficult nature, and
demands the most acute vision.
These spiral filaments in the Oscillari@ do not appear to be
destined for the purposes of impregnation, for they gradually
increase in length and thickness, soon exhibiting innumerable
spiral turns, and between them in the latter condition, and the
finest spermatic filaments, a thousand different transitionary
forms are met with. From the spiri//a-like condition, they
pass, by an increase in length and a continual spiral move-
ment, into a spirulina-like form. Finally, when their motile
faculty has become weakened, they affix themselves by one
extremity to any near, larger object (for instance, Conferva-
filaments, &c.), whilst the other extremity continues to move
about with a creeping motion,—the peculiar Oscillarian move-
ON THE PROPAGATION OF THE OSCILLARLZ. 191
ment,—in performing which a young filament frequently re-
turns to the spiral. The last-described condition constitutes
the Leptothrix of authors. The filaments now gradually be-
come thicker, and though, at first, of the lightest emerald green,
they gradually assume a deeper and deeper tint. The first
indications of articulation are perceptible in them, until at last
a young Oscillatoria is again perfected.
The extremities of the young Oscillaria, as is well known, are
fringed with hairs: this may be an indication of the existence
of cilia, previously invisible, on the head-end of the filament,
which end has now become the point of the Oscillaria. But
in young plants it is not merely one or a few apical cells that
are so fringed, for I have, in filaments thus furnished, not un-
frequently noticed them fringed for the length of, perhaps, 30-
50 joints. This circumstance recals to mind the long-ciliated
spermatozoa of the Ferns and L£quisete. This investigation
will also afford ground for many important conclusions with
respect to the motion of the Oscillarie.
I shall return to many peculiarities of the Euglena in an-
other place, in speaking of other Nostochinez, and will here
merely state that I first remarked their plant-like connexion
in the Rivularie, in the gelatinous substance of which, when
the Rivularia was mature, | always met with these bodies.
Much time and continued study, together with a fortunate
conjunction of circumstances and ingenious combinations, will
be requisite to follow the filaments here described by me
through the labyrinth of forms of alge, with their heterogeneous
generations, if it be wished to apply this idea throughout that
class of plants.
( 192 )
RE VIE Ws.
A Frora AND Fauna wituin Livine Antmats. By JosepH Leipy, M.D.
Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge.
Tuart there are animals which inhabit the bodies of other
animals as their natural locality has long been known. Many
of these are so obvious as to be popularly recognized ‘under
the name of “ Worms.” It is, however, only since the ex-
tensive employment of the microscope in aiding vision, that
any large addition has been made to those generally known.
Not only is it found that each species of animal has its pecu-
liar parasitic animal and plant, but every species of animal
appears to have a Flora and a Fauna of its own. Formerly a
country was necessary to supply the materials of a Fauna or
Flora, but with the microscope in hand the stomach of an
insect affords abundance of peculiar species of animals and
plants for such a purpose, Dr. Leidy’s work is not an account
of all the species of plants found in living animals, but an
account of certain new genera and species of plants discovered
by himself in the stomach and intestines of a few species of
insects. In an introduction, Dr. Leidy refers to the plants
and animals of the human body. ‘These are treated of at
length in the works of Dujardin,* Diesing,+ and Robin.t
The plants described by Dr, Leidy are as follows :—
Genus, Enterobryus, Leidy. Thallus attached, consisting of a
single very long tubular cell, filled with granules and globules,
producing at its free extremity one, usually two, rarely three
shorter tubular cells, and growing at the other end from a
relatively short, cylindroid, amorphous, coriaceous pedicle,
commencing with a discoidal surface of attachment.
E. elegans is found growing from the basement-membrane
of the mucous membrane of the small and large intestine of
Julus marginatus, Say; and primary part of the exterior of
Ascaris infecta, Streptostomum agile, and Thelastomum at-
tenuatum, entozoa infesting the cavities of the viscera of the
same animal.
E. spiralis is found attached to the mucous membrane of
the small intestine of Julus pusillus.
* Histoire Naturelle des Helminthes. Paris, 1845.
+ Systema Helminthian Vindoboniw. 1850.
{ Histoire Naturelle des Végétaux Parasites qui croissent sur l’Homme
et sur les Animaux Vivants. Paris, 1853.
FLORA AND FAUNA OF LIVING ANIMALS. 193
E. attenuatus grows from the mucous membrane of the
ventriculus of the Passalus cornutus.
Dr. Leidy observes that these entophyta are found in the
herbivorous Myriapoda and Coleoptera, and in no instance has
he been able to detect them in species which are carnivorous.
Genus Eccrina, Leidy. Thallus attached, consisting of a
very long tubular cell, filled with granules and globules, pro-
ducing at its free extremity a succession of numerous globular
or oblong cells, and growing at the other end from a relatively
short, cylindroid, amorphous, coriaceous pedicle, commencing
with a discoidal surface of attachment.
£. longa was found growing in profusion from the mucous
membrane of the posterior part of the intestinal canal of
Polydesmus virginiensis.
E. moniliformis was found growing upon the mucous mem-
brane of the intestinal canal of Polydesmus granulatus.
Genus Arthromitus, Leidy. Thallus attached, by means of
one or more granules, simple, cylindrical, very long, fila-
mentous, articulate without ramuli. Articuli indistinct, with
amorphous contents finally converted into solitary oval
sporules.
A. cristatus grows from the mucous membrane of the ven-
triculus and large intestine of Julus marginatus, and also upon
Enterobryus elegans, Ascaris infecta, Streptostomum agile, and
Thelastomum attenuatum ; from the mucous membrane and its
appendages of the ventriculus of Passalus cornutus, and Poly-
desmus virginiensis, and upon Eccrina longa.
Genus Cladophytum, Leidy. Thallus attached by means of
one or more granules ; filamentous simple, with minute lateral
ramuli, or branched inarticulate amorphous in structure.
C. cornutum was found in the same positions as Arthromitus.
It is very minute. The filaments measured from the 1-700th
to the 1-100th of an inch in length, by the 1-80000th to
1-25000th of an inch in diameter.
Genus Corynocladus, Leidy. Thallus attached by means of
one or more granules; filamentous very compound ; branches
thicker than the trunk, without ramuli; inarticulate amor-
phous in structure.
C. radiatus was observed growing from the mucous mem-
brane and its appendages of .the ventriculus of Passulas
cornutus.
In addition to the above genera and species, Dr. Leidy
describes some parasitic phytoid bodies, whose structure he
could not well make out.
Associated with this Flora, Dr. Leidy found the following
Fauna :—
VOL, II. P
194 FLORA AND! FAUNA OF LIVING ANIMALS.
In Julus marginatus were found—
Gregarina Juli marginati, Ascaris infecta, Streptostomum
agile, Thelastomum attenuatum, Nyctotherus velox, Bodo Julidis,
a species of Vibrio.
In Passalus cornutus were found—
Gregarina Passali cornuti, Hystrignathus. rigidus.
In Blatta orientalis, the common cock-roach, were found—
A species of Vibrio, a species of Bodo, Nyctotherus ovalis,
a species of Gregarina, Streptostoreum gracile, Thelastomum
appendiculatum. Of these, Ascaris infecta, and the genera
Hystrignathus, Streptostomum, and Thelastomum, are new.
Dr. Leidy has also a chapter on pseudo- entoph yta. He is
inclined to regard many of the free-floating vibrio-like, not
spontaneously Viloviae filaments, as plants. The following
caution may be useful :-—
“Jn the study of the vegetable parasites of animals, particularly those
of the intestinal canals, it is necessary to be careful not to confound tie
tissues of certain well-knéwn cryptogamic plants, which may serve as food,
or adhere to the ordinary food of such animals, with true entophyta.
Thus fragments of fungi, confervee, lichens, and the spores of these, used as
food, or adhering as foreign matter to food of an ordinary kind, are liable
within the intestines to be mistaken for parasites.
‘‘In mid-winter I found beneath an old fence-rail an individual of
Acheta nigra, or large black cricket, within the proventriculus of which
were large quantities of what I supposed at the time to be a free, floating
entophyte, resembling in general appearance the ordinary yeast fungus
Torula, but which I now suspect to be an ergot upon which the animal
had fed. 'The*plant consisted of oblong or oval vesicular bodies, appa-
rently thickened at the poles, and filled with a colourless liquid ; but this
appearance, more probably, arose from the cells being distended with a
single large, transparent, colourless, amorphous globule, which pressed a
small existing amount of protoplasma to each end of the cavity. ‘The cells
were single, or in rows to eighteen in number. Frequently a single cell of
comparatively large size had an attached pair of cells, or rows of cells, at
one or both ends. Occasionally they are met with containing one or two
small round hyaline amorphous nuclei. The isolated cellules measured
from the 1-2500th to the 1-1666th of an inch in length, by the 1-8000th
to the 1-6000th of an inch in breadth. The rows measured up to the
1-300th of an inch in length.”
He adds that it is not improbable that an occasional new
species of cryptogamic plant might be discovered in the ex-
amination of the contents of the intestine of such animals as
the earth-worm, herbivorous Myriapoda herbivorous insects,
Chelonians and Batrachians. Some such bodies he describes,
and regards it as probable that they may produce some of the
cryptogamia which appear externally on animals, as Botrytis,
&e. There can be little doubt of the importance of this field
of observation, and in some of these, at present obscure
organisms, may yet be discovered the sources or indications of
states of disease to which the animal body is subject.
TRANSACTIONS OF PATHOLOGICAL SOCIETY. 195
The work is illustrated with ten beautiful plates illustrating
the details of the structure of the new plants and animals
described by Dr. Leidy.
TRANSACTIONS OF THE PaTHotosicaL Society or Lonpoy. Vol. IV. (for
the Session 1852-53).
Tus volume contains the results of the Society’s proceedings
during the Session of 1852-53, and presents a great amount
of matter interesting to the pathological histologist. Among
other papers of considerable value in that point of view,
we would indicate more especially an account by Dr. Bris-
towe, of the appearances exhibited in a case of “ Encepha-
loid cancer of the dura mater, and of the periosteum of the
ribs,” &c.; as also a paper by the same observeron the sup-
posed coexistence in the lungs of cancer and miliary tubercle (?).
But which latter productions are pronounced by Drs. Jenner
and Bristowe to be likewise of a cancerous nature, and not
tuberculous.
Dr. Bristowe also records the occurrence of “ hematoid
crystals in a hydatid cyst,” p. 166—a fact of considerable
interest. They are thus described: “In every part of the
cyst were numerous free vermilion spots, the largest of which
were about a line in diameter, and which clearly consisted,
to the naked eye, of rhomboidal crystalline plates. Micro-
scopic examination showed that all the vermilion points were
really colourless plates of cholesterin, the surfaces of which
were thickly studded with ruby-coloured, more or less regu-
larly rhomboidal crystals, having all the characters of the
bodies usually described as hematoid crystals. The largest
of them were about the thousandth of an inch in the long
diameter. The remains of Echinococci were everywhere
visible.”
We notice also a valuable paper, by Mr. Jabez Hogg, on
‘* Enchondroma of the Testis,” and in other situations, illus-
trated with excellent figures. We do not, however, perceive
how the occurrence of true bone in an enchondromatous mass
from the mamma of a bitch, or its characters, favours the view
entertained by Professors Todd and Bowman, viz.: “that the
lacune are developed from the nuclei of the cartilage cell.”
The latter statement, moreover, being one of whose truth there
is, at any rate, very considerable reason to doubt.
Dr. Handfield Jones describes the intimate nature of the
condition of the gastric mucous membrane, termed ‘ mam-
mellation.” The small whitish eminences which give the
-membrane the peculiar aspect thus denominated, were best
p 2
196 TRANSACTIONS OF PATHOLOGICAL SOCIETY.
seen in vertical sections as whitish grains or masses in the
submucous tissue. These masses consisted of tortuous tubes
crowded and _ packed together, and filled with an epithelium
composed of smaller-sized cell-particles and free nuclei, toge-
ther with abundant amorphous granular matter and much oil.
In the intervals of the masses there were no tubes, and the or-
dinary parallel arrangement was entirely lost. Dr. H. Jones
thinks that the tubes, thus filled, bear some real resemblance
to the granulations of a diseased kidney ; and like them, result
from the decay of the surrounding tissue and the distension of
the canals by epithelium. He concludes, therefore, that there
is some reason to believe that the glandular secreting structure
of the stomach is liable to degenerative disease of the same
kind as those which affect the kidney or liver. One of these
is a fatty degeneration, the other a change more analogous to
granular renal disease.
That there is some truth in these views is highly probable ;
but at the same time we do not conceive that the condition of
the mucous membrane above described is necessarily, in all
cases, one of degeneration, or even of disease, consisting pro-
bably, in many instances, simply in an infraction of the tubes
of the gastric mucous membrane, with epithelium, either
temporary, or more or less permanent.
Mr. John Marshall describes the appearances observed on
the examination of a case of lobular hepatitis.. And Dr, Lionel
Beale gives an account, which we regret is so short, of the
contents of a cyst in the kidney, which would seem to throw
additional light upon the vexed question of these cysts, to
which we adverted more at length in our notice of the previous
volume of the Pathological Society’s Transactions. The large
cyst in Dr. Beale’s case appears to have been lined with
epithelium, and besides this, he states “ that the tubes formed
dilatations in the meshes of the matrix.” Dr. Hare records a
similar case, but unfortunately seems to have omitted any
microscopic examination of the lining of the cyst. Dr.
Handfield Jones notices the occurrence of a ‘“ peculiar form of
uric acid crystals,” presenting the aspect of “spherical or
polygonal grains, $53 inch in diameter, and showing a con-
centric and radiated structure. On solution in liquor potasse
they left behind some granulous film, and some transparent
capsules of homogeneous membrane.” What could be the
chemical relations of this membrane ?
There is also an interesting communication from Dr. Bris-
towe on “muscular or fibrous tumours of the uterus,” in which
he shows that these tumours, at all events in some cases, are
composed wholly of muscular fibre-cells, similar to those of
PAGET, ON SURGICAL PATHOLOGY. 197
the uterus itself, and are not simply fibrous tumours, contain-
ing a greater or less quantity of muscular fibre mixed up with
them.
Associated with so many valuable contributions to micro-
scopic pathology, we regret to find a paper, which, as regards
that branch of science, at any rate, is by no means calculated
to advance knowledge, or to add credit to the transactions of
the Pathological Society. We refer to a paper by Dr. Black
of Chesterfield, descriptive of a case of hydatids expectorated
from the left lung, subsequently to the occurrence of typhoid
fever, Kc. It is a subject for regret to find an observer, so
zealous and acute as Dr. Black appears to be, so grievously
misled by the procrustean force of preconceived notions, as to
describe such objects as those represented in PI. II. fig. A.,
as portions of nerve tube and lymphatic vessels contained in
the sputa. In no possible condition could either of those
tissues present appearances like those figured by Dr. Black.
The objects most probably represent portions of vegetable or
animal hairs, But a more serious matter in Dr. Black’s paper
is in what he says respecting the hydatids expectorated from the
lungs (p. 52). That these were true hydatids, or echinococcus-
cysts, is sufficiently obvious from their appearance under the
naked eye; but when Dr. Black proceeds to describe their
intimate structure as viewed under the microscope, it is
difficult to decide, whether we should most admire his in-
genuity in building up a theory on the most baseless suppo-
sitions, or his apparently complete ignorance as to the true
nature of hydatid cysts. All that need be remarked concern-
ing this portion of the paper is, that it is absolute nonsense ;
and we cannot but wonder and regret that some friend in the
Pathological Society, should not have suggested as much to
the author before the publication of the paper. If we were
called upon to select a typical instance of theorizing run mad,
it would be the description here given of the mode in which
the walls of hydatid cysts come to be laminated (p. 57). It
is to be hoped that Dr. Black will be more careful in drawing
conclusions on future occasions.
LEcTURES ON SuRGIcAL PatruoLtocy. By James Pacer, F.R.S. London.
Longman.
We cannot discuss in our pages the general principles of
Surgical Pathology, but we are anxious to call attention to
Mr. Paget's book, because it recognises the aid which micro-
scopic research is calculated to confer on the principles of
Pathology, whether involving the art of the physician or the
198 PAGET, ON SURGICAL PATHOLOGY.
surgeon, We are sorry to know that there are still some
persons practising the medical profession who doubt the
benefit to be derived from the use of the microscope in the
practice of Medicine and Surgery. Such persons suppose
that because the diseases they treat get well without the use of
the microscope, that therefore the microscope is of no use in
practice. They forget that this argument can be employed
by every pretender to medical skill, and that the results: of
treatment are to be looked for in the improved: state of the
public health, in the ability to cure disease, and increased
intelligence of the members of the medical profession. ‘The
discoveries made by the microscope, and their influence on
the practice of Medicine, have perhaps been more evident in
exposing the absurdity of an empirical practice than in sug-
gesting new methods of rational treatment. But such works as
the present are the best answer that can be given to the igno-
rant assertion that the microscope is of no value in the prac-
tice of the healing art. It is all very well for the blind to
say that eyes are of no use, but those who see are best able
to appreciate their value.
Although at first sight it might be thought that Surgery is
more independent of the use of the microscope than other
departments of medical practice, a little reflection will show
that its application to the study of the nature of inflammation,
the healing of wounds, the repair of fractures, the results of
inflammation; and the nature and growth of simple and
malignant tumours, is of the utmost importance. The mission
of the surgeon is not to operate, but to avoid operations ; and
he who knows most minutely the nature of disease will be
most likely to attain this object of his art. That Mr. Paget
has been sensible of this we have abundant proof throughout
these very able lectures ; and we can conscientiously recom-
mend them as examples of the manner in which researches in
Pathology should be conducted. There are many subjects
ireated of in this work that we should liked to have discussed
in our pages, but our limits will not permit us on the present
occasion ; and we are anxious not to allow another Number of
our Journal to be published without calling the attention of
our surgical readers to its pages.
The work consists of two volumes, illustrated with a large
number of woodcuts, which refer more especially to the
subjects demanding microscopical research. In the first
volume the subjects of hypertrophy, atrophy, repair, inflam-
mation, mortification, and specific diseases, are taken up.
The second volume is entirely devoted to the various kinds of
tumours. In this volume, of the subjects discussed, the one
GAZZETTA MEDICA ITALIANA. 199
to which most practical interest is attached is evidently
that of the distinctions between malignant and non-malignant
tumours. . Mr. Paget thinks the distinction can be made out
by microscopic characters. With regard to cancer structures,
he says they may be generally described as formed of “nu-
cleated cells, or of such corpuscles as are rudimental of or
degenerate from the nucleated cell. Herein, and in the fact
that the corpuscles are neither imbedded in formed inter-
cellular substance, nor orderly arranged, lies one of the cha-
racters by which caneers are distinguished from other tumours
and from all natural parts.” A connected view, however, of
the origin and development of malignant tumours is still a
Orn ey and much more remains to be done before a
satisfactory histological account can be given of these truly
terrible conditions of cell-formation in the animal body.
Gazzetra Meprica Irarrana, Ser. II., No. 43, for October 25,
1853.
Tuis Journal contains a paper by Professor Pacini, on the
‘Structure of the Retina; communicated chiefly for the pur-
pose of indicating certain points, in which the statements on
that subject made by him (Sudla tessitura della retina), and
published in 1845 in the ‘ Nuoyi Annali di Scienze Naturali
di Bologna,’ have anticipated the more recent observations of
Miller and Kélliker. The points in which the observations
of the later authors correspond with those of the Florentine
Professor, include the subdivision of the retina into five dis-
tinct layers, which Professor Pacini enumerates from within
to without, commencing with the limitary membrane (mem-
brana limitante) the discovery of which appears to be due to
him, as is also the credit of haying been the first to indicate
the resemblance between the nucleated corpuscles of the retina
and the nerve-cells. In fact, the main additional fact of much
importance made known by Miller and Kolliker, is the ex-
istence of fibres prolonged from the ‘rods and cones’ of the
bacillar layer, and probably communicating with the fibres of
the optic nerve. But this discovery is one of so much im-
portance, as alone to mark an era in the histological history
of the retina, in which, as regards other particulars, Professor
Pacini has played a much more important part than appears
hitherto to have been conceded to him,
( 200 )
NOTES AND CORRESPONDENCE.
Composition of the Boghead Coal.—In compliance with the
request of the President of the Microscopical Society, 1 beg to
send you a copy of the results of my examination of the Bog-
head mineral, called Boghead coal (brown variety).
It is of a dingy drab colour, very compact and difficult to
pulverize; it has a slaty somewhat conchoidal fracture, and
is easily scratched by the nail, a light-brown streak being left.
Burnt in a crucrble it evolves an abundance of exceedingly
luminous gas, and the (coke?) left retains exactly the form of
the mass Salmnitied to distillation, and is of whitish colour.
This so-called coke will not burn, but when ignited in con-
tact with the air it leaves a white ash. Reduced to very fine
powder, and treated with coal-naphtha (the same as is used in
the manufacture of marine glue), the mineral yields a brown
solution, which evaporated leaves a resinoid mass, and the
residue left after treatment with the above-mentioned men-
struum may be partially dissolved by treatment with boiling
concentrated sulphuric acid,
The specific gravity of the samples examined varies from
LL tot lle.
Its constituents are as follows :—
Volatile matter - - - 67°28
Carbon - - - - 9°43
Ashes - - - - Zeno
Sulphur in coal - - 0:88 0°88
Ditto in coke - = 0°86
Ditto in volatile matter - 0°02
100°88
Composition of the ashes :—
Silica - - = - - 53°6
Peroxide of iron - - - 40
Alumina - - - - 39°2
Carbonate of lime -—- - - 32
100°0
A. Normanpy, 67, Judd Street, Brunswick Square.
the Boghead Coal.—l| have just received the Journal, and I
find in it a statement, copied from the ‘Commonwealth,’
MEMORANDa. 201
which I must correct. It is there stated, that I said at the
Royal Society of Edinburgh that I regarded the Torbane
mineral as differing from bituminous shale, because 1 could
not extract bitumen from it by any solvent.
Now what I really stated was this, “ that bituminous coal
and bituminous shale were wrong names, inasmuch as no true
bitumen existed in either, or could be extracted by those
solvents in which true bitumen is soluble. I added that the
combustible matter in the mineral was, like that of coal, not
true bitumen, and that I could find no chemical difference
between it and the combustible part of ordinary coal. Some
persons regarded the mineral as earthy matter which had
become impregnaied with bitumen ; but this was not the case,
if by bitumen be meant the substance, allied to asphalt, com-
monly so called. My argument was that since I could find no
chemical distinction between the combustible matter in this
mineral and that in coal, the mineral was, chemically con-
sidered, a coal. As to structure, that is often wanting in
portions of coal, and besides, Dr. Traill had just said that no
true distinction could be founded on the absence of structure.”
By the report in the Journal I am made not only to say
nearly the reverse of what I did, say, since I maintained the
identity of the combustible or bituminous matter in coals,
shales, and the mineral, but Iam made to talk downright
nonsense, as if I maintained that solvents could extract bitu-
men from shale, which I said they could not.
Allow me also to point out that the Reviewer of Fresenius
on Mycology has made a mistake in translating Unscheinbarkeit
‘‘unsightliness.” It means not precisely invisibility, but the
want of obvious perceptibility ; and F’. means to say that it is so
difficult to see the structure and organs of fungi that people
are thereby deterred from the study. The phenomena are too
obscure, too little apparent, to attract the many. This is his
true meaning, for which no single English word will suffice.—
WILLIAM Grecory, Edinburgh.
A defence of the proposed new genus “ Actinophenia”—Shadbolt.
—In a paper by Mr. Roper on the “ Diatomacee of the
Thames,” read before the Microscopical Society in January
of the present year, that gentleman alludes to a species pre-
viously described by me (under the name of Actinophenia
splendens, occurring in the Port Natal gathering of Diatomacea,
and also found abundantly in the Guano from Callao), as
being probably somewhat similar to one found by him amongst
the Thames deposit, but he refers bis species to the genus Acti-
nocyclus of Ehrenberg, under the specific name sedenarius. As
202 MEMORANDA.
it is evident from the remarks which accompany his deserip-
tion that he has mistaken my reasons for not classing the
species in question as he has done, it is probable that others
may have not comprehended them ; and I think it right, con-
sequently, to endeavour to show, that my object was not a
needless multiplication of genera, more especially as I per-
ceive from Mr. Roper’s drawing that our attention is directed
to one identical plant.
I am aware that it may look like presumption in me to
enter the lists against so great an authority as the learned Pro-
fessor quoted ; but, in the first place, 1 am by no means satis-
fied that I really do differ from Ehrenberg, and even if |
do, it is by no means surprising that a minute flaw should be
perceptible to the Lilliputian that was overlooked by the
giant.
In all the Actinocycli proper, the number of segments
formed by the septa is always even, and every alternate segment
occupies a position ina different plane from that in immediate
contiguity to itself. This is so marked a character, that it
cannot fail to be observed when once pointed out. The front
view presents an undulating outline, and the two valves are so
placed that the alternate segments in each fit into one another,
the septa also coinciding; but in the genus which I have
called “* Actinophenia,” the case is in every way different even
according to Mr. Roper’s own description (the correctness of
which I quiteadmit), for here, as in the genus “ Arachnoidiscus,”
the segments are ail in one plane, and the septa all in another,
being placed internally. Moreover, the front view of the two
valves presents a sort of double scallop in outline; and to
crown the whole, the septa of the inferior valye are not placed
opposite to those in the superior one, but intermediately.
Surely all these points are sufficient to establish a generic
difference ; but if not, there is another to which I would direct
the attention of microscopists, viz., the structure of the frustule.
In the genera Actinocyclus, Coscinodiscus, Triceratium, Acti-
nophenia, and Arachnoidiscus, | have most distinctly and un-
mistakably detected the presence externally of a sort of mem-
brane not unlike cellulose, having very minute reticulations,
puncta, or cells (according to the fancy of the observer); for
they are so minute that it is impossible to pronounce with any
degree of certainty even when viewed under the very highest
powers of our finest instruments ; and this external membrane
is not brittle like the siliceous part, but tough and capable of
being folded and unfolded without its necessarily breaking ; and
this in the genus “ Arachnoidiscus”’ 1 have actually accom-
plished, and recorded the fact'in a paper published in the
MEMORANDA. 203
‘Microscopical Society’s Transactions.’ This external mem-
brane is in all the genera I have quoted, supported by a siliceous
framework ; but if we examine those of Actinocycli and Actino-
phenia, how different they appear, the one having a strong
siliceous network between the septa, and the other being
quite destitute of such an appendage. It seems that Mr.
Roper has noticed the membrane to which I have alluded, but
has not probably been aware of its character ; and has evidently
fallen into the error of supposing that I had relied upon that
as a characteristic difference, because the markings are exceed-
ingly patent in Actinophwnia from the absence of the net-like
reticulations in the siliceous part, and somewhat obscured by
their presence in the Actinocycli, and the other genera pre-
viously mentioned.
One other objection I have to make is to the specific desig-
nation sedenarius, founded upon one of the most inconstant
characters that can be employed, viz., number—and it un-
fortunately happens in the present case, that the variation in
the number of septa is so frequent, that seventeen to twenty
might quite as well have been selected as the number employed.
I am aware that Mr. Roper merely took up what he conceived
to be Ehrenberg’s view, and that the specific designation was
not of his selecting ; but if he will examine a slide of Callao
Guano, he will, I am sure, be satisfied as to the inconstancy
in the number of septa.
Under all these circumstances, I submit that I have adduced
sufficient evidence to establish the claim of the “ Actinophenia”
to a separate generic distinction, whether | have chosen a
proper designation or not, | must leave to others to decide —
GEORGE SHADBOLT.
@n a Beveloping Solution for Microphotographs made by
artificial Wight.—The developing solution, of which the tfor-
mula is here given, appears to possess a considerable advan-
tage over pyrogallic acid, used in the common way, in the
production of microphotographic collodion negatives. The
black is much more intense than that which I have been able
to procure by the use of pyrogallic acid, and the lights fully as
clear, if not more so, That it will keep, is also an advantage,
though a trifling one, as it can be made extemporaneously in
a few moments at any time. Whether it will answer as well
for microphotographs made by daylight, and for the usual
camera-pictures, my experience will not allow me to state ; for
the latter I have fancied it not well adapted—but why, | do
not know. The solution is made by dissolving
30 grains protosulphate iron,
10 grains tartaric acid,
204 MEMORANDA.
in 1 fluid ounce of water, acidulated with two drops of nitric
acid, It is, perhaps, needless to remark that the iron-solution
without the tartaric acid, answers very well for positives on
the glass. The light I have used for microphotography has
latterly been common gas, with a good Argand burner, which
I find quite sufficient for the 4-10ths and under, The time
required is from 5 minutes to 15 minutes. Under longer ex-
posure the collodion begins to dry.—G. B.
Mode of Growth of Parasitic FungiimAs all the scientific
men of this country agree in opinion as to the mode of attack
and growth of fungoid diseases on plants, it may seem pre-
sumptuous, if not superfluous, to add anything to what has
already been said upon the subject. May it not, however, be
possible that many of these men whose names stand so high as
to cause their opinion to be received as authority, without
further investigation—may it not be possible that in the great
variety and multiplicity of their pur-
suits they may have passed over so
rae a comparatively unimportant a subject ?
RE } For, if they had brought the full
SS powers of their investigations to bear
upon it, they could not fail to have
been convinced of what I am now
about to advance: that fungi do not
enter and ramify in the tissues and
send up stems through the stomata
of living healthy plants,* but that
they only grow upon the surface, as
may easily be seen, if proper care be
observed in preparing sections for the
microscope. I have bestowed a great
deal of time and attention on the subject, and feel fully con-
vinced that the mode of growth of this class of fungi is as
represented in the annexed illustration, which, should you
think it, with the accompanying remarks, worthy your notice,
you will oblige by inserting in your excellent Journal for
April.—Epwarp Tucker, Margate.
* I wish to be understood to refer especially to the class of fungi,
Hyphomycetes, or Mucedines, which includes Botrytis and Oidiwm.
( 205 )
PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
Microscoricat Society. January 25th, 1854.
George Jackson, Esq., President, in the Chair.
Geo. Coles, Esq.; Montague Leverson, Esq.; J. H. Roberts,
Esq.; T. W. Burr, Esq. ; Wm. Stuart, Esq.,—were balloted for,
and duly elected Members of the Society.
A paper was read by F. C. S. Roper, Esq., on the Diatomacez
of the Thames (Transactions, vol. ii., p. 67).
‘A paper was read by R. S. Boswell, Esq., entitled Remarks upon
the Bird’s-head process found upon Cellularia plumosa, and other
zoophytes.
February 15.—Anniversary Meeting (Transactions, voi. ii. p. 83).
Royau Institution. March 17th, 1854.
On the Construction of the Compound Achromatic Microscope.
By Cuarztes Brooke, M.A., F.R.S., Surgeon to the Westminster
Hospital.
Arter briefly adverting to the ordinary phenomena of reflection,
the lecturer illustrated those of refraction by a moveable diagram,
which readily explained the total reflection of a ray of light incident
on the common surface of two media, at an angle greater than the
critical angle, corresponding to which the angle of refraction is 90’.
The aberration of reflected or refracted light at a spherical surface
was then alluded to; and although the reflectors employed in micro-
scopes may be rendered free from spherical aberration by giving
them an elliptic, and those of telescopes a parabolic form, there is no
practicable method at present known of constructing lenses otherwise
than with spherical or plane surfaces ; and from the difficulty of ob-
taining sufficiently perfect reflecting surfaces, and of preserving
them when obtained, refracting microscopes are now universally
employed.
Chromatic dispersion was then mentioned, and the usual mode of
producing achromatism by the combination of various kinds of glass,
which differ in their dispersive power, which was illustrated by a
combination of three prisms. The construction of achromatic object-
glasses was next explained, as well as the nature of the aberration
produced by the presence or absence of a plate of thin glass, covering
the object, and the mode of correcting it in object-glasses of high
power, by varying the distance of the anterior from the posterior
combinations, as first applied in practice by Mr. A. Ross, and fully
detailed in his article on the Microscope in the ‘ Penny Cyclopedia.’
The angle of aperture of object-glasses was then explained, and
the power of those of large angular aperture in developing the struc-
ture of certain test objects, such as the siliceous shells of Diatomacee,
was explained to be totally distinct from the mere increase of light
transmitted.
206 PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
Mr. Brooke offered an hypothesis as to the structure of these
objects, from which it would necessarily follow that the structure
would be rendered visible by oblique rays alone, and the necessary
degree of obliquity would depend upon the smallness of the elevation
on the undulating surface of the shell. This view was then shown
to be highly probable. A specimen of the Plewrostgma formosum
(first found by Mr. Brooke, at Walton-on-the-Naze) was viewed
under a 43-inch object-glass by Ross, and an achromatic eye-piece of
high power (which was stated to be unquestionably superior to a
deep Huyghenian eye-piece) ; when an opaque dise was interposed
between the object and the centre of the object-glass, which cut off a
large portion of the central rays, the diagonal rows of dots were still
distinctly visible; but when the marginal rays were stopped out by
a diaphragm, although a much larger quantity of light was admitted
than in the former case, the markings were entirely lost.
In order to render visible the more difficult objects of this class,
glasses of large angle of aperture have been constructed ; but their
employment is much limited, owing to the greatly-increased diffi-
culty of correcting the aberrations of the transmitted pencil of light,
and consequently the small amount of correction, that is, of adapta-
tion to altered circumstances, that they admit of. From investiga-
tions which he knew to be in progress, the lecturer expressed a hope
that by due adjustments of the illuminating pencil, the most difficult
objects would be rendered equally visible under object-glasses of
moderate aperture, which are much more generally useful.
Mr. Brooke then alluded to the preposterous angle of aperture of
certain foreign object-glasses, viz., 172°, and explained the fallacy of
the ordinary method of determining that angle, which consists in
viewing through a microscope the ‘ight of a lamp placed at a few
feet distance, and moving either the light or the microscope, so as to
traverse the centre angular distance through which the light is visible.
In this method, the course of the rays is contrary to what is usual,
and oblique pencils may be brought to an imperfect focus at the
back of the object-glass, and produce a glare of light, but which
meet at a greater angle than the extreme rays that can enter the
object-glass from the field of view, and which, consequently, are the
extreme available rays.
A very perfect instrument for measuring the angle of aperture,
designed by Mr. Gillett, was then explained. This consists of two
microscopes, the optical axes of which may be adjusted to coinci-
dence. One of these is attached horizontally to the traversing arm
of a horizontal graduated circle, and is adjusted so that the point of
a needle, made to coincide with the axis of motion of the moveable
arm, may be in focus and in the centre of the field of view. The other
microscope, to which the object-glass to be examined is attached, is
fixed and so adjusted, that the point of the same needle may be in
focus in the centre of its field. The eye-piece of the latter is then
removed, and a cap with a very small aperture is then substituted,
close to which a lamp is placed. It is evident that the rays trans-
mitted by the aperture will pursue the same course in reaching the
PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES. 207
point of the needle, as the visual rays from that point to the eye; but
in a contrary direction, and being transmitted through the moveable
microscope, the eye will perceive an image of the bright spot of
light, throughout that angular space, that represents the true aperture
of the object-glass examined, The applications of this instrument
in the construction of object-glasses are too numerous to be here de-
tailed.
The important subject of illumination was then so far considered
as the short space of time allotted to the discourse would permit.
It may be taken as an axiom. ‘that in the illumination of transparent
objects, the amount of definition will depend upon the accuracy with
which the illuminating rays converge upon the several points of an
object ; consequently, the source of light and the field of view must
be the conjugate foci of the illuminator ; of which an achromatic
combination, similar to an object-glass, is the best form, and the con-
cave mirror commonly employed is probably the worst, inasmuch as
in a pencil of rays obliquely reflected at a spherical surface, no focal
point exists.
The first compound microscopes on record, as those of P. Bonnoni,
about 1697, which were placed horizontally, and that of J. Marshall,
in the beginning of the eighteenth century, which was vertical, were
furnished with central condensers; but in later years the perfection
of the illuminating apparatus has by no means kept pace with that
of the ocular portion of the microscope, though scarcely of less im-
portance, in attaining the utmost practicable perfection in the vision
of microscopic objects.
The advantages of employing an achromatic condenser were first
pointed out by Dujardin; since which time an object-glass has been
frequently but inconveniently employed, and more recently achro-
matic illuminators have been constructed by most of our instrument-
makers. Some years since Mr. Gillett was led by observation to
appreciate the importance of controlling, not merely the quantity of
light, which may be effected by a diaphragm placed anywhere be-
tween the source of light and the object, but the angle of aperture
of the illuminating pencil, which can be effected only by a diaphragm
placed immediately behind the achromatic illuminating combination.
An elastic diaphragm, or artificial pupil, as it might be called, was
first proposed by Mr. Brooke, which was shown to answer very well
in a large model, and produced a remarkable semblance of vital con-
tractility ; but mechanical difficulties interfered with its application,
and the revolving diaphragm in the instrument now well known as
Gillett’s condenser was substituted.*
When the rays of light converging on the field of view meet at a
greater angle than that of the extreme rays that can enter the object-
glass, the dark-ground illumination is produced, in which the objects
are seen in strong lines of light on a dark ground: this is best suited
to objects having a well-marked outline, such as spicula of sponges,
* A description of this very useful apparatus has been recently pub-
lished in the ‘ Elements of Natural Philosophy,’ by Golding Bird and
Charles Brooke.
208 PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
or the shells of the Polygastrica. This may be effected either by
Wenham’s truncated parabolic reflector, or by a central opaque stop
in Gillett’s condenser.
The value of this kind of illumination in certain cases was shown
by its effect in rendering visible the persistent cell-walls in a speci-
men of hard vegetable tissue, a section of a plum-stone ; which could
hardly be distinguished by the ordinary or bright-ground illumina-
tion. A white cloud brightly illuminated by the sun has long been
recognized as the best source of illumination ; butas this is not often
obtainable, the light of a Jamp thrown upon a flat surface of plaster
of Paris, or powdered carbonate of soda, has been used as a substi-
tute. . ya ty x
' 7+ y
4 ‘ 4 —
te 7 i & 7 ,
‘ + i a “
ee "
; hs 1
‘= *
j r
a ky ov,
P3 bd
|? = Fr
- ! i cow = J
. 2
= é ' -
, pele
‘<
N tf
a) ‘
’
‘
t S
_
4 - 7
& Wert inp Tonka
HAM
Ford
Never Seur Vb
Tuffkn West ac
on i” ATS
a
oe yet sae
-
Vb Ht Vl
Sour Sourn
A>
-
( 209 )
ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS.
On the AverturE of Oxssect-Giasses. By F. H. Wenanam.
In the ‘ Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science,’ for Jan.
1854, I described a method of measuring the angular aperture
of object-glasses (which had previously been made use of by
Professor Amici). Since that time there has been some dis-
cussion in relation to this subject, and as the plan that I pro-
posed has been somewhat misunderstood, I will offer some
further explanation.
The principle consisted in placing a lens of short focal
length over the top of the lowest eye-piece of the ordinary
microscope, so that the focus of the emergent pencil, and that
of the examining-lens should be coincident ; as thus adjusted,
the microscope = converted into a kind ae telescope, and a
view of objects, at an infinite distance, may be obtained. On
rotating the microscope in a horizontal plane, taking the focus
of the object-glass as the centre of motion, a distant object
will be seen throughout the arc, that includes the aperture of
the objective. When the object is bisected, or becomes very
indistinct, this point will be the limits of useful aperture.
The foregoing method has been objected to, on the ground
that it is as much a measurement of field of view as aperture,
but this is by no means the case, as the three eye-lenses form
an optical combination that takes up the rays from the objec-
tive at its posterior, or conjugate focal point; and but a very
minute portion of the field lens of the eye-piece comes into
action, for by substituting a stop of oniy 1-20th of an inch in
diameter in place of the ordinary one, there is no difference in
the resulting measurement,—in fact, the definition and dis-
tinctness is rather improy = by it than otherwise. It is,
perhaps, advisable to have a small stop at a short distance
above the upper lens, as it will serve to keep the eye central.
On first considering the modus operandi of this instrument,
it would appear that as it causes the focus of the object-glass
to be an infinite one, that there is no similarity between focal
distance and the relation of aperture, and its effect on objects
seen with a microscope under ordinary circumstances ; or, in
short, that the aperture of the object-glass, in the form that it
is usually understood, is apparently quite destroyed ; but it is
a property existing in the object-glass, thus circumstanced,
VOL, II, Q
210 WENHAM, ON THE
that it is still capable of receiving rays from distant objects,
at every incidence within its aperture, and forming them into
an image in the axis of the microscope, and it is a somewhat
important feature in the principle, that we can ascertain the
relative distinctness of the image at the same time that the
aperture is being measured. if did not recommend this for
the purpose of superseding existing methods of measurement,
as Mr, Lister’s is perfectly accurate up to a certain number of
degrees ; but it is more especially useful as a means of cor-
roborition’ and for detecting errors that Mr. Lister’s plan will
not always show ; for example, if an object-glass be selected
with a large aperture that is surrounded by coloured zones, or
a false ent: and measured with the examining-lens attached,
on reaching the extreme, if this lens be removed, it is ‘hen
simply Mr. Lister’s arrangement, and the clear light from the
candle will be seen exactly to bisect the field of view ; but
the coloured rings, and all other light that does not tend to
form an image, will be outside, and not included within the
aperture.
I have found the method very serviceable, and am the more
inclined to advocate it from the circumstance of its having
been employed by Professor Amici, whose practical experience
in the construction of object-glasses gives his opinion much
weight.
There is another plan of measuring apertures, contrived by
Mr. Gillett, lately described hoes the Royal Society, and
which has been announced, in the last Journal, as being, “a
very perfect instrument for measuring the angle of aperture.”
Supposing this assumes all preceding methods to be imper-
fect, | will venture to give some reason for believing that it
does not advance to such a standard. In describing the
instrument, I infer that proper arrangements have been made
for ensuring accuracy of motion and centering, and which fully
answer the required end.
The principle of action is as follows:—The object-
glass, whose aperture is to be measured, is attached to an
ordinary microscope body, fixed in an horizontal position ; a
candle or lamp is placed close in front of the eye-piece,
which is removed, and a cap, with a very small aperture,
inserted in its stead, Under these circumstances the rays
will pass through the lenses of the objective, and on finally
emerging therefrom, will form a cone of light corresponding
to its aperture, It is merely the simple micehvedient of the
angle of this cone that Mr. Gillett has endeavoured to arrive
at. To effect this, he has thought it necessary to employ
another microscope, with eye-piece and object-glass complete ;
APERTURE OF OBJECT-GLASSES. 211
the focal point of which is made to rotate horizontally from a
centre coincident with the axis and focus of the first micro-
scope. The traverse of what may be termed the examining-
microscope is indicated by an arc divided into degrees. This
arrangement is not new to me, as [ have used the same for
some years, for examining the oblique correction of object-
glasses; but I always considered it to be too incorrect for a
measurer of angular aperture, for the indication will be nearly
as the sum of the two object-glasses ; ; or a large portion of the
aperture of the examining-glass is added to the angle of the
objective to be measured, and for tiiis there is no direct ratio.
I have two object-glasses, one having a clear and definite
aperture of 95°, and the other 90°, which, when applied
together in this way, the indicated angle is very near 180°.
Mr. Gillett appears to have discovered this source of error,
as he has since attempted to remedy it by making an alteration
in his instrument, which now somewhat differs from that
originally described. To explain the improvement, I will
consider the two microscopes and objectives placed with their
axes in the same right line with foci coincident. A patch
or stop is then placed over the front of the examining object-
glass, which cuts off exactly one half of its area in a vertical
position. Supposing this stop to occupy the left-hand side,
the body of the examining-microscope is then moved to the
right ; and when the light disappears, the number of degrees
are noted. ‘The microscope is next moved back to its linear
position, and the stop shifted round, so as to cut off the right
hand half, and the degrees taken from this direction, added to
the first indication, will give the angular aperture. This has
thus to be obtained by means of a double traverse and shifting
of the stop, which must be, to some extent, detrimental to
accuracy. The last modification certainly reduces the aperture
of the examining object-glass, but the same may also be done
by using a stop with a very narrow vertical slit; the whole
angle can then be taken at one operation, without sti teins the
stop. I have tried both these arrangements with different
assortments of object-glasses, but still find that there are some
curious discrepancies.
If every precaution be taken for obtaining an accurate
result according to Mr. Gillett’s method, and then the instru-
ment be reversed, so as to rotate or traverse the object-glass
with the aperture to be measured, the same indication will be
obtained, This, then, merely resolves itself into Mr. Lister’s
method of measurement, and which will certainly perform
better, and be more accurate, if the optical arrangement which
intervenes, and only serves as an impediment to the free
oe =
212 WENHAM, ON THE
passage of the light, is removed; in short, | am of opinion
that Mr. Gillett’s complex contrivance will not prove seryice-
able to the practical optician, If it is only the measurement
of the angle of the cone of light emergent from the object-
glass that he desires to accomplish, it may be accurately
effected by means of a very simple and portable instrument,
without any optical appliances whatever, as these only terid
to falsify the result; but, for many reasons, | do not approve
of measuring apertures in this manner.
There is a paper in the Proceedings of the Royal Irish
Academy for January 23rd, 1854, ‘ On a New Method of
Measuring the Angular Aperture af the Objectives of Micro-
scopes,’ by the Rev. T. R. Robinson. This is perfectly
accurate in principle, and, as the paper contains some original
information that leads the way to matters of much practical
utility, I shall refer to it at some length.
The mode of measurement cannot be better described than
by using the author’s own words. ‘ As a lucid point in the
focus of the objective sends out from the eye-piece rays nearly
parallel, so light sent in the opposite direction through the
microscope will converge at that focus, and then diverge in a
cone, whose angle equals the aperture of the objective. If this
cone be intercepted at right angles to its axis, by a screen, and
the diameter of its section, together with the distance of the
screen from the surface (focus) of the objective, be carefully
measured, they give the aperture.”
The luminous source may be either a camphine lamp or
sunlight; the latter gives “a beautiful map of the objective's
light territory,” and shows with remarkable distinctness the
most minute errors of workmanship in any of the lenses, such
as scratches, defective centering, dirt, &c. Another important
application of Professor Robinson’s principle, is the measure-
ment of the diminution of effective aperture that the object-
glass sustains, when used upon an object immersed in balsam,
or other medium; I do not think that this measurement can
be so well effected by any other method than that here spoken
of. The author mentions the fact that objects in balsam will
be less illuminated than in the other way ; this alludes to the
diminished angle of the illuminating pencil, and the same
reasoning also applies to the aperture of the object-glass.
The annexed diagram will show to what extent various angles
of aperture are reduced, when viewing a structure immersed
in Canada balsam. The exterior aperture is 170°, which is
assumed to be the largest effective pencil that con be got
through an object-glass ; this is,at once reduced to 82° or less,
and the inner angle of 90° is brought down to about 55°.
APERTURE OF OBJECT-GLASSES, 213
I may here observe that a parallel plate of glass over an
object, mounted dry, has no effect in reducing the aperture, for
a
the rays, after being deflected by the first surface, emerge
again rae the second one parallel to their original direction,
and all cony erge to a point at the same angle as at first, con-
sequently the object is seen through the ae with an ‘angle
of aperture the same as if it was not interposed. This is not
the case when the object is immersed in a refracting medium
with a plane surface, for the first, or single deflection, is not
compensated for a second time, and hence the angle of aper-
ture will be considerably reduced, according to the refractive
power of the medium. Without resorting to theory to
demonstrate what the reduction of aperture ought to be, I will
show, practically, what it really is. In order to ascertain this,
I employ ed a piece of polished plate-glass with parallel idles.
0508 of an inch thick, which possessed very nearly the
same refractive power as Canada balsam; I ascertained this
by filling a plano-concave lens that I had by me, made of the
same glass, with that material; when the concave side was
placed on die plate of glass, on looking through them both,
no optical effect could be dieiiry ered,
The method of using the glass plate was as follows :—]
first covered one side of it with a thin film of bees’-wax, to
serve as a screen, and laid this downwards on the stage of the
microscope. I then focussed the object-glass to be measured,
exactly upon the upper transparent surface of the plate.
Without shifting the microscope from its horizontal position,
I next placed a cane before the eye-piece ; a bright circle of
light appeared on the bees’-wax screen, the diameter of which
I carefully measured ; an angle was taken from the circumfer-
ence of the circle to the focal point of the objective (the
214 WENHAM, ON THE
distance being equal to the thickness of the glass plate). The
angle thus obtained will represent the effective aperture of
the object-glass for an object mounted in Canada balsam.
The glass plate was now removed without disturbing the
other adjustments, and a paper, or card screen placed in
exactly the same plane as the bees’-wax film formerly occu-
pied. The diameter of the circle of light was agaim measured :
an angle taken from the circumference to the same point as
before represents the aperture for an object mounted dry.
This last is in strict accordance with Professor Robinson’s
method. The following were the results :—A 1-12th, having
an aperture of 146° on a object mounted dry, was reduced to
75° on an object in balsam; an 1-8th of 125° to 71°; a 1-5th
of 105° to 68°; anda 4-10ths of 90° to 56°.
I have not had an opportunity of trying to what extent the
aperture is reduced by the various other known media used in
mounting objects. This may be very easily done by filling a
parallel glass cell with the fluid, and it will exactly represent
the conditions under which such objects are mounted,
These experiments will readily account for the difficulty of
discovering the markings or structure of a severe test when
mounted in balsam ; for, as thus seen, it may be inferred that
no aperture exceeding 85° can be made to bear upon it, and
this is even supposing that the largest aperture object-glass
that has ever been constructed is used. Such being the case,
{ am somewhat puzzled at an announcement that appears to
contradict this fact, coming from one that must be considered
an authority in these matters. I refer to Professor Bailey,
who, in a letter addressed to Matthew Marshall, Esq., dated
January 20th, 1852, first speaks of an American object-glass
of very large aperture (1723°), and its performance on the
most difficult tests known, and then proceeds to say: “In
all these cases (and, in fact, whenever I allude to a test
object), | mean the balsam-mounted specimens. The dry
shells I never use as tests.” This assertion seems to me to be
extraordinary, and very like saying that an aperture of 85° or
90° will do everything tbat is required. I have invariably
found that when very difficult tests are mounted in balsam, I
cannot discover the markings, and certainly, the reasons
herein given will account for it. It is to be hoped that the
American opticians have discovered some new and peculiar
principle in object-glasses, that will render a smaller amount
of aperture serviceable ; but however this may be, I think
that Professor Bailey’s statement requires some further expla-
nation.
As the nature of the markings on test objects is now
APERTURE OF OBJECT-GLASSES. 215
exciting some degree of attention I will offer some remarks
on the subject. The prevailing opinion with some theorists
is, that the stria are rendered visible by the contrast induced
by an inherent refraction of the siliceous prominences, throwing
a portion of the rays from the source of illumination without
the limits of the aperture of the object-glass, and thus causing
the markings to appear opaque. This is, in effect, comparing
the object to a piece of fluted glass. Now, if this were
correct, if even the most easy of this class of objects were to be
mounted in Canada baisam, the refractive index of this and
silex being so nearly the same, every appearance of structure
would be entirely obliterated ; but it is found not to be so, for
the markings have the same appearance when in balsam as
out of it; what want of distinctness there may be is partly
accounted for by the effect of diminished aperture, which is,
of necessity, reduced under this condition, and therefore, less
of the radiations from the object are collected.
I cannot persuade myself that any vital organism can be so
devoid of structure, and so perfectly homogeneous as this
theory would imply. I believe that all test objects are seen
in the same way as any other transparent ones, by means of
the different degrees of opacity of the parts. This opacity
may arise from varying thicknesses, or from an imperviousness
to light arisimg from colour, or the aggregated structure of the
markings. In any of these cases refraction is not called into
operation; and, further, I can show the markings on the most
difficult tests when illuminated as opaque objects under such
circumstances, that no light can be refracted from the striz
into the object-glass.
Those who adyance such speculations as these appear to
forget that the definition of tests depends entirely upon
aperture, and that this must be increased in proportion to the
closeness of the lines or dots upon the object, and if the aper-
ture of the objective is insufficient, no method of illumination
will call them into view ; there is no occasion even to employ
a microscope to ascertain this fact. In my paper on illumi-
nation, contained in the last Journal, I have made comparison
between the optical properties of the eye and a microscope ;
this has been rather doubtfully received, for some cannot see
the analogy ; but I must again refer to the same organ for a
demonstration of the properties of aperture,
If we place some small print against a wall, and retire to
such a distance that the words are barely legible, and then
apply to the eye an optical combination similar to an opera-
glass, which will give it greater aperture, without increase. of
magnifying power; it is most remarkable how this assists
216 WENHAM, ON THE
vision, and appears to illuminate the object, enabling the
print to be easily read.
The eye by itself is also a natural lens, possessing some
amount of linear aperture, and if further comparison were
wanting, the marginal rays show evident symptoms of imper-
fect achromatism ;—but to return to the point in question.
If we hold the blade of a penknife diametrically across the
pupil, and examine the flame of a candle, it will appear
double ; as the images formed at the opposite extremes of the
pupil, or aperture, do not unite on the retina, this is igiite
analogous to the diffracting spectrum seen in the microscope.*
By using a piece of paper in the form of a cross, in place of
the penknife, four images may even be obtained. The appa-
rent mobility of distant objects, when a body is brought in
a line with them at a short distance from the eye, may be
attributed to the same causes.
To illustrate the effects of the aperture of the eye in sepa-
rating lines, suspend in a good light a piece of textile fabric,
printed either in stripes or dots. Stand at such a distance off
that the lines and interspaces are just clearly defined. Now
examine them through a small perforation, made with a pin
in a black card. The lines or dots will become invisible ;
approach nearer and they will reappear; by substituting a
smaller stop they will vanish as before, and again become
distinct at a shorter distance. [ cannot go further than merely
to mention this fact, which has been thoroughly investigated
by Mr. Lister, who from the three data, of size of stops,
number of lines in a given space, and distance of the eye from
the object, has obtained very practical results, and ascertained
the degree of aperture necessary for separating lines or spaces
a certain distance asunder. In making comparison between
experiments with the eye and microscopic object-glass, it is
assuming angular and linear apertures to be the same in effect,
of which fact there can be no question.
For a demonstration of aperture I will again quote Professor
Robinson’s paper :—“ The effect of angular aperture is merely
an increase of illuminating power analogous to that of linear
aperture in a telescope. Let O be a point of an object seen
by an objective whose anterior surface is AB; this point, in
case of a test object, may be considered as self-luminous, and
equally so in every direction.”
This exactly confirms what I have endeavoured to explain,
that aperture is just effective in proportion to the quantity of
radiations collected from the object.
* See ‘ Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science,’ for April, 1854,
page 152.
APERTURE OF OBJECT-GLASSES. 217
All these facts must tend to prove that the separation of
distances and definition of tests is entirely dependant upon
aperture, and not upon illumination, as the Jatter will be quite
ineffectual without the former. In concluding these remarks
I may mention, that of two object-glasses of equal perform-
ance, the best is that which does its work with the Jeast
amount of aperture. Microscopists are but too apt to judge
of the value of objectives, and select them entirely by the
latter element.
Some years ago I announced my opinion that 150° might
be considered as the limits of useful aperture. This was
asserted from practical data, and theory has led Professor
Robinson to the same conclusion. There is little to be
gained beyond this; and now that 160° and even 170° are
not uncommon, I consider it quite absurd to suppose any
wonderful effects will be produced from an extra 25°. Besides
the small assistance and little light to be obtamed by means
of the most oblique rays, they have another bad effect in
giving a distorted image of the object. ‘This latter circum-
stance alone has made me desirous of trying any method that
would give the probable result of causing an object-glass to
perform effectively with a less degree of aperture. Apparently
this can only be accomplished through the reduction of the
obliquity of the exterior rays, incident upon the first surface,
by making the front of the anterior lens concave. For many
years foreign glasses of this form have been sold, but their
performance has not been such as to tempt an imitation of
any peculiarity in their construction. Some time ago I gave
this a trial, but not with that degree of care necessary to
ensure a certain result.
The concave form has been investigated mathematically by
Professor Robinson with such good promise, that I have been
once more induced to take it in hand, though he to some
extent over-estimates the advantages to be gained from it;
for he assumes the first surface to be dense flint, which would
reflect a greater quantity of light, whereas this loss is lessened,
as all our best object-glasses have of late years been made
with triple fronts, with the first lens of crown glass.
With excessive difficulty I have succeeded in making 1-8th
of 138° with two separate anterior combinations, each giving
the same degree of aperture and magnifying power. The first
has a plane incident suriace. The second front is worked to
a concave radius of 0°625 of an inch. On comparing them
together I could not discover any appreciable advantage, in
point of quantity of light, in favour of the one with the concave
surface. I have tried the experiment with every degree of
218 GORHAM, ON THE
care, and consider that it sets this point finally at rest, and
that it is a theory that does not tell in practice; I also under-
stand that Ross has long ago arrived at the same result. 93
To these combinations we shall have occasion hereafter to
refer,
* The size marked two drachms used by chemists and apothecaries.
T Sewing needles are generally sold in papers, which are numbered from
one to twelve, according to their thickness. With a micrometer under a
microscope, J examined the diameter of apertures made with needles from
the papers marked Nos. 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10, and found them respectively
equal to the 1-36th, the 1-38th, the 1-44th, the 1-50th, and the 1-70th
of an inch.
VOL. II. R
226. : GORHAM, ON THE
Now, if distance produced no change in the apparent mag-
nitude of objects, the apertures should remain as needle holes ;
and the colours should appear red, yellow, and blue, at all
distances. But this is not found to be the case. On the
contrary, when examined by looking through the bottom of
the box from the inside, they are found to present the follow-
ing phenomena :—
1. Bringing the box within an inch or two from the eye
these small inlets appear to expand into circular discs, which
touch one another at their margins (see Plate VIII. fig. 2).
And when held still nearer to the eye they become so much
enlarged as to overlap at their edges (PI. VIII. fig. 3), But if
the discs overlap, the colours must blend; and it is worthy of
especial notice that this is actually found to take place. For
when the three primary colours, red, yellow, and blue, are
thus united in pairs, the secondary tints, orange, green, and
violet are produced; and when the three primary tints all
combine there is formed white light (Pl. VIII. fig. 3).
These effects are demonstrable, and the colours are suffi-
ciently distinct by the light of a taper held a few inches from
the eye; but they are more brilliant and beautiful when seen
in a room screened from the direct rays of the noonday sun
by an ordinary white blind.
2. Assuming each of these apertures to be an object, the
circular disc is its enlarged image painted on the retina of the
eye. It is difficult to obtain a correct idea of the size of these
images without actually measuring them ; inasmuch as this is
estimated very differently by different individuals. ‘To some,
for instance, they appear to exceed an inch in diameter; to
others they are as small as a fourpenny piece or a split-pea.
My own imagination presents them as exactly resembling
small coloured wafers. But it is probable that a cognizance
of the actual size of the apertures themselves being associated
with the perception of the image leads to an erroneous con-
clusion as to their real dimensions. In every instance, how-
MAGNIFYING POWER OF SHORT SPACES. 227
ever, the magnitude assigned to them has been less, and never
greater, than their true size.
In order to measure them it is merely necessary to compare
them, that is, the images, when the apertures are held at half
an inch from the eye, with circles, or diameters of circles, of
known dimensions, placed at ten inches. This is effected in
a rough way by holding a measure horizontally ten inches
from the eye, and noticing, when this is examined by looking
through the aperture, how many inches or parts of an inch
are included within the area of the circular image. When
used for this purpose the apertures should not be covered with
tracing paper, and the kind of light used should be specified.
Now, by the properties of the visual angle it may be shown
that when a small round opening, the 1-40th of an inch in
diameter, or thereabouts, is held at ten inches from the eye,
it presents an image equal to about the 400th of an inch
across, and which appears as a mere speck. But when this
same opening, or aperture, is examined at half an inch only,
its image will be found so much enlarged as to cover a circular
area two inches and a half in diameter, placed, in order to
institute the comparison, at ten inches from the eye; and this
may be easily proved by direct experiment. The apparent
size of the disc has therefore undergone an immense increase
by this simple process of bringing the aperture nearer to the
eye. It is, in fact, magnified a thousand diameters. For—
ta inch ; 23 inches :: 1 : 1000.
But this gives the rate of increase in one dimension only.
Hence, if our calculations are carried a little further, we shall
find the entire area of the disc magnified one million times.
For :—
Area of circular disc (a) 24 inches in diameter = 4°90873
” ” (B) a0 », » = 000004908
Then area of (a) : area of (8) : : (diameter)? : (diameter)*
ee ee 25 | 40000 _
. ir i a 4 or al = 1000000.
Thus it appears that the image which is produced by
examining a small hole made with a needle is magnified one
million times by simply diminishing its distance from ten
inches to half an inch from the eye.
3. These discs are invariably diminished in size when,
from any cause, the intensity of the light is increased, While,
therefore, on viewing them by the direct rays of the sun, their
margins scarcely touch, by diffused daylight, or the light of a
taper, they directly overlap. This result is clearly owing to
R 2
228 GORHAM, ON THE
the alternations of size of the pupillary aperture: for this
circular opening expands when the light which enters the eye
is diminished, and contracts when the light is increased.*
For the same reason the discs always become smaller when
the other eye is opened, and again resume their size when it
is closed. This effect is instantaneous, and may be repeated
again and again, as often as we choose to make the experi-
ment. ‘These rapid alternations of size in the circles, result-
ing from the alternate contraction and dilatation of the pupil,
show, in a striking manner, how the quantity of light which:
enters the one eye regulates and controls the pupillary aperture
of the other, and thus points to the necessity for shading both
eyes in those diseases where it is important to exclude the
light from either.
4, That the pencils of light emanating from these apertures
cross within the eye, come to a focus, and form an inverted
image at the bottom, may be inferred from the fact of their
visual angle being less than 48° when they are examined at
half an inch. And that the image itself is really inverted
may be proved by making a second very small aperture close
to the edge of the larger one (fig. 4). The image of this
double aperture is an ovate disc seen in its true or erect
position (fig. 5), in which position it would not be seen were
it not inverted on the retina,
Fig. 4.
The visual cones emanating from these apertures, there-
fore are thus disposed (fig. 6) and transmitted through the
humours of the eye, by which they are rendered convergent,
and so come to a focus at the bottom.
5. It is worthy of notice that the imnermost rays of these
cones of light, which we have just examined, cross each other
almost directly after proceeding from their radiant points
towards the eye: and, as they do not again intersect during
* The ordinary dimensions of the opening of the pupil, seen through
the cornea, are from the 0°27th to the O°13th of an inch; and its mean
size is the 0°20th of an inch.
MAGNIFYING POWER OF SHORT SPACES. 229
their passage through its humours, the image of any small
object held within the ;
angle acb should be s
formed erect on the
retina, and should be
seen, consequently, in
an inverted position.
That this is the case
may be proved by direct
experiment. For this
purpose I mounted a
small cross about the
tenth of an inch in
length, and the twentieth of an inch broad, cut from a sheet
of coloured gelatine, on the centre of a glass slide, with gum
water, so that it might be used at pleasure. On holding this
small cross between the eye and the aperture a small inverted
image of it is seen, as if drawn in the centre of the disc.
Moreover I noticed generally, that the images of all objects
which were so placed as to subtend the angle ach were seen
in an inverted position.
To illustrate this, let 7 (fig. 7) be the radiant points pro-
ceeding from the
aperture p, in the
bottom of the box,
6b, and let rab
rab be the cones
of light passing
through the slide
of glass s and the
eye ¢, to form a
circular image on
the retina 7. Let
the cross which
occupies the centre
of the slide be suf-
ficiently small to
subtend the angle
ach; then the rays
of light caande “b,
which Mldmikate
its extremities, are
transmitted to the
retina without in-
tersection, form-
ing there an erect
image 7, which is seen in an inverted position at p.
Fig. 7.
230 GORHAM, ON THE
A rude modification of this experiment may be made with
a pin, a cork, and a small pillbox. This latter should have
a small hole, about the fortieth of an inch in diameter, made
in one of its sides with a needle ; and a circular piece, about
the eighth of an inch
in diameter, should be
excised at a point ex-
actly opposite the first
from the other side.
The pin is now stuck
into the cork and the
box inverted over it,
the centre of each open-
ing and the head of the
pin being all in one
straight line (fig. 8,
aa). On __ looking
through the small hole
the pin is seen much magnified ai in an erect position; but
when examined through the larger opening it appears inverted,
6. In pursuing these investigations it occurred to me that,
whilst in the polyscope, or ordinary multiplying glass, the
multiplication of the images is effected by causing the rays
which proceed from the object to travel towards the eye in
as many different directions as there are images, by refraction :
the same result might be obtained without a glass, by trans-
mission, For it was clear, that if it be possible to view the
same object by rays of light, all emanating from different
points, and concentrating themselves in the centre of the eye,
such an object must appear multiplied. Hence, on examining
a small cross, similar to that which was used in the last
experiment, under the light admitted through six apertures, by
holding it between them and the eye, I was gratified to find
my anticipations realized ; for six inverted images of the cross
immediately appeared: one being painted on the centre of
each disc, as if by magic,
This phenomenon was scarcely less interesting than either of
the former, for it seemed to present a new and anomalous position
of the object, with respect to transparent media, in the forma-
tion of multiplying images ; in short, a new kind of polyscope
was discovered, having properties distinct from those belonging
to an ordinary multiplying-glass, In order to point out the
difference between these two optical instruments, it must be
borne in mind that, in a common multiplying-glass, the object
to be multiplied is placed on one side of the glass, and the
eye on the other, while the images are conveyed to the eye by
the aid of the refracting power of the glass. Thus, in the
Fig, 8,
MAGNIFYING POWER OF SHORT SPACES. 231
multiplying-glass with three faces, a bc, fig. 9, let the object
be placed at 0, and the eye at ¢; then the new images, ¢7, are
seen in the direction of the emergent rays, ae, be, after refrac-
Fig. 9.
tion; that is to say, the rays ao,bo, emanating from the
object at 0, converge on the opposite side of the glass, and
enter the eye at e¢, which thus perceives three images instead
of one: the first being that of the object in its real position, 9,
and the other two in the directions ez and e7. But the same
result may be obtained, as we have said, without refraction,
by holding a small Fie. 10.
object nearly close
in front of the eye,
and inspecting it
by the light trans-
mitted through
small apertures,
when the number
of the images will
be found to coin-
cide with that of
the apertures, and
will be seen in the
direction of the
pencils of light
which travel
through them. In
order to illustrate
’ this, let abc, fig.
10, be three small
apertures, about
the 1-40th of an
232 GORHAM, ON THE
inch in diameter, and the 1-8th of an inch apart, made in one
straight line in the bottom of a pillbox, and let 0 be a small
cross of gelatine, as before described, or any other small,
transparent, well-defined object mounted on a slip of glass.
Let e be a section of the eye, and ac, the images painted
on the retina: these images will be circular discs, having,
in the centre of each, an inverted image of the object 0, as
shown in the opposite figure (11). |
Hence the bottom:of the box, which contains these openings
a, b, and ¢, is similar to a multiplying-glass in producing as
many images of the object as there are transparent facets in
the glass, but unlike in these important particulars, that those
facets are all in the same plane; that the light is not refracted
by them, but merely transmitted ; and that the eye and the
object are both on the same side, that is, in front, of the mul-
tiplying medium.
In this experiment it may be instructive to notice: 1. The
rectilineal direction of the visual cones in their passage from
the apertures to the eye, each of which, although intersecting
the others, and being crossed by them again and again, travels,
in one undeviating course, until it falls upon the cornea, and
is finally brought to a focus on the retina, thus defining the
shape of the images. 2. The last direction of the pencils of
light which fall upon the cornea, determining the position of
the images in space, for an object always appears in the
direction in which the Jast ray of light comes to the eye. If
the light which comes from a star were bent into fifty direc-
tions before it reached the eye, the star would, nevertheless,
appear in the line described by the ray nearest the eye.
3. The influence of proximity of the object to the eye in
increasing the magnitude of the image. 4. The perception
of many images, of only one object, that object being ren-
dered visible not by one pencil of light only, but by many
pencils in different directions, explaining the cause of the
multiplication of images; and 5. The peculiar arrangement
and disposal of the rays, during their passage from the aper-
tures to the eye, in producing an erect retinal imaye, and an
inverted mental one :—for these are so many phenomena, each
and all of which serve to show how the laws of light may be
illustrated by means the most simple.
7. The multiplication of images, referred to in the last par-
agraph, has been shown to result from the simple transmission
of light through small apertures.. But there is a second case to
be noticed, wherein double images are produced by refraction,
that is, refraction during the passage of the rays through the
eye, and without the intervention of a lens of any kind.
MAGNIFYING POWER OF SHORT SPACES. 233
These double images are seen on holding a small object behind,
instead of in front of, the apertures ; and when seen, it is to
Fig. 11. Fig. 12,
be noticed that they always occupy that oval space formed by
the mutual intersection of the circular discs, fig. 12, s.
In order to explain this, let two small holes (a a, fig. 13) the
1-70th of an inch in diameter,* and the
1-20th of an inch apart, be made in the
bottom of a box, and let a pin, p, be held
behind the box, at the distance of an inch
or two. On looking at this through the
apertures, a double image of it will be
seen atziz. When the pin is withdrawn
to a considerable yet certain distance, say
p, 2 Single image only will be noticed, the
rays coming to a focus at f; but on bring-
ing it nearer, the two again become visible.
It is evident that these phenomena are to
be referred to the refraction of light, during
its transmission through the humours of
the eye.
The refracting power of the eye varies
at different ages, and in different indivi-
duals of the same age ; and it would appear
that its intensity may be measured by ascer-
taining the distance at which any small
object, such as a pin, produces a single
image, when viewed through two apertures,
in the manner just described ; for when the
distance is known, the direction of the rays
being determined by the interval of the
apertures, the visual angle is also known ;
Fig. 13.
and when one image only is seen, the rays by which it is
formed are brought to a focus exactly at the bottom of the
eye, thus measuring the refractive power of its humours.
* Such apertures can be made with a needle marked No. 10.
234 OSBORNE, ON CLOSTERIUM LUNULA.
But if the same object, at precisely the same distance, were
examined by another eye, and if two images were seen instead
of a single image, there is good reason to infer that, in the
latter case, the transparent media of the eye would be endowed
with powers of refraction greater than in the former; hence
the relative refracting power of two eyes may be found by
measuring the intermediate space between two points, say p
and p’, at which the same object appears as one, that is, forms
a single image in two different individuals.
I have, in this paper, laid before my readers an account of
several new phenomena which have occurred to me whilst
investigating some of the laws of optics; in doing which it
accorded with my design and professional avocations to be brief
and perspicuous, rather than to write an elaborate essay. On
a careful perusal, especially of the sixth paragraph, it will,
doubtless, not have escaped notice, that certain of the results
involve principles bearing a direct application to the con-
struction of one or two amusing and instructive optical instru-
ments, not heretofore invented. But I shall beg to reserve a
more particular description of these for a second paper.
(To be continued.)
On Ctostertum Lunuta. By the Hon. and Rey. S. G.
Ossorne. Communicated by JaBez Hoae, Esq.
“¢T HAVE now examined with great care more than one hundred
specimens of C. Lunula. I will give you the result as
impressed upon my own mind.
‘“‘T believe this plant (if plant it be) consists of an outer case,
of a hard and almost insoluble material, having at each end
a minute aperture, opening to receive the water in which it
lives. This case is divisible in the centre ; about the middle
of the concave side there is some difference in texture or con-
struction, for the slightest pressure will rupture it, allowing
the endochrome to escape.
“The endochrome itself is contained in a very thin mem-
branous sac, free of the outer case, except, perhaps, at one or
two spots about the centre, where ‘the streak of light is per-
ceptible. This sac is highly elastic, and often by its con-
traction or expansion alters the appearance of the plant. At
its extremities it has apertures to receive the fluid brought
through those in the outer case.
“The endochrome, consisting of green matter, changes its
appearance with the growth of the plant ; sometimes it nearly
OSBORNE, ON CLOSTERIUM LUNULA. 235
fills its investing membranous sac, at other times it leaves a
good deal of it, as well at the ends as at the margin, empty.
At the extremities of the green matter there are certain bodies
acting with a ciliary movement within what has been called
a chamber, being towards the point of the membranous sac:
certain bodies, apparently of the same kind, occasionally
separate from the endochrome in a small mass, appearing at
the extreme end of this so-called chamber, or at the side close
to the end ; these also impart a ciliary movement to the water
within the sac, around them.
“ Over the whole surface of the endochrome I can not only
trace a distinct circulator, but the action of cilia. In one
specimen, which I had the pleasure of showing for some
hours to Mr. Mansel, of Spetisbury, a neighbour of mine,
devoted to the microscopic observation of the Desmidiew and
Algz, the bunch of ciliary matter had got to the extreme end
of the internal sac;;which was so expanded as to fill up the
whole point of the outer case ; they thus abutted on the outer
aperture opening upon the water; the result was an evident
action on the water, in which we could see the points of cilia
working externally to the point of the plant; the water was
thrown in jets quite as far as in the annexed sketch. I use
the word jets, for it was not like any other action on water
I have ever seen produced by cilia. The water was spirted
in globules, similar to what one would expect to see in a
microscopic fountain. We had the pleasure, with the mem-
bers of my own family, of watching it for many hours. I
used a 1-inch of Ross’s, a }-inch of the same maker as illu-
minator, with a prism, and the usual bull’s-eye condenser ; the
light was taken from a strong moderator lamp; the eye-piece,
a very powerful and clear one, made for me by Mr. Ladd.
‘* As to the circulation (no new discovery) I never find any
difficulty in tracing its course. My theory is this :—there are
cilia, more or less in number, over the whole endochrome ;
peculiar clusters of them at its extremities; these keep up an
action, attracting and repelling fluid drawn to them, through
the apertures in the internal and external cases. The fluid,
when received within the membranous sac, is impelled over
the whole surface of the endochrome by the cilia. Between
236 OSBORNE, ON CLOSTERIUM LUNULA.
the outer case and the inner one currents are kept flowing,
receiving, as I believe, their impulse from the same action.
** When we saw the ciliary action external to the plant, as
described above, we saw that the marginal currents had ceased:
to flow. I infer from this, that by the accidental pressure of
the glass, the active mass of ciliary bodies had got so close
to the end of the sac as to press out to the edge of both aper-
tures, that of the sac, and that of the external case. The
machinery thus displaced gave us that hydraulic action outside
which was proper to the interior of the plant; 1 assume that
the normal action of these cilia would jet what water they
did not send over the endochrome back with some force
against the interior of the outer case, and thus force it into
the currents we see.
“If I put a specimen on the stage, cover the stage so as to
exclude the light, use the parabolic illuminator, with the
direct light of the sun; in certain focal positions I see what
appears to be cilia working evenly and continuously along the
whole external margin of the plant. I am inclined to believe
it is not so, that this is some ocular deception, and that these
cilia, so seen, are within the outer case; it may be that there
are cilia on the external surface of the membranous sac, as
well as over the endochrome. More practised observers, with
higher powers, may yet determine that; of the existence of the
cilia throughout the plant there can be no doubt, and no
object I have ever seen will bear comparison with this, when
beheld under a sun light; it is, indeed, a Godlike work, as
wonderful as beautiful.
“It is very seldom that I can trace a current up one margin
and round the point down the other; these currents seem to
me as the rule, to pass from the point, when they reach it,
down to the centre of the spot, where the cilia are seen
terminating the endochrome.
‘‘] have just seena specimen,* but not of C. Lunula, of this
shape ; the shell of the
plant had formed itself
into two halves, one over-
lapped the other, its out-
line quite clearly defined ;
in these two divisions we could see the circulation going on,
as I have dotted it, round each segment separately, at the
circular extremities. ‘The loose bodies seen in the chamber
of C. Lunula have very generally cilia, and are, I believe,
zoo-spores ; loose pieces of endochrome are sometimes brought
round in the current, but these are easily distinguished ; 1
* O, Leibleinii.
OSBORNE, ON CLOSTERIUM LUNULA. 237
have never seen anything like true cyclosis, 7. ¢., molecules, in
circular movement within the so-called chamber. Although
I have purposely burst many specimens when under view, I
have never seen the green matter, in passing out, get between
its own sac and the outer case. I leave the above at your
disposal, hoping it may prove interesting, only claiming for
it the attention due to the working of one who is but a tyro
compared to many of you, though a hard-worker, and devoted
to the studies the microscope so abundantly affords, of his
Maker’s works.
“ Are you aware that the Arthrodesmus Incus drawn in the
books should be drawn as represented in the
annexed figure? It has avery beautiful hyaline {{~ 4
membrane stretching from point to point, cut }
at the edges, something like the Micrasteria.
A moment’s good manipulation under a high y
power will prove it, especially with the aid of Uf vt NE
colouring matter in the water.
“ Why is Xanthidium armatum drawn without the sete,
clearly to be seen between its processes ?
“*T can discover cilia in the Pentium, Docidium, and Xan-
thidium ; but not to the same degree of clearness as in the
Closteria ; circulation can also be seen in some other Desmidiee.
Make any use you please of this, I fear, lame account of what
has been more interesting to work than it is easy to describe,
or, I fear, likely to interest those who read it.”
Having received a liberal supply of specimens from the
Rey. Mr. Osborne, I have great pleasure in confirming bis
observations with respect to the ciliary motion. I made use
of Shadbolt’s glass parabolic reflector, with an 4-inch object-
glass and a deepeye-piece. The sun was shining at the time,
and I threw a ray upon the Closteriwm, when, to my delight, I
saw the whole frond brilliantly glittering with the moving
and active cilia, as represented in the drawing, fig. 1; whilst
in the cyclosis numerous zoo-spores were most actively moving
about by the same agency. It is impossible to imagine a
more beautiful object and spectacle than was here presented.
When the sunlight, falling on these little bodies, warmed
them into life and motion, the rapid undulations produced by
the action of the cilia, illuminated the whole frond with a
series of most charming and delicately-coloured prismatic
fringes or Newton’s rings.
The motion and distribution of the cilia must be seen by
the aid of the direct sun-rays and parabola; for, although |
tried every other mode of illumination, and, with Mr,
Brooke, used Gillett’s condenser, yet neither of us noted satis-
238: OSBORNE, ON CLOSTERIUM LUNULA.
factorily their situation and distribution until we resorted to
the parabola.
At the same time the circulation may be most accurately
observed to take place over the entire surface of the pond.
The stream is best seen to be running up the external margin,
just internal to a row of cilia with another taking a contrary
direction next to the serrated ciliary edge of the endochrome,
the whole being restricted to the space between the mass of
endochrome and hyaline integument, passing above and
around the cyclosis, but not entering into it. Mr. Bower-
bank appears to have observed this a few years since, and
Mr. Ralfs in describing it, says:—‘I at first supposed that
the circulation was confined to the margins, nor did I per-
ceive it elsewhere until Mr. Bowerbank adjusted the micro-
scope, and showed me the motion extended over the whole
surface of the endochrome.” The Rev. Mr. Osborne has just
sent me a drawing, with description and other observations,
which may prove interesting to microscopists.
UT
mau}
=e
ooo ——
Semin maT TTT
Epithemia g gibberula, Kiitz.
Grammatophora angulosa, Ehr.
Be stricta, 1
Y. undulosa, ,,
now known to be a calcareous
plate from a species of Synapta.
It dissolves in acids, and polarizes
light.
MEMORANDA. 289
San Francisco, California.
Arachnoidiscus Ehrenbergii, Bail. Gomphonema minutissimum, Ehr.
Cocconeis scutellum, Ehr.
Terra del Fuego.
Entopyla australis, Ehr. Grammatophora stricta, Ehr.
Grammatophora serpentina, Ehr.
Rio Janeiro.
Climacosphenia australis, Kutz. Spongiolites anchora, Ehr.
Grammatophora oceanica, Ehr. The last two come from the cal-
*Isthmia minima, H. et B, careous particles of an Echino-
Dictyocha splendens, Ehr. derm (Synapta).
Valparaiso,
Stauroptera aspera, Ehr. Gallionella sulcata, Ehr.
Cocconeis scutellum, ,, Grammatophora hamata, Ehr.
Actinoptychus senarius, Ehr. Dictyocha speculum, Fi
Philippine Islands.
*Amphitetras favosa, H. et B. | Navicula Lyra, Ehr.
Amphora libyca, Ehr. Pinnularia didyma, Ehr.
*Campylodiscus Kiitzingii, H.et B. | Surirella fastuosa, Ehr.
Coscinodiscus linearis, Ehr. Tetragramma asiatica, Ehr.
Denticella Biddulphia, ,, *Triceratium orientale, H. et B.
Gallionella sulcata, - Dictyocha splendens.
Grammatophora oceanica, Ehr. Spongiolites Agaricus.
Navicula elongata, -
Sooloo Sea.
Coscinodiscus excentricus, Ehr. Triceratium Favus, 8. acuminatus,
Ps marginatus, ,, Bail.
Gallionella sulcata, ‘a Spongiolites Agaricus, Ehr, In situ,
Grammatophora oceanica, ,, forming bunches in the tissue of
*Isthmia minima, H. et B. | a sponge.
Surirella fastuosa, Ehr.
Wilson’s Island.
PoumouTa GROUP.
Climacosphenia australis, Kiitz. Stauroptera aspera, Ehr.
Podocystis adriatica, es Pinnularia didyma, ,,
Tahiti.
Climacospheenia australis, Kiitz. Navicula Sigma, Ehr.
*Cocconeis Parmula, H. et B. Podocystis adriatica, Kiitz.
Denticella Biddulphia ? Ehr. Stauroptera aspera, Ehr.
Grammatophora oceanica, Ehr. Triceratium concavum, H. et. B.
Gallionella sulcata, a Epithemia musculus, Kiitz.
*Hyalosira punctata, H. et B.
Tongataboo.
Denticella Biddulphia? Ehr. Grammatophora oceanica, Ehr.
Epithemia musculus, Kiitz. Synedra superba, Kiitz.
VOL, II, x
290 MEMORANDA.
New Zealand.
A large collection of marine Alga from New Zealand was examined, but
n0 Diatomacex could be detected adhering to them.
Those marked thus (*) are believed to be new, and have been described.
—Professor J. W. Batney, in Proceedings of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia, Oct., 1853.
Mateh Photographs, or Camera Eucida drawings of Mi-
eroscopic Objects for the Stereoscope, made by means of
the ordinary Monocular Microscope.—Professor Wheatstone,
the eminent physicist, in connexion with his remarks upon
the value of the binocular microscope, in the July number of
the ‘ London Microscopical Journal,’ suggests that the mono-
cular microscope may be made to give match stereoscopic
pictures, by successively changing the inclination of the axis
of the objective and ocular to the stage holding the object.
This plan, though not easily made applicable to microscopes
of the present construction, must, | think, give excellent
results with the low powers, say with the two inch and inch
objectives, and possibly with the half inch. But with the
higher powers of large angle of aperture, the close proximity
of the front surface of the objective to the thin glass cover of
the objects totally precludes its being put in practice.
The method described below may be readily adapted to any
microscope, at an expense comparatively trifling ; it is appli-
cable to every grade of objective ; and upon fair trial I find it
to give satisfactory results.
Behind, and close to the objective, insert an isosceles glass
prism, say a half or a quarter inch equilateral or rectangular
prism, adjustable for position, and capable of being inclined
at pleasure any required number of degrees, on a central axis
transverse to the axis of the ocular and objective, said axis
being parallel to the polished faces of the prism. When the
hypothenuse or reflecting surface of the prism is made coin-
cident in direction with the axis of the microscope, the posi-
tion of the prism being appropriate, the light travelling from
the objective to the ocular will suffer reflection in its transit
through the prism; but the appearance and position of the
field, except its reversal in one direction, will be essentially
the same as if no prism were there. By inclining the prism a
little, other objects are brought into view, as though the slide
containing them were moved. If now, the slide be re-adjusted,
so as to restore the field as at first, the objects will be seen
from a different point of view, and will therefore wear a modi-
fied appearance. :
The mode of proceeding is as follows: two good successive
MEMORANDA. 291
views of the same object are to be obtained, between which
there must be a difference of inclination of the prism, say
from four to eight or nine degrees, according to the depth of
stereoscopy desired, In each instance, the principal object is
brought to the centre of the field, by adjusting the position of
the slide. In each instance, a careful camera lucida drawing
is to be made, or a photographic impression taken; which,
when properly viewed, each by an eye, will be found to
coalesce into a single image, manifesting the fine stereoscopic
effect, which characterizes the image seen through the bino-
cular microscope.—Proféssor Rippett, New Orleans Medical
and Surgical Journal.
On the use of the Camera lucida as a Micrometer.—Several
communications on micrometers have appeared in the ‘ Micro-
scopical Journal,’ and | am induced to address you on the sub-
ject from having particularly noticed the two following extracts
of a letter from. Mr. Jackson in your last Number :—
“ The inquiries for a cheap form of microscope which I
constantly hear, make me think that the difference between Al.
and 1/. for an adjunct to the instruments, would, in many in-
stances, be a serious obstacle to the use of any means of minute
measurement; and it is with the view of placing these means
within the reach of all observers that I have advocated ruled
glass.
“To induce observers to make accurate measurements,
which is the aim both of H.C. K. and myself, it is not suffi-
cient to place an instrument in their hands; they must be
taught to use it with little trouble.”
1 think that the following method of using the camera
lucida with a stage micrometer answers the requisites of
cheapness, facility, and accuracy :—
Place a stage micrometer in the focus of a microscope ;
adapt a camera lucida, and then accurately trace on a piece of
card-board, one, two, three, or more of the divisions. Subdi-
vide each division by tens or (if need be) by hundreds ; then
place the object to be measured in the focus of the microscope,
and observe, through the camera lucida, the number of divi-
sions it extends over on the card-board. For instance: I have
an object-glass and eye-piece which, with the length of tube
in my microscope, magnify 500 diameters ; and on looking
with these at a stage micrometer, with 200 divisions to the
inch, I find that each division occupies 24 inches on a card-
board placed underneath the camera lucida on the table, I
mark one of these spaces on the card-board, and divide it into
25 parts; that is, into tenths of an inch, and, consequently,
292 MEMORANDA.
each tenth of an inch on the card-board corresponds to the
5000th part of an inch of an object in the focus of the
microscope. Obviously, also, if instead of card-board, I use
a slip of ruled glass, with a hundred divisions to the inch,
each division will then correspond to the 50,000th part of an
inch.
For convenience of calculation, it is desirable that each
division of the micrometer should coincide with the lines of
inches, or large fractional parts of an inch, on the card-board ;
and this is easily effected when the microscope is furnished with
a draw-tube ; but when the latter is wanting, the same point
may be gained by elevating the card-board on a book or some
kind of stage; of course, always taking care that the distance
of the camera lucida from the card-board should be precisely
the same, when an object is to be measured, as it was when
the divisions were marked on the card-board. The ease of
this method, also, in, accurately determining the magnifying
power of any combination of lenses and eye-pieces he may
happen to possess, will be evident to any one attempting to
practise it. The cost of a camera lucida is very trifling, and
there would be no need to purchase a stage micrometer, if one
could be borrowed for a short time, since a piece of card-board,
once accurately marked* in the above manner, would supersede
its further use-—HENRY CoLEs, Hammersmith.
. * For each power.—[Eb. ]
( 293)
PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
Microscoricayt Society. May 17th, 1854.
Dr. Carpenter, President, in the Chair.
J. F. Streatfield, Esq.; J. Lubbock, Esq.; — Shelly, Esq. ;
Dr. T. J. Sturt; A. Mongredieu, Esq. ; and J. G. Noble, Esq.,—
were elected Members of the Society.
A paper on the Circulation in Closterium Lunula, by the Rev.
S. G. Osborne (see Journal, p. 234) was read.
March 29th, 1854.
Dr. Carpenter, in the Chair.
James M‘Mahon, Esq.; Andrew Yeates, Esq.; Antonio Brady
Esq.; C. O. Dayman, Esq; and George Hanby, Esq.,—were,
balloted for, and duly elected.
A paper by Mr. Jabez Hogg, on the development and growth of
the Water-snail, was read (Transactions, p. 9!).
April 19th, 1854.
Geo. Shadbolt, Esq., in the Chair.
R. W. 8S. Lutwidge, Esq., and James Townley, Esq.,—were
balloted for, and duly elected.
A paper by Dr. W. Gregory, of Edinburgh, on some deposits of
Fossil Diatomacez, was read (‘Transactions, p. 104).
Roya Society. March 9th, 1854.
On a new and more correct Method of determining the Angle of
Aperture of Microscopie Object-Glasses. By W.S. Gruuert,
M.A.
Tue author began:—‘ With the consideration that the central
pencil was alone to be regarded, and that the marginal rays of this
were the true limits of the angle of aperture, and that consequently
the rays of all oblique pencils were to be excluded, as these might
cross at a point not coincident with the principal focus, and being
measured separately, might form an angle (apparently of aperture)
not coinciding of course with the true one, although perhaps not
differing from it in amount.” Mr. Gillett’s mode of measuring the
aperture is as follows :—‘* The microscope is placed horizontally,
and centred by an object placed in the focus. A hollow cone is
substituted in place of the eye-piece, having an aperture at its
summit. Light passing through this aperture is made to form an
image of it in the principal focus of the object-glass, in the place
of the original object. On this image a horizontally-placed ex-
amining microscope is then directed, which traverses as the radius
of a graduated circle, having its centre corresponding with the
plan of the original object, and therefore with the image to be
received ; and the angle of aperture is measured by the are passed
through between two extreme positions in the usual manner.”
294 PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
May \\th, 1854.
On the relation of the Angular Aperture of the Olject- Glasses
of Compound Microscopes to their penetrating power and to
oblique light. By J. W. Grirrita, M.D.
Dr. Griffith’s remarks had reference only to transparent objects.
The ordinary cause of the outlines of objects becoming visible
consists in the refraction of the light out of the field of the micro-
scope, or beyond the angle of aperture of the object-glass; and
another condition affecting distinctness consists in the relation which
the luminousness or darkness of an object bears to that of the field
or background upon which it is apparently situated. An increase
of the angular aperture of the object-glass in certain cases will there-
fore impair the distinctness of their images, because this increased
aperture will allow of the admission of those rays which would
otherwise have been refracted from the field, and the margins will
become more luminous and less contrasted with the luminous field.
If the parts of an object which refract light are large in propor-
tion to the power of the-object-glass and of irregular form, they will
refract a certain number of rays, so that these cinnot enter the
object-glass ; hence certain parts will become dark, and will map
out in the image the structural peculiarities of the object. But. if
the parts are minute, of a curved form and nearly symmetrical, they
will act upon the light transtitted through them in the manner of
lenses, and their luminous or dark appearance will vary according
to the relation of the foci of these guasi lenses to that of the object-
glass.
In certain objects, however, of extreme minuteness, such as the
valve of a Gyrosigma (Pleurosigma), the irregularities of struc-
ture are so very inconsiderable, or the difference of the refractive
power of the various portions of the structure is so slight, that the
course of the rays is but little altered by refraction on passing
through them, and under ordinary iliumination all the rays will
enter the object-glass ; neither are the rays collected into little cones
or parcels of sufficient intensity to map out the light or dark spots
in the field of the microscope, according to the relation of their
foci with that of the object-glass.
This is the case with light transmitted directly through the object
as in the ordinary mode of illumination ; but when oblique light is
transmitted, one of the two sets of rays passing through the de-
pressed and the undepressed portions of the object will be so refracted
as not to enter the object-glass, whilst the other set will gain admis-
sion, and thus the two parts will be rendered distinct. If the
markings are more delicate, or if the difference between the refrac-
tive power of the two portions of the object is less, both sets will
enter the object-glass. But when the light is rendered still more
oblique, oue set would be again excluded being refracted out of the
field. Henceit is evident that the angular aperture must be larger
as the markings are finer, or the difference between the refractive
power of the portions of the tissue is less; because the obliquity of
PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES. 295
the light will be required to be very great to cause the exclusion of
one set of the rays, and the other set would necessarily be too
oblique to enter the object-glass unless it be of correspondingly large
aperture.
The author then proceeds to explain the reason why a central
stop will in certain cases render delicate markings more distinct, by
stopping off the more direct rays, and allowing only the oblique
ones admissible into an object-glass of large aperture to enter it.
The direct rays, in fact, not conducing in any way to the more
distinct perception of the object, the image of which is formed, as
above explained, by what may be termed the difference between the
more and the less refracted rays. And the difficulty in explaining
how an object-glass of large angular aperture will*render markings
evident which were not visible under an object-glass of smaller aper-
ture, vanishes when it is considered that the additional rays admitted
by the object-glass of larger aperture are more oblique ; hence one
set of rays, as in the above case of oblique light, will be refracted
from the field of the microscope, whilst the other set will enter it.
Now as it is these additional rays alone which render the delicate
markings evident, it is obvious that the more direct central rays
(being at any rate useless) can only serve to impair the distinctness
of the image, and that advantage will arise from cutting them off
by a central stop.
The paper then proceeds to discuss the relation of the penetrating
power of an objective to its defining power. The author’s defini-
tion of what he terms penetrating power ; would appear to make it
depend upon the amount of angular aperture, but it is not very
clear what is meant by defining power as contradistinguished from
the above, or from the power of giving a clear definition of objects—
a quality obviosuly dependent simply upon the accuracy with which
the chromatic and spherical aberration of the objective are cor-
rected, and wholly independent of magnifying or separating power.
Royau Intsh AcApemy. January 23rd, 1854.
On a New Method of measuring the Angular Aperture of the
Objectives of Microscopes. By the Rev. T. R. Roxsrnson, D.D.,
President of the Royal Irish Academy.
Tue effect of angular aperture is stated to be merely an increase of
illuminating power analagous to that of linear aperture in a tele-
scope, and from mathematical considerations given in the paper,
it appears clear that, especially for covered objects, nothing is gained
above 150° at all commensurate to the difficulty of constructing
such objectives. ‘‘ But in addition to this,” the author goes on to
say, “‘ that the whole of these great apertures is not in every case
thoroughly effective.”
This made him seek some mode of measurement which would
not only give the angle of aperture, but also show how the light
was distributed; and the following seemed to fulfil both these
requirements :—
296 PROCEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES.
“ As a lucid point in the focus of the objective sends out from
[to] the eye-piece rays nearly parallel, so light, sent in the opposite
direction through the microscope, will converge at that focus and
diverge in a cone whose angle equals the aperture of the objective.
If this cone be intercepted at right angles to its axis by a screen,
and the diameter of its section, together with the distance of the
sereen from the surface of the objective be carefully measured, they
give the aperture. If S be the diameter of the section, D the
distance, O the diameter of the objective, and I that of the image of
the luminary used which is formed in its focus :—
2 tan. A ore x aie
2 D O+!
the upper sign being used if the section is measured within the
penumbra and vice versd. In most cases, I will be so small that the
second factor is — unity; for the author directed the light of
the sun into the instrument by means of the reflecting part of a
solar microscope, and not only got measures with extreme facility,
but had at once a beautiful map of the objectives light-territory.
The results of measurements of available aperture taken in this
way as compared with those by the usual method were briefly as
follows, and from which the importance of this mode of examining
stated apertures of object-glasses, will be at once apparent :—
Aperture.
Focal length By By
of Objective. New Method. Old Method.
No. 1 + 80°.8 80°.75
ee vb 110°.8 160°.0
ae a5 109°.3 129°.0
sn fat Gb 102°.0 126°.4
5 ae 15 114°.6 156°.0
as) ~ 122°.8 170°.0
The facts adduced are sufficient, as the author believes, to show
the necessity of attending not merely to the amount of aperture but
also to its quality. What is the cause in the deficiencies in the
latter respect can be determined only by one familiar with the con-
struction of the objectives, but it probably arises from some of the
lenses being so small that their edges meet the luminous pencil and
reflect false light. The disturbance, however, may also be owing
to the brass of the cells, but if so the remedy is the same, viz., the
increasing a little the diameter of the posterior lenses. The author
would also suggest another alteration, in case it be thought desirable
still to make objectives of these extreme apertures—that the anterior
surface be concave instead of plane.
.
i
TRANSACTIONS OF MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE VII.
To illustrate Mr. Hogg’s Paper on the Development and Growth
of the Water-snail.
Fig.
1.—A magnified representation of the increase and change of situation
occurring to the yolk of egg of Limneus on the fourth day.
2.—The change observed on the sixth day, showing the transverse fissure
or divisional line in the mass.
3.—The formation of the shell proceeding more rapidly, it appears on the
sixteenth day as the larger portion of the embryonic mass.
4,.—The embryo performing its heliacal windings around the shell.
5.—The embryo, or young animal, seen soon after it has issued from the
shell.
6,—The tentacles, with cilia, seen under a 34-inch object-glass ; the arrows
indicating the course of the current produced by the cilia.
7.—The natural size and form of the shell of a full-grown Limneus.
8.—Parasitic animal found on the body of Limneus, magnified 100
diameters.
MW
Py
£ Ge
DE/ TTC
OC. atl
4
ALG
5
SS ee Mon
JOURNAL OF MICROSCOPICAL SCIENCE.
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE IX.
In illustration of Mr. Currey’s Paper on two new Fungi.
Fig.
1 and 2.—Natural size of one of the Fungi.
3 and 4,—The same magnified by a 2-inch object-glass.
5.—The capillitium and spores under a 4-inch object-glass.
6 and 7.—Natural size of second Fungus.
8.—Spores and hairs in its interior under a power of 220 diameters.
Valen West. chromy ith
TRANSACTIONS
OF THE
MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY
LONDON.
NEW SERIES.
VOLUME II.
LONDON:
SAMUEL HIGHLEY, 32, FLEET STRERT.
1854.
aay Loe ay. Oy |
INDEX TO TRANSACTIONS.
VOLUME IL
A.
Actinophrys Sol, remarks on,
by
R. S. Boswell, 25.
3p
Binocular vision, on the application |
of to the microscope, by F. H. Wen- |
ham, 1.
Boswell, R. 8., remarks on Actino-
phrys Sol, 25.
Busk, G., F.R.S., on the structure
and function of the avicularian
and vibracular organs of the Poly-
Zoa, 26. a
Diatomaceex, new forms of, from Port
Natal, description of, by G. Shad-
bolt, 13.
. of the Thames, some
observations on, by F. C. 8. Roper,
F.G.S., 67.
He
Hogg, Jabez, observations on the
development and growth of the
Water Snail (Limneus stagnalis),
91.
I.
Illumination of transparent objects,
on a method of employing artificial
light for, by G. Rainey, M.R.CS.,
23.
L.
Legg, M. S., A.I.A., observations on
the examination of Sponge-sand,
1S:
Limneus stagnalis observations on
the development and growth of
the, by Jabez Hogg, M.R.C.S., 91.
M.
Microscopical Society, Report of the
Fourteenth Annual Meeting of the, |
81. _
PB
Polyzoa, remarks on avicularian and
vibracular organs of, by G. Busk,
F.R.S., 26.
Q.
Quekett, John, on the minute struc-
ture of the Torbane Hill mineral,
34,
R.
Rainey, G., M.R.C.S., on a method
of employing artificial light for the
illumination of transparent objects,
23.
Report of the Fourteenth Annual
Meeting of the Microscopical So-
ciety, 81.
Roper, F. C. S., some observations on
the Diatomaceze of the Thames, 67.
S.
Shadbolt, G., description of some new
forms of Diatomaceze from Port
Natal, 13.
Sponge-sand, observations on the ex-
amination of, &c., by M.S. Legg,
AXTCAS, 19:
dhe
Torbane Hill mineral, or Boghead
coal, on the minute structure of, by
John Qnekeit, 34.
We
Water Snail (Limneus Stagnalis), J.
Hogg, on the development and
growth of the, 91.
Wenham, F. H., on the application of
binocular vision to the microscope,
1.
TRANSACTIONS
OF THE
MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY
OF
LONDON.
On the Application of Binocutar Vision to the Microscope. By
F. H. Wennam. (Read May 25, 1853.)
On viewing objects by the unassisted eyesight there are two
conditions which enable us to appreciate or judge their various
distances. Firstly, the object is observed by each eye from
a separate point of view, and the consequent difference of
outline, light, and shade between the images formed on each
retina allows us to form an accurate idea of their various
sizes and positions. ‘The angle of stereoscopic vision has been
stated somewhat definitely to be about 18 degrees, but this
must be subject to considerable variations, as whether the ob-
server is long or short-sighted, the difference of distance
between the eyes, and also the bulk, form, and position of the
object. I may state that I have obtained a very good perspec-
tive of minute objects when the angle of vision has exceeded
50 degrees,
If we perforate a card with a pin, and examine the articles
in a room illuminated by candle-light, with one eye looking
through this aperture, we shall be able to judge of distance
only from the relative intensity with which the objects are
illuminated, the nearest receiving and giving off the greatest
quantity of light, and the farthest being in comparative darkness,
I make these preliminary observations because, in viewing
the greatest portion of objects under the microscope, the con-
ditions here referred to, which give us the faculty of judging
of bulk and distance, do not exist in the same degree, if at
all. In the first place, in viewing an object, as a transparency,
with a single lens of short focus, we see it under such circum-
stances as seldom happen to such surrounding objects as come
under our daily observation, and in the illumination of trans-
parent objects by direct transmitted light, the effect is the
reverse of that which is necessary for us to judge of distance
VOL. 11,
B WenuaM on Binocular Vision.
by the relative intensity of the light, for that portion of the
object farthest from the lens will receive the greatest share.
This objection may probably be removed by a different sys-
tem of illumination, but of this I shall treat hereafter. If the
single lens is provided with a proper stop, what is known as
the angle of aperture will be so exceedingly small that a series
of uniform opaque particles lying behind each other in an
object will be only seen by the direct light that they intercept,
and the underlying: ones will be invisible. These are the
reasons why most microscopic objects, which we know must
have a visible thickness, appear so perfectly thin, that we
might almost imagine that they were painted on the glass
slide upon which they are mounted. This illusion. may be
attributed to the natural effects of monocular vision, and in
this case the only remedy is to view the object from different
points at the same time with each eye, under equal magnify-
ing power. I shall now enter into various methods of effect-
ing this. One of the most simple and obvious is to employ
two lenses, one to each eye, only differing from an ordinary
pair of spectacles in the foci being shorter and the optic axes
converging till the points where the foci intersect become
coincident.
Binocular vision may also be obtained through a single
lens, if the diameter is sufficiently large to allow both eyes to
see through it at the same time as in the common reading-
glass. In these instances we cannot well use glasses of shorter
focus than four or five inches; and in cases where higher
magnifying powers are required it becomes necessary to adopt
some method which shall produce the effect of bringing the
two eyes proportionately closer together, to suit the diminished
diameter and shorter focus of the lens. This may be accom-
plished by means of a system of four plane reflectors, inclined
at an angle of 45 degrees, and fixed behind the lens in a
line at right angles to its axis, or else by four rectangular
prisms in the same position; both these can be made
to adjust to suit the
diameters of various
lenses and difference of
distance between the
eyes.
The arrangement that
I have tried for lenses
of short focus is repre-
sented by fig. 1: a@a@ is
a plano-convex lens, be-
hind which is placed the usual stop db. _¢ ¢ are two rhomboidal
Fig. 1.
Wenuam on Binocular Vision. 3
prisms of glass, with the reflecting ends inclined at an angle
of 45 degrees. All the four surfaces of both prisms should
be well polished, and their combined length when placed
together should be such that the distance between the centres
of the external diagonal reflecting planes should be the same
as that between the eyes. I prefer the two solid prisms to a
combination of four rectangular ones, as there is less loss of
light, and error arising from external reflection. This com-
bination makes a remarkably fine hand magnifier, giving such
a depth and substance to objects as cannot be obtained with a
single eye; the field of view is also large, as we are able to
see the object obliquely through the lens. For lenses of low
power, as from one to two inches focus, the prisms would
require to be separated to some extent, or we should not ob-
tain a sufficient angle for stereoscopic vision; in fact, we
must consider this merely as a method of bringing the eyes
closer together, that we may be enabled to see through a lens
of small diameter with both of them at the same time, ina
similar way as with the ordinary reading-glass before re-
ferred to.
On looking through the prisms, fig. 1, without the magni-
fier, a singular illusion is produced, for the vision with the
two eyes is brought so nearly to a state of parallelism that
they are in effect blended into one, and we so far lose the
power of appreciating distance, that we appear able to grasp
objects several feet away from us, as the deceptions arising
from monocular vision are increased by seeing with the two
eyes from the same position as with one.
In obtaining binocular vision with the compound achromatic
microscope, in its complete acting state, there are far greater
practical difficulties to contend against, and which it is highly
important to overcome, in order to correct some of the false
appearances, arising from what is considered the very perfec-
tion of the instrument. All the object-glasses from the one
inch upwards are possessed of considerable angular aperture,
consequently images of the object are obtained from a differ-
ent point of view, with the two opposite extremes of the
margin of the cone of rays; and the resulting effect is, that
there are a number of dissimilar perspectives of the object, all
blended together upon the single retina at once. For this
reason, if the object has any considerable bulk, we shall have
a more accurate notion of its form by reducing the aperture of
the object-glass,
Select any object lying in an inclined position, and place it
in the centre of the field of view of the microscope, then,
with a card held close to the object-glass, stop off alternately
b2
4 WENHAM on Binocular Vision.
the right or left hand portion of the front lens, it will be seen
that, during each alternate change, certain parts of the object
will alter in their rela-
tive position. To il-
lustrate this, figs. 2
and 3 are enlarged
drawings of a portion
of the egg of the com-
mon bed-bug (Cimex
lecticularis), the oper-
culum which covers the
orifice having been
forced off at the time
the young was hatched. The figures exactly represent the
two positions that the inclined orifice will occupy when the
right and left hand portions of the object-glass are stopped
off. It was illuminated as an opaque object, and drawn
under a two-thirds object-glass of about 28° of aperture.
If this experiment is repeated, by holding the card over
the eye-piece, and stopping off alternately the right and left
half of the ultimate emergent pencil, exactly the same changes
and appearances will be observed in the object under view.
The two different images thus produced are just such as are
required for obtaining stereoscopic vision. It is therefore
evident, that if, instead of bringing them confusedly together
into one eye, we can separate them, so as to bring figs. 2 and
3 into the left and right eye, in the combined effect of the two
projections we shall obtain all that is necessary to enable us
to form a correct judgment of the solidity and distances of the
various parts of the object.
I shall now explain some plans for effecting this. The
most obvious method is to have two microscopes placed side
by side, and converging towards the object, each tube to be
furnished with a similar objective and eye-piece. For very
low powers this would, no doubt, be the most perfect form of
binocular microscope, but it is liable to objection, firstly, on
account of its expense, and, secondly, from the difficulty, if
not impossibility, of using the higher powers. I do not think
that it would be practicable to use anything beyond the half-
inch object-glass; but I believe where vision is assisted by
the use of both eyes together, it would be of advantage to
employ objectives of smaller angular aperture, in this case, the
focus would then fall at a greater distance from the front lens,
I should also mention that a microscope of this description
would require the two tubes to be placed at a different angle
of convergence for every pair of object-glasses employed, of
either longer or shorter focus.
~
WenuaM on Binocular Vision. 5
It has also been proposed to bisect the whole combination,
of which our best objectives are composed, and separate the
semi-lenses a sufficient distance asunder to obtain the effect
of stereoscopic vision, each half being made to serve the
purpose of a distinct combination; but this, I believe, would
not answer at all, for if we escaped the total destruction of
the object-glass Rene the operation of sawing it through, we
should render it aoe for all the ordinary purposes of inves-
tigation, and also because any separation of the semi-lenses
is quite unnecessary; for the angle of aperture of al! the
object-glasses by our best makers now exceeds that which is
requisite for obtaining stereoscopic vision; and the methods
that I have now to explain refer to the principle of obtaining
two images of the object through the same object-glass, which
is in all cases of the usual construction.
In the last ‘Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science’
there appeared a notice of a binocular microscope by J. L. Rid-
dell, from Silliman’s Journal. Fig. 4.
According to his description,
fig. 4 will represent the ar-
rangement ; a is the objective
provided at the back with the
usual stops. The pencil of
rays emergent from the ob-
ject- glass is bisected and re-
flected in opposite directions,
by means of the internal
surfaces of the rectangular
prisms } b, which surfaces
are inclined at an angle of
45°, / The rays are again re-
flected ina vertical direc tion,
by means of two anti
prisms, cc, the distance be-
tween which must be regu-
lated by the position of the
eyes. The last prisms must KG
be placed upon a lower level, ERR
as from the direction in which
the rays are incident upon
the first reflecting surfaces of the prisms b b, they have a down-
ward tendency. The rays, after crossing each other, are received
by two Huygenian eye-pieces, dd. In the diagram I have
shown the prisms no larger than necessary for collecting all
the rays from any of the object-glasses to be used; but it
must be evident that Mr. Riddell makes use of prisms of
6 WenuAM on Binocular Vision.
a larger size, as he states that “The outer prisms can be
cemented to the inner by Canada balsam.” This amounts
to the same thing as using a pair of prisms of solid glass,
such as is represented by cc, fig. 1. I have carefully tried
both of these methods, and find that the prisms alter the
chromatic correction of the object-glass, and also materially
injure the definition; for in making arrangements of prisms
of this description we must always bear in mind that they
produce a similar kind of aberration as a piece of glass of the
same thickness as the distance which the ray passes through,
Fic. 5. both before and after its reflection. ‘There
is also great difficulty in getting a per-
| fectly flat surface to the small reflecting
planes. All these defects will be greatly
magnified by the eye-piece.
I have also tried what effect could be
produced by means of plane reflectors, as
Mr. Riddell says, “I use, for lightness
and economy, four pieces of common
looking-glass instead of prisms.” My
experiment was not tried with common
looking-glass, but with thin microscopic
covering-glass, silvered at the back. The
definition with the lower powers was to-
lerably good, but the loss cf light very
great.
In order to remove the illusion of ele-
vations appearing as depressions, Mr.
Riddell proposes the “additional use of
erecting eye-pieces ;” but I am afraid that
when the microscope is taxed with this
addition, the loss of light and defining
power will become very great, and that
even easy test-objects will appear so ob-
scure as to preclude all hope of our
making any additional discovery relative
to their structure.
I must remark, that I have made these
last observations and experiments merely
for the sake of arriving at the truth, and
not with the view of detracting in the
slightest degree from the merits of Mr.
Riddell’s invention ; for very great credit
is no doubt due to him for leading the
way to the practical application of a principle, in the absence
of which the microscope still remains an imperfect instru-
ment; and, for my own part, I may, in all probability, shortly
~l
WenuAM on Binocular Vision.
see the day when my own designs for effecting the same end
may be rendered obsolete by the march of i improvement.
In the plan just referred to, the error arising from the
length or thickness of the prisms may
be Seetoshed by making the two mi-
pares bodies converge towards b J,
3, and adopting two reétangular
= with the reflecting surfaces at
the proper inclination for directing the
rays of light from the objec t-glass, up
the centre of each tube: by this means
we can much reduce the substance of
glass that the rays will have to pass
through.
Figs. 5 and 6 represent another
dicthud that I have contrived for using
only two prisms, which can be made of
the smallest possible size, and also at
the same time do away with one re-
flecting surface, which is one of the
principal sources of error. Fig. 5 is
“i plan, and fig. 6 the elevation. a,
g. 6, is the object-glass, over which
a8 two right-angled prisms bb, placed
side by ide with the reflecting sur-
faces, at an angle of 45°. ce, fig. 5,
are two Huygenian eye-pieces, placed
a sufficient distance asunder to suit
the eyes, and converging towards the
vertical axis of the object-glass. The
contact sides of the prisms must be
equally ground away, till their two
emergent surfaces are in a plane at
right angles to the axes of their respec-
tive eye-pieces. This method in-
volves the necessity of having the
object-glass at right angles to the
two bodies of the microscope, and is therefore just suited to
some of the foreign form of stands, but is of course inap-
plicable to the English ones, unless, indeed, we mount the
bodies after our usual fashion, and allow the object-glass to
point upwards in an inclined direction, and pass through the
bottom of a stage, on the upper surface of which the objec ts
can be placed, and which surface should be parallel to the
axes of the bodies. This would give great facility for direct
illumination; for whether we used a superposed ‘achromatic
condenser or not, we should not require a mirror either by
Fig. 6.
8 WENHAM on Binocular Vision.
day or candle-light. I have not yet tried this arrangement of
prisms, but intend to do so, as I have a favourable opinion of
the method, although the one next to be described is pro-
bably better..
If we consider the relative position of the two reflecting
surfaces of the prisms bb, figs. 5 and 6, they will form the
same angle represented by the
top line of fig. 7. It is there-
ig.7 fore evident, that if a rectan-
\ gular plate of speculum metal is
AAG Sache and oliateell so as to
form two reflecting facets in-
clined to each other at the re-
quired angle, as represented by fig. 7; and this being placed
at an angle of 45°, with the division of the facets intersecting
the axis of the object-glass, we shall divide the rays, and
reflect them horizontally, just in the same way as represented
in figs. 5 and 6, merely by means of one single reflection.
Any other direction than a right angle, with respect to the
axis of the object-glass, may of course be given to the rays,
by inclining the reflector more or less. From the simplicity
of this contrivance, and the facility with which it may be
constructed, I shall take an early opportunity of giving it a
trial. The only question I have is, whether a material may
not be found that will reflect more light than even speculum
metal: I have heard an alloy of cast-steel and platmum well
spoken of, but have never seen any of it.
In considering the aberrations which the thickness of glass
contained in the reflecting prisms must inevitably produce
when placed immediately behind the object-glass, it occurred
to me, that if the same prisms were placed close to the top lens
of the eye-piece, these errors, not being magnified, would be
less sensibly felt.
I have before mentioned, that the final image of an object,
when it leaves the eye-piece, is compounded of several different
images or perspectives of the object, all blended together,
and which are as equally capable of separation there as be-
hind the object-glass itself, as exemplified by figs. 2 and 3,
which bear exactly the same appearance when under view,
with the alternate sides of either the object-glass or eye-piece
stopped off.
Fig. 8 represents the methods that I have contrived for ob-
taining the effect of bringing the two eyes sufficiently close to
each other to enable them both to see through the same eye-
piece together. aaa are rays converging from the field lens
of the eye-piece. After passing the eye lens b, if not inter-
cepted, they would come to a focus at c, but they are arrested
Wenuam on Binocular Vision. 9
by the inclined surfaces d d, of two solid glass prisms. From
the refraction of the under incident surface of the prisms the
focus of the eye-
piece becomes
elongated, and
falls within the
substance of the
glass at e. The
rays then diverge,
and, after being
refiected by the
second inclined
surface f, emerge from the upper side of the prism, when
their course is rendered still more divergent, as shown by the
figure. The reflecting angle that I hake given to the prisms
was 471°. I also find it is requisite to erind away the contact
edges of the prisms as represented, as it prevents the extreme
margins of the reflecting surfaces from coming into operation,
which can seldom be daaeies very perfect.
The definition with these prisms is good, but they are
liable to objection, on account of the extremely smal] portion
of the field of view that they take in, and w hich arises from
the distance that the eyes are of necessity placed beyond tlie
focus of the eye- piece, where the rays being divergent, the
pupil of the eye is incapable of taking them all in: : also ici
is great nicety required in the length of the prisms, which
must differ for nearly every different alee er.
I have constructed an adjusting binocular eye-piece, not
differing in principle from the last. The first reflection is
performed by means of a triangular steel prism, with the two
inclined facets very highly polished; this is represented by
the dotted outline g g, fig. 8. The rays, after having been
reflected at right angles, are taken up by two rectangular
glass prisms, shown by the dotted lines at ff.
The loss of light in this is much greater than in the former
instance, and the ficld of view more contracted; for the rays
from the eye-piece, after being reflected from the surface of
the steel prism, fal] to their natural focal distance, instead of
being elongated, as in the solid prism, consequently the eye is
still fiether removed from the focus. I had chosen hard steel
for the reflector, on account of the property this material pos-
sesses, of allowing the figure of a small flat surface to be
retained, or even perfected, during the operation of polishing.
I have also tried a combination of prisms over the field-glass,
using two eye lenses, but with no good result.
The best effect that I have yet produced in the way of
Fig. 8.
10 WenuamM on Binocular Vision.
binocular vision applied to the microscope, is that next to be
described, in which I have altogether dispenséd with reflecting
surfaces, merely using three refracting prisms, which, when
; placed together, are _ per-
Fig. 9. fectly achromatic. aa, fig. 9,
is a single prism of dense
flint glass, with the three
surfaces well polished. 606
are two prisms of crown
glass, of half the length of
the under flint prism, to the
upper inclines of which they
are cemented with Canada balsam. The angle of inclina-
tion to be given to the prisms must depend upon the dispersive
power of the flint and crown glass employed. In the combina-
tion that I have worked out, I have used, for the sake of sim-
plicity, some flint and crown that Mr. Smith kindly furnished
me with, in which the dispersive powers are exactly as two to
one, consequently I have had to make the angle of the crown
just double that of the flint, in order to obtain perfect achro-
matism, The refractive power of each must also be known,
that we may determine the angles of the prisms suitable for
refracting the rays from the object-glass into the two eyes, at
a distance of nine inches. cc, fig. 9, represents a ray of light
incident at right angles upon the under surface of the flint
prism. On* leaving the second surface and entering the
crown prism it is slightly bent inwards, and on finally emerg-
ing it is refracted outwards, in the direction required.
On looking through this prism I could not discover the
slightest colour or distortion ; it is almost like looking through
a piece of plain glass, and the loss of light is so inappreciable,
that it is difficult to distinguish any ‘difference between an
object and its refracted image.
The base of the compound prism should not be larger than
is sufficient to cover the stop of the lowest object-glass, in
order that they may be made very thin.
The method of applying the prism to the binocular micro-
scope is shown by fig. 10. aa is the object-glass, b the prism,
placed as close behind it as the fittings will admit. The
prism is set in an aperture ina flat disc of brass, which has
an horizontal play in every direction, in order that it may be
adjusted and fixed in such a position that the junction of the
prisms may bisect the rays from the object-glass, and at the
same time be at right angles to the transverse centres of the
eye-pleces,
ce are the two bodies of the microscope, provided with
WenuaM on Binocular Vision. 14
draw tubes and the usual eye-pieces, dd. The distance between
them should be rather less than the average distance asunder
of the eyes, and in cases where
these are very wide apart we can
pull out the draw tubes, which will
increase the distance between the
eye-pleces.
With this apparatus I obtain the
whole of the field of view in each eye,
which circumstance I was not pre-
pared to expect, as this must in
some measure depend upon the cor-
rection of the oblique pencils of the
object-glass, for we cannot expect
to look obliquely through the ob-
jective of a compound achromatic
microscope in the same way as in
the single lens arrangement, fig. 1,
but can only avail ourselves e aac
oblique pencils of rays as are cor-
rected for passing through the axis
of the microscope. The arrange-
ment represented by fig. 10 certainly
gives a larger and better field than
any other that I have yet tried ; and
on examining a globule of mercury
I could not ene er any aberration or inward or outward
coma when viewed by the eyes, either separately or together.
I should here mention that the same illusion is occasionally
produced in the appearance of some objects with the instru-
ment last described, as mentioned by Mr. Riddell, the vision
being to some eyes pseudoscopic, or projections appearing as
depressions, et vice versa. Probably habit would enable us to
judge of their true form without our being under the necessity
of resorting to a special expedient for the removal of the de-
ception.
I have not yet tried a binucular polariscope applied to this
instrument, but I have reason to expect some curious effects
from it.
I have thus far announced the progress of my expe riments
towards the attainment of complete binocular vision with the
microscope, and I cannot too strongly insist on the importance
of striving to arrive ata perfect result, particularly with the
highest powers, for I feel convinced that it will be the means
of ‘settling many disputed points of structure. Whether it will
require objec tives of a peculiar construction | am not at present
able to determine, but I may observe that the high power
Fig. 10.
12 WenuaM on Binocular Vision.
object-glasses, as now constructed, are best suited for viewing
very thin objects. We obtain far more pleasant vision of
bulk and depth with a smaller aperture. I have no doubt
that the defects of the larger aperture arise from the confused
medley of stereoscopic images blended together in one eye,
and which confusion must increase with increase of aperture ;
but if, on the other hand, we can divide these images between
both eyes, then I admit that the aperture cannot be too great,
as the largest portion of microscopic objects, from the way in
which they are mounted, would be all the better shown under
an exaggerated perspective, if I may so express it.
The binocular microscope has already explained to me
some of the false appearances arising from oblique illumina-
tion. I refer particularly to what is known as the diffracting
spectrum ; for example, if we illuminate the Podura by very
oblique light, we see a kind of overlying shadow, upon
which the ae of the scale are also visible. As I can-
not reconcile this appearance to the known laws of the dif-
fraction of light, I think that it is miscalled, and appre-
hend that the ‘phenomenon merely arises from the oblique light
illuminating one of the perspective images partly as an
opaque, and the other as a transparent object, and that they are,
consequently, so far separated as to give the appearance of a
double image.
In illuminating objects under the binocular microscope with
the ordinary*concave mirror some management is required in
order to get both images equally intense, for we can readily
get one brilliantly illuminated, while the other is in compara-
tive darkness, appearing on a black ground almost as an
opaque object, exactly resembling in their combined effect on
the eyes what is known as the diffracting spectrum. It also
occasionally happens that the angle of light from the mirror
is not sufficient to illuminate both images at the same time.
These appearances lead me to conjecture that the instrument
will require a particular kind of illumination, but I am hardly
yet in a position to express a decided opinion on the subject,
but will investigate the matter shortly.
This is the sum and substance of my present experience
with respect to binocular vision applied to the microscope,
and I do not think that mere enthusiasm has led me to over-
rate the importance of the subject, but hope that what has
already been done is only the commencement of a new era in
the advancement of this useful and important instrument. I
believe that there is yet much to be looked for in the way of
improvement by the investigation of unexplored optical com-
binations and principles.
WenuamM on Binocular Vision. 13
In conclusion I must express my thanks to Messrs. Smith
and Beck for the prompt assistance that they have afforded
me in the construction of the instrument, and also for the
free use of such apparatus, selected from their stock, as might
be useful to me in conducting my experiments.
A Short Description of some New Forms of Diatomacex from
Port Natal. By Geo. Suapspottr. (Read May 25, 1853.)
Tue constantly increasing interest evinced in the examination
of the elegant forms of the Diatomacez has recently received
an additional impetus from Messrs. Smith and Beck’s publi-
cation of the first volume of the long expected ‘Synopsis of
the British Species,’ by the Rev. W. Smith, F.L.S.
A work of the kind alluded to will supply a want that has
been much felt by microscopists, both as a record of what
has already been accomplished in this branch of study, and
also as a foundation for a general system of classification and
nomenclature, for not only is the latter in the most deplorable
state of confusion, but by far the greater number of the foreign
species are only capable of being referred to by their “local
habitation,” being destitute of the other appendage generally
considered so necessary.
Under these circumstances I propose conferring a provi-
sional name on such new species as Iam about to describe,
trusting to the indulgence of any prior claimant to this right,
whom I may unintentionally supplant, and promising to with-
draw such name on cause being shown.
About twelve or fifteen months back I was supplied, by the
kindness of Mr. Geo. Busk, with a gathering of Diatomacee
from ‘ Port Natal” so rich that I shall not attempt to give a
detailed account of the forms already known, but, merely
noticing a few of the most prominent of these, describe more
particularly those species that are, so far as I am aware,
entirely new, endeavouring by the respective designations to
recall them to the mind, by fixing upon some prominent
peculiarity of appearance in each as the foundation for such
distinction.
From the prevalence of certain forms (although I am not at
all acquainted with the facts of the case) I should be inclined
to pronounce the locality whence they are derived as subject
to marine influence, and at the same time probably not far
from the mouth of some river, and it is also evident that the
specimens are undoubtedly recent.
Mixed with the Diatomee are some other bodies, which
are scarcely capable of being classed with them, although, like
14 SuapBott on New Forms of Diatomacee.
the spicula of many of the sponges (of which there is a
goodly proportion), they are of a siliceous character, such
as the Dictyocha, and also a form to which my attention was
directed by Mr. Busk, and which I purpose identifying by the
name of Bacteriastrum, from Baxrtngia, a stick, and Aorgov, a
star.
By the kind assistance of another of our members, Mr.
Capron, I am enabled to lay before you drawings of these
most interesting bodies (of which may be distinguished three
species), as also of most of the other novelties.
From the tenuity of their structure the various Bacteriastra
are better observed without being mounted in balsam ; they
consist of a central irregular annular portion (not unlike the
connecting membrane which may be observed in the Diatomee
during self-division), surrounded by from eight to twelve rays,
each many times longer than the diameter of the central por-
tion, and the construction of these rays affords a good specific
distinction, viz. 1st, B. furcatum (fig. 1), the marginal rays
forked ; 2nd, B. curvatum (fig. 2), marginal rays entire and
curved in one direction; 3rd, B. nodulosum, marginal rays
entire, straight, and covered with small protuberances like a
knotted stick. This last species is by far the most rare.*
A form tolerably abundant and quite distinct from anything
I have ever met with from any other locality I propose to call
Euphyllodium, from «v, and QvAdov, having somewhat the
outline of a spathulate leaf (fig. 3). It is characterised as
follows: viz. valve symmetrical, convex, divided by a median
rectilinear rib, reticulations of an irregular oblong form, dis-
posed in regular and elegant curves around centres formed by
the terminations of the median rib. I have noticed but one
species, which I have called C. spathulatum. There was at
first some doubt in my mind whether this might not belong
to the genus Cocconeis, but the very distinct appearance of the
median line, and the absence of anything that could possibly
represent the inferior valve, which in the latter genus is
generally (I believe always) somewhat different from the
superior one, and likewise the marked character of the outline,
satisfied me that this supposition was incorrect. It is not
unlike the aspect of the genus Podosphenia, but here again
there are differences so distinct as to satisfy me that it cannot
be referred to it with propriety ; for instance, there is no re-
flexure of the valve, and the markings are not moniliform
strie, but rather tessellate in character.
* Since writing the above, I have made out most unquestionably that
this pseudo-annular portion is a distinct cell, and not a mere annulus.
SuapBo tt on New Forms of Diatomacec. 15
Of the genus Triceratium there are no less than five new
species, one old, and one doubtful, making seven in all.
The first I shall notice is of moderate size, and is distin-
guished by peculiarly delicate markings somewhat obscurely
disposed about three equidistant pseudo-nuclei— Tr. sculptum
(fig. 4).
Next we have one in which the markings appear like
minute dots, closely crowded together, but disposed in a very
regular manner from the axis of the valve; this is about the
same size as the preceding, but the outline differs materially,
each margin being arcuate with the concave surface outwards
—Tr. arcuatum (fig. 5).
Another species of medium size is in form nearly the con-
verse of the preceding, the margin being so inflated as to cause
the triangular outline to approach that of the circle; hence
Tr. orbiculatum as its specific designation (fig. 6). This
species exhibits a structure similar to that of Coscinodiscus
radiatus: the reticulations, however, are not so regularly
hexagonal, but they are largest at the centre, and diminish
in size gradually towards the margin of the valves.
I have noticed also a single specimen of what appears to
be Tr. alternans, but, as it presents only its front view, it is
difficult to determine.
The next I shall allude to is, however, the most important,
being very remarkable and especially interesting from the
front view exhibiting the disposition of the horn-like append-
ages (figs. 7a and 7) and the mode of dividing. On the
lateral view of the valves the most striking peculiarity isa
sort of twistedness in the angles (fig. 7a), which is very
marked: the specific name proposed is to note this fact, viz.
Tr. contortum.
The surface of each valve is adorned with short spines
arranged in a tri-radiate double row, and at the termination
of each double row is one very long one, being about one-
third of the length of aside of the valve. These long spines
are independent of and placed nearer to the axis than the
horn-like processes from which the genus derives its name.
Fig. 7b shows a specimen undergoing self-division.
Another new species, much smaller than the last, is charac-
terized by the reticulations being coarse and irregular in form,
and the horns very large as compared with the size of the
valve— Tr. orassum.
Another species is, I believe, a variety only of the T. favus,
which has been called gibbosus.
The genus Pleurosigma has no less than five species, two
being quite new, and both having the markings arranged dia-
16 SuapBoit on New Forms of Diatomacee.
gonally, that is, with (what the Rev. W. Smith considers)
cells placed alternately in contiguous rows. The outline of
the largest (fig. 8) is very clumsy and the ends obtuse, and
the median line but slightly flexed—this | call ‘ validum ;”
the other, P. inflatum, on the contrary, is of a graceful out-
line, the apices acute, the flexure of the median line con-
siderable, and is broad in proportion to its length (fig. 9). A
third species is, I believe, also new; it was observed by
Mr. Capron when making the drawings; but as I have not
had an opportunity of examining it, I have not further no-
ticed it. Specimens of P. formosum and P. Hippocampus are
also found,
There are two new species of Amphitetras, viz. A. ornata
and A. tessellata ; the former (fig. 10) is of small size, the mar-
gins of the valves being considerably hollowed or emarginate
and folded over so that each valve is not unlike in form to a
collegian’s cap. The surface is elegantly but somewhat irre-
gularly ornamented with delicate markings. A. ¢essellata (fig.
11) is of larger size, and the markings coarse and resembling
a tessellated pavement.
There is a very striking and beautiful discoid valve, toler-
ably abundant, of the same genus as one commonly found in
the guano from Callao, but which, I conceive, has never yet
had a generic name. It differs in essential characters both
from the Coscinodiscus and Actinocyclus, and its position
would probably be midway between them.
It is possessed of a pseudo nucleus, is minutely embellished
with delicate markings similar to those seen in Pleurosigma
anyulatum, &c., but in segments radiating from the centre, so
that, in all probability, the front view would exhibit slight
undulations. The absence of any distinct division between
the segments, however, separates it from Actinocyclus. I
propose for this form the generic name Actinophenia, from
axtiv, a ray, and Qzeivos, glittering, with the specific designa-
tion splendens.
Fig. 12 is a new species of Eupodiscus, having four pro-
cesses arranged regularly, and with the markings of a some-
what similar character to those in the last described species,
forming an elegant cross; I have, therefore, named it £.
crucifer.
Fig. 13 represents a Campylodiscus latus, also new, the cana-
liculi being wide apart and few in number.
Moderately abundant in this gathering are specimens of a
highly interesting nature, on which the generic name of As-
terolampra has been conferred by Professor Baily, of New
York: one species, A. marilandica, has been figured in ‘ the
SHapBott on New Forms of Diatomacee. 17
American Journal of Science and Art,’ vol. xlviil.; a copy of
the paper is in the library of this Society, it having been pre-
sented by the late Mr. Edwin Quekett. The Port Natal
species differs in many respects from A. marilandica, as the
following description will show :—
Frustules disciform, slightly convex, cellular (?), elegantly
marked around the margin with 7 or 11 segments of an
elliptical or parabolic outline, radii proceeding from the
centre to the apex of each segmental curve, and strength-
ened with bracket-like projections. The aspect is not unlike
an ornamental wheel, the radii forming the spokes, The seg-
ments aye regularly and minutely divided into dots or cells (?),
but it is necessary to use a high power and careful manipula-
tion to display them: when properly shown, however, nothing
can well be more exquisitely beautiful. There is a very no-
ticeable peculiarity in the number of the segments; in every
specimen I have seen, being either 7 or 11 (a few only of the
latter number), and in the normal state the two valves, as far
as my observation extends, are, without exception, disposed
alternately, that is, that a segment of the superior valve always
corresponds to an interspace of the inferior one, and vice versa.
I have named this species A. impar, from the odd number of
segments. Fig. 14 isa representation of this beautiful frustule.
A species of another genus, established by Professor
Baily, Climacosphenia, is shown at figs. 15a and 15), b
being the lateral view, and a the front view, in which the
ladder-like divisions more resemble the links of a chain than
in the only other species I have seen: I have consequently
ealled it Cl. eatena.
Two very interesting forms, by no means rare in this very
rich gathering, belong to a genus that has been described
under the names of Zygoceros and Denticella, the latter by
Professor Baily, and as they clearly differ from the former, as
may be seen by the most casual observer on inspecting fig.
16, which is a single frustule of a true Zygoceros, moderately
common in this collection, I shall adopt the latter designation.
I have only seen them either single or in pairs, having just
completed the process of self-division, having a somewhat
persistent connecting membrane. Front views are shown of
the two new species in figs. 16 and 17. The side view is more
or less elliptical in outline at the junction of the two valves,
but sections in almost every other plane parallel to this would
present a different figure, owing to the protuberances shown
in the front view. In both species there arise from the cen-
tral inflations two slightly curved spines from each valve,
which, as in Triceratium, &c., in the process of self-division,
VOL, II. c
18 SHavBo.t on New Forms of Diatomacee.
are arranged across each other. The smaller of the two spe-
cies (fig. 16), D. simplex, has but one central inflation, and the
lateral expansions are symmetrically placed so as to give each
valve the appearance of a sort of mitre or head-dress. It is
marked with numerous well-defined dots or cells (?). The
second species, D. margaritifera (fig. 17), has, besides the
two lateral expansions, three intermediate inflations, the cen-
tral one being considerably the largest, and the whole is
covered by numerous pearl-like eminences similar in aspect to
those so common in Cosmartum and .other Desmidiee. In
both species the union of the two valves is marked by a sort
of projecting band, which completely encircles the frustule.
In addition to those I have described there are very many
other forms already familiar to observers of the Diatomea,
and doubtless some new forms which I have overlooked. I
am well aware that the present is a most imperfect sketch of
a highly interesting gathering, containing, as will be shown
by the following summary, no less than 55 species, of which
20 are certainly new, and in addition 4 forms of Sponge
spicula.
Species. Species.
Bacteriastrium é . 38 of whichare certainly new 3
Calophyllum
‘Triceratium
Pleurosigma .
Amphitetras .
Actinopheenia
Eupodiscus
Asterolampra .
Denticella
Campylodiscus
Climacospheenia
Navicula
Stauroneis
Pinnularia
Nitzschia
Grammatophora
Tabellaria
Striatella
Zygoceros
Acnanthes
Cocconeis
Doryphora
Podosphenia .
Synedra
Coscinodiscus .
Tryblionella
Meloseira
Biddulphia
Epithemium .
Dictyochas
”? >
bo
S| Be DR Re pppoe
And 4 forms of Sponge Spicules.
Ou
on | cere armel ceed cect ee OA cee eel ee SS ell cel ll SO eel SO ell Oo OO SO ell ROMS] Be
Lree on Sponge Sand. 19
Observations on the Examination of SponcE Sanp, with Remarks
on Collecting, Mounting, and Viewing FoRAMINIFERA as
Microscopic Oxsects, By M.S. Leae, A.I.A. (Read
June 22, 1853.)
Various papers on the structure of the Foraminifera have
been brought before the Society by Mr. Williamson and others,
but the impression conveyed by those communications has
been that the shells in question are not very easily obtained,
and consequently they are likely to be passed over by micro-
scopists from the want of specimens by which to study
them.
Although the matter of this paper has no pretension to
originality, | am induced to offer these remarks in compliance
with a suggestion thrown out by a Member of our Council,
that if Members would occasionally communicate facts, appa-
rently unimportant in themselves, or new modes of manipu-
lation under the general title of ‘ Microscopic Memoranda,’
such remarks would contribute to diffuse a taste for the pursuit
by facilitating the labours of those whose time and inclination
admit of such researches.
Under this impression I now lay before the Society the
result of my experiments on sponge sand, and the methods
employed to bring the specimens more immediately within
my reach without ‘the labour of picking them out from an in-
discriminate sample of the sand itself.
Having observed that there was some degree of uniformity
in the magnitude of certain species of the Foraminifera, it
occurred to me that by sifting the mass of sand through wires
of different gauges important results would follow, and I
therefore obtained some specimens of wire-gauze of 10, 20,
40, 70, and 100 wires to the inch, and, having also procured
from a sponge merchant about a peck of the rubbish arising
in sorting the sponges, I proceeded to separate the sand into
parcels of different degrees of fineness,
In the first process (employing a gauze with 10 wires to the
inch) I cleared the mass of clippings of sponge, small pebbles,
&c., without obtaining any specimens of shells worth retaining.
In the second (20 wires to the inch) I obtained some very
nice specimens of the Orbiculina adunca and complanata, but
scarcely anything else; these specimens, of which the Mem-
bers may recollect that Dr. Carpenter exhibited a series of
very beautiful drawings at one of our soirées, were thus brought
together, instead of being, as before, scattered through the
mass, at intervals few and far between.
c2
20 Leae on Sponge Sand.
By means of the third gauge of wire-gauze, specimens of
Peneroplis, and smaller specimens of Orbiculina, were brought
together, with other species of Yoraminifera of considerable
variety of beauty and form, the result here obtained being
very decided and characteristic of particular species; for,
although the quantity retained after this process was compara-
tively small in relation to the original mass, yet the specimens
were such as to afford an ample reward for the time and
trouble incurred in obtaining them.
But the most surprising result was obtained by using the
next quality of wire-gauze (that of 70 wires to the inch), the
amount retained being much larger in quantity, and the pro-
portion of shells to sand and other débris being such that
sliders mounted indiscriminately from it yielded several very
good objects in every instance.
From the above samples I was enabled to select, without
difficulty, shells for microscopic observation; in the first two
by the naked eye, and in the latter by using a hand magnifier,
and removing them with the moistened point of a camel’s-hair
pencil.
‘The remaining portion of sand, forming probably 19-20ths
of the original mass, will contain, as may easily be imagined,
a very small comparative quantity of shells; but, nevertheless,
it must not be thrown away. I again passed some of it
through a gauze of 100 wires to the inch: the sample then
retained yielded a fair quantity of shells by washing it in
water, and thus other species characterized by their size were
brought out by adopting the following process: having selected
a dish of sufficient size and depth, and spread at the bottom
of it a quantity of the sand, as much water was poured on it
as would cover the whole to the depth of half an inch; after
allowing the floating particles to settle, the dish was slightly
raised at one end and gently agitated, so as to produce little
eddies in the water. Inashort time it was observed that small
channels were formed in the sand of a whiter aspect than the
other portions ; allowing the water to settle gradually, the dish
was slowly tilted at one end until the surface of the sand was
exposed : the whiter particles being then carefully removed by
means of a camel’s-hair pencil, they were found to consist
almost entirely of very minute shells; and the process being
repeated a few times a large amount (microscopically speak-
ing) was obtained for future examination.
In connexion with this subject I may venture a few remarks
upon collecting, mounting, and viewing specimens of the Fo-
raminifera as far as my experience has enabled me to speak.
When about four years ago I was staying at Weymouth
ie on
Lrae on Sponge Sand. 21
with my friend Mr. Woodward, in walking over the Small-
mouth Sand, which is situate on the north side of Portland
Bay, we observed the surface of the sand to be distinctly
marked with white ridges, extending many yards in length,
and parallel with the edge of the water. Upon examining
portions of these we found that they consisted of Foraminifera
in considerable abundance, and, upon scraping up a quantity
of it carefully with a card, we obtained in a short time a
bottleful of material which contained thousands and probably
millions of these minute shells.
My friend Mr. Cocken, during a recent residence at
Brighton, was very successful in obtaining a considerable
quantity of the Foraminifera from the surface of the mud
exposed by the receding tide in Shoreham Harbour ; and here
also the surface only should be taken, in order to have a large
proportion of shells.
It is very well known to many of our Members that the
ouze from the oyster beds yields a very fair proportion of
Foraminifera and other materials for microscopic examination,
and I am inclined to think from these evidences that the sur-
face, and the surface alone, of sand or mud banks will yield
satisfactory results. And I should recommend to all those
who contemplate collecting for themselves, or employing others
to do so for them, to take only the surface, being convinced
that a few spoonfuls obtained in this way will yield more
than a spadeful taken indiscriminately. My view of this is
also confirmed by the large amount of shells in the sponge
sand, for being taken from the sea-shores, that which is
gathered up with them is such as occurs only on the surface.
I think it also very probable that a locality shelteredyfrom the
direct action of the sea would be more favourable for finding
these organisms than a bold shore exposed to all the violence
of the wind and waves,
If these conjectures should be borne out by experience, it
is to be hoped that the increased facilities of finding their
habitats will lead to extended observations on their living
economy, a subject rendered extremely interesting by the
papers of Mr, Williamson and the writings of Dr. Carpenter
and others, where the subjects of their structure and zoological
position are very ably discussed.
The species of Foraminifera are so numerous that the mere
mention of 575 species described by D’Orbigny as peculiar
to the torrid zone, 350 species to the temperate zone, and 75
species to the frigid zone, sufficiently attests their abundance,
and the samples of sand which have come under my own
observation from the Caramatta Strait in the China Sea, from
22 Luce on Sponge Sand.
Australia, and other localities, afford ample proof of numerous
and beautiful forms.
After collecting these minute shells, two very important
points are, mounting them for future examination, and viewing
them so as to obtain their true structure. Much depends on
the different genera, as to the most eligible mode; the simplest
and most natural is that adopted by Mr. Marshall of placing
them in cells made of perforated card, putting a piece of thin
glass over and sealing it down, so that the objects roll about
loosely, and are viewed as opaque objects by a side light;
another mode, also adopted by the same gentleman, is placing
the shells on a glass slip with a little very dilute gum water,
which causes the shells to adhere sufficiently to the glass as
to admit of the air being exhausted from them when mounted
in Canada balsam. They may then be viewed either as opaque
or transparent objects, but it will be observed that the texture
of the shell which invests the segments of the animal is (as
observed by M. d’Orbigny) very variable, but it almost always
follows the different mode of growth upon which the orders of
that author are founded. When the segments are closely packed
together, the shell is opaque, of a close texture like porcelain,
and without any indications of external porosity; when the
segments are alternate without a spire, and when the spire is
oblique, the shell is porous, and pierced over the last cells
with a great number of little mouths, through which proceed
the filaments, but which become obliterated when the animal
no longer needs them; when the segments are im a straight
line, when they are coiled upon the same spiral plane, or
when they are alternate, and the shell inequilateral, their
texture ig almost as transparent as glass.
From the above description it will be evident that one
single mode of illumination will not suffice for duly developing
the structure of these shells, and I should therefore recommend
that some be mounted loosely in a cell, so that all parts may
be viewed as they roll over; and others be mounted in Canada
balsam, and viewed by means either of the annular condenser
of Mr. Shadbolt or the parabolic reflector of Mr. Wenham.
By these means the difference in structure between the upper
and under surfaces of the same species of shell is brought out,
and that confusion avoided which occurs when direct light is
transmitted.
Rainey on Artificial Light. 23
A Method of employing Armriciat Lieut for the Ittumina-
TION of TRANSPARENT OBsects, by which it is so deprived of
Glare and Colour as to be equal in its Illuminating Power to
the best Daylight. By Gero. Rainey, M.R.C.S., Demon-
strator of Anatomy atSt.Thomas’s Hospital. (Read June
22, 1853.)
Tue principal disadvantages attending the use of gas and
lamp light, as they are ordinarily employed for microscopic
illumination, are the disagreeable and somewhat painful glare
and the unnatural colour which is given to all objects thus
illuminated.
These inconveniences are not felt so much where only a
plane or concave mirror is used, as when the light is concen-
trated upon the object by an achromatic condenser ; and, in
the former case, they are partially remedied by transmitting
the light through a piece of ground glass, either common or
coloured ; or by dulling the surface of the mirror; but in the
latter one, these means, by cutting off too much light, are
productive of more harm than benefit, especially where the
markings upon an object are very delicate and require a parti-
cular kind of illumination to render them distinctly visible,
as, for instance, the dots on the Pleurosigma angulatum.
Hence, unless some other plan be adopted for moderating the
intensity of all artificial light and correcting its colour, the
employment of the achromatic condenser must either be
limited to the hours of a good daylight, or the observer be in
danger of materially injuring his eyesight.
Mr. Gillett’s apparatus for producing the effect of a white
cloud does, I am informed, remedy all the defects of lamp-
light, but, from some difficulty or other in constructing or in
applying it, its employment has not become general.
The plan to which I have to call your attention is especially
applicable to Mr. Gillett’s condenser, and may at a compa-
ratively small expense be made a part of that most useful
instrument.
Before proceeding further I may observe that the principle
upon which my apparatus is constructed is one which has
been of general adoption for the preservation of the eyes of
those who use glasses, and therefore so far has no claim to
originality ; but its precise construction and application to the
microscope, and its effect in rendering artificial light equal if
not superior to the very best daylight, are admitted by those
who have seen it, and, to the best of my knowledge, are also
new. But my motive has not been novelty but utility, in
bringing this subject under the notice of this Society.
24 Rainey on Artificial Light.
Now that which gives the peculiar burnish or glow to all
objects when highly illuminated, whether by the direct rays of
the sun, or by light proceeding from ignited matter, is due to
the heating portion of the spectrum and certain coloured rays.
In the former case we make use of light for microscopic illu-
mination which has been deprived of this burnish by its
having passed through the clouds; and in the latter this can
be equally well effected by passing the light emanating from
gas or a lamp through such transparent coloured media as
will stop the calorific rays, and at the same time furnish the
kind and amount of colour necessary to form, with the coloured
rays of the flame, white light.
The combination which I find to answer best is the fol-
lowing :-—
One piece of dark blue glass, free from any tint of red, one
of a very pale blue with a slight shade of green, and two of
thick white plate glass, all cemented together with Canada
balsam.
This combination so completely stops the calorific rays, that
when the direct rays of the sun are concentrated by a bull’s
eye of the ordinary size upona lucifer-match with this medium
intervening, it does not become ignited ; and when this medium
is used with Gillett’s condenser, objects illuminated by the
light of a camphine lamp appear as if they were seen by a
bright daylight.
Boswe tt on Actinophrys Sol. 25
Remarks on Actinopurys Sot. By R.S. Boswetx, Spring
Hill Cottage, Charmouth, Dorset. (Read Oct. 26, 1853.)
In an interesting paper in the ‘ Journal,’ of a description
of Actinophrys Sol, by A. Kolliker, &c., (Vol. I., pp. 25
and 98,) the author, after entering into a very minute descrip-
tion of this curious animalcule, says:—‘‘ The creature also
seems to be capable of altering its entire form to a certain
extent, and to be able to expand and again contract itself i
toto. More extensive and more energetic movements do not
occur at all, and I am consequently altogether ignorant as to
how locomotion of the animal is effected.” My object in
sending this short notice is to give him that information which
he seems to want, though perhaps by this time he may have
made the same discovery as myself, if not, it cannot but be
interesting, not only to him, but also to others, who take an
interest in these minute wonders of creation.
The “Sun animalcule” is very common in this part of
Dorsetshire ; it abounds in pools where Desmidiee are found :
they are ravenous feeders, not only upon the Desmidiee, but
also upon all kinds of minute spores and animalcules. It was
on examining some beautiful Desmidiee, a few evenings
back, that my attention was arrested by the curious appearance
of two or three very small Actinophrys floating very lightly
upon the surface of the water in the form of a ball, with their
delicate tentacular filaments perfectly erect all over their
bodies ; in fact, they seemed to be floating upon these delicate
filaments. This beautiful and curious appearance, so different
from what I had generally observed, induced me to request
Mrs. Boswell to look at it, but, while she was rising from her
seat, I exclaimed, ‘‘ You are too late, the little creature has
given a leap, and I have lost it!’ but upon moving the slide
in the direction of the leap, I found the creature composedly
resting in the usual manner upon the surface of the water—
that is, in a flat position. This was not a solitary instance, for
about five minutes after another gave a similar leap: the dis-
tance must have been very great considering the size of the
animal, as it was in the centre of the disc under Messrs.
Smith and Beck’s 2-3rd object-glass with the second eye-piece,
and I had to travel full an inch beyond the radius. These are
the only two instances I have met with at present, not having
made the little creature my peculiar study.
I have frequently mounted the Actinophrys Sol with Des-
midiee, but they generally burst at the edge of the sphere
owing to the pressure of the glass cover, although they are to
VOL, II.
26 _ Busx on Avicularia.
all appearance considerably thinner than Micrastorias denti-
culata.
Remarks on the Structure and Function of the AvicULaRiaNn
and ViBracuLaR Oreans of the Potyzoa; and on their
value as diagnostic characters in the classification of those
creatures. (Read Nov. 23, 1853.)
2, one class of the
Tue Polyzoa, or, more properly speaking,
Polyzoa characterized by the possession of a movable semi-cres-
centic lip, furnished with a corneous rim, at the mouth of the
cell,—the cheilostomata as I have elsewhere termed them, or
Celleporina of Ebrenberg,—are, many of them, distinguished
by the presence of appendicular organs affixed to one part or
another of the cells of which the polyzoarium is composed.
These organs are of*two kinds, the one a sort of pincers, and
the other consisting of a long, slender, movable seta. To the
former set of organs, of whatever form, the term aviculariwm is
here applied, and the latter are designated as vibracula.
With respect to the structure of these organs of either class it
is sufficient to remark that, however diverse their appearance
may be, they are all constructed upon the same general type,
that is to say, the organ consists of a hollow cup or receptacle
containing two sets of muscles for the movements of its motile
portion, the mandible, as I term it in the one case, and the
seta in the other. Beyond this general conformity in type,
however, my knowledge of the more intimate structure and
contents of the cup in the vibracular organs, does not allow me
to approximate them to the avicularia.
The avicularia, besides the movable mandible, it may be
observed, always have a corresponding fixed beak, the opponent
as it were of the mandible, and necessary to constitute the
organ, what I presume it to be, an instrument of prehension.
This beak is needless, and is therefore wanting in the vzbra-
cula, and its absence in cases where the movable part is
detached, would serve to distinguish one kind of organ from
the other.
I, The avicularia.—
The first notice we have of the existence of these organs
or rather of one form of them, is contained in Ellis’s account
of what he terms the ‘ Bird’s-head coralline,” (Nat. Hist.,
Zooph., p. 36, pl. 20,) where he says, ‘‘ On the outside of each
cell we phe by the microscope, the appearance of a bird’s
head, with a crooked beak opening very wide.”
Busk on Avicularia. 27
Mr. Darwin, in the ‘ Voyage of the ‘Adventure’ and
‘ Beagle,’ adverts at some length to these organs, and de-
scribes their actions in the living state very graphically. They
have also been described with great care by Dr. Van Beneden
and the late Professor John Reid, and also by Nordmann
and Krohn, the latter (as I extract from Dr. Johnston’s ‘ Hist.
Brit. Zooph.’) classifying them under three different forms:
1, those which have the figure of the crab’s arms; 2, those
which resemble pincers; and 3, those which are formed like
bristles or hairs; the last corresponding to what are here
termed the vibracula.
In a paper read before this Society, October 27, 1847, and
published in the ‘ Transactions,’ I have described more particu-
larly the structure of the curious and unique form presented
by this organ in Notamia bursaria, pointing out, I believe for
the first time, that the muscles were divisible into two distinct
sets, one for the closure and the other for the opening of
the mandible, with other minute particulars of their mecha-
nical arrangement previously unnoticed ; I also stated that the
muscles not only in this organ but throughout, in this and
other Polyzoa, are of the striped kind, or resembled those of
the Brachiopoda more than of any other class in the Mollusca.
I also indicated that the mandible and the beak of the cup
were differently constituted to the rest of the organ, being com-
posed of a horny instead of calcareous substance ; and that
besides the two sets of muscles above noticed, the cup con-
tained a “ peculiar body of unknown nature.”
I believe that up to the present time our knowledge of these
organs is pretty nearly limited to the above particulars. With
respect to their homologies and functions, nothing but con-
jectures have been offered; in fact, as regards the homo-
logies of these organs with any existing in animals belonging
to the same or any other class, no conjectures beyond the most
vague have been offered. They may, perhaps, be regarded as
analogous in function with the Pedicellarie of the Echino-
derms, as well as with the little accessory cups filled with
prehensile filaments, or thread cells, which are found in the
Plumularie and Campanulariade; but, I conceive that any
homology with these organs is quite out of the question.
They are as nearly related to the claws of a lobster or the feet
of a Pygnogonum.*
* Mr. Huxley has pointed out to me several points of resemblance be-
tween the avicularia, especially as to their mechanical and muscular ar-
rangements, and the shells of the Brachiopoda. An ingenious idea, and
calculated to lead to the more serious consideration of the relationship
between the Polyzoa and Brachiopoda, as suggested by Mr. Hancock
d 2
28 — Busk on Avicularia.
Their structure so obviously indicates their aptitude for pre-
hension, that the supposition of such being their function has
been long entertained: and I have myself no doubt whatever
as to its being so; for, as Dr. Johnston observes, “ although
they are too short to hand the prey to the mouth, yet, retained
in a certain position, and enfeebled or killed by the grasp, the
currents set in motion by the ciliated tentacula may then
carry it within reach.” (‘ Brit. Zooph.’ p. 334.) Some time
in the last year, a specimen of Scrupocellaria scruposa, if
I remember right, was exhibited at one of our meetings, with
a minute vermicule, retained in the grasp of its avicularia ; and
the same thing seems to have been repeatedly noticed. An
instance of the kind occurred to me when at the sea-side this
autumn, and I have made a figure to represent the occurrence
(Plate IT. fig. 12). It is ofa portion of Scrupocellaria seruposa,
two of the -avicularia on which have, apparently simulta-
neously, caught a minute vermicule which they retained with
a most tenacious grasp. I kept the zoophyte under observa-
tion for several days, in the living state, and during that time,
in fact, till the whole died, the grasp of these organs was not
relaxed ; and, although the movements of the captive were
very active and apparently energetic, it was unable to liberate
itself from the grim hold of its tiny but persevering antagonist.
Another instance of the grasping propensity of these organs
is exhibited in fig. 10, where two of them appear to be
engaged in deadly combat. This figure is also intended
to show the disposition of the muscles when thus employed.
Considering, therefore, the conformation of the avicularia,
and the instances in which objects of prey of different kinds
have been noticed engaged by them, I think it is impossible
to avoid the conclusion that they are for the prelension of ob-
jects, either for the purpose of using them for food when dead
and powerless, as suggested by Dr. Johnston; or it may be for
purposes of defence.
With respect to the structure of the avicularium, I have
already stated what is known; and have, in addition, only
to remark that it has occurred to me to notice a circumstance
hitherto overlooked, and which may eventually serve to throw
some light upon the “ peculiar body” contained in the cell to
which I adverted in my observations on Notamia. It was in
(‘ Ann. Nat. Hist.,’ 2nd Ser., vol. v. p. 198), than has hitherto been given
to it. And with regard to this, it should be borne in mind, though per-
haps the character is of no great importance, that all the Brachiopoda
have striped muscular fibres, whilst for the most part the other classes of
Mollusca, with some exceptions—Pevten, for instance—all have muscles of
the unstriped kind,
Busk on Avicularia. 29
that species, also, that I first noticed (in 1852) the fact that
when the mandible is thrown back, or, in other words, when
the avicularium is open, a slight prominence comes into view,
covered with delicate setose hairs, which do not seem to be of
the nature of cilia, because they exhibit no motion. These
minute sete appear to he seated on the “ peculiar body ” above
adverted to, and which again seems to be so connected with
the muscles by which the mandible is closed, or rather,
perhaps, to a membrane by which they are covered, or by
which the opening of the cell is closed, when the mandible is
thrown back, as to be protruded, simply by the throwing back
of that process; so that the sete are then made to project
beyond the level of the cup, and are withdrawn as the man-
dible closes. Fig. 2 represents this apparatus in Notamia.
Fig. 7, the same thing in Bugula plumosa, and fig. 9, in
Bugula avicularia. These are the only three species in
which, up to the present time, I have been able to perceive
this arrangement ; but not having had an opportunity of ex-
amining the avicularia of any other, except Serupocellaria
seruposd, for the purpose, and in wien I was unable to detect
it (fig. 15), I am not prepared to say that it obtains univer-
sally. It is probable, however, that in a modified form it may
do so. Iam inclined to the opinion that it is atactile organ,
the object of which is to apprize the occlusor muscles of the
contact of any minute floating object, upon which the muscles
immediately contract, and either close the avicularium against
the invasion of a foe or capture the appropriate prey.
A second point that I have also observed in these organs,
and which, I believe, has not been before noticed, is that the
portion of the cup in which the muscles and the greater part
of the peculiar organ (which might probably be regarded as a
nervous ganglion) are placed, is closed in by a delicate mem-
branous tympanum, which has a central perforation, through
which the conjoined tendon of the occlusor muscles passes, and
also a second smaller opening (at all events in B. avicularia),
the object of which I do not know. This tympanic mem-
brane is shown in fig. 8.
So much for the structure and conjectural function of the
avicularia ; and to proceed to consider the vibracula in the
same particulars.
1. As to the structure of these organs, I have nothing new
to offer. They consist, as I have said, of a cup containing the
muscular apparatus, and of a movable seta, articulated to the
cup, and which appears to be moved in the same way as the
mandible of the avicularia. This seta is in most cases simple
and terete ; in others, as, for instance, generally in the genus
30 Busk on Avicularia.
Caberea, it is toothed on one side; and in others, as in the
species forming the family Selenariade, of which we have no
British representative, the seta is very variously and curiously
formed, in some being trifid or bifid at the extremity, and in
one, Selenaria maculata, it is spirally contorted and minutely
annulated, so as very closely to resemble the proboscis of a
butterfly.
As to the function of the vibracula, it would appear, in most
cases, to be simply defensive. The seta may be observed in
almost constant motion, sweeping slowly and carefully over
the surface of the polyzoary, and removing what might be
noxious to the delicate inhabitants of the cells when their
tentacula are protruded.
Another circumstance often to be observed with respect to
these organs, is this, that each presents inferiorly a rounded
perforation, as in Scrupocellaria and Canda, sometimes chan-
nelled as in Caberea, which indicates the point of attachment
of a radical tube or fibre. That this connexion with a radical
tube, however, is not an essential attribute of the vibracular
organ is sufficiently obvious from the circumstance that those
tubes are frequent where no such organs exist; but where
there are vibracula, the tubes invariably enter them, and not
the cell itself. This is especially evident in the genus Canda,
of which the British species, Canda ( Cellularia) reptans, affords
an instance.
In the case of the Selenariade or Lunulites, 1 think it not
improbable that the vibracula may be subservient to loco-
motion.
These organs, both avicularian and vibracular, appear to me
to be of very considerable importance in a systematic point of
view ; and, although from our imperfect knowledge of them,
and in fact of the Polyzoa in general, the supposition can only
be regarded as problematical, it seems not improbable that
the presence or absence, especially of the avicularium, may be
connected more directly with the intrinsic nature of the
species upon which they are found, than has hitherto been
supposed. It may, for instance, be the case, that those furnished
with these offensive weapons live upona kind of food different
from that of the others who do not require such an aid in the
capture or weakening of their prey. The Polyzoamay, per-
haps, thus be divided into vegetable and animal feeders, or into
feeders upon dead, and those which feed upon living organisms.
One thing, however, is certain, that these organs afford, in many
cases, excellent and available systematic characters ; and this
part of the subject I will now proceed briefly to discuss.
I have already stated that the accessory organs we are now
Busk on Avicularia. 31
considering are divided into two kinds, apparently with dis-
tinct functions—avicularia and vibracula; the one, probably
prehensile, the other defensive. Of these, the avicularia are
found by far the most extensively ; in fact, they are wanting
in but few of the genera constituting the chetlostomatous
class of Polyzoa. In employing them for the purpose of
classification, it is necessary to subdivide them into three
classes. 1, the pedunculate. 2, the sessile; and 3, the
immersed. The two latter cladaest however, run insensibly
into each other, whilst the pedunculate form is obviously
quite distinct, inasmuch as it presents an additional member,
in the form of a basal joint. It is this form of avicularium to
which the term “ birds,” or “ vultures’ heads,” is more pro-
petly applied. It is well known in this form, as it occurs in
Bugula avicularia, B. plumosa, and B. flabellata: it is also
found in Bugula tridentata (Krauss), a South African species ;
and in Bicellaria ciliata; whilst it is wanting altogether in
Bugula neritina, Bicellaria grandis, and Bicellaria gracilis.
A second modification of pedunculate avicularium, where it
assumes the form of a long trumpet-shaped or infundi-
buliform tube, exists in Bistilania tuba. So far as I know
then, at present, the pedunculate form of avicularium is
restricted to the genera Bugula and Bicellaria, though it does
not exist in every species of either genus, and in one, assumes
a form quite different from the ordinary. All that can be
said about it, therefore, in those two genera, is that where the
avicularia exist, they are of the pedunculate variety. The
true ‘ bird’s-head” avicularia are always placed on the an-
terior aspect of the cell, on one side below the level of the aper-
ture, whilst the tubiform variety arises on the back of the cell.
The sessile form of avicularium, as I have observed, may
be subdivided into the projecting and the immersed. =
these, the latter is much the more extensively distributed :
is placed either at the angles or margin of the cells, or on
some other part, usually of their anterior aspect, but some-
times on the posterior: instances of the latter are presented
in Caberea nuda, where the vibracular organs, so characteristic
of the other species in the same genus, are replaced by what
may be termed avicularia, though, in fact, they should more
properly be referred to the vibracular type, inasmuch as
the radical tubes enter their bases. The genus Retepora, also
offers an instance of the posterior position of true avicularia ;
but, with these exceptions, I am not acquainted with any
other in which the avicudaria are not on the sides or front of
the body, as indeed, if our surmises with respect to their func-
tion be well founded, might be expected.
32 Busk on Avicularia.
Of angular imbedded avicularia, the numerous species
of the genus Catenicella afford examples. This organ, in
fact, in that genus, often furnishing very satisfactory specific
characters. In some, as C. plagiostoma, it is of gigantic size,
in others very minute, and in one it seems to be aborted, being
replaced by channelled processes, C. carinata. In several
other species it is in some cells replaced by long ascending
cornua or hollow spines, as in C. cornuta and C. taurina.
The genera Menipea, Canda, Scrupocellaria, and Cellularia,
are respectively distinguished by the presence or absence of
avicularian and vibracular processes. ‘The former are always
of the sessile kind, either immersed, and at the superior and
outer angle of the cell, or projecting and placed on the front
of the cell, below the level of the aperture. In the genus
Menipea, there is an angular, superior, imbedded avicularium
in many of the cells, and a projecting sessile organ on
the front of the cell below the aperture, and no vibracula.
The British species, Menipea ternata, affords an instance ;
the other species similarly characterized, are—M. cirrata,
M. fuegensis, M. triseriata, M. ornata, M. patagonica, and
M. multiseriata. The genus Canda, differs from Scrupocel-
laria, mainly in the want of any avicularian process at
the superior and outer angle; but the cells sometimes have a
sessile avicularium in front, below the aperture. This is
particularly the case with Canda arachnoidea, in which the
avicularia appear to occupy an unusual position: they do not
seem to be seated on the fronts of the cells themselves, but to
form a series affixed to the median septum between the two
rows of cells ; and, what is very curious with regard to them
in this species, they are apparently developed long after the
completion of the cells, seeing that they are totally wanting
in the upper and younger portions of the branches of
the polyzoary, and gradually increase in size towards the
inferior portion. In Scrupocellaria, we arrive at the full
development of these accessory organs; the species in this
genus being all distinguished by their being furnished with
both avicularia and vibracula. Of the former, one is always
imbedded in the superior and outer angle, as in Scrupocellaria
serupea, S. scruposa, and S. Macandrei ; whilst in others, such
as §. ferox, and S. cervicornis, there are superadded to these,
sessile avicularia on the front of the cell below the aperture,
in the former species, of colossal dimensions. The genus
Cellularia, again, is distinguished by the entire absence
of both avicularia and vibracula. The British form Cellularia
Peachit, affords an instance.
The genus Caberea, except in the single species above re-
Busk on Avieularia. 33
ferred to, and which might, perhaps, on that account, almost be
regarded as the type of a separate genus, is distinguished, and
very remarkably so, by the extraordinary size and curious
arrangement of the vibracula on the back of the branches,
which thence derive a very close resemblance to an ear of barley.
It is in this genus that the vibracular organ acquires its ex-
treme development. A British example is afforded in Caberea
Boryi, a not uncommon denizen of the Channel coasts. In
the genus Emma, we have afforded an instance, in which the
position of the organ may be used in the generic character.
In the species belonging to this genus, the sessile, lateral
avicularium is situated on a level below the aperture. £. ¢.,
Emma erystallina and E. tricellata.
The peculiar disposition and form of the avicularia, in
NNotamia, have been sufficiently adverted to in this and my
previous communication to the Society.
It would require too much of your time and too much
space to enter very particularly into all the instances in which
I have found the form, position, and existence of ayicularia
and yibracular processes useful in the classification of species.
The above remarks, hasty as they are, will serve to give
an idea of the extent to which they may be so employed ;
and I would only observe, in addition, that a similar atten-
tion to these organs will be found indispensably requisite for
the due appreciation of specific and even generic distinctions,
in the difficult and hitherto much confused families of the
Flustrade, Membraniporide, and especially of the Celleporide,
Escharade, and Selenariade. In Lepralia, particularly, in
which genus I have placed nearly 60 species, I have found the
use of these organs of the utmost importance, and easily avail-
able. In fact without them it would have been a most difficult
task to marshal into due order such an irregular and mutinous
host. For the mode in which I have so employed this
character, I must refer you to my ‘ Catalogue of Marine
Polyzoa, just published by the British Museum, and will
conclude by saying, that the names of the Polyzoa here em-
ployed are those by which they are distinguished in that
work, in which the appropriate synonyms will be found.
34 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
On the Minute Structure of a peculiar CompustiBLe Mine-
RAL, from the Coal Measures of TorBANE-HILL, near Batu-
GATE, LintirHGowsHiRE, known in Commerce as BoGHEAD
Cannet Coat. By Joun Quexerr, Professor of Histology
to the Royal College of Surgeons of England. (Read
Noy. 23 and Dec. 21, 1853.)
Tue substance in question has lately excited the greatest
interest in the scientific world; and a trial, second to few in
importance, has recently taken place in Edinburgh, haying
for its object the determination whether the Torbane-hill
mineral should be called a coal or not, and whether it should
be included in the missive of agreement for a lease, and let as
coal. Those of my hearers who may wish for a particular
account of the matter in dispute, and a statement of the facts
brought forward, both by the pursuer and defender, or, with us
in England, plaintiff and defendant, | would beg to refer to
Mr. A. W. Lyell’s Report of the trial, published by Messrs.
Bell and Bradfute of Edinburgh.
Upon this trial no less than seventy-eight witnesses were
examined—thirty-three for the plaintiff, and forty-five for the
defendant. They might be classified as geologists, mineralo-
gists, chemists, microscopists, and practical engineers, such as
gas managers, miners, &c.
With four‘of these classes of scientific witnesses I have no
immediate concern, and will, therefore, leave them to settle
their own differences ; but not so with the microscopists, with
many of whom my opinions are entirely at variance.
In order that you may all fairly understand the nature of this
question, as far as the microscopical observers are concerned,
I will, in the first place, give you a detailed account of the
minute structure of the Mineral itself. Secondly, I will givea
brief description of the minute structure of Coal. Thirdly, I
will lay before you the whole of the evidence given by the
microscopists on the part of the pursuer as well as the defender;
and lastly, make a few remarks upon the conflicting testimony
of some of the witnesses.
I wish that the matter had fallen into abler hands than
mine; but having been intimately acquainted with the
mineral in dispute for some time past, and as two of the oldest
members of this society, Mr. Bowerbank and myself, have
had their competency called in question, and have been repre-
sented by the Judge as no botanists, and, therefore, “are not,
as I understand, conversant or skilful in fossil plants,” and the
society itself not having escaped his ridicule, the jury being
from the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 39
informed that the Microscopical Society of London is “a
learned body, who make it their object to pry into all things,”
I cannot be silent; but I would have you keep in mind that
my sole motive in now appearing before you, is, the cause
of truth, and in this cause I come forward fearlessly, but
honestly, to state that the Torbane-hill mineral is not, micro-
scopically speaking, a Coal ; that it is not like any of the combus-
tible substances used in this country as Coal ; and that, althouyh
possessing some of the properties of Coal, it is, notwithstanding,
a mineral sui generis, having a basis of clay which is strongly
impregnated with a peculiar combustible principle, and that when
plants are found in it, they are accidental, and have no more been
concerned in the formation of the mineral than has a fossil bone
in that of the rock in which it may be imbedded.
1. External characters of the Mineral.—Of these you will
have a good general idea from the specimens on the table before
you. It frequently occurs in seams of some considerable
thickness, and always in the neighbourhood of coal, some-
times in immediate contiguity with it, but at other times,
according to Mr. Ansted, separated from it by a layer of fire-
clay. The colour is generally a dark brown or black, without
lustre, but varies according to its position in the seam;
its specific gravity is 1,2, or 1,%;, water being as 1. When
scratched with a knife it exhibits a brown streak, in which
particular it is said to differ from all the known coals with one
or two exceptions. It is tough and not so brittle, but that
very thin sections may be made of it, and when struck with a
hammer, it emits a dull sound; the remains of plants, espe-
cially Stigmarie, are of constant occurrence, and can be dis-
tinguished by the naked eye without difficulty.
2. Characters exhibited under the Microscope-—When a
small chipping or fragment, about half an inch square, is
examined as an opaque object under a power of 40 or 50
diameters, it will be found to consist of masses of a yellow
material, some being of irregular figure, others more or less
rounded, imbedded in a granular matrix, varying in colour
from a yellowish-brown, almost to black. The whole of the
mineral appears to be composed of granules of various sizes,
and although the part which has been termed the matrix is
black, this also will become brown if the surface be scraped.
The scraping can readily be done under the microscope whilst
the fragment is being inspected ; and, curiously enough, both
the surface of the mineral, and the minute particles scraped
off, assume a light-brown colour. Portions of plants imbedded
in the mineral can, by the process of scraping, be readily
distinguished from the impressions of plants ; the former are
36 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
always black and do not alter in colour, whereas the latter
become brown, the same as other parts of the mineral.
3. Characters exhibited by sections under the Microscope.—
There appear to be two principal varieties of this mineral,
one of a yellowish-brown colour, the other nearly black, these
differences, however, are chiefly dependent upon the position
the particular fragment selected for section occupied in the
block. When the first variety is reduced sufficiently thin to
be transparent, which can be done without much difficulty, it
will be seen to consist of a tolerably uniform, yellow mass,
whilst the darker variety is either of a rich brown, or of a
pale-yellow colour, minutely spotted with black granules.
When the first or yellow variety is examined with a power of
50 or 100 diameters, it exhibits an appearance of being made
up of a mass of transparent rounded particles or spherules of
a rich yellow or amber colour, varying in size from the 15 5th
to the }s5th of an inch (as shown in Plate IIL, fig. 1), whilst
the darker variety (fig. 2) is composed of two essential ele-
ments, one in the form of the transparent rounded particles,
the other minutely granular, but black and opaque, and
occupying the spaces between the yellow particles. In the
first variety of this mineral, or that which is of a yellowish-
brown colour in section, the yellow particles above alluded
to are so very abundant, that they appear almost to make up
the entire mass, whilst the dark granular element is small in
quantity. In the second, or dark variety, the strictly granular
opaque element is much more abundant; it sometimes occurs
in large patches, having none of the yellow particles with it,
but more frequently it is found in'the form of coating to
the particles themselves. When the yellow particles are of
large size, they always exhibit more or less of a radiated
structure internally: this appearance, which is well represented
in figs. 1 and 2, very much resembles that of a radiated frac-
ture, or a species of crystallization. I shall now, for the sake
of distinction, call all these yellow particles, or spherules, the
bitumenoid or combustible portion of the substance, and the
dark, granular part, I shall consider as the strictly mineral, or
earthy ingredient.
In some specimens there is a tolerable regularity in the size
of the yellow particles, and in the disposition of the black
mineral ingredient around them, so much so that an unprac-
tised eye might, at first sight, consider its structure to be cel-
lular: that such mistakes “ee actually been made you will
very soon have an opportunity of learning.
Having told you what is the usual stractare of the substance
in question, I must beg you to understand that it matters little
from the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 37
in what direction the sections are taken; whether cut verti-
cally, horizontally, or obliquely, there is no perceptible
difference in the structure, and I say it without fear of con-
tradiction, that no one, however skilled in microscopical
observation could, from the inspection of a single specimen,
state the direction in which the section had been made. Such
is not the case with coal, as will hereafter be shown; a single
inspection is sufficient to enable a practised microscopist to
determine the actual direction of the section, whether trans-
verse or longitudinal.
Examination of portions of the Mineral having Plants
imbedded in their substance.—1 have already stated that
plants and the impressions of plants are not uncommon in this
mineral ; of these | have made numerous sections and chip-
pings, and most instructive they all are. The plants appear to
be principally Stigmarie, and exhibit more or less of the three
tissues known to botanists as the cellular, the woody, and the
vascular ; and should one or more of these be present in any
section, the minutest fragment even of a cell or vessel can be
readily recognised by a practised observer; they, as it were,
stand out boldly from the mineral matter in which they are
imbedded, and (as shown in figs. 3 and 4) can be distinguished
in all cases by their rich brown colour; but such plants [ not
only consider as extraneous and not forming the bulk of the
mineral, but such plants my investigations lead me to conclude
rarely if ever form coal; at all events no coal that [ have yet
examined has ever exhibited the least trace of being made up
of such plants as are so commonly seen imbedded in this
mineral. Even the coal lying upon this mineral, and running
through it in every possible direction, is composed principally
of woody tissue, and not of plants such as these.
Examination of sections of the Mineral having Coal in juxta-
position.—The first specimen of this kind which I had the
opportunity of examining was brought by Mr. Bowerbank
himself from one of the Torbane-hill pits. From this speci-
men several sections were taken; one of them slightly mag-
nified, is represented in Plate V., fig. 1. I regret I cannot
show you the specimen itself, it being lodged in the Court of
Session, in Edinburgh ; but [ have been favoured with a some-
what similar one through the kindness of Mr. Gratton. As the
block lay in the pit, the coal was situated below the mineral
in the position I now hold it, and you will readily be able to
distinguish the one from the other by the naked eye; but
when viewed with a power of at least 50 diameters (as
shown in Plate III., fig. 5), the smallest fragment of the coal
that may happen to be mixed up with the mineral may be
38 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
readily traced; even a part so minute as a single woody fibre
can easily be recognised.
In some specimens, the line of demarcation between the
coal and the mineral is not very decided, owing to the coal
and the plants found in connexion with it being so intimately
blended ; in all such cases recourse should be had to the
streak, as the best guide to distinguish them. In every part
of the block containing coal and coal plants, the streak is
black ; but in the smallest portions of the mineral it is brown.
It is s curious fact, however, that in the specimen now before
you, three kinds af structure are visible to the naked eye:
Ist, true coal ; 2nd, a mixture of coal with a few coal plants,
principally Stigmarie : 3rd, the mineral. When sections are
made through the block in two directions at right angles to
each other, the coal and the mixture of coal and plants will
exhibit a structure corresponding with longitudinal and trans-
verse sections of wood, but the mineral is the same in both
sections. The yellow particles occupy all the interstices in the
coal, and vary in shape, according to the spaces they have to
fill (as shown in fig. 5); but whether they be elongated or of
circular figure, more or less of the radiated structure is present
in every particle. In such sections the vegetable tissues may
be distinguished from the earthy ingredient by their rich
brown colour.
Examination of the Powder.—When the Torbane-hill mineral
is reduced to powder, and examined either in water or in
Canada balsam, the combustible and incombustible portions
can be well seen; the one occurring in the form of the yellow
or amber coloured particles before noticed, and constituting
full two-thirds of the mass (as shown in Plate IIT., fig. 6),
whilst the remainder is made up of minute opaque granules,
having occasionally amongst them some which are quite
transparent, and probably Shipegee
Characters of the so-called Coke and of the Ash.—'Three por-
tions of the coke of the Torbane-hill mineral, each about
4 inches square, obtained from a gas-retort by Mr. Gratton,
were of a greyish colour, and when scraped became perfectly
black. ‘The remains of plants were very visible throughout
the substance of each, and were even more distinctly seen in
the specimens of coke than in the mineral itself before being
subjected to heat, for every part, however minute, had
assumed a silvery appearance. When a flat piece of the coke,
about half an inch square, is examined as an opaque object
under a power of 50 or 100 diameters, it presents a peculiar
sponge-like structure ; and when contrasted with a portion of
the mineral, it will be noticed that all the yellow particles
from the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 39
have disappeared, and a pitted appearance is produced, the
pits being nothing more than the cavities in which the yellow
particles were lodged, and the walls of the pits being the
granular earthy ingredient which at one time surrounded the
yellow particles. When small fragments of the coke are
scraped off and subjected to a power of 250 diameters, none
of the yellow combustible principle is present, the entire
bulk being made up of dark granular masses. If the mineral
be burnt in anopen fire, the ash will be nearly white; and
when examined microscopically, no trace of the yellow com-
bustible matter will be seen, and the granules (as shown in
fig. 7). will be very minute, and of a light colour. These
appearances will be constant, if care be taken to select a part
of the mineral in which no traces of plants are visible to the
naked eye; but if portions of plants be present, they will be
readily recognised by their woody and vascular tissues. The
principal distinction, therefore, between the coke of the gas-
works and the ash is, that in the former the granules are
larger and blacker than they are in the latter.
From these and numerous other observations, I con-
clude that the mineral in question is a clayey substance, im-
pregnated with a combustible material occurring in the form
of rounded particles of a rich yellow or amber colour, but
whether these particles be bituminous or not the chemists
must decide.
What I have already stated refers exclusively to the
Torbane-hill mineral, and no mention has yet been made of
the structure of coal. Under this head I could enter into a
detailed account of most of the well-known varieties of British
coal, my knowledge of which has been principally derived
from a careful investigation of sections made by myself and
by my friend Dr. James Adams, of Glasgow; and I am
happy in having this opportunity of bearing testimony to
the correctness of the observations of Dr. Adams, upon which
his opinions had been formed prior to my having the pleasure
of his acquaintance. Were I now to describe these, I fear
you would be kept here many hours; but it is the intention
of Dr. Adams and myself, at no very distant period, to read a
paper on the minute structure of the principal kinds of British
coal, before the Geological Society, as we deem that the most
fitting place for such a subject. For our present purpose,
therefore, it will be merely necessary for me to give, in as con-
cise a manner as possible, the results of the investigations of
Dr. Adams and myself on this point; but I would have you
understand that although I give youa general description of the
structure of coal, | have with me the specimens from which
you will be enabled to judge for yourselves whether my state-
40 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
ments be correct. I am fully aware that the prevalent opinion
with geologists and botanists is, that coal is made up of fossilized
vegetable matter, and that this vegetable matter may consist of
stigmaria, ferns, mosses, &c.; in short, of a great variety of
vegetable substances. My investigations, however, lead me
to believe that the basis of coal is essentially a peculiar kind
of wood, and that when ferns, stigmariz, lepidodendra, and
other plants occur in coal or its neighbourhood, they should
be considered foreign to the coal, as these plants, before
noticed, are to the Torbane-hill mineral. However contrary
this may be to our preconceived notions, yet all the sections
on the table before you, on a careful examination by an unpre-
judiced observer, can lead to no other conclusion. I believe
that there are in this room at the present time more sections
of coal than any private individual has ever yet produced
before a scientific assembly, and it is from these specimens,
and from the study of these alone, that I am warranted in
making this assertion. The botanist will remember that most
of the plants generally considered as forming coal, are such
as on section will exhibit more or less of the cellular, woody,
and vascular tissue: now it is a remarkable fact, that most
of the plants visible to the naked eye in the Torbane-hill
mineral, as well as those lying in the strata above and below
coal in general, are those which may contain spiral or other
vessels; but, judging from all the sections of coal now before
you, as well as chippings of others too numerous to mention,
I am forced to the conclusion that such plants rarely if ever
form coal, the basis of coal being essentially wood, of what
kind, however, I will not at the present stage of the inquiry
venture to mention, but I will state thus far, that it approaches
more nearly to that of the Conifer than any other wood ;
because in the Conifer, as we know them in this country,
there are few if any vessels or ducts in the woody part
of the trunk, but occasionally cellular tissue in what are called
the turpentine vessels, the entire bulk being woody fibre.
Such is the case in coal. In all the sections that I have
examined of undoubted coal, I have as yet found no trace of
a spiral vessel or a dotted duct, but in one or two instances
where the woody structure has been very evident, as shown in
Plate V., fig. 3, the fibres were evidently dotted.
External Appearances of Coal.—These must be so well
known to most of you, that I need not dwell further upon
them than to particularise one or two kinds which approach
nearest to the Torbane-hill mineral in general appearance.
The most remarkable of these is from Methil, in Fifeshire,
and known as the Brown Methil. So peculiar is it, that
when scratched with a knife, the streak is brownish-black
from the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 41
in colour, somewhat resembling that of the mineral. There
is also another variety of coal, termed the Black Methil, but
in this the streak is black, as in all other coals. Yet the
microscopic characters of both these varieties are very similar,
and differ in no respect from coals generally. A curious fact,
however, I learnt from the chemists in Edinburgh, that the
composition of the Brown Methil came nearer to that of the
Torbane-hill mineral than any of the other known coals did ;
a fact which is borne out by the similarity in their external
appearance.
Examination of Coal by the Microscope-—If a small cubical
block of any kind of coal be examined under a power of
50 diameters, four of its six sides will exhibit more or less of
a fibrous structure, precisely like that of wood ; the other two
sides, if perfectly flat, will appear bright and polished, and
show very little structure: these correspond to the transverse
sections of wood. Treat the Torbane-hill mineral in the same
way, and how very different are the results! Nearly the
same structure will be found on all its sides, but in none is
there the least trace of a fibrous arrangement.
Examination of Sections of Coal by the Microscope-—lf a
section of any well-known coal, cannel or otherwise, be
reduced sufficiently thin to be transparent, a work sometimes
of considerable labour and difficulty, it will be found to ex-
hibit one of two structures, according to the direction in which
the section has been made. These, for the sake of distinction,
may be called the cellular and the fibrous; the first corre-
sponding with a horizontal section, the second with a
vertical section, of wood. If it so happen that a section
taken at random from any specimen of coal should exhibit one
of these structures above named, by cutting at right angles,
the other will be found. Thus, for instance, if the first section
should correspond to a horizontal section of wood, the cut at
right angles to it will correspond with the vertical one ; and,
of course, if the section be an oblique one, an intermediate
structure would be observed. This remarkable fact is con-
stant in all the coals I have examined, and a knowledge of it
enables the observer to tell at once whether any section taken
at random was a horizontal or a vertical one. How strangely
different this from the Torbane-hill mineral! Cut that mineral
in any way you please, and there will be little or no difference
in appearance. The structure of the transverse sections of coal
is so very peculiar and so characteristic, that | must briefly
point out the means it affords of distinguishing coal from any
other modification of vegetable tissue. The peculiarity con-
sists in this,—that, in the midst of a black opaque ground,
VOL, II. e
42 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
numerous brown transparent rings, each having a black dot
in the centre, are interspersed ; they appear like transverse
sections of thick-walled cells or of woody fibres. In some
coals they occur in close proximity to each other, as in woods
generally: in other cases they are more or less separated,
either by the black material before alluded to, or by a network
of rather smaller rings, in which the central dot is absent.
There are many coals, especially some of the common domes-
tic kinds, in which it is difficult to recognise this structure in
every part of the section ; in these coals a rich brown struc-
tureless material—bituminous or not I cannot say—seems to
be in excess, and so obscures the characteristic appearances of
the rings. In longitudinal sections the woody fibres are
generally well seen, and a tendency to split in the direction
of their length (as shown in Plate V., fig. 5), may always be
observed. Amongst the fibres may be noticed certain elon-
gated cells, of a rich brown colour, having a dark line running
down through the centre: these are constant in all coals, and
when divided transversely, appear as the rings before noticed.
Their size is tolerably uniform in many coals (as shown in
Plate V., fig. 2). Mr. Witham was acquainted with the
differences between a longitudinal and a transverse section of
coal, as may be seen on referring to the 2nd edition of his
work on the “ Fossil Vegetables of the Carboniferous and
Oolitic Deposits ;” both the rings and the elongated cells are
well figured, and his remarks on the value of investigating the
microscopic structure of coal, are very excellent. The absence
of vascular tissue in the numerous sections of coal, made both
by Dr. Adams and myself, would lead to the supposition that
the wood of which it is composed must approach very near to
that of the Coniferz.
Examination of the Powder of Coal.—When coal is reduced
to a fine powder, and examined either in water or in Canada
balsam, it will be found to consist principally of short opaque
cylinders or fibres, occurring singly or in bundles, and of
angular dark-brown plates of various sizes, probably composed
of bituminous matter (as shown in Plate V., fig. 7); the
remainder of the mass is made up of minute transparent
particles of silica, with an occasional mixture of fragments
of cells and fibres. Many blocks of coal have a fine dull
black powder on two of their outer surfaces, which will make
the fingers very black: this I call the charcoal layer, and in
it will be found fragments of woody tissue of cells, and even
of vessels. My investigations lead me to believe that this
layer is derived from plants which existed at the same time
as the coal-wood, but were not capable of being converted
from the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 45
into true coal, but having been subjected to a great heat,
their remains are left as a species of charcoal. Some speci-
mens of the Torbane-hill coal have a large amount of this
charcoal upon their upper and under surfaces, and in it, vessels
of various kinds will occasionally be found, although such
vessels do not occur in the solid coal itself.
Examination of the Ash of Coal—Vhe brown ash of coal,
with the exception of particles, probably of silica, is almost
wholly composed of vegetable remains, some of which pro-
perly belong to the coal itself, whilst others are derived from
extraneous plants which have been mixed up with it. Every
kind of tissue which has been described as proper to the coal
may be met with in the ash, when not too much burnt. The
remains of woody fibres and cells are the most common con-
stituents, but flat, very opaque, irregular masses, such as are
shown in Plate V., fig. 4, and which evidently correspond to
portions of transverse sections of wood, are frequently found.
Portions of siliceous cuticle, probably of grasses, as shown
in fig. 6, from a drawing by Dr. Adams, are far from being
uncommon. In short, when the indications of the woody
structure of coal are very faint in sections, they are well ex-
emplified in the ash. Sections of Welsh Anthracite (which
I believe to be a fossil coke) are most difficult to obtain, and
when made, afford very unsatisfactory evidence of vegetable
structure: when, however, the ash is examined, the presence
of woody tissue is unquestionable.
The Torbane-hill mineral has been most carefully examined
by my friend Dr. Adams, and as his investigations were car-
ried on independently of mine, it will be satisfactory that you
should be made acquainted with the conclusions he has ar-
rived at after a laborious series of examinations. ‘They are as
follow :—
“¢ The most interesting example which could be adduced, illustrative of
the differences in essential characters, as demonstrated by the microscope,
between substances supposed by commercial men to be identical, is found
in the Torbanehill mineral, known also by the name of Boghead coal. In
the lawsuit previously alluded to, much of the scientific evidence regard-
ing this mineral was of a very conflicting character, so much so that the
court virtually set aside the scientific evidence, and decided on the legal
merits of the commercial bargain.
‘The importance of the interests involved, and the high character of
the witnesses examined, have made this trial very celebrated; and it is
from an excusable desire that the grounds of the opinion I expressed at
the trial should be understood, that I now seek to place them on record.
I will, however, confine my remarks to a very short summary of my
observations made upon the Torbanehill mineral, leaving a fuller detail
with my friend, Professor Quekett, who gave joint evidence with me, and
with whom I have discussed and investigated the whole subject of my
e2
44 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
present communication with a most pleasing and perfect accordance of
observation and opinion.
“ The following are the principal results :—
“], A very thin section of the Torbanehill mineral, when viewed by
transmitted light, has a pale-yellow colour, is semi-transparent, and, with
the exception of very slight variations in the depth of the colour, probably
dependent on the varying thickness of the section, it appears to be a
uniform homogeneous mass. The same appearance is constantly presented
notwithstanding that the sections are taken in various directions. While
this is the usual appearance of what may be termed the average specimens,
viz., of portions taken from the centre of the block (or seam), yet, in
sections taken from near the outside, or lower portion of the seam, I find
a quantity of small opaque particles (evidently earthy matter) in the form
of a fine powder, scattered through the yellow-coloured medium forming
the mineral. In such specimens the transparent yellow substance forms
irregular rounded granules, and the opaque powder is either sparingly
diffused over, or forms an outline or partition, more or less perfect, around
the exterior of the yellow granules. These granules vary much in size,
being as small as 1-4000th of an inch, and of every intermediate size
from that up to 1-200th of an inch in diameter.
‘¢ Tn sections taken from the outside, as above described, I have observed
oceasional patches of opaque material of every irregular form, and which
I could not liken to any other substance, unless I spoke of them simply
as specks of dirt. In the same sections I have also found stalks of plants
and fragments of wood. These opaque patches and vegetable fragments
are always distinetly isolated ; that is, they do not in any way resemble
or form part of the substance of the mineral, otherwise than by being
involved or contained in it, and their presence, therefore, can only be
considered accidental.
“II. When reduced to a fine powder, and examined under water, all
the particles of the mineral have a clear, and generally a sharp outline,
are of an irregularly rounded form, and may be described as of a uniform
granular appearance. About 7-10ths of the granules are very translucent,
and of a light amber or yellow colour. About 2-10ths of the particles
(also translucent) partake more of a flat, angular shape, and are quite
colourless, probably consisting of siliceous matter. The remainder of the
powder consists of dark semi-opaque particles.
‘“< In specimens of powder taken from an outside portion of the mineral,
there is observed a larger proportion of the semi-opaque particles, together
with the occasional appearance of vegetable stalks, rough fibrous frag-
ments, and delicate fibrils of microscopic plants. With these special
exceptions, the powder gives no trace whatever of organic structure.
“ IIT. The ash of the mineral, when examined under water, presents a
considerable quantity of the colourless particles already described, lying at
the bottom of the fluid, while a filmy particle of transparent particles floats
on the surface. No trace whatever of organic structure is here observed.
** Polarised light does not in any way affect the appearances of the
mineral.
I have, in consequence of these investigations, a firm conviction of the
non-identity of the Torbanehill mineral with coal, setting aside those
differences which may be found to exist under mineralogical, geological, or
chemical investigation. I cannot conceive how the evidence of Amorphisin
in the one case, and of intimate vegetable composition and of regular
structure in the other, can be explained away, or any other view than
that of non-identity of physical structure. In coal we find a well-
characterized organization, or regular arrangement of its component parts
from the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 45
so distinctly peculiar, that I should question the competency, at least, of
any party who, after comparing the microscopic appearances of the two
substances in question, could hint at a resemblance. The Torbanehill
mineral, on the other hand, is as thoroughly devoid of organic structure,
or of any rezular arrangement of its compouent parts, as is a mass of
jelly or a conglomerate of masons’ mortar.”
I will now, in the third place, proceed to read the evidence
given by the witnesses for the pursuer and the defender.
Professor QuEKET?T.—Hxramined by Mr. MACFARLANE.
You are one of the Professors in the Royal College of Surgeons in
London ?—Yes.
What chair do you occupy ?—The chair of Histology.
What is the object of that study?—An examination of the minute
tissues or structure of plants and animals.
I believe you have devoted a great deal of study and attention to that
subject ?—Yes, for the last twenty years.
You have published a catalogue of the preparations in the College of
Surgeons of London, descriptive of the various tissues ?—Yes.
And you have yourself a very extensive collection ?—Yes, I believe the
largest in Europe.
You conduct your investigations with the aid of the microscope ?—Yes.
And have you made careful investigation into the structure of the
various coals, as well as other minerals >—Yes.
Have you in this way had occasion to examine the most of the known
coals in England and Wales ?—Yes, about seventy varieties.
Have you also examined varieties of Scotch coal ?—Yes.
What have you discovered to be the tissue of coals ?-—They show us a
woody tissue.
Have you found structure of that description in all the varieties to
which you have referred ?—AlIl the varieties of coal.
More or less distinct, I suppose ?—Yes.
Now, have you examined the Torbanehill mineral ?—Yes, in every
possible way microscopically.
Were specimens of the mineral delivered to you?—Yes, some time ago.
By whom ?—By Mr. William Forbes and a Mr. Rettie. I have the
specimens here.
Now, did you subject those specimens to a very careful examination ?—
Yes, very careful.
You tried them in every possible way, and repeatedly ?—Yes, and
repeatedly. g
Did you make a great many sections out of them ?—Yes, an immense
number.
ad as to give you every possible opportunity in tracing their structure ?
—Yes.
What result did you come to?—That the Torbanehill mineral is dif-
ferent from anything that I ever saw in my life before.
Did you discover any trace of organic structure ?—Yes, when plants are
accidentally mixed with it.
You were enabled to ascertain when it was so ?— Yes.
Perfectly ?—Perfectly.
But in the substance itself ?—No structure—that is, what the micro-
scopists would term an organic structure.
Is it different in that respect from all the varieties of coal you have
examined ?—Decidedly so.
46 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
Did you get illustrations P—Yes, I have illustrations. (Produces same.)
I think you will come to a better understanding of the thing from those
illustrations than from the specimens.
Explain what that is (referring to illustration shown to the jury).—This
is a section of the Torbanehill mineral, or rather a granular section, and in
it you will observe some yellow matter that burns—whether bituminous or
resinous you must go to the chemists for. ‘The black part is the strictly
mineral part.
What is the mineral matter to which you refer ?—It is the dark granular
matter.
Lord-President.—I understand that these illustrations show the bitumen
and the mineral at different places ?—Yes, my Lord.
Mr. Macfarlane.—Now, then, do the illustrations of your coal investi-
gations exhibit a different appearance ?—Decidedly.
Now, you say the mineral substance there is granular, is it so in the
coal ?—Not at all, except when visible to the naked eye. In coal, you
can see mineral structure by the naked eye, but to that I do not allude ;
but under the microscope you can tell that is a totally distinct thing from
the coal itself. What I mean is, that in specimens of coal you can often
see crystallized matter with the naked eye.
Is that extraneous ?P—I would say so.
But when subjected to the microscope ?—It exhibits a totally different
structure. It is not granular; it depends entirely on which way the
specimen of coal is cut. If cut in one direction you will either see a
cellular or fibrous appearance.
Indicative of what ?— Woody tissue.
You have, I suppose, made sections in all the specimens of the Torbane-
hill mineral—in all the various ways you have made sections of the coal ?
—Yes.
And you have found in all the different sections a decided difference,
showing them in your mind to be different, substances P-—Certainly.
Then, judging from all your experience and investigation, do you con-
sider this 'Torbanehill mineral to be a description of coal or not ?—Certainly
not.
Have you any illustrations of coal there >—Yes, I have a most remark-
able illustration—perhaps the jury will understand better by this than
anything else. I have here a section of the mineral and coal in juxta-
position; this has been cut by Mr. Bryson, lapidary, and you will be
enabled to see whether coal or mineral. The woody section is shown by
the dark colour, the mineral by the other.
Are those illustrations of longitudinal, or transverse sections, or what
sections >—That of coal is longitudinal, and of the mineral it is supposed
to be the same, because they are in juxtaposition.
Suppose a transverse section—what differenceP—In the Torbanehill
mineral a section at right angles would present precisely the same cha-
racter, but the coal would present another character, that character being
shown in this lower drawing (exhibiting it to the jury). You will notice
that the coal runs through that mineral. You can trace it by its minute
tissue.
You examined some of the Scotch varieties of coal?—Yes, many
varieties.
Did you examine the Methil?—Yes, of two kinds, I believe known by -
the names of the brown and the black.
Did you discover vegetable structure there ?— Yes.
Decidedly in both ?—Decidedly in both.
And in that respect different from this Torbanehill mineral ?—Certainly.
i et pt
from the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 47
You mentioned at one time that you had observed the presence, in some
of those coal specimens, of fossil plants ?—Certainly.
Could you see them with the naked eye ?—Yes, in those specimens of
the Torbanehill.
Have you seen them in coal in the same way ?—Yes, but I consider
them extraneous or isolated examples.
Cross-examined by Mr. Neaves.—Is the structure of coal uniform in
general?—It is so tar uniform that the various transverse sections are
uniform, and so are longitudinal.
Equally visible in all places of the coal p—Yes, in all places, except, as 1
have stated before, where you have mineral that is foreign to the coal.
ee mineral matter do you allude to?—The chemists must decide
that.
You only speak to appearances ?—Yes.
And the same formation in all?—Yes; the plants differ; I believe there
are two kinds of plants or tissue that essentially form coal.
But they present the same appearance ?—Yes, but those plants are not
traceable in the same specimens of coal]. ‘That in the neighbourhood of
Glasgow may be different from the coal found in the neighbourhood of
Edinburgh.
Can you distinguish the one plant from the other ?—Yes, in the longi-
tudinal section.
And you never found any portion of any coal without exhibiting the
same permanent structure P—Certainly not.
Where did you get that specimen you showed us of the two coals
together ?—That was taken by Mr. Bowerbank from the mine two or
three days ago, and the drawing was taken from a magnified representation
of one of the sections.
Lord President.—Let us take down what those specimens are if they
are to go in, but I thought they were to be taken away by the witness.
Dean of Faculty.—No. 25 represents that yellow matter of which the
witness spoke ; No. 26 is the drawing of that highly-magnified section ;
Nos, 28 and 29 are the specimen and the drawing; and No. 27 is the
appearance presented by the two different sections of coal itself, the one
longitudinal and the other transverse.
Witness.—There is one thing I would wish to state, this—I came here
to speak the truth, and it may be testimony for or against my evidence,
when I say that all that which may be supposed like vegetable structure
in the Torbanehill mineral disappears when the structure is thin.
Dean of Faculty.— When you speak of that which appears as vegetable
structure, you mean those isolated fossil plants?—Yes. 1 would also
allude to the fact that a book was published in this city twenty years ago,
by Mr. Witham, of specimens made by Mr. Nicol; and this was the first
representation of this vegetable structure.
Dr. James Apams.—Lxamined by Mr. MAcFARLANE.
You practise as a medical man in Glasgow ?—I do.
Have you devoted a good deal of time and study to observations by the
microscope ?—I have.
For a considerable time back ?—For many years.
eure you subjected to examination by the microscope various minerals ?
—lI have.
Extensively ?—Extensively.
Varieties of Scotch coal ?—Yes, a great many.
Most of the known varieties ?—-Most of the known varieties,
Have you examined the Torbanehill mineral ?—I have.
48 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
Recently ?—Recently.
And did you subject it to a very careful investigation ?—Very careful.
In various forms p—Yes.
Now, will you tell me what those Nos. of process are, No. 259 to 263,
both inclusive ?—259 represents sections of various specimens of the Tor-
banehill mineral, as seen under the microscope.
From the centre of the same, from the outside or bottom, and also from
the outside of block ?—Yes.
What is the next No. P—260, representing two sections of coal, termed
to me cannel coal—Duke of Hamilton’s cannel coal; the one represents
what I have termed a longitudinal section, and the other a transverse
section, drawn by myself.
The next No.?—Is 261. This represents.a drawing of what was
termed to me Lesmahagow, Ferguson’s cannel coal—two sections drawn
from specimens made by myself; but the drawing made by an artist
named Donald, of Glasgow, under my eye.
And you have no doubt they are correctly done?—No doubt; very
faithfully made.
The next No. ?—262, representing sections of—Ist, what is termed
Jordanhill cannel coal. The one is longitudinal of Jordanhill, the other is
a transverse section of a coal called Cowdenhead, given tome. This one,
2638, which represents three drawings—two transverse and one longi-
tudinal; a transverse section of Jordanhill cannel coal, drawn by a
medical gentleman of the name of Risk, under my eye, a faithful delinea-
tion ; the other is a drawing of cannel coal procured from the Glasgow
Gas Works, called Knightwood coal; and there is also a longitudinal
drawing of Knightwood. ‘Those three drawings were made under my eye
by Mr. Risk.
Did you subject the powder of the Torbanehill mineral to the micro-
scope ?—I did.
Having applied a little water ?—Yes.
What did you discover to be the particles ?—Those particles have a
clear granular shape, they are of an irregular rounded form, and I say
may be described as exhibiting an uniform granular appearance.
Any further description ?—About 7 of those granules are very translu-
cent, and of a light-amber colour. About %, also translucent, partake
more of a flat or angular shape in their outline, and are quite colourless ;
and there are a few particles of a dark or semi-opaque matter.
Now have you examined coal specimens in the same way ?—I have.
What were the results ?—They differed very materially ; the particles
of cannel coal which I took as being the more compact coal, are found of
various sizes, and in form generally flat, angular, or oblong, with fibrous
character; the edges generally rough and as darkly opaque as in the
centre.
Have you examined the ash of the Torbanehill mineral p—I have.
When you said that the coal particles were of different sizes, were the
particles of Torbanehill mineral of various or the same size?—When I
examined them under a high power I found the Torbanehill to be also of
various sizes.
You examined them with the aid of a microscope carefully ?—Yes.
What results?—I found it very difficult to describe the appearance,
because it seemed to consist of a film or congeries of structureless particles,
I got nothing tangible almost to lay hold of. I consider most of those
consisted of the colourless particles which I have mentioned as having been
found in the powder, viz., the flat, angular, and perfectly transparent
particles.
from the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 49
I understand, Doctor, when you say perfectly structureless, that there
was no organization ?—No organization ; they have form.
No trace of vegetable origin ?—None.
Nor the coal ash?—In the coal ash examined under water, I found
abundant remains of vegetable structure, examined in the same way.
Woody tissues in the coal ?—Yes.
Did you conduct your investigation of the ash of the Torbanehill
mineral and of the coal both in direct and transmitted lights >—By both.
And with the results which you have described ?—Yes.
Were they the best, most approved instruments ?—They were. I have
used various instruments of all kinds, but I have used the best and most
recent construction.
What were those ?—Those were prepared by two of the most eminent
London opticians, Mr. Ross and the firm of Smith and Beck.
What conclusion do you arrive at in regard to this Torbanehill mineral,
_ keeping in view your investigation of the sections, of the powder, and of
the ash ?— That the two substances are totally dissimilar.
That the Torbanehill is a different substance from any coal with
which you are acquainted >—Yes.
Cross-ecamined by Mr. Neaves.—Are you in practice in Glasgow as a
physician P—I am.
Have you marked the magnifying power of the instruments used on
those specimens ?—I have.
When did you first see this mineral?—I think on 15th January last
year.
Had you never seen it before ?—Never to my knowledge.
You had previously been in the habit of examining coals ?—I had.
And had seen all the caunel coals ?—Not then. I have since examined
them.
What coal had you seen when in the practice of examining before ?—
Chiefly domestic coal.
For many years ?—For several years.
With any particular view >—None.
The body and ash of domestic coal ?—Yes.
You always see the woody structure in the ash ?—Always; I have
never failed.
And in the coal ?—Do you mean the sections ?
Yes—I have never met with a piece of coal that had not those
appearances.
Do you give it a name ?—I call it a fibrous section, from appearing like
a bundle of fibres in one direction. I give it longitudinally, because it
gives me the idea of length, and annular, that is, composed of rings,
when seen in a cross cut with a longitudinal.
But are equally distinct in the same coal always?P—Not equally
distinct.
Not equally distinct in all coals nor in the same coal ?—No, but remain
always distinct in every coal.
Re-examined by Mr. Macfarlane.—Have you been at Torbanehill ?—Yes,
And made specimens ?—Yes.
Did you examine from those specimens ?—Yes.
Fair or average specimens of the mineral ?—I took them just as they
were raised from the pit, and examined them from the centre, outside,
and every way I could possibly conceive.
Your observations have been more recently directed to cannel coal ?—
Yes.
Can you give me the names ?—lI believe I have examined about forty or
50 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
fifty different specimens, as far as I know, but I can give the names o
different coals that I tested.
Just give us a few ?—These were Capeldrae, Wemyss, and Pirniehill,
&e.
Your investigations had been previously chiefly directed to the ordinary
coals ?—Yes.
Is it more difficult to trace the organic structure in the cannel coal than
in the ordinary domestic coal ?—It is.
Perhaps requires more skill and practice ?—Yes, in conducting the
investigation into the cannel coal.
What is the reason of that?—The reason I believe to be, that the
structure is much more compact in the cannel coal, and the section requires
to be made exceedingly thin, and it is very difficult to procure that con-
dition, from the excessive brittleness of the material, and also intense
opacity, and containing particles of hard matter, which frequently tear
out the specimens.
Mr. BowERBANK.—Faxamined by Mr. MACFARLANE.
Mr. Bowerbank, you live in London P—I do.
You have given a good deal of your time and attention to microscopical
observations ?—I have for these twenty-five years past.
You are a fellow of the Royal Society ?—I am.
You were lately president of the Microscopical Society of London -—
I was.
And you have written on the subject, I believe ?—I have.
Have you made a great many examinations, with the aid of the micro-
scope, of mineral substances P—I have.
Of various descriptions of coal ?—I have. For many years, the subject,
simply as a natural-history subject, was much inquired into,
And you have turned your attention to it ?—I have.
And have for several years been taking observations, with the micro-
scope, of coal substances p—Yes.
Have you been at Torbanehill P—I have.
Recently ?—Yes, recently.
And you obtained specimens of the mineral that is working there ?—I
did.
And subjected them to examination ?—I have.
Did you give a specimen last week to Professor Quekett ?—I showed
him a specimen, and he desired to possess it for examination.
And did you give some specimens to Dr. Adams ?—I did.
What has been the result of your examination of coal substances ?—
Every coal which I have examined, either by sections, or by external
characters, or by the examination of the ash, has convinced me that it is
an essential character of coal that it should be composed principally of
organized vegetable substances and bitumen.
Lord President.—Of what, did you say ?—Of organized vegetable
carbon and bitumen principally.
Mr. Macfarlane.—With a little earthy matter ?—Yes.
I think you said these examinations were of the sections of the sub-
stance, and of the ash as well ?—Of the sections of the coal matter, and of
the ash as well. The practice generally adopted in examination is, first
to observe its ordinary characters, and next its sections, so as to develop
its structure.
Have you pursued the same mode of investigation in regard to the
Torbanehill mineral ?— Exactly.
And with what result ?—I have found no organic structure in it,
from the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 51
although I have examined it by powers varying from 40 or 50, up to
very nearly 700 linear. I have also examined the ash with great care ;
and I may say that as to almost every specimen that has passed through
my hands identified, and others as well, in no case have I found any
indications of vegetable structure in the ash.
Then the results of your examination of the coal, and of this mineral,
are very different ?—Quite opposite.
I suppose, Mr. Bowerbank, you have used the best instruments ?—Yes,
Sir, I believe there are no better to be procured. Indeed, unless they
were instruments of a high optical character, they would not develop the
minutest portions of the tissue satisfactorily.
Who are the great London makers ?—Ross, Powell and Smith, and
Bett (or Beck).
You have examined, I suppose, different varieties of shales, have you ?
—To a very considerable extent.
Any traces of organic structure in them ?—Not in the body of the
shale itself, but a great intermixture of isolated plants. In fact, in coal
shales isolated plants form a considerable portion of them.
We have had the word ‘ amorphous’ used frequently, Mr. Bowerbank.
Can you explain its meaning ?—lI understand an amorphous mass of
that description to be a mass without crystallization—a mass which
would cleave in any direction without any determinate arrangement.
For instance, I would say a sandstone, although formed of granulated
masses, is still an amorphous mass, as there is no determinate arrange-
ment.
Where there is organic structure, the word amorphous would not, of
course, apply P—Not to the structure itself, but it may apply to the
medium in which that structure is imbedded.
Cross-examined by Mr. Neaves.—Where did you get your specimens ?
—Some from Torbanehill pits, which I visited within the last week.
And adjoining properties ?—And some from the adjoining properties as
well.
What property was that ?—Bathgate pit, and another pit. I also
received verified specimens sent from the country to request an examina-
tion of them.
You first saw the mineral there P—I first saw the mineral at Queen-
wood College, some time ago.
Some months ago ?—About three months ago.
Re-ewamined by Mr. Macfarlane.—Among other coals have you
examined various cannel coals ?—Frequently.
And the statements you have made have had reference to them as well
as to others ?—The specimens which I have examined of the cannel coals,
vary very considerably in character from this new mineral from Tor-
banehill.
You discovered the vegetable origin of the structure in them ?—Oh,
yes.
This closes the evidence of the microscopists on the
pursuer’s side. I will now proceed to read that given on the
side of the defender.
Professor J. H. BALFour.—Haxamined by Mr, NEAVEs.
You are Professor of Botany in the University of Edinburgh ?—Yes.
And I understand that you have devoted attention not only to the sub-
ject of botany as concerns existing plants, but also to fossil botany ?—Yes.
52 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
Is that a part of the course that you teach ?—Yes.
In the course of teaching that class, are you in the habit of examining
mineral substances with a view to noticing their structure P—I examine
fossil plants. I have a large collection of specimens of fossil plants.
Have you been in this case shown some specimens of different minerals
with a view of examining them ?—Yes.
What were they ?—I have seen specimens of the 'l'orbanehill coal, the
Methil coal, the Capeldrae coal, the Lesmahagow coal, and several other
parrot and other common coals,
Did you visit the ground at Torbanehill ?—Yes, I went to the pits and
examined the coal, and brought specimens from the place.
Did you visit the Methil pit >—Yes.
And got some specimens from Methil ?—Yes, out of the pit.
And where did you get the other specimens that you refer to?—I got
them from various sources. Some were sent me authenticated by Mr.
Russel, some were given me by Dr. Maclagan, also by Dr. Redfern, Dr.
Aitken, and Professor Harkness.
Did you make sections of these minerals with a view to a microscopical
investigation of them P—Yes.
Did you make such a variety of sections as to enable you to judge in all
directions >—Yes, so as to judge fully of the structure.
Now, from that examination, are you able to say whether you dis-
covered in these specimens traces of organic structure P—Certainly organic
structure.
In all the specimens ?—In all the specimens more or less.
Now, in the Torbanehill mineral did you find marks of organic struc-
ture ?—Certainly.
And in the Methil ?—And in the Methil.
Was there any difference, or any resemblance, between the appearance of
the Torbanehill mineral and the Methil mineral?—A remarkable similarity.
Was there some Lesmahagow coal ?—Yes.
And some Capeldrae also ?— Yes.
And I think some Kinneil coal ?—Some Kinneil.
Which is a cannel also ?—Yes.
Did you take the assistance of Dr. Greville?—I took his assistance in
delineating what we saw under the microscope.
Did you see his delineations ?— Yes.
Did they appear to you to be successful ?—Most correct, I think.
You believe coal generally to be a vegetable formation, I suppose ?—
Certainly.
Of what species of plants is it generally supposed to be composed P—The
coal plants are numerous. We have, in the first place, a mass of ferns,
stigmarias, sigillarias, lepidodendrons, calamites, and various other genera.
The ferns supposed to form coal-beds are very gigantic ferns compared
with the present ferns ?—They are tree ferns.
Is it a cryptogamic plant P—Yes.
In such plants, what is the particular appearance or structure you
would expect to find ?—In all these plants, as well as in other plants of a
woody stem, we have cells and vessels ; but in the tree ferns we have a
structure which may be said to be pretty regular, which is called scalari-
form, or ladder-like, from the bars visible upon it. They are vessels or
tubes.
Did you see in the Torbanehill coal appearances that seemed to you to
indicate cellular structure ?—Certainly.
No doubt of that ?—No doubt of that.
And also some appearances indicative of scalariform structure ?—Yes.
from the Coal Measures of Torbane-hiil. 53
The cellular appearances more generally diffused than the other ?—Yes,
much more generally.
Do you consider you have in that way evidence of the vegetable compo-
sition of the Torbanehill mineral ?—Yes, certainly.
And of the same character generally as the other cannel coals that you
examined ?— Precisely.
{Here several drawings were handed to the witness, and he was asked to
explain them.
In the first drawing, which was of the Torbanehill mineral, witness
stated the sections showed the vegetable structure, and also the scalariform
vessels, with the bars upon it, very distinctly. ]
Is that the kind of structure that is seen in modern tree ferns ?—Yes,
The next drawing exhibits three sections,—the Lesmahagow, the Capel-
drae, and the Torbanehill coal,—showing precisely similar structure. They
are a little different in colour, but the same in structure. There are also
sections of the Torbanehill and Methil in the drawings, showing the same
appearance and structure in both these. Another drawing of the separate
individual shales shows distinctly the appearance of separate cells, both in
the Torbanehill coal, in the Lesmahagow coal, and in the Capeldrae coal.
And, in fact, we find these in various other coals.
The cell is the base of the organic structure of these vegetables >—Yes.
It is the accumulation of cell upon cell that builds up the structure p—
Yes.
Judging microscopically, then, and also with your knowledge of fossil
botany, would you draw the inference that the Torbanehill was of the
same, or of a different class of substances from the other cannel coals that
you have mentioned ?—The same class as of the cannel coals I have seen.
The only difference, I understand you to say, is the difference in the
tinge of colour ?>—Yes, and that occurs in many coals.
You don’t think that essential in deciding the question ?—I do not.
Cross-examined by the Dean of Faculty.—These observations are made
upon a thin section ?—Yes.
Who made the sections ?>—They were made by Professor Harkness, Dr.
Aitken, Dr. Redfern, and Mr. Glen.
Would you mark upon each the name of the gentleman who did them ?
—Yes, to the best of my recollection.
{Here witness marked each section as requested. }
Have you yourself been accustomed to make such sections ?—I have
made sections for the microscope.
Have you much practice with the microscope ?—Yes, it is part of my
course.
In reference to existing plants P—Yes, and also to fossil plants. I have
a large collection of fossil sections.
With regard to this drawing here [holding up one of those previously
described by witness], that represents the impression of an individual fossil
plant ?—That represents only a portion of a plant, the vascular part of the
vascular tissue of a plant, approaching nearly to the scalariform tissue.
Do you mean that the tissue is there, or the impression on the plant -—
The tissue is there.
In this other portion of the seam, then, which is coloured brown, you do
not observe any structure ?—I did not examine particularly.
But does this represent what you saw on that occasion ?—Yes.
Then there is no appearance of structure there ?—I cannot say.
There is no structure represented there >—No.
All that you found in this particular section is the representation of part
of a fossil plant ?—Yes. ”
54 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
Part of an individual plant apparently ?—Part of an individual plant
probably.
Do you know from what portion of this seam of Torbanehill mineral this
slice representing the upper drawing is taken P—I do not know the portion
of the seam.
Do you know the portion of the seam from which any of them were
taken ?—I have only seen the specimens. They seem to be the ordinary
appearance of the Torbanehill mineral, and quite the usual appearance of
the coal, so far as I saw.
Here the Dean of Faculty took up another drawing, and asked witness
if he saw anything similar‘to that ?—I saw appearances similar to that.
Have you represented them ?—Represented them so far in some of these
sections, only the dark colour between makes a: difference in the appear-
ances.
Lord President.—Is that in the Torbanehill mineral >—Yes.
Dean of Faculty.—Did you see anything like that [showing witness
another drawing, No. 25]?—Something approaching to this. It wants, in
some respects, the regularity of the structure I have seen in the other.
Shown No. 26, another drawing, and asked if he had seen anything like
that ?—This also approaches to what I observed, but wants the definiteness
and regularity of the structure I saw.
Did you see anything like that [showing No. 28, another drawing] ?—
Yes, the yellow part is more like what we saw in the general structure.
What power did you use in making these observations ?—They are
marked in diameters ; two of them were 200, and the other 70.
Have you ever examined shales in this way ?—I have looked at one or
two shales. It is not so much in my way as plants.
Do you find marks of fossil plants in them ?—Yes, they occur; but the
structure is different in them. ‘They have not the same marked definite
form I have seen in the others.
I understand that\in these you represent both the transverse and the
parallel sections ?—Yes, we have taken them in two directions.
Which are the transverse P—The three upper are the longitudinal, and
the lower the transverse or horizontal.
What do you mean by horizontal ?—By horizontal we mean cutting off
the ends of the vessels.
That is to say, you learned that from the gentlemen who made them ?—
I have examined sections.
You did not see the sections made >—No.
Then, of course, you could only get the information from those gentle-
men who made them ?—Yes.
Are the three upper cut along the stratum, as it were, off the top of the
stratum as it lies?—I am talking of them as regards the appearances we
see in the microscope. Judging from ordinary structure, in the one case
we cut the ends of the vessels ; in the other, we cut along the line longi-
tudinally.
Lord President.—The three upper are cut along the line of the vessels,
and the three others are cut across the line of the vessels.
Dean of Faculty.—Do I understand you to say that you were told they
were cut in this way, and that that is the ground of your saying so; or do
you form your opinion by the appearance they present ?—I was of course
told so; and on looking at them, I should say they are so cut.
Then it is from both these reasons that you say so ?—Yes.
Did you examine any part of the ashes of this mineral with the micro-
scope ?—No. i
Did you ever examine"the ashes of coal with the microscope ?—No.
from the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 55
Did you use direct or transmitted light in these examinations ?—I used
generally transmitted light, but I also viewed some specimens by direct
light.
Re-examined by Mr. Neaves.—There are several drawings here. Did
you examine a great many more cuttings than these drawings?—A great
number.
How many more, do you know ?—I cannot tell the number of the sec-
tions of Torbanehill ; at all events, some eight or ten, besides sections of
other coal.
And then made a drawing of these >—Yes, as being average specimens.
Did you see some of these sections made P—Yes, these were the sections
made under my direction by Mr. Glen.
The Methil section?—I cannot say I saw it made in the sense that
I saw the whole process gone through, but it was done for me, by my di-
rection, from a piece of Methil coal.
Lord President.—Did you see Mr. Glen make some of the sections ?—I
should rather say that the sections I allude to were made under my direc-
tion, and were authenticated by me at the time.
Mr. Neaves.—In the other sections of the Torbanehiil mineral which
you have examined besides this, did you find the same appearances p—The
same appearances.
I forget what you said as to this yellow part of No, 28 ?—I considered
that to be a cellular structure.
The yellow part included ?—Yes.
This cellular tissue is a magnified appearance of the separate individual
cells >—Yes.
With the view of showing that they were at larger power ?—These are
cells which occur in these coals, and they are separated the one from the
other. We took magnified drawings of them.
Occurring at Boghead ?—Yes, and on the others.
And besides showing those things, you formed an opinion of what they
were ?—Yes.
That they were the indications of vegetable cellular structure ?—
Certainly.
Lord President.—That is, the appearances in the mineral seams P—Yes.
Mr, Neaves.—Including the Torbanehill p—Yes.
And of that yellow part of the representation of the Torbanehill
mineral ?—I believe it to represent vegetable cells.
In these plants I suppose the structure is but imperfectly understood ?
—I may say we do not know it so completely as we know all the plants
of the present day.
The cells may be longer or shorter >—Yes.
They vary in their form ?—Yes.
And that may affect the longitudinal appearance of the cells ?—Yes.
I do not understand you to say that this is the mere impression of a
foreign fossil, but the actual structure of the mineral at that place ?—
Certainly.
Dean of Faculty.—The individual plant is there lying in the mineral ?
—The structure of the plant—not the entire plant.
A part of a fossil plant is seen there ?—Yes.
Mr. Neaves.—Forming a part of the coal ?—Yes.
Dean of Faculty.—I understand, Dr. Balfour, that there is a part of
the fossil plant here lying imbedded in something or other ?—It is a quite
dissimilar part as regards the appearance.
The plant must be there in order to give it that appearance ?P—It must
be the structure appearing so distinctly as to be seen there.
56 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
Very well; a plant is lying here upon another thing, which is here
represented by a dull-brown colour ?—Yes, a part of the plant.
Mr. Neaves.—What did you say ?—That that is part of the structure
of a plant which is lying there in the mineral. When you make a
section of the mineral you come upon this, showing you that there was a
plant.
: At that part the mineral consists of that plant ?—Yes.
Dean of Faculty.—You have seen fossil plants in stone quarries ?—Yes.
Mr. Neaves.—You do not consider that an example of such an appear-
ance r—No.
Dr. Reprern.—Examined by Mr. NEAVEs.
Dr. Redfern, you lecture on subjects connected with the microscope in
connexion with the University ?—Yes; and teach the use of the micro-
scope.
You are a Fellow of the College of Surgeons of London ?—Yes.
Have you been accustomed to the examination of substances by the
microscope ?—Yes.
Principally of vegetable substances for some years ?—I have for many
years been in the practice of examining vegetable structure by the micro-
scope. :
Both in recent vegetables and in fossil substances ?—I have.
Did you lately receive some specimens of different minerals, including
some of the Torbanehill mineral ?—I did.
From whom did you get the Torbanehill mineral ?—I got some specimens
from Dr. Fyfe, and some others from the Aberdeen Gas Works, in the
presence of Mr. Leslie, the manager.
Did you subject these specimens of the Torbanehill mineral to micro-
scopical examination ?—I did so.
How many sections of it did you take >—Eighteen.
From the same piece, or from different pieces ?—From eight different
pieces.
Did you or did you not find vegetable structure in these sections P—I
found vegetable structure in every section.
Have you examined different cannel coals with the same view ?—I
have.
What cannel coals ?—I have examined Lesmahagow cannel coal,
Capeldrae cannel coal, Wigan cannel coal, Methil cannel coal, and
Halbeath parrot coal; and also the Kinneil coal from Bo’ness.
Tn what way would you speak of the examination of these minerals,
and of the examination of the Torbanehill mineral, in reference to the
vegetable structure ?—I am quite convinced, that in the sections of these
different coals there are parts which cannot be distinguished from each
other.
Vegetable structure in all ?—In all.
And in some parts this mineral undistinguishable from the others ?—
Certainly.
The Boghead mineral has considerable varieties of aspect in itself ?-—It
ha
S.
Different shades of colour?—There are black, brown, and spotted
pieces—black pieces with brown spots.
In the lightish-colour portions of the Boghead mineral, what is that
you saw ?—I saw vegetable cells in these portions.
The structure that you saw is cellular structure ?—Yes.
Besides the cells that you saw, what else did you notice P—I noticed
also woody fibre, or woody tissue.
Jrom the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 57
Are there some yellow spots in this light-coloured portion of the
mineral ?—There are.
What do you think these yellow spots indicate ?—'They indicate the
existence of vegetable cells.
Have you applied any test to endeavour to find out whether they were
vegetable or not ?—I have, Sir; I have many reasons for concluding that
they are vegetable cells.
Would you mention your reasons?—I find that they can be perfectly
isolated—they project upon the edges of all sections of the mineral—they
are rounded—they are as uniform in size as the cells of other vegetable
structures—the general appearance of the section is that of a piece of
vegetable cellular tissue—the yellow spots do not act upon polarised
light, or act upon it very feebly.
Generally speaking, do you consider that the Torbanehill mineral
exhibits the same appearances of structure and position microscopically
as the other cannel minerals ?—It does.
Did you see Dr. Greville’s drawings ?—I not only saw the drawings,
but I saw him make them.
You had long previously examined the minerals ?—I had; long and
carefully.
Do these drawings appear to you to represent the general character of
the mineral P—They do.
And you believe these drawings to represent cellular tissue ?—I do.
Your sections were taken at random from the general specimens that
you had ?—Certainly.
As fair specimens that you thought the mineral would exhibit ?—That
was my chief object in obtaining them from the Aberdeen Gas Works.
I took the specimens for as fair average specimens of the Torbanehill
mineral as | could obtain.
And they would have supplied similar representations as those Dr.
Greville has given, in your opinion ?—I am satisfied of that.
Cross-ecamined by the Dean of Faculty— You say Dr. Greville’s
drawings represent the same thing that you saw ?—They do,
Did you examine the ash of this coal >—Yes.
With the microscope ?—Yes. I consider the examination of the ash as
liable to great sources of fallacy, and place no dependence upon it.
Your reasons?—I should not look upon the ash to make out the
structure it contains.
That is not your reason, but a repetition of your opinion. What is
your reason ?—Because I would expect the greater portion of vegetable
structure, if it existed, to be destroyed by the process of combustion.
Did you ever examine the ash of ordinary coal with the microscope P—
I have not.
Dr. R. Ky GrevinLe.— Examined by Mr. NEAVEs.
Dr. Greville, I believe gon have devoted a good deal of your attention
to the study of botany ’—Yes, it has been the principal study of my
whole life.
And in connexion with that to the use of the microscope ?—I may say,
without exaggeration, that for many years I have used the microscope
almost every day.
Among other branches of the vegetable kingdom, you have studied and
written upon the cryptogamic family, which includes the ferns ?—Yes.
And which requires particular use of the microscope in order to illustrate
its fructification ?°—Yes. I may add that 1 have made the drawings of
everything [ have published from my own microscopical investigations.
J
58 Structure of a peeuhar Combustible Mineral,
1 made drawings of the outline and structure of two or three hundred
ferns alone.
Were you asked to assist some gentlemen using the microscope to
represent the appearance of some sections of minerals ?—Yes.
These are the drawings you made ?—Yes.
Did you yourself look at various sections of the minerals besides those
that you have represented ?—I did, especially with regard to the Boghead
mineral. I examined under the microscope eighteen different slices made
from eight different specimens of the substance.
Were these Dr. Redfern’s specimens ?—Yes.
Did you discover vegetable structure in these ?—Unquestionably, in
the whole of them.
Did you examine some other minerals—some cannel coals that this
gentleman had?—I examined all those coals of which the names are
appended to the drawings. ‘There is the Methil, Lesmahagow, and
Capeldrae coals.
Now these are correct representations, to the best of your ability, of
what they present ?—They are; they might be more minutely finished,
but they give, I hope, a fair representation of the structure.
Did it appear to you, from your examination of these different things,
that they were the general structure of the mass, or any incidental
structure ?—I have no hesitation in saying that it was the general
structure of every specimen, not incidental. I should consider it to be
quite impossible it could be incidental.
Do you consider that there is a material difference or a substantial
identity between these different bodies, as represented in these different
minerals ?—I do net. I examined the specimens of the three upper-
most sketches, and the structure was so similar, that I considered them
to be identical. here is a difference, but nothing amounting to any-
thing essential in the structure. The Lesmahagow, Capeldrae, and
Torbanehill are.essentially the same. I may be allowed to add, that in
each slice there is a difference in every part of that slice, so that you
must be guided by the general view.
From your botanical ‘knowledge, have you any doubt that these repre-
sentations exhibit vegetable cells : ?-T have no more doubt of that than of
my own existence at this moment.
Will you explain what that paper is?—[handing witness one of the
drawings spoken to by Professor Balfour|—That drawing represents
vegetable cells in an isolated state, scattered throughout the substance, and
observable, I believe, in most coals—certainly in most coals that I have
examined. It is difficult to say what they may be, but I have no doubt
that they are vegetable cells, solitary cells. They may possibly be
transverse segments of cells, but I would not venture to say anything
more than that. I believe them to be vegetable cells.
Found in this mineral ?—We have found these vegetable cells in the
Boghead as well as in others.
Will you explain what these two drawings represent ?—! handing witness
two of the drawings spoken to by Professor Balfour |—The uppermost one
represents cellular tissue in the Torbanehill mineral; and, upon the
whole, I consider that as one of the most satisfactory specimens which I
examined ; the cellular tissue is so unequivocally marked, and so regular,
that it may be compared to that of a recent plant. It is exceedingly well
defined. What I have represented in the drawing is not in the least
exaggerated. No person accustomed to botanical sections would hesitate
in believing that to be cellular tissue. The lower drawing represents a
beautiful specimen, but whether that is general in the mineral I could not
Srom the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. a9
say. It represents a modification of the vascular structure of platrts
called technically the scalariform structure. I can compare it best by
comparing it with an old basket. It is an unequivocal vegetable structure.
What occurs in its neighbourhood in the rest of the section ?—'This
was the whole that I saw. The other portion was not ground so thin,
and I could not see what it consisted of ; but judging from tfig traces of
these vessels at the extreme edges, I have no reason whatgver to doubt,
that if the remainder of the section had been ground sufficiently thin, we
would have seen the continuation of that structure.
But the other cells that you described here are diffused through the
entire mass of the substance ?—In all the specimens I examined it was
uniform throughout the whole. It was exceedingly well marked in the
one that represents the transverse section of the cells.
You get the width of the cells more distinctly when you cut the
transverse section ?—You get the area more distinctly shown.
Cross-examined by the Dean of Faculty.—Can you explain to me what
are infusoria ?—Infusoria represent minute animals invisible to the naked
eye—visible only to the microscope.
Where do you find them ?—It is very difficult to say where you do not
find them. Generally they are sought for in fluids.
You find them in minerals also?—I am not prepared to answer that
question. Iam not sufficiently acquainted with the subject to venture
to answer it.
Then you cannot tell me what appearance they present when found in
minerals when examined under the microscope ?—No, | am not aware of
their occurring.
Professor HARKNEss.— Examined by Mr. Youna.
Professor Harkness, you are Professor of Geology in Queen’s College,
Cork ?—Yes.
You succeeded Dr. Nicol ?—About six months ago.
You have devoted considerable attention to the study of geology ?—I
have.
And also to the examination of objects by the microscope ?—Yes, so far
as relates to fossil plants.
You have visited Torbanehill ?—I have.
You went down one of the pits ?—I was down two of them.
And examined the mineral as it lay in the earth ?—Yes.
And made yourself acquainted with its geological composition ?—I
found it to occur in the proper coal measures.
Exactly in the position you would expect to find coal ?—Decidedly so.
You found nothing whatever in its geological composition to lead you
for a moment to doubt that it was coal?—Nothing; on the contrary,
everything to induce me to believe that it was coal.
Did you form any opinion upon the mineral itself?—I formed the
opinion, that from the appearauce of the mineral it was a coal.
Did you take some specimens of the mineral away ?—Yes, I did, for the
purpose of making a more careful examination.
And after that examination you retained your opinion ?—I did.
And your opinion now is that it is a coal?—Decidedly so, without any
manner of doubt.
Did you make some sections of the mineral which you took away with
the view of microscopic examination ?—So far as regarded fossil plants.
Did you find the structure familiar ?—I found the structure peculiar,
and the fossils characteristic of the coal formation.
How many structures are there in coal and coal plant ?—There are two
60 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
or three distinguishing characteristics, first the woody fibre, the scalariform
tissue, and the cellular tissue.
Is this upon the examination of a great many sections?—Yes. That
was generally, not mere accidental structure of particular pieces.
You saw a drawing made by Dr. Greville?—I was present when that
drawing was made.
And that gave a sufficiently distinct idea of the course of examination ?
—Yes.
Of the Torbanehill and some other coals P—Yes ; and the Lesmahagow,
Kinneil, Capeldrae, and some other cannels.
I believe the drawing’was made from a section furnished by you ?—
That is a most beautiful specimen of cellular tissue.
This is the most beautiful specimen you have seen of woody fibre P—I
distinguish woody fibre from cellular on account of the more regular
formation of the cells.
You have no doubt that this is a vegetable product >—Not the least.
{ Witness was shown the drawings illustrative of cellular tissue and
woody fibre, and distinguished each with great precision. |
You know what shales are ?—Yes. ;
Do shales ever exhibit vegetable structure P—As shales they do not.
How would you describe a shale ?—There are several forms of shales.
Supposing the coal to be so mixed with earthy matter as to be incapable
of being used for fuel, then that would be called a coaly shale.
And when the coaly matter is so great in proportion to the earthy mat-
ter that it will burn ?—I should consider this a coal.
And more or less pure according to the admixture of earthy matter ?—
All coals contain more or less of earthy matter, and accordingly the coals
run into shales as the earthy matter increases.
When you come to a substance beyond which a substance will not
burn, you would call it a coaly shale ?—Yes.
It is very difficult to draw the line at the exact ne ’—Very difficult.
Has this mineral anything of the character of a shale ?—Not the least,
so far as I have been able to detect.
You have seen specimens of Methil coal, and examined them with the
microscope ?—Yes.
And did you find anything to distinguish the Boghead mineral ?—
So far as external appearance went, I could scarcely distinguish the one
from the other, and there was also a great similarity in internal structure.
There are a variety of cannels which approach each other very closely ?
—In regard to the distinction between the two there is not a more com-
mon one than this, the capability of burning and being used for the
purposes of fuel.
If the substance would burn, and could be used as fuel, you would say
it was a coal ?—Yes, I would.
If any substance is sold in the market as a coal, is it a coal?—Yes, I
should think so.
There is no science against this >—None that I am aware of.
Cross-examined by the Dean of Faculty.—I suppose whatever comes out
of the coal measures and burns by itself is coal?—No; I would not say
that. You might get a fragment of bitumen, which would not be coal,
and that burns. by itself,
Is that the only exception ?—I am not prepared to say that there are
any other exceptions.
Fracments of bitumen would be an exception ?—Yes.
The | way by which you distinguish a coal from a shale, or a shale from
from the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 61
a coal, I understand is, that the one will burn, and that the other will
not ?—The one will burn without the mixture of any extraneous matter.
It will burn by itself ?—Yes.
There are other distinctions ; but this is the distinction upon which you
rested ?—Yes.
You were going to tell us that there were a number of kinds of shales.
Tell me some of these ?—There are some which are absolutely devoid of
coaly matter—clay shales, which have no coal in them at all.
Any other distinction ?—Yes; there are shales which I should charac-
terize as bituminous shales.
How do they differ from coaly shales >—They differ inasmuch as they
give a bituminous smell when struck by the hammer; and they yield
bitumen to chemical solvents.
Do they burr ?—Yes, they burn in some cases.
Where do you find most bituminous shales ?—Yon find them in Cam-
bridge and in Dorsetshire, in the higher beds of the oolite.
Do you find the Methil coal to be of a laminated and slaty structure >—
I found some fragments that were laminated; but others present the
conchoidal structure that you have in the Boghead, and is compost.
The Boghead is compost ?—It is.
Is the Methil coal so ?—It is generally so.
But portions are slaty and laminated ?—Yes.
Will you explain what infusoria are >—I have not given any opinion as
concerning infusoria.
But you can give one ?—They are minute microscopic animals.
Where are they found ?—I generally find them in water.
Are they not to be found in minerals?—I have not found them in
minerals.
But are they not to be found in minerals ?—They are found in certain
mineral beds, but I have not found them in mineral beds.
Dr. Wituiam AITKEN.—Hxamined by Mr. PENNEY.
You made some sections of the Torbanehill mineral, and of some other
coals ?>—Yes.
Were they for your own examination, or some that Dr. Greville drew ?
—TI did some, and also for my own.
You got the returns from Torbanehill ?—I did.
From the pit mouth ?—Yes.
You made the sections fairly for the purpose of testing ?—Yes.
Mr. Neaves then stated that they would not require to examine
Mr. Glen, as his sections were also admitted.
Having now read to you the evidence given by the micro-
scopists on both sides of the question, I cannot refrain from
making a few remarks on some of the statements of the
defender’s witnesses. The subject to me is a painful one, for
it is always with feelings of regret that I venture to differ in
opinion from any scientific observer ; but, however contrary
to my inclination, I have a public duty to perform, to say
nothing of the character I have to sustain amongst you as
a member of this society. I sincerely hope, however, that
those gentlemen will take it all in good part, and believe that
it is only for the reasons above assigned, and not from any
62 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
public or private feeling of opposition to their opinions that I
appear before you this night.
I will not dwell long upon the subject, as it must be very
clear to you all—first, that the specimens examined by these
gentlemen must have had more or less of plant structure im-
bedded in them; secondly, that they have evidently mistaken
the peculiar arrangement of the combustible and earthy por-
tions of the mineral for vegetable cellular tissue. Thirdly,
they can certainly never have examined sections of many
coals microscopically, as one and all tell you that they saw
the same structure in the mineral as they did in coals. Had
they made sections of coal in two directions, at right angles
to each other, they could hardly have failed in seeing, almost
at a glance, how much the sections differed in structure the
one from the other. That such is really the case, even in the
coals which they state in their evidence they have examined,
may be shown by reference to Plate IV. In fig. 1 is repre-
sented a transverse section of the so-called brown methil ;
and in fig. 2, a longitudinal section of the same. The two
structures are so different in appearance, that, had such
sections been made, I feel confident there could not have
been a second opinion on the subject. In fig. 38 is shown a
transverse section of the black methil, and in fig. 4 a longi-
tudinal section. ‘The differences, if anything, are even more
striking than in the brown methil. But what will be said
of figs. 5 and*6, which represent a transverse and longitudinal
section of Lesmahagow cannel coal? That anything at all
resembling such a structure as this, can be found in sections
of the mineral in question, except when coal is present, I
emphatically deny.
Now, granting for a moment that the structure of the
mineral be cellular, what plants, I would ask, could the cells
have belonged to? Can any botanist produce a single
instance of a recent or fossil plant of the same thickness as a
seam of the Torbanehill mineral, which shall be made up of a
mass of cellular tissue, that is, without vessels or woody fibres
being present with the cells ?
Again, if the structure be cellular, we should expect to find
the most durable part of the cell—the cell wall—always pre-
sent, which is not the case. If this view be correct, the yellow
particles being solid must be the contents of cells, they cer-
tainly cannot be cells. ‘The cell-wall also, as far as we know
it, in recent and fossil plants, always presents on section a
more or less uniform thickness and a homogeneous appear-
ance; whereas the structure around the yellow particles in all
cases, except where plants are present, is minutely granular,
From the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 63
being in reality the clayey or earthy ingredient of the
mineral.
None of the defender’s witnesses, it appears, ever examined
the ash of coal; and one witness in particular, Dr. Redfern,
stated that the examination of “ash in general was liable to
great sources of fallacy, and placed no dependence upon it ;”
whereas, it subsequently appeared that he had never examined
the ash of ordinary coal with the microscope.
Were I disposed to be hypercritical, I could mention many
other points in the evidence that I entirely dissent from; but
I trust I have already said enough, and will therefore sum up
my remarks by stating that I consider the mineral in ques-
tion is not a coal, being structurally different from all un-
doubted coals, including those with which it appears it has
been compared by the microscopists engaged by the defender.
In order, therefore, that the scientific world in general may
have an opportunity of judging for themselves whether this
statement be correct or not, I have put specimens of the
mineral and of these coals into the hands of the preparers of
microscopic objects, and in a short time sections will be on
sale by them and by the principal opticians in this metropolis.
I might by some persons be accused of unfairness in
making even these few remarks upon the evidence of the wit-
nesses for the defence, when they are all located in different
parts of Great Britain, and therefore not able to be present
this evening to answer for themselves. I wish, however,
that they could have been here, and more especially if they
could have brought with them the sections upon which their
opinions were formed, and the drawings which were produced
in court. They might say, perhaps, that it would not be fair
play to send their specimens, their drawings, and their remarks
into an enemy’s camp; on my own part, however, I can ven-
ture to state that | am ready to appear before any tribunal of
scientific men in this kingdom, and my drawings and speci-
mens shall be open to all who may be interested in the subject,
to examine for themselves. I beg it may be expressly under-
stood, that should there be any one point in this paper which
on subsequent investigation may turn out to be incorrect, I
shall be as ready to come forward and acknowledge myself in
error as I now am to express an opinion not hastily formed :
my only object, as I said before, is truth; and by truth I will
abide.
There is one other point that I would briefly allude to
before drawing my remarks to a conclusion, and this is a
portion of the Lerd President’s address to the Jury, in which,
64 Structure of a peculiar Combustible Mineral,
as before stated, Mr. Bowerbank and myself are placed in no
very enviable position ; it is as follows :—
“« Besides those gentlemen who were examined as geologists and che-
mists, and who differ so widely, there was examined another class of men,
and possessed of great attainments—I refer to the microscopists. One of
them was the late President of the Microscopic Society of London—a
learned body, who make it their object to pry into all things. Three of
these gentlemen were examined for the pursuer, and four for the defender.
The pursuer’s witnesses told you that there was no trace of organic struc-
ture, no woody fibre or tissue, in short, no trace of vegetable matter in
this substance, although occasionally there might be the incidental pre-
sence of vegetable remains. ‘The witnesses of this class on the other side
told you, on the contrary, that in every part of it there was the most clear
vestiges of vegetable structure. I do not know, when I have so many
geologists and so many microscopists telling me that it is not coal, and
so many on the other side telling me the opposite, I say I do not know
that I feel myself much the wiser, or further advanced in the inquiry.
But if you have, in addition, a great number of chemists, and speaking
with equal authority and equal contrariety, it is difficult to know what to
make of the controversy. -I do not know that I have anything to say
against the skill of the microscopists, or the skill of any of those gentle-
men ; but one general remark may be made on the microscopic testimony,
and it is, that there are those who see a thing, and also those who do not
see it—those who do see it, cannot see it unless it is there, and those who
cannot see it do not see it at all. But very skilful persons looking for a
thing and not seeing it, creates a strong presumption that it is not there.
But when other persons do find it, it goes far to displace the notion that it
is not there. But there is another observation on the microscopic evidence
that occurred to me. Ido not know whether I am under any misappre-
hension, but I think that three, certainly two, of those examined by the
defenders, are botanists also; and I do not think that any of those exa-
mined for the pursuer, two of them from London, represented themselves
as botanists. Now, the defender’s witnesses are accustomed to look for
plants, and can understand them when they see them. The gentlemen on
the other side again, looking for woody fibre or tissue, are not, as I under-
stand, conversant or skilful in fossil plants. But finding such a difference
of opinion, and such opposite conclusions arrived at by those persons, | do
not know, unless you think that some gave their reasons more satisfac-
torily than others—I say I do not know that I feel my mind much
relieved from the difficulties of this case by listening to all that evidence.
It is very interesting no doubt, and if they were all standing on one side,
and nobody standing on the other side, it might be very satisfactory to
one’s mind to listen to such evidence.”
To such remarks I would briefly reply that, however
severe a counsel may be in his cross-examination, and how-
ever strong his language in addressing the jury may be, I
think it to a certain extent excusable, as he is endeavouring
to do the best for his client; but 1 must confess my great
surprise that a learned judge should see fit to single out one
set of scientific witnesses from the pursuer’s side, and hold
them up, I would say, almost to ridicule; that he did so on
from the Coal Measures of Torbane-hill. 65
the present occasion, the part of the address which I have just
read to you will show. I think it will eventually turn out that
the two members of the Microscopical Society of London,
“ that learned body who make it their object to pry into all
things,” are accustomed to look for plants, and can under-
stand them when they see them; nay, I will assert that they
can do more, for they can tell when a particular structure is
not a plant. Had his Lordship been silent on the point, he
would not have laid himself open to these truly justifiable
remarks,
I would now, gentlemen, in conclusion, leave the matter in
your hands. I think that the subject in question is one of
the most important ever brought before the notice of this
Society, and one which no set of men in this or any other
country are so competent to investigate. Most of the members
of this society are, as stated in the certificate for suspension,
*‘ attached to scientific pursuits,” and most of them are in
possession of the best instruments, and are accustomed to use
them; let them, therefore, study the subject for themselves,
and give independent testimony. Where, I might ask, can
be found a correct definition of coal? I believe, at present,
no such definition is extant, and it is on this account that I
look upon the trial of Gillespie versus Russel, as one of the
greatest importance to the geologist, the chemist, the mineralo-
gist, and the microscopist; and | am of opinion that from it
will spring, not only a perfect definition of coal, but of other
combustible substances found in connexion with it, and,
therefore, itis to be hoped that such contradictory statements
as were made by the different scientific witnesses on the trial
in question may in future be avoided. It remains, then, for
the microscope, ‘‘ that most valuable of all scientific instru-
ments (to quote the words of Mr. Ross) ever yet bestowed by
art upon the investigator of nature,” to assist in deciding the
true structure of coal, as it has already done that of many
other organic substances of a previously-doubtful nature.
“eorpis Jo Ayqeqoad
‘goood avjnsur jo pu ‘104}eur AyjAva Jo saynuvas
yep jo Ajoryuo sjstsuoo yse oy} ‘suring Aq
"QINJON.YS 9[G2IOGOA JO sows, SMOTS poaowiat uvaq oavy saporjaed Moped oy} OU
skvaye yse oy} pur ‘aouvavodde snoiqy v Jo ssoy woud ‘soytavd 10 syd jo soles ve Surjuosoid “yse
10 a10ur syuosaid pu ‘punos oiyjejouL v sjtme eyOD | ‘yona}s way punos [[np ‘ASuods puv yySI] ‘ayo | pue ayoo ay} Jo sAojORAeYD “c
*ynosoid soutrjouos 10}}eUr ‘snovoris ATqeq
Ay ws {.Mojoo uMoIq Your v Jo sayeid aepnsue -oad pue “udaredsuv. oy1nb saoyyo ‘onbedo outos
poueyey WIA paxtur Ay[euoIsvo00 are aseyy ‘sayyemt AyyAva Jo sopNuVAs Jo aanjX1U [eUOIsvd00
: Souqy Jo SeTpung Jo seaqy Jo Ayyedroursd pasodwioy | yy1a ‘sepoyavd aozjad oyy Jo ATjedroutad pasodmog | * sepsod ayy Jo suojowreyQ *F
“MOTO UAOIG
YoU ¥ JO SI MoNA0d promournziq oy} sasvo ysour Ut
qnq ‘ssvur oy} YSnoryy ApreMZoi1t poszoyyeos oie *SONSST} ILO] JO uF oy} Aq se
sajorsed prousurnjziq Moyo Moz v “TINO, WMO TPA sev “Mood wAOIG Port tty, Aq postusooo1
ay} sv ‘woo oWOs UT ‘“paulwexa udeq dary Ajiseo aq Avur Aaqy ‘yuosa.d oq syueyd Jo suorns0d
YOUpA syvoo oy} [Te JO o1ystaojovrvyo o1e ‘1099RT Jo ‘sjyuvjd Jy ‘opeur st uotoos oy} ABM JOA
ay} Ul saiqy oy} pue s|[a0 payesuoTa uUMOIG -IOIYA IINJON.YS UL douUaIayIp ou ! Yora Jo a1} U0
YoU oy} pue ‘touL1oJ OY} Ul SULI poanojoo-roquie dy} UL yuasaad st aAMYonA}S poyerpes B ‘aSAV] O18
pay[eo-os ay} Jo vouasaid ayy, “poo Fo suorjoas sepryaed oy} uoy AA ‘sIseq avpnuerS-AjoynarUL ‘adoos
Surpuodsa1100 YIM Sutoaise yjoq ynq “uodezy «| v AQ papunotins sasvo autos ut ‘Inojoo A0que -O10IU oY} Japun suoTjo—s
-jip A]j[e}0} suorjoas [eUIpNiLsUO, puL astoAsUBIT, | pur ‘ainsy aAvfMoIIO Jo ‘sozIs snortwA Jo sopyaeg | Aq payiqryxe sdojovaeyQ ‘eg
“SSUUL OY} WOAF 41
Suistea Aq 10 Sutdvazos Aq aoyI10 ‘UMOAg BUIODAq ‘sdojourerp OG Jo 1aMod v&
“poom JO [4 Syoryq JoAoMoy Gaed Aue :sseur Teroueds oy Jopun ‘yoafqo onbedo ue se
uOTOaS [BUIPNyISuo0] v oy] ‘aouvvedde snoaqy e WOIZ poyovjop are YO “anojoo UAOAG-Y ST] pomora “Quoumseaz yeorqno
PQIYX TIM ‘s}YyST] Ure}100 Ur ‘Sopis XIs st Jo Mog | Jo Suteq sopnavd so sofnuvads osoy} ‘avpnuery | ev Aq poyziqryxa saojowreYyD *%
*‘ShOd}SN] puv UMOAG Yap “[IPEP, UMOAG oy} ut “Oa]SN] JOYA
‘SNOd}sN] puB Youtq Ywodys ‘opyytuq, “Youlq anojoH | ‘uMorq yrays ‘qySno, ‘yovqq a0 uUMOAG “AMOTOD | * * * SIOJOBILYO [eUIO}XY “1
"IVOO "IVUUNIW 'TIUA-ANVEYOL Ras
‘IVOQ) pue TVUANIPL TIIH-ANVAUOT, olf} Ud9MJoq AONAUNAATIGG JO SLNIOG 'IVdIONIYT 94} JO MALIA UVINAY T
Roper, on the Diatomacee of the Thames. 67
Some Observations on the Diatomace® of the Thames. By
F.C. S. Roper, F.G.S. (Read January 25th, 1854.)
In the year 1843 M. Ehrenberg, read before the Academy of
Sciences of Berlin a paper on the microscopical marine infv-
soria of the deposits of the Elbe,* in which he established the
remarkable fact that at Gliickstadt, a distance of forty miles,
and even above Hamburg, upwards of eighty miles, from the
mouth of the river, marine siliceous-shelled Infusoria were
found alive, and their skeletons deposited in such abundance
in the mud of the river, that at the former locality they form
one quarter to one-third of the entire mass, and that the pro-
portion is still about half that amount at Hamburg, as far as
the flood-tide extends. All his observations gave a great pre-
dominance of marine over fresh-water species, even when the
salt taste of the water was no longer perceptible.
In the lists which accompany this paper, M. Ehrenberg
enumerates thirty-four marine species, under the style of
siliceous-shelled Polygastrica, the whole of which would now
be classed as Alg@, under the order Diatomacee. The local
distribution of these organisms is a point of some interest ; and
as well-authenticated lists of species from the different localities
in Great Britain have still been only partially attempted, I am
induced to lay before the Society the results of some observa-
tions on the deposits of the river Thames, which accord in a
great degree with those made by Ehrenberg in the Elbe,
though the proportion of marine to fresh-water species is more
equal at corresponding distances from the sea.
The abundance of the Diatomacee, and the facility with
which the different species have been collected at Hull,
Poole Harbour, and other well-known localities, where they
may be eathered alive, and offer such advantages for acquiring
an intimate acquaintance with their habits and modes of
growth, has tended, in a great measure, to divert attention
from those which are deposited by the Thames water ; and,
with the exception of some species of Triceratium, Eupo-
discus, and a few other forms, the greater part of the list I
shall hereafter mention has been hitherto, so far as I am
aware, altogether unnoticed, or at all events no special detail
of them has been given from that locality.
The chief cause, I imagine, for this neglect of the Diato-
macee of the Thames and other rivers, has arisen from the
fact, that observers have endeavoured to pursue the same plan
* Verhandl. der Konigl. Preuss. Akad. der Wissenschaften zu Berlin,
43.
VOL, IT. h
68 Roper, on the Diatomacee of the Thames.
which meets with such success in the localities I have before
alluded to, that is, to examine them in a living state ; but, as
far as I can judge from my own experience, this affords a most
unsatisfactory result ; and after a careful examination of the
mud deposited at different points in the Thames, any one
might easily arrive at the conclusion that the varieties to be
met with were comparatively few, and, except for the exami-
nation of some of the larger species, not worth the time neces-
sary for extended observation.
Having, some months back, brought home a bottleful of
the black mud from the extremity of the Isle of Dogs, taken
about half-way between high and low water mark, and for
several nights successively submitted it to a careful examina-
tion, the only species of Diatomacee | met with were a Trice-
ratium favus, and several specimens of Coscinodiscus radiatus
and Surirella splendida. 1 had laid it aside for some time,
when it occurred to me that the same course of proceeding
which is necessary to bring out the siliceous frustules from
guano might prove equally efficacious with this Thames mud.
Acting on this idea, | boiled a portion of it for some time in
hydrochloric and afterwards in strong nitric acid, until the
whole was perfectly clean: and, on mounting it, the result far
exceeded my expectations; for though impossible to form
an accurate conclusion, I should imagine that, excluding the
coarse sand, nearly one-fourth of the finer part of the residuum
was entirely*composed of the siliceous valves of different
species of Diatomacee ; and the prevalence of marine forms
also proves that, at the distance of nearly forty miles from
the mouth of the Thames, their distribution is very similar
to that previously described by M. Ehrenberg in the Elbe.
The only observations on this point of the inquiry, as
regards British rivers, that | have met with, are notices of the
species which occur in the Humber, and in a paper by Mr. T.
F. Bergin,* read before the Microscopical Society of Dublin
in 1842, who, from a careful examination of the deposits of
the Liffey, after a perusal of Ehrenberg’s paper on the Mud
Banks in the Harbour of Wismar, was led to a different con-
clusion; and stated it as his opinion that a few species of
Navicula, not comprising 1-1000th part of the mass, were the
only organized forms that occurred in the mud deposited by
that river. The cause of this he attributes to the fact of the
source of the river being so short a distance from the sea, and,
having its rise in the mountains of Wicklow, the rapidity
* Microscopic Journal, vol ii., p. 68.
Roper, on the Diatomacee of the Thames. 69
of the current is so great, that the germs of these minute
organisms have not time to increase and multiply as they do
in more sluggish streams, flowing for a long distance through
alluvial deposits.
A similar occurrence of marine Diatomacee at a considerable
distance from the sea has, however, been noticed by Professor
Bailey, in America, who, in his ‘ Microscopical Observations
on South Carolina and Georgia,’ published by the Smithsonian
Institution, expresses the surprise with which he found in
Lake Monroe, 200 miles from the mouth of the St. John’s
river, specimens of Amphiprora constricta, Odontella poly-
morpha, and Navicula elongata, which he considered decidedly
marine, and which had often occurred to him on the shores of
the Atlantic.
I now proceed to give lists of the species from different
localities in the Thames, placing those from the Isle of Dogs
first, and comparing them with the forms from Hammersmith
and near Gravesend ; and though I have been unable at pre-
sent to examine the deposits of the two latter localities so as
to give more than a general view of the species, yet these are
sufficiently well marked to show the distribution of those
peculiar to marine and fresh water.
In all the localities many species of Melosira, Odontidium,
and other genera occur, which, from the want of good figures,
I have been unable to name. The well-marked frustules o!
those figured in the first volume of the Rey. William Smith’s
valuable synopsis have been easily recognized, from the ex-
tremely accurate figures there given. In all cases where any
doubt existed, I have referred to slides of the species authen-
ticated by Mr. Smith himself. In some few instances I am
indebted to his kind assistance, and also to his able coadjutor,
Mr. West, for the determination of forms I was unable
satisfactorily to identify, and in a few others I have depended
on the figures of Kiitzing’s work on the Diatomacee. One if
not two species of Dictyocha occur in the mud from the Isle of
Dogs, but I have excluded them from the list, as there appears
some doubt if they can be correctly referred to the same order.
Marine and Brackish Water Species from the Isle of Dogs.
1. Epithemia sorex 9. Eupediscus argus
2. F musculus | SO; - fulvus
3. Amphora affinis 12. u radiatus
4. SS hyalina 12. 2 sculptus
5. Cocconeis scutellum 13. Actinocyclus undulatus
6 if diaphana 14, fs sedenarius ?
7. Coscinodiscus radiatus 15. Triceratium favus
8 7 eccentricus 16, ee striolatum
h 2
Roper, on the Diatomacee of the Thames.
39. Navicula Jennerii
40. “ pusilla
4l. 3 elegans
42. Pinnularia directa
43. “4 distans
44, ts peregrina
45. Stauroneis pulchella
46. Pleurosigma hippocampus
47. 53 strigilis
48. Synedra gracilis
49. » crystallina
50. i superba
say) ES » tabulata
52. Doryphora amphiceros
53. Boéckii
54. Odontella aurita
. Podosira Montagnei
. Grammatophora marina
. Zygoceros rhombus
. Melosira nummuloides
. Achnanthes (a spec.)
Fresh-water Species,
17. Triceratium undulatum
18. alternans
Ne), Cyclotella Kiitzingiana
20. Campylodiscus cribrosus
21. bi-costatus
22. Surirella Brightwellii
23. A ovata
24, F gemma
25. ae fastuosa
26. salina
Zhe” Ley; blionella marginata
28. 9 punctata
29. 7, acuminata
30. KA gracilis
31. Nitzschia sigma
32, x angularis
33. - parvula
34 93 dubia
35. Amphiprora alata
36. Navicula elliptica
37. A didyma
38. 5 punctulata
1. Epithemia turgida
2. a alpestris
3. argus
4, Cymbella Ehrenbergii
5. ae maculata
6. sy cuspidata
{6 ve helvetica
8. Amphora ovalis
9. Cocconeis placentula
10. Campyllodiscus costatus
11. Surirella biseriata
12. . pinnata
13. Cymatopleura solea
14. a elliptica
15. Nitzschia sigmoidea
16 Pr linearis
17.. Navicula ovalis
18. 5 producta
19. ., rhyncocephala
20. i inflata
21. 55 eibberula
22. amphisboena
23. Pinnularia acuta
24,
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31,
32.
33.
34,
35.
36.
37:
38.
39.
40,
41.
42°
43.
44,
| 45.
Pinnularia viridis
ve oblonga
5 major
a radiosa
Stauroneis linearis
4 Pheenicenteron
S anceps
Pleurosigma attenuatum
Synedra radians
Cocconema lanceolatum
5 parvum
a cistula
Gomphonema acuminatum
“5 capitatum
a curvaium
is constrictum
ay cristatum
dichotomum
Odontidium hyemale
Fragillaria capucina
Tabellaria ventricosa
Diatoma vulgare
From this list it appears that out of one hundred and four
species, fifty-nine are peculiar to marine and brackish water,
of which thirty are decidedly marine.
The following six
species are, however, all that are identical with those included
in M. Ehrenberg’s lists from Gliicksiadt and Hamburg, viz. :
Coscinodiscus radiatus and eccentricus, Triceratium favus,
Surirella gemma, Eupodiscus argus, identical with T'ripodiscus
Rorer, on the Diatomacee of the Thames. 71
germanicus and Actinocyclus undulatus, probably identical with
Actinoptychus senarius. This would seem to show that though
the general results were similar, yet from some peculiarity,
either in the water or the distribution of these minute
organisms, the species abounding in the rivers of the north of
Europe are marked with a distinctive character from those
found in the Thames. The prevailing form in the Elbe ap-
pears to be the Actinocyclus, and its allied genus Actinoptychus
of Ehrenberg, of which he enumerates no less than fourteen
species out of the thirty-four marine forms that he recognised.
On comparing with the foregoing list from the Isle of Dogs,
the species which occur in the mud at Hammersmith and near
Gravesend, it appears, that though a few marine forms are
still found at the former locality, yet the preponderance of
fresh-water species is very great ; whilst at the latter the marine
and brackish water species, with a few exceptions, alone
occur.
The following lists include all I have at present met with
from those localities :—
Marine and Brackish Water Species from the Thames near Gravesend.
1, Epithemia musculus 21. Nitzschia angularis
2. Cocconeis scutellum | 22. Amphiprora alata
3. Coscinodiscus eccentricus 23. Navicula Jennerii
4, i radiatus 24, = didyma
5. 5 marginatus ? 25 “ punctulata
6. Eupodiscus argus 26, Pinnularia cyprinus
": ~ crassus 27. Stauroneis salina
8. Actinocyclus undulatus 28. Pleurosigma angulatum
9: ee sedenarius ? 29, - hippocampus
10. Triceratium favus 30. ss Balticum
iG ae alternans 31. Doryphora amphiceros
12. Campylodiscus cribrosus 32. Achnanthes brevipes
13. Surirella ovata 33. Grammatophora marina
14, = gemma 34, Podosira Montagnei
ine a fastuosa 35. Melosira nummuloides
16. Tryblionella acuminata 36, Bs suleata
Nits marginata 37. = salina
18. - punctata 38. Odontella aurita
19. Nitzschia sigma 39. Orthosira marina
20. ,, dubia
Fresh-water Species from Gravesend.
1. Cocconeis placentula 5. Navicula minutula
2. Coscinodiscus minor 6. Synedra ulna
8. Nitzschia sigmoidea 7. Cocconema cistula
4, Navicula cuspidata 8. Cyclotella rotula
Marine and Brackish Water Species from the Thames near Hammersmith,
1. Amphora membranacea
2. Coscinodiscus eccentricus
3. Actinocyclus undulatus
4,
Surirella Brightwellii
5. Tryblionella gracilis
6.
acuminata
72 Roper, on the Diatomacee of the Thames.
7. Nitzschia sigma 11. Pleurosigma hippocampus
8. Nitzschia parvula 12. Doryphora amphiceros
9. Navicula elliptica 13. Gomphonema marinum
10. Pinnularia directa 14. Odontella aurita
Fresh-water Species from the same Place.
1. Epithemia turgida 16. Pinnularia viridula
2. Cymbella Ehrenbergii iG - stauroneiformis
3. Amphora ovalis 18. Pleurosigma attenuatum
4. Cocconeis placentula 19. Synedra ulna
5. Campylodiscus costatus 20. Cocconema cymbiforme
6. Surirella biseriata 21, He cistula
7. Cymatopleura solea 22. Gomphonema acuminatum
8. 5 elliptica 23. 4 constrictum
9. “3 apiculata 24, Fragillaria virescens
10, Nitzschia sigmoidea 25. Diatoma vulgare
11. Navicula amphisboena 26. Melosira arenaria
12. a crassinervia 27. 3 varians
13. a inflata 28. Fragilaria capucina
14, 93 euspidata 29. Coscinodiseus minor
15. + amphirhynchus
From these lists it appears that at Gravesend, out of forty-
seven species, eight only are decidedly peculiar to fresh water ;
whilst at Hammersmith we find there are twenty-nine fresh-
water species out of a total of forty-three ; showing, however,
that the influence of the flood-tide, even at that distance from
the sea, gives a decided character to the Diatomacee deposited
by the water. The following ten species are all that are
common to the three localities :— Coscinodiscus eccentricus,
Actinocyclus undulatus, Tryblionella acuminata, Nitzschia sigma,
Pleurosigma hippocampus, Deryphora amphiceros, Odontella
aurita, Cocconeis placentula, Nitzschia sigmoidea, and Cocconema
cistula, of which the three latter alone are peculiar to fresh
water. These are all forms which more extended observation
on the deposits of other river and estuary deposits will pro-
bably prove to be most universal in their distribution. I have
found most of them in the mud of the Avon from Bristol, and
also in that deposited at Pembroke Harbour; but it will re-
quire a careful examination of many other deposits to prove
that any have a purely local habitat, or are entirely confined
to sea or fresh water.
The following species which occur in the Thames have also
been found by Professor Bailey in America, recorded in ‘Sil-
liman’s Journal of Sciences’ for 1845, vol. xviii. p. 837 :—
In the Mud from Charleston Harbour.
Actinocyclus senarius _ Rhaphoneis amphiceros
Coscinodiscus eccentricus | rhombus
Eupodiseus argus Triceratium favus
Pinnularia didyma | : Zygoceros rhombus
Pleurosigma Baltieum
Roper, on the Diatomacee of the Thames. 73
And in the Mud from Newhaven Harbour.
Actinocyclus senarius Pinnularia peregrina
Coscinodiseus eccentricus y didyma
Gallionella sulcata Rhaphoneis rhombus
Grammatophora marina
A proof of the widely-extended distribution of these species.
From the first of the foregoing lists I have selected a few
species for more particular notice, and annex drawings of the
most interesting, on the scale adopted by Mr. Smith, namely,
400 diameters.
There is a large species of Cocconeis (PI. VI. fig. 1), elliptical
in form, and marked longitudinally with undulating striz, and
also with faint transverse lines, concentric with the extremities
of the valve, but only visible with a high power and oblique
light. ‘The perfectly elliptic form and peculiarity of the cross
striae seem to distinguish it from the C. placentula of Mr.
Smith ; but I am doubtful whether it may not be a variety of
that species.
Of the four species of Hupodiscus, the most plentiful is
E. radiatus, which, from one specimen, in which three frustules
were conjoined, may probably sometimes occur concatenated,
in a similar way to. Odontella aurita. E. sculptus, the most
peculiar in its markings, is rarely met with; and £. fulvus
and argus are sparingly distributed. The latter shows the
delicate hexagonal reticulations alluded to by Professor Quekett
as marking the Tripodiscus Rogersit of Professor Bailey. The
star-shaped cells appear, when seen by direct light, to be
placed in the centre of small bosses or protuberances, in which
it differs from all other Diatomacee that | am acquainted with,
The Actinocyclus undulatus of Mr. Smith’s Synopsis occurs
abundantly. This species appears to include the Act?-
noptychus senarius of Ehrenberg and Kiitzing ; but after a
careful examination of many specimens, [ have been unable
to make out any undulations similar to those of fig. 4, in
Piate V. of the Synopsis, in the large species that occur in the
Thames and elsewhere; and although a multiplication of
species is a point carefully to be avoided without good
grounds, it appears to me that the appellation undulatus
should be confined to a small form, in which these undula-
tions distinctly occur, and the large and well-known species
retain the name originally applied to it by M. Ehrenberg,
namely, A. senarius.
Sparingly distributed, I have another large and beautiful
dise (fig. 2), with sixteen septa, the surface of which is covered
with faint cross striae, similar to those of Plewrosigma ; and in
* See Histological Catalogue, p. 212.
74 Rorer, on the Diatomacee of the Thames.
that respect it resembles the valves from Natal, for which
Mr. Shadbolt proposed the name of Actinophenia ; but I find
this striation is no distinctive character, as all the specimens
of A. undulatus (or senarius) that I have examined have the
same peculiarity, and the septa are plainly discernible, espe-
cially with the parabolic condenser. In the lists I have ap-
plied to it provisionally the name of Actinocyclus sedenarius,
as it approaches very nearly to Ehrenberg’s figure of that
species in the ‘Berlin Transactions’ for 1839, tab. 4, p. 2.
The septa appear to have their origin from the smooth central
portion or pseudo-nodule, and to terminate at slight eleva-
tions or openings at the margin of the disc, and in perfect
specimens those on one valve are opposite to the mterspaces
on the other. The front view exhibits slight traces of undu-
lations, as in fig. 18, not in continuous waved lines, but rising
to points at the extremities of the rays, giving the side view
an appearance similar to that of a ridge-and-furrow roof. ‘The
diameter varies from 1-288th to 1-187th of an inch.
Of the genus Triceratium four species occur. A small one,
by no means uncommon, is represented by fig. 38, which
I consider the J’ striolatum of Ehrenberg; it has convex
sides, small horn-like processes at the angles, which are rather
obtuse, and is marked with minute dots or cells, radiating
from the centre. In the determination of this species I am,
after a careful examination, compelled to differ from Mr.
Brightwell, who, in his monograph of this genus in a late
Number of the ‘ Microscopical Journal,’ refers to a Paper by
M. Ehrenberg in the ‘ Berlin Transactions’ for 1839, in which
there is a figure of T. striolatum, and the following description
of the species: —“‘ Testulz lateribus triquetris convexis, angulis
sub-acutis, superficie subtilissime punctato-lineata, dorsi cin-
gulo medio levi;” and yet Mr. Brightwell describes it as
with ‘concave ends,” and figures it with concave sides; and
in the frustules I have seen of his species, the central band on
the front view is punctate or cellular, whereas it is described
by Ehrenberg as smooth. 'The cellular structure of the side
view is also so plainly apparent, that it would hardly have
been described as “ subtilissime punctato-lineata ” by so careful
an observer. Looking, therefore, at Ehrenberg’s figure and
description, I should conclude that the species figured by
Mr. Brightwell cannot be the T. striolatwm, but should re-
ceive some other appellation. The concave sides would seem
to refer it to T. pileus of Ehrenberg; but I have not seen a
figure or full description of that species.
Triceratium alternans of Bailey is rarely met with ; and I
have only one specimen of J. undulatum, in which the peculiar
Roper, on the Diatomacee of the Thames. 75
projection of the posterior valve beyond the undulating sides
of the upper, as noticed by Mr. Brightwell in his Paper before
alluded to, is plainly shown.
Campylodiscus costatus and cribrosus are frequently met
with. Another small species is represented by fig. 4, which
Mr. Smith informs me he has named bi-costatus, and that he
will give a figure of it in the addenda to his second volume.
In appearance it so much resembles C. clypeus, that I had
applied that name to it, especially as that species is included
in Ehrenberg’s lists as occurring at Gliickstadt, Hamburg, and
some localities in Holland, and was found by Professor Bailey
in Lake Monroe. The valve is nearly circular, saddle-shaped,
canaliculi about forty, distinct, length at the sides about half
the radius, at the ends much shorter. The central portion
has two narrow bands of coste parallel with the terminations
of the side canaliculi, Diameter is about 1-384th of an
inch,
The most abundant species in all the slides I have examined
is represented by figs. 7 to 10, which I believe would all
be included as varieties of Doryphora amphiceros by Mr.
Smith, and as different species of Rhaphoneis by Ehrenberg
and Kiitzing. The difference of form is so great, and the
peculiarity of the cellular markings so apparent, that they
appear to furnish data for specific distinction quite as gued
as are afforded in many species of Wavicula and Plewrosigma.
Not having Ehrenberg’s figures or descriptions to refer to,
I am guided solely by the “species Algarum” of Professor
Kiitzing. Fig. 7, from its lanceolate form, strong granular
markings, and well-marked median line, might probably be
referred to Rhaphoneis gemmifera. The length varies from
1-319th to 1-320th of an inch; breadth, about 1-1090th of an
inch: it occurs but sparingly. Fig. 8 is rarely met with, but
is readily distinguished by its more robust form, the greater
delicacy of its striz, and the slightly marked and nearly
parallel sides of its median line. The length is 1-349th of
an inch, and breadth 1-779th of an inch. It would be referred
to Rhaphoneis fasciolata. Fig. 9 is exceedingly common, and
in the size of its markings resembles fig. 7, but differs in
being more concentric, and nearly obliterating the median
line at the acute extremities of the valve. The breadth of
the valve is also much greater in proportion to the length.
The length is 1-600th of an inch, and breadth 1-1224th of
an inch. It agrees with Rhaphoneis pretiosa. Fig. 10 is
widely different from any of the preceding, and is by no
means abundant. The valves are very diaphanous, the mark-
ings faint, median line obscure, and form sub-orbicular, the
76 Rover, on the Diatomacee of the Thames.
apices being very short; the length is 1-588th to 1-779th of
an inch, and breadth 1-1034th to 1-968th of an inch. I
should refer it to Rhaphoneis rhombus. The only point of
distinction between this genus and the Doryphora of Pro-
fessor Kiitzing appears to be the presence of a stipes; and it
would be a point of some interest to determine whether
these forms are attached in a similar manner, or whether, as
I imagine from the abundance with which they occur, and the
absence of any direct negative observations, the frustules are
free as in Navicula.
A large and well-marked species is represented by fig. 5,
which has not, I believe, been hitherto figured as British. I
have been unable to obtain a front view of a perfect frustule,
though the single valves are by no means uncommon, By a
comparison with some specimens of Zygoceros rhombus from
Petersburg, Virginia, kindly lent me by Professor Quekett,
I have little doubt that it can safely be referred to that
species,* as the only difference is, that in the Thames spe-
cimens, the side view of the valves is rather broader in
proportion to the length. The valves are nearly rhomboidal,
slightly produced at the extremities, and terminate in a pro-
jecting tubular horn or spine. The surface is minutely
punctate with small hexagonal cells, radiating from the
centre, and has from three to six small spinous processes at
the sides, with two rather longer at the extremities of the
valve. The length varies from 1-300th to 1-183rd of an inch,
and breadth from 1-575th to 1-260th of an inch, :
Figs. 11 and 12 are, I believe, front and side views of
Zygoceros surirella of Ehrenberg. I have only met with one
specimen of the perfect frustules, represented by fig. 14, which
agrees in form with the figure given by him in the ‘ Berlin
Transactions’ for 1839, tab. 4, fig. 12, and shows the smooth
central band and striations, which distinguish the side view.
Fig. 16, which I consider the side view of a larger specimen,
somewhat resembles the genus Rhaphoneis, but differs, in
the markings being nearly parallel, and though granular, so
confluent as almost to appear as lines; the central smooth
portion terminates in two lobes, corresponding with the pro-
jections, which appear at the extremities when the front view
is obtained, ‘The length is 1-714th to 1-1240th of an inch,
and breadth 1-1500th to 1-2500th of an inch. I have met
with the same species in the deposits of Pembroke Harbour.
Fig. 6 a and d represents a small cross-shaped valve that
occurs sparingly, which Mr. Smith, from a drawing, thought
* The genus Zygoceros is included by Mr. Smith in that of Biddulphia ;
this will, therefore, be the Biddulphia rhombus of the ‘ Synopsis.’
Roper, on the Diatomacee of the Thames. 77
might be referred to his Odontidium tabellaria: it is peculiar,
from the strongly-marked cross striz, which occur on each side
of the valve; the length is 1-1385th and the breadth 1-1750th
of an inch. The form of the valve is similar to Ehrenberg’s
figure of Staurosira construens,* which he describes ‘as a
four-angled Fragilaria, separated from the nearly allied genus
of Amphitetras, by the absence of openings at the four angles,+
but without authentic specimens for comparison, it is im-
possible, from the small outline figure he gives, to refer it
with certainty to this genus. Mr. West informs me he has
met with it from many other localities} From the Thames
near Gravesend I have lately obtained a large and fine spe-
eimen of Coscinodiseus, about the 1-107th of an inch in
diameter. It has a smooth spot in the centre of the valve, and
with that exception is covered with hexagonal cells, radiating
towards the circumference. Mr. Smith informs me it is quite
new to him, but approaches somewhat to C. marginatus, but
differs from the descriptions given of that species. I have at
present no other forms, either from this locality or at Hammer-
smith, that call for special notice.
From the foregoing observations it appears that at the
distance of at least fifty miles from the sea, the deposits of
the Thames are still, to a certain extent, influenced by marine
forms of life, and that at Greenwich, which is about forty
miles from the mouth of the river, a most distinct marine
character is shown by the examination of the species of
Diatomacee which occur there. I think it very probable
that many species are only brought up by the flood-tide, and
being unable to exist in the slightly-brackish water, the
siliceous skeletons are merely deposited in those parts of the
river least subject to disturbing causes, and that they would
rarely be met with in a living state. That they have a per-
ceptible influence on the formation of shoals and mud-banks
in the bed of the river there can be no doubt; and the great
abundance and general distribution of species serve to illus-
trate the occurrence of similar deposits in a fossil state, at
localities now far removed, by alterations in the earth’s surface,
from the streams or harbours in which they were originally
deposited.
Another point, probably worthy of attention, is the in-
fluence these organisms have in the formation of deltas at the
* See Berlin Academy Transactions, 1847, tab. 1, fig. 44.
+ See Berlin Academy Proceedings, 1843, p. 45.
~ From specimens I have lately seen of Odontidium Harrisonii, W. S.,
I am inclined to believe that this may be a small form of that species
rather than 0. tabellaria. As it is a doubtful form I have not included it
in the lists.
78 Roper, on the Diatomacee of the Thames.
mouths of large and slowly-flowing rivers, such, for instance,
as the Mississippi, in which the mean velocity of the current
at New Orleans is only about one mile and a half per hour
for the whole body of water. Sir Charles Lyell, from expe-
riments on the proportion of sediment carried down by the
river, has calculated that, taking the area of the delta at 13,600
square miles, and the quantity of solid matter brought down
annually at 3,702,758,400 cubic feet, it must have taken 67,000
years for the formation of the whole.* Now, as the siliceous
frustules ot the Diatomacee are secreted from the water alone,
and would most probably be extremely abundant in so
sluggish a stream (especially as Professor Bailey has found
both marine and fresh-water species abundant in the rice-
grounds), there can be little doubt that, without taking the
larger proportion noticed by Ehrenberg in the Elbe, even if it
were considerably less, it would reduce the above period by
several thousand years, and the same cause would probably
apply with equal force to the Ganges and Nile. M. Ehren-
berg considered that at Pillau there are annually deposited
from the water from 7,200 to 14,000 cubic metres of fine
microscopic organisms, which in the course of a century
would give a deposit of from 720,000 to 1,400,000 cubic
metres of infusory rock or Tripoli stone.
My principal object in the foregoing paper has been to
direct the attention of microscopists more particularly to the
Diatomacee* deposited by rivers and in tidal harbours, not only
in those localities where they occur in overwhelming abun-
dance, on the surface of quiet estuary waters, but in the mud
itself, in which many of the rarer forms, and doubtless many
new species, are yet to be found, That such an examination
is still a desideratum is, I think, shown by the fact that out of
the 279 species described by Mr. Smith in the first volume of
his ‘Synopsis,’ only six are given as inhabitants of the
Thames, and a very limited number to the Avon, Orwell, and
some other rivers; whilst the Severn, the Mersey, and many
of our tidal harbours are altogether unnoticed.
That examinations of this nature may sometimes prove
useful in an economical point of view is very probable, parti-
cularly as it has been noticed that the best samples of guano
contain the greatest number of these siliceous skeletons, which
doubtless serve to replace the large amount of silica ab-
stracted from the soil by the cereal crops. Hence it is pro-
bable that the deposits of many of our rivers would have a
beneficial effect if applied to the land, and it rests with the
microscopist to point out the most favourable localities for
* Lyell’s Principles of Geology, 8th edit., p. 219.
Roper, on the Diatomacee of the Thames. 79
obtaining it. Ehrenberg notices an instance where this has
been done in Jeverland, where a blue sand, abounding in cal-
careous and siliceous shells, is collected, and greatly increases
the fertility of the arable soil to which it is applied; and
Professor Bailey also states that the mud of Newhaven har-
bour is used as a fertilizer, and is found to contain 58°63
per cent. of silica.
The distribution of the lower forms of Algae, particularly
the Diatomacee, is probably more extended, both in point of
time and geographical range, than any other class of or-
ganized beings. Thus we see associated with gigantic reptiles
and other extinct forms, several existing species of Diatomacee
occurring in the chalk formation before the deposition of the
tertiary strata, proving that the Eocene group is not strictly
entitled to that designation, but that the dawn of the world in
which we live extends much further back in the history of our
planet.* And with respect to their local distribution, Dr.
Hooker, in alluding to the deposits of the Victoria Bar-
rier in the Atlantic Ocean, remarks,+ “‘ There is probably no
latitude between Spitzbergen and Victoria Land where some
of the species of other countries do not exist. Iceland, Britain,
the Mediterranean Sea, North and South America, all possess
antarctic Diatomacee. The siliceous coats of species only
known living in the waters of the South Polar Ocean have
during past ages contributed to the formation of rocks, and
thus they outlive several successive generations of organized
beings. The Phonolite stones of the Rhine, and the Tripoli
stone, contain species identical with what are now contri-
buting to form a sedimentary deposit (and perhaps at a future
period, of rock), extending in one continuous stratuia for 400
miles.”
With the distribution of these forms in our own country
we are only at present partially acquainted, and the prepara-
tion, therefore, of carefully-compiled lists of species from
different localities is still a point to be desired, and might
probably lead to some interesting generalizations.
In conclusion, I have only to hope that this slight attempt
to bring before the Society the results of a careful examination
of the Thames deposits may induce other and more expe-
rienced observers to take up the same subject in other locali-
ties. The facts | have brought forward are sufficient to
afford, in the words of an excellent observer and late member
of this Society, ‘‘a striking proof of the important part which
* Humboldt’s Cosmos, p. 265.
{ Dr. Hooker, Flora Antarctica, vol. ii., p. 505.
t Mr. Edwin J. Quekett, in London Physiol. Journ. Feb, 1844, p. 145.
80 Roper, on the Diatomacee of the Thames.
these minute organisms were created to perform in the depo-
sition of materials for the earth’s surface, and stamp upon
reflecting minds that no creature, even the most minute, is
formed without special purposes ; and that the least in size of
all, by the organization given to them by the great Architect
of the Universe, have been employed to carry out his un-
fathomable intentions.”
Ree? ORT
OF
THE FOURTEENTH ANNUAL MEETING
OF THE
MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.
Tue Microscopical Society of London held their Fourteenth
Annual Meeting, February 15th, 1854,—Grorce Jackson,
Esq , President, in the Chair. The Assistant Secretary read
the following Reports :—
Report of Council.—According to annual custom, the Council
have to make a Report on the state and progress of the Society
during the past year.
The number of members at the last anniversary was—ordi-
nary members 198, associates and honorary 5, giving a total
of 203. Since that time there have been elected 28, making
the total number 231. This number must, however, be re-
duced by 3, who have retired, making a final total of 228,
and being an increase of 25 upon the number at the last
anniversary.
The cabinet of objects and the library have been increased
by various donations ; and there are also in the possession of
the Society various drawings and diagrams relating chiefly to
papers read at the meetings of the Society, together with
copies of the several parts of the Transactions and of the
Journal,
The Council have also to state that, in consequence of the
great inconvenience of the present rooms, they have decided
upon removing from them. The Society will return to the
rooms of the Horticultural Society in Regent-street, if possible,
by the meeting on the 29th March.
VOL. Il. i
Fourteenth Report of
84
“Pl “SP 16S% AOU SI AJalo0g ay} 0} SUISuOTEq sjosuop *juap sed ¢ Jo JUNOMIY OY, »
“HTAOE “V “A
‘sore “TVOaUdad “H
"POs ‘ArenIqe7 WET sup peaoidde puy pourmex
; 00 ¢ "ort os 8 8s goueIANeT “IPT Wor uoreUOGg
Gong © =: * Span Ur compre OL L opax
Oars Tere es = sg SORUOO PG SST WSris0 Sseyerng, —
fa) ie te S099 ‘emaysog ‘Arenonere SO aeliGle ise oy a i,
ES eae ae = : on 2. D PSST ‘Arenuep 0} sjos
o 916 eee oF eb “W0D “PTT “8G “2018 Uo spuaprarq omy,
0 0 eL * ‘ox ‘Aqdvisoyyry ‘sytodoy ‘suonovsuviy, SuyULIg € 9 Bl PIOs suowousueLT, jo saidor)
9 SITSLT ° * * * * * * * apatog 9e “op “syuoumyserzoy OF 885-0 ~ | so PSel DUsSeer ie reer
L OLOL °° °° ‘OR {TO ‘seg ‘SsSunaeyt ye couepuoiyy ‘TS81. srwad OY} Oy syuomdeg jenuuy
is sos es ete 8 +s (qana0g) weUTyATy “ 0 & GF > * * (oMquo0s wad ge
0 OL G : a * peysoaut Usaq AVY Yor) suo1sodutoy
Ore. 17 2 o> Mat + ~Arepineg gueqewsy 0 8~ 09 ‘+ + sraquiapy Jo eomenag tog
0233 ee ee eee Hoe OIMINO MO Aiea D'S °F
CMisee0G= Meio es Se oS 22 BUOY Jo quay og T-8 ze °° * * * * ‘avoX snoraerd a3 wos souepeg
“D3 °F Le omg 5
"SINUWAV *SLdTGOa yy
"PEST ‘YIeT Aaenaqa,y 04 ‘gegt ‘eT Arenaqag wo1g
‘SUOLIGAV GHL FO LWOday
the Microscopical Society. 85
The President delivered the following Address :—
GENTLEMEN,—I have much pleasure in again congratu-
lating you on the state of our finances; for, although the
balance in hand is only twelve pounds more than that of last
year, yet we have been enabled to pursue our usual course of
investing the compositions received from life-members, and
have thus increased our funded property from 210/. 5s. 11d.
to 2591. 4s. ld. It is the opinion of some who have had ex-
perience in these matters, that a society which judiciously
expends its yearly income is in a more healthy condition than
one which hoards a large portion of it, and that therefore we
ought carefully to avoid becoming rich. Until, however, our
dividends form a much larger proportion of our annual assets
than they do at present, we need entertain no fears on this
head ; while the possession of a reserve fund to fall back upon
in case of need cannot be regarded as an evil.
By the arrangement which has been made with the editors
for the supply of the ‘ Microscopical Journal’ gratuitously to
all our members, and by the prompt publication of our trans-
actions, which have been brought down to the end of the year,
a steady increase both of members and papers may be reason-
ably expected ; of which [ trust the experience of the past
year is but the commencement. Twenty-eight new members
have been elected, and twelve papers, many of them of con-
siderable interest, have been read.
That of Professor Wheatstone, on the application of bino-
cular vision to the microscope, has pointed out the advantages
we may expect to derive from this principle, when certain
optical difficulties have been overcome; and Mr. Wenham,
by his ingenious contrivances and admirable workmanship,
has vanquished some of these difficulties, and given us a
glimpse of the benefits in store for us.
The modification of artificial light by the intervention of
coloured glasses has often been attempted, but it has generally
been found to impair definition. The combination proposed
by Mr. Rainey, for the purpose of stopping the heating rays,
although it sensibly diminishes the light, appears to answer
remarkably well.
Dr. W. Gregory, Mr. Shadbolt, and Mr. Roper have con-
tributed papers on Diatomacez. The latter, on those of the
Thames, is particularly interesting, as opening a field of
research in our own vicinity, the specimens being obtained
from localities with which we are all acquainted.
Mr. Legg’s paper on sponge-sand contains many hints
86 _ Fourteenth Report of
which collectors and mounters of objects will find useful in
their pursuits. Mr. Boswell has communicated an interesting
fact on the mode of progression of Actinophrys Sol. His
subsequent paper on the bird’s-head processes in Polyzoa had
been anticipated by the accurate and more extended observa-
tions of Mr. Busk, read two months before. The valuable
paper of Professor Quekett, on “ a combustible mineral from
the coal measures of Torbane Hill,’ clearly demonstrates the
presence, not merely of the remains of plants, but of a peculiar
woody structure in every description of coal, and the absence
of this peculiar structure in the mineral in question.
In microscopic botany we have been favoured with two
interesting communications: one by Dr. Hobson, on the
development of tubular structure ; and the other on the disease
affecting the vine, by Mr. T. West.
As most of these papers have been already published, a
more extended analysis of them would only be tedious. I
would rather occupy a few minutes in considering how far this
Society, during the fourteen years of its existence, has accom-
plished the objects which its founders had in view at its
formation.
On turning back to our “ History, Constitution, and Laws,”
we find it recorded that one of these objects was the ‘* promo-
tion of improvements in the optical and mechanical construc-
tion of the microscope.” With the improvements which
have been made in the construction of object-glasses, the
Society for many years had but little to do; although, by
promoting the use of the instrument, and by keeping alive a
spirit of rivalry between the different makers, it was not
altogether without influence. Recently, however, an amateur
among our own members has demonstrated the possibility of
getting good definition with an angular aperture that admits
of no appreciable increase ; and has thrown out suggestions,
which, if carried into effect, will be productive of still further
advantages.
In the mechanical construction of the instrument, and in
the different methods of illumination, so many improvements
have been made by our members, that I should take up too
much of your time were I to attempt to enumerate them.
The next object proposed for the Society, “ the communi-
cation and discussion of observations and discoveries,” has
constituted the principal occupation of our hours of meeting;
and for the interest and variety of the subjects, I need only
refer to the volumes of our ‘Transactions.’
These observations have been altogether the result of imdi-
vidual and self-directed researches; but it is worthy of con-
the Microscopical Society. 87
sideration whether more might not have been done had we
adopted the co-operative and systematic mode of proceeding
recommended by our first President. That Professor Owen’s
suggestions may not altogether be lost sight of, I will, with
your permission, quote a paragraph or two from his Address at
our Second Anniversary !
After remarking on the importance of conceiving clearly
the aim of our researches, and giving a right direction to our
exertions, he says: “ A slight glance even at the classes of
natural objects, of which the intimate structure remains but
partially, if at all, known, will suffice to show us how many
are the subjects that might be profitably selected by an indi-
vidual or a committee for a systematic series of microscopical .
observations. In the animal kingdom, for example, how little
we know of the modifications of the microscopical structure of
shells recent and fossil, of the stony habitations of the nume-
rous class of polypes, of the crustaceous coverings of the
annulose animals, of the calcareous coverings of the Echino-
dermata, or of the bones in different classes of animals, and in
different parts of the skeleton of the same animal !
“In Mineralogy how much remains to be done in the
microscopical investigation of different classes of rocks, as of
oblites, of sands, flints, &e.
“If committees were appointed to take different subjects
of minute research under their respective care, in how short
a time might a vast body of microscopical facts be accu-
mulated !”
Selecting a few subjects from the Professor’s list, let us see
what the systematic researches of three individuals, quite dis-
tinctly carried on, have effected. The structure of shells has
been ably investigated both by Dr. Carpenter and by Mr.
Bowerbank ; the structrue of flints and agates also by the
latter ; and that of bones, developing general views of much
importance, by our indefatigable Secretary.
Had committees been appointed, as Professor Owen sug-
gested, and had their members worked with half the zeal and
assiduity displayed by these three gentlemen, what a vast
body of microscopical facts might by this time have been
accumulated !
The “ formation of an arranged collection of microscopical
objects” was another of the ends proposed to be effected by
the Society ; but, considering the number of our Members,
and that many of them are dextrous manipulators, frequently
engaged in mounting specimens, the progress made in
stocking our cabinet is by no means a subject of congratula-
tion. The last object proposed to be attained was “ the esta-
88 _ Fourteenth Report of
blishment of a library of standard microscopical books.”
Here also, although something has been done, we have no
cause for boasting. But if every Member who wishes to
refer to such works, and cannot find what he wants in our
library, were to address a note to the Council, giving the title
of the book needed, we should gradually have these deficien-
cies supplied.
There are one or two subjects of microscopical investigation
that do not appear to have attracted our attention so much as
might be wished.
Some communications from the Rev. J. B. Reade, in the
early days of the Society, served to show that the microscope
might be made of great utility in delicate chemical re-
searches; and a paper by Dr. Bird Herapath, in the Fifth
Number of the ‘ Microscopical Journal,’ strongly confirms
this view ; but, with the exception of some incidental notices
of the application of chemical tests to determine the nature
of organic structure, very little of chemical microscopy has
come before this Society. For this there may be a sufficient
reason; the subject is a special one, and chemists may
prefer bringing their microscopical observations before the
Chemical Society, to the alternative of submitting chemical
matters to the Microscopical. How far they are right I will
not determine.
When we look over the list of our Members, and observe
the number of medical men included in it, we may well be
surprised that our ‘ Transactions’ have been enriched with so
few papers on Animal Pathology. Had this been the case
only since the institution of the Pathological Society, a reason
similar to that above assigned might account for it; but even
now it may fairly be questioned whether the accuracy of dis-
coveries in microscopical pathology would not be better
tested by a body of men accustomed to use the instrument,
and to examine matters of all kinds with it, than by ose
who have not had these advantages, however well they may
be acquainted with the general subject.
A physician in a neighbouring country some years ago
announced that, by the aid of the microscope, he had disco-
vered a pathognomonic symptom of pulmonary consumption
in a peculiar egg-shaped body occurring in the sputa. It
was afterwards found that in the hospital to which he was
attached the consumptive patients breakfasted on arrow-root,
and the peculiar bodies were some of the unbroken starch
granules that had stuck to their mouths.
In both the addresses of Professor Bell this want of papers
on Animal Pathology is noticed; and his ideas are so just, and
the Microscopical Society. 89
his language so clear and forcible, that 1 cannot better con-
clude the subject than by quoting the last paragraph from
his Address at our Sixth Anniversary: ‘Let us remember,”
said he, “ that the instrument which we employ is capable of
elucidating subjects of far more importance than the distinc-
tion of species of animalcules, and the demonstration of the
structure of a zoophyte. The relief of suffering, and the sal-
vation of life itself, are amongst the legitimate objects of
microscopic research. Let not our medical members, then,
be satisfied with the mere amusement, or even the bare scien-
tific information to be derived from it; but let them employ
it as an important means of carrying out the great objects of
their profession, in determining the nature of diseased struc-
tures, the distinctions between the healthy and morbid states
of the tissues, and, consequently, in enlarging our means of
restoring health to the sick, ease to the suffering, and life to
the dying.”
It only remains, Gentlemen, for me to express the satisfac-
tion which I feel in resigning this Chair to one whose inti-
mate knowledge of physiology in both its branches, no less
than his general scientific attainments, so eminently qualify
him to preside at our meetings.
It was unanimously resolyed—That the Reports of the
Council and Auditors be received ; and that the Reports, with
the President's Address, be printed.
The election of officers took place ; when the following were
declared elected :—
Officers.
PEPER a ws Dr. CarrENTER.
Geaistirer ee. Oe Sar N. B. Warp, Esq.
aE. Us) a JoHn QUEKETT, Esq.
New Members of Council.
Dr. Lionet Brace.
Joso. Gratton, Esq.
M. MarsuHatt, Esq.
Samu. C, WuiTsreaAD, Esq.
In the place of
Warren De La Rug, Esq.
W. Gittert, Esq.
Joun Ler, Esq., LL.D.
Rosert Wartine'ron, Esq
ae
Hoae, on the Water-Snail. 91
; 4 . 4 Py
as a 8 2 : e*- of x
Observations on the ered and Gafwmsityy the WaTER-
SNalL (Limneus stagnalis). By Japez Hoae, M. REC. S., &e.
(Read March 29th, 1854.) E
*
In submitting the observations which I have the honour of
bringing to the notice of the Fellows of .the Microscopical
Society this evening—on the Development and Growth of
the Water-snail (Limneus stagnalis)—1 do so with considerable
diffidence. When I first gave the subject my special atten-
tion, and began to jot down the remarks that occurred to
me as growing out of my experiences, I was not fully aware
of the extent to which many able investigators had traversed
the same ground before me. So far back as 1754, precisely
a century since, Baker, in his book entitled, ‘ Employment
for the Microscope’ (p. 325), was the earliest to describe
**a small water-snail and its spawn, or eggs, fastened in little
masses, against the sides of the glass,” in which he kept
them. It also engaged the attention of the illustrious
Swammerdam; and, more recently, that of Reaumur and
Dr. Grant. Mr. Bowerbank’s very interesting and careful
observations on the ‘ Structure of the Shells of Mollusca and
Conchifera,’ and the scientific researches of Dr. Carpenter,
have thrown great additional light upon this subject. A brief
record of my own personal investigations, with regard to this
department of microscopic observation can, therefore, present
no signal feature of interest beyond that of confirming and
enforcing the experience of the talented and eminent micro-
scopists who have preceded me. It is with this view that I
venture to lay before the Microscopical Society the few
remarks which I have now the privilege of reading, happy if
I shall have contributed, in however slight a degree, to add in
any way to the store of knowledge already accumulated.
Into a glass vase, where my stock of Chara, Vallisneria, &c.,
is growing, I introduced last Autumn a single Limneus, for
the purpose of observing its habits; I was then more espe-
cially curious to see its mode of creeping along, under the
surface of the water, by means of its fleshy foot. Upon one
occasion, as [I sat watching the movements of the animal,
attached as it then was to the side of the vase, near the surface
of the water, it suddenly became uneasy, moving to and fro,
and ina short time it began to deposit very slowly, through
a fissure near its ventral aperture, a small gelatinous sac,
filled with transparent specks, at the same time firmly gluing
it to the glass. This sac I examined with a pocket magnify-
ing-glass, and found it contained fifty-six ova. Each egg was
VOL. IT. :
92 Hoae, on the Water-Snail.
of an ovoid form, and consisted of a pellucid membrane filled
with a transparent fluid, having a very minute yellow spot, the
yolk, adhering to one ade of the cell-wall. Seen with the
sunlight falline upon it, it had all the brilliant colours of the
soap- -bubble. Viewing it again on the second day, I observed
that the yolk had a eral spot, or nucleolus, rather deeper
coloured than the rest. On the fourth day the yolk had
changed its position, and doubled in size, as shown shghtly
magnified (Plate VII. fig. 1). Upon a closer examination, a
central depression, or transverse fissure, could be seen, which,
on the sixth day, plainly indicated the line of demarcation in
the little mass, as represented at fig. 2. From this time it
commenced to move round the whole interior of the cell, with
a very slow rotatory motion ; the motion was increased when
the sunlight shone upon it, from which I concluded, that, as
it received more heat, its movements were thereby accelerated.
The increase in size of- the two parts of the animal appeared to
be uniform up to the sixteenth day, when the shell apparently
occupied the larger portion, represented at fig. 3; and the
spiral axis, foadd which the calcareous lamelles were being
deposited, had a much darker colour than the soft, or cephalic
extremity. On the eighteenth day the tentacle was visible,
with a small black speck at its root, the eye; this was seen
to be protruded with the movement ‘ot the tentacle. Upon
closely watching it, a fringe of cilia could be seen surrounding
the tentacle Snide al aperture ; and, from observing the direc-
tion of the currents, I am led ie believe that the earliest
rotatory motion is in a great degree, if not wholly, dependent
upon the action of the pile A constant current being kept
up in the cell-contents, we may conclude, that with this
motion, we have the conversion of the cell-contents into the
several tissues ; and probably the whorl-shape of the shell is
likewise due to the same formative process. The rotation
was, on every occasion of my observing it, from the right to
the left, and this always combined with a motion around the
eee 5 fhe embryo performing a circuit, as represented magnified
at fig. 4, and forcibly reminding me of M. Wichura’s scientific
investigations into the curious property possessed by the
ieaeeviot plants, of winding generally in a particular direction.
He observes :—
“Tt is a very remarkable phenomenon, that the cirenlarly or heliacally
acting forces of nature follow an unchanging, definite, lateral direction in
their course. In cosmical nature the planets “describe heliacal lines, wind-
ing to the right in space, by virtue of their circulation from west to east ;
since this is combined with the advance, in company with the sun, towards
a point in the northern hemisphere. In the department of physics we
meet with allied phenomena in the circular polarization of light, and in
Hoae, on the Water-Snail. 93
the course of electro-magnetic spirals. Organic life exhibits the same
laws in the circulation of the blood, in all cases starting from the left side
of the animal body ; and in the heliacal windings of the shells of Mollusks,
which follow a direction determinate for every species. But plants, above
all, give evidence of a wonderful obedience to such laws, in the direction
of the spiral vessels, the heliacally winding trunks of trees, winding stems
and leaves, and probably also in the circulation of their saps.” *
Professor Quekett has directed attention to this subject,
especially with regard to plants, in his ‘ Histological Lec-
tures.’ To proceed :—
From the twenty-sixth to the twenty-eighth day the little
animal was actively engaged in making its way out of the
ege, in the advanced stage represented “at fig. 5, leaving its
shell behind it in the ova-sac, and immediately attaching itself
to the side of the glass. The ciliary motion is then better
seen; each tentacle being surrounded at the extreme edge by
a row of cilia kept in motion by bands of muscular fibre : the
cilia are protruded from beneath the shell, and kept'incessantly
at work, in conjunction with those surrounding the opening to
the taouth : ; thus bringing a constant current AG water for the
zration of the Penehce situated above the oral aperture ;
and at the same time a due supply of nourishment for the
growth of the little animal. And it is a remarkable fact, that,
as soon as the gastric teeth are properly matured to enable
it to cut the vegetable substances growing in the water, the
cilia being no longer required, then disappear, and drop off,
from the tentacles. The tentacles and oral fringe of cilia are
represented magnified, in the drawing, at fig. 6. But if, on
the other hand, the young animal be kept in fresh water
alone, without vegetable matter of any kind, it still retains its
cilia, and attains only to a small size ; it then acquires gastric
teeth, but of a very imperfect character, which never attains
to perfection in form or in size. If at the same time it is
confined to a small narrow cell, it will only grow to such a
size as will enable it to move about freely; thus adapting
itself to the necessities of its existence.
Dr. Grant, I believe, first pointed out the ciliary motion in
the embryo of some salt-water species of Gasteropoda. In
examining the embryos of Buccinum undatum and Purpura
lapillus, which are also enclosed in groups within transparent
sacs, he was struck with an incessant motion of the fluid in
the sac towards the fore-part of the embryo; and he then
noticed that this motion was produced by cilia placed around
two funnel-shaped projections on the fore-part of the young
* M. Wichura, ‘“‘On the Winding of Leaves,” translated by Arthur
Henfrey, F.R.S., ‘ Scientific Memoirs,’ 1853.
k 2
94 Hoge, on the Water-Snail.
animal, which form the borders of a cavity, in which he per-
ceived a constant revolution of floating particles. He also
observed these circles of cilia in the young of the species of
Trochus, Nerita, &c., in which the embryo was seen revolving ~
round its axis. He met with the same appearance in the naked
Gasteropoda, as the Doris, Eolis, &c. ‘The embryo of these
revolve round its centre, and swims rapidly forward by means
of its cilia, when, it escapes from the ovum, Dr. Grant
assigns various uses to these motions, but does not connect
them with respiration or nourishment, although there can be
little doubt that they are so.
In some six weeks, or two months, the flattened form of
the shell becomes gradually changed into that of the conical
form of the full-grown animal (fig. 7).*
That this little creature is hermaphrodite, like the common
snail, is proved by my having only this solitary animal in my
vase; and yet nearly- all the eggs deposited by it arrived at
maturity. Like the common snail it is also copulative, as I
have seen two animals mutually pass a thin tongue-like organ
into a fissure between the body and upper surface of the pos-
terior portion of the foot.
I observed in the few eggs that did not come to maturity
that the yolk only slightly increased in size, and then remained
in that state until all the others were hatched, when the ova-
sac became, the prey of other animals.
This one snail deposited two and three of these ova-sacs
in the course of the week ; and in two months I calculated
that upwards of 800 young would result therefrom; thus
it will be seen, that the number of eggs deposited by each
individual is very great; fully explaining the rapidity with
which this class of animals increases, either on land or in
the water.
The shell, as we have before seen, is begun at a very early
stage in the formative process. It is first observed to have
the shape of minute ovoid cells, which are deposited side by
side around the axis, or central cell ; and this may be
described as a cytoblast, enclosing a certain quantity of colour-
ing matter, just sufficient to give it a distinctive appearance,
from the previously-formed basement membrane. ‘The sides
of one cell being in close contact with those of other cells, a
gradual compression, or elongation, takes place, and we have,
finally, resulting divisional ribs, hardened by the deposition
of calcareous matter into a shelly covering. Subsequently all
trace of the earliest cells and cytoblasts are lost.
* In warm weather the eggs arrive at maturity in a much shorter time,
especially when exposed to the light and warmth of the sun.
Hoae, on the Water-Snail. 95
My own observations upon the Limneus, in many important
particulars, coincide with those of Mr. Bowerbank, made in
1843, and published in the Transactions of this Society, upon
the Structure of Shells of Mollusca, &c. Mr. Bowerbank thus
explains the development of the shells of these animals :—
“‘ Let us suppose the rudiment of the future shell to have been the
result of the excretion of some mucus or lymph (properly, albumen) ; it
would then be nothing more than a very thin transparent membrane, with
a determinate figure dependent upon the figure of its species. In this
membrane organizing cytoblasts and cells are produced and multiplied in
rapid succession, until, by their increase and opposition, a cellular struc-
ture is formed init. On their first appearance the cells are transparent
and globular, but pushed on by the law of growth, which regulates their
development, they very soon begin to secrete, from their inner surfaces,
carbonate of lime. ‘The cells being filled with it, a solid structure is the
result of their close aggregation ; the pattern being modified only by the
form and degree of condensation of the calcigerous cells, in which it has
been secreted. ¥: : bi = *
A layer or stratum of shell being thus formed, another is produced from
its inner surface by the same means, and then others, until the normal
set is completed: the whole being kept together as one by the living
tissues.”
Mr. Bowerbank believes that the truth of this mode of
formation is proved, not only by the structures he has dis-
covered, but also by the phenomena which occur in its repa-
ration of injuries ; for he says :—
“This reparation is not made by a coat of calcareous matter, spread
over the wound by the collar or mantle of the animal, as has been main-
tained, but by an effusion of coagulable lymph, in which cytoblasts are
produced in the first instance, and quickly succeeded by a cellular struc-
ture, in which the earthy basis of the shell is secreted, and by which the
scar is filled up, or the fracture cemented together.”’
This I have repeatedly verified, and always found that after
an injury to the shell of either an embryonic, or more perfectly-
formed animal, in a few hours subsequently the process of
repair has been commenced by a deposition of cells, less in
size, and somewhat more iuregular in form than the first.
Upon breaking off an eighth of an inch from the edge of the
shell of a full-grown animal, I observed that it first threw out
a series of exudations of plasma, or albuminous matter; which,
after some days, became hardened by a calcareous deposit,
corresponding in appearance to the lines of growth of the old
shell, but only to the extent required to convert the edge into
a smooth and strong margin of about one-half the breadth
broken off; and, ultimately, new lines of growth were
thrown out beyond the edge of the mantle; this I clearly
ascertained by scraping it with a fine knife, In reference to
this part of my inquiry I may be pardoned for directing
96 ‘Hoge, on the Water-Snail.
attention to the very interesting observations of Professor
Paget :—
“That the reparative power in each perfect species, whether it be
higher or lower in the scale, is in an inverse proportion to the amount of
change through which it has passed in its development from the embryonic
to the perfect state. And the deduction to be drawn is, that the powers
for development from the embryo are identical with those exercised for
the restoration from injuries : in other words, that the powers are the same
by which perfection is first achieved, and by which, when lost, it is
recovered. Indeed, it would almost seem as if the species that have least
means of escape or defence from mutilation were those on which the most
ample power of repair has been bestowed ; an admirable instance, if it be
only true, of the beneficence that has provided for the welfare of even the
least of the living world, with as much care as if they were the sole
objects of the Divine regard.”
Dr. Carpenter differs in some particulars from Mr. Bower-
bank, more especially with reference to the vascularity of
the shell, which, I believe, he entirely denies, and somewhat
inclines to the more generally received opinion of Reaumur ;
who, after careful examinations of the shells of Gasteropoda,
came to the following conclusions :—
“‘ That these calcareous defences are mere excretions from the surface
of the body, absolutely extra-vital and extra-vascular, their growth being
carried on by the addition of calcareous particles deposited in consecutive
layers. The dermis, or vascular portion of the integument, is the secreting
organ, which furnishes the earthy matter, pouring it out apparently from
any part of the surface of the body, although the thicker portion, distin-
guished by the appellation of the mantle, is more especially adapted to its
production. The calcareous matter is never deposited in the areole of the
dermis itself, but exudes from the surface, suspended in the mucus which
is copiously poured out from the muciparous pores, and gradually hardened
by exposure ; this calciferous fluid forms a layer of shell, coating the inner
surface of the pre-existent layers to increase the size of the original shell,
or else in furnishing at particular points for the reparation of injuries
which accident may have occasioned.” *
Now, if it be a mere excretion from the surface of a mem-
brane, and neither vital nor vascular, how does Reaumur
account for the deposit of the calcigerous cells, and subse-
quent formation into shell, so early seen in the embryo; and
that long before these cells can become consolidated by
exposure to air? Mr. Bowerbank has seen, as well as myself,
that at a very early stage of embryonic life, calcareous matter
is deposited, and hardened into shell ; and this can be readily
proved, by simply breaking up the egg, and submitting a
portion of the contents to the action of a drop of very dilute
acetic acid, when the carbonate of lime will be very quickly
* « Article Gasteropoda.’ By Professor Rymer Jones. ‘ Cyclopedia of
Anatomy and Physiology.’
Hoee, on the Water-Snail. 97
dissolved out, with a brisk effervescence ; the basement mem-
brane only remaining, as in the older shell.
If the young animal be viewed under a power of 150
diameters, the whole mass is sufficiently transparent, to show
that the shell is an important part of the whole structure, and
not “ suspended in mucus ;” but has a hardened and definite
form long before it issues from the egg, or comes in contact
with the external air, to produce any hardening effect upon it.
Mr. Bowerbank has observed, that in the fully-formed shell
“the mode of effecting repairs in the periostracum, affords
evidence of a high degree of vitality.” As to the term eztra-
vital, | know not what it means; and, I believe, no one who
has bestowed care and attention in the investigation of the
works of the Great Creator, will for one moment assume the
smallest speck to be an eztra-vital production, or addition,
Indeed, it appears to me that it would be as reasonable to
deny the vitality of bone, or the growth of the lower organized
cartilage, as to deny it to the shell of the pectinibranchial and
pulmonated Mollusks.
Dr. Carpenter says :—
“It may now, however, be stated as an ascertained fact, that shell
always possesses a more or less distinct organic structure ; this being, in
some instances, of the character of that of the epidermis of higher animals,
but in others having more resemblance to that of the dermis, or true
skin.”
From repeated examinations, I believe, with Mr. Bower-
bank :—
«¢ That the structure of shell is analogous to bone in some respects, and
is formed much in the same manner as in particular kinds of bony matter,
by the deposition of carbonate of lime within the cells of the membranes,
which enter into the composition of the shell, or by the aggregation and
coalescence of the calcigerous cells when the membrane is very sparingly
produced ; and that it is made up of three strata. Each stratum being
formed of innumerable plates, composed of elongated cellular structure ;
each plate consisting of a single series of cells parallel to each other.
These plates of cellular structure are deposited alternately in contrary
directions, so that each series of cells intersects the one beneath it, at
nearly right angles,”
If to a portion of the periostracum a small quantity of very
dilute acetic acid be added, to dissolve out the calcareous
matter, and it be then viewed under a magnifying power of
250 diameters, it will be seen to be composed of oval cyto-
blasts, exhibiting distinct nuclei, beneath which will be found
a fine membrane studded with minute spots, apparently the
escaped contents of the cells. This membrane has a regular
series of corrugations or folds arranged throughout its whole
extent, which gives to the shell in certain positions an
98 -Hoae, on the Water-Snail.
iridescent lustre. Immediately beneath this is placed the
transparent basement membrane of an even texture and very
light amber colour, this is the albummous or animal mem-
brane ; which with the layer before referred to, and above this,
appears to me to be traversed by tubes, that no doubt run
from the inner to the outer portion of the shell substance, and
probably this net-work of pores have assigned to them similar
duties to those in the human skin, viz., that of throwing off
effete particles of matter, &c.
The very small proportion of animal matter contained in
this shell is a marked characteristic ; after the removal of the
calcareous matter by dilute acid, we have the small residuum
of a grain or two only ; from this cause the shell is very brittle
at all times. The shell of the fully-formed animal is ovate,
whorls five or six, elongated and dextral; thus favouring, as
before observed, the notion that the circular motion of the
embryo when in the egg determines the whorl.*
The mantle of the animal partakes of the same character
and structure as that of mucous membrane generally, more
especially that portion of it lining the internal surface of the
shell; thence it is reflected over the body, and forms a direct
communication with the external shell and internal soft parts.
Its other important use, besides that of depositing carbonate
of lime, is the secretion of plasma, or a glazing fluid, which
it spreads over the internal portions of the shell, and with
which it lubricates the whole of the external parts, thus pre-
venting any irritation that might arise from a drying up of
the coarser particles of calcareous matter. Another use I
have particularly noticed, is that of converting a large part of
it, beneath the greater whorl of the shell, into an air-bag, or
receptacle for holding a bladder of air, which must have consi-
derable influence in rendering the shell buoyant and light, as
by suddenly discharging it, the animal instantly sinks to the
bottom. The animal is often seen to rise to the surface of
the water for the purpose of taking in a supply of fresh air,
which it does by opening a small valvular aperture, situated
about the eighth of an inch above the ventral outlet. If the
animal be removed from the water it immediately squeezes
out this supply of air, at the same time it presses out the
water from the body, for the purpose of enabling it to recede
* For further information and much interesting matter upon this sub-
ject I must refer to Mr. Bowerbank’s researches upon the ‘ Structure of
Molluscous and Conchiferous Animals,’ most accurately and carefully
illustrated, published in the Transactious of this Society, 1843. Also Dr.
Carpenter’s researches, published in the Reports of the British Association,
1544 and 1947; and his ‘ Principles of General and Comparative Phy-
siology.’
Hoee, on the Water- Snail. 99
into the interior of its shelly house for protection ; in this act
it is greatly facilitated by the action of retractor muscles,
having a strong tendinous attachment to the columella of the
shell. The shell of the young animal, and thin portions of the
older shell, viewed by polarized light on the selenite stage,
are interesting and beautiful objects. In the young animal
the growth of the membranous part is effected by the gradual
expansion of the vascular and cellular tissues, and we are
soon enabled to define the expanded foot. This is a fleshy
disc, broader anteriorly and divided into transverse segments ;
by a particular arrangement of the longitudinal muscular
fibres it is enabled to perform a series of undulatory move-
ments, by which means the animal glides smoothly along; its
under surface is likewise studded over with a number of small
orifices, which assist in causing a vacuum to be formed, and
thus it suspends itself in an inverted position from the surface
of the water, moving about in any direction, The muscular
fibres, by their interlacements, greatly assist the animal in its
progression, and in the performance of rapid movements ; at
the outer edge it is turned over, or returned upon itself,
forming a smooth and strong margin of condensed tissue and
muscular fibres, which take their course in broad fasciculi, and
gradually taper off toa thin tendinous attachment on the pillar
of the shell.
The mouth is situated at the under and fore-part of the
head ; it is a muscular cavity, enclosing a dental apparatus,
semicircular in shape and provided with transverse rows of
projecting spines, or teeth of a horny structure, or, more
correctly, alternating rows of incisor and canine teeth, each
being pointed with silica, and accurately fitted to cut against
each other; they are thus admirably adapted for the scraping
or stripping off the cuticle from the blades of Vallisneria,
which the animal does without killing the plant, and leaves it
more accurately divided, than at all possible to obtain by the
usual mode of splitting for microscopic observation, The
gastric teeth are immediately joined to the oesophagus or
gullet, and to this succeeds the gizzard, a strong muscular
apparatus, a quarter of an inch in length, and having a rugose
appearance, with transverse and longitudinal fibres, by means
of which every movement requisite for the conversion of the
food is effected, and passes into a small membranous sac, the
stomach ; this is folded into longitudinal plice, and from it
arises the large intestine of considerable length, having much
of the appearance of intestine in the higher order of animals,
excepting in colour ; a narrow longitudinal band passes down on
either side of the external coat, and internally it is apparently
100 Hoge, on the Water-Snait.
supplied with valves. In its course it takes a considerable
turn around the inner whorls of the shell, terminating in a
rectum which has its vent placed between a small portion
of the mantle and the under edge of the last whorl of the shell.
The liver is not nearly so large as it is in the land-snail ; it
consists of two lobes, and is enclosed in a strong capsular
covering ; it pours a pale-coloured bile into the stomach by
more than one duct, and is provided with a proper hepatic
system of vessels.
The heart is a strong muscular apparatus, having both an
auricular and ventricular cavity ; it is surrounded by a very
delicate membrane (the pericardium). In shape it is pyriform,
with muscular cords stretching from side to side, of a highly
elastic character, looking not unlike very fine bands of India-
rubber alternately contracting and expanding ; these cords are,
no doubt, analogous to the corde tendinee of the mammal
heart. The heart receives the erated blood from the respira-
tory organs, and propels it through the vessels at the rate of
sixty times a minute. It is placed far back in the superior
portion of the shell, near to the axis, where it is securely fixed
without reference to the movements of the mouth or body of
the animal.
Like others of this family of aquatic Gasteropoda, the
breathing apparatus resembles the branchiz of fishes in struc-
ture; they are pectinated, and placed in three or four rows
near the roof of a cavity under the integuments of the head,
or rather above the oral opening, which is peculiarly arranged
with retractor and other muscles, for the purpose of permitting
an uninterrupted eration of the bloed as it is brought to the
branchiz.
The nervous system consists of many gangliz, or nervous
centres, in place of a distinct brain, but “each of these
gangliz may be considered as a distinct brain of the hetero-
gangliate form.’ They are freely distributed throughout the
body, but connected with each other by cords of communica-
tion ; the nervous mass appears to be granular, and is some-
what yellow in colour, whilst the nerves themselves are white
and smooth, and invested with a delicate membrane (neuri-
lemma). Professor Jones observes that—
‘¢ One remarkable circumstance may be mentioned as peculiar to this
class ; the changes of position of the nervous centres obey the movements
of the mouth, with which they are intimately connected ; they are, in
fact, pulled backwards and forwards by the muscles serving for the pro-
trusion and retraction of the oral apparatus, and are thus constantly
changing their relations with the surrounding parts.
“The ganglia, placed above the cesophagus, sends off branches to supply
the muscles of the head, the tentacles, and give origin to the optic nerves ;
Hoee, on the Water-Snail. 101
and from the sub-cesophagial ganglion, which fully equal the former in
size, arise those nerves which supply the muscles of the body, and of the
viscera.” *
The singular adaptation of the eye must not be omitted ;
this appears in the early embryonic stage to be situated within
or on the tentacle, it is constantly retracted with it, which is
due to the length of the pedicle, and to the retractile sheath
of the optic nerve, enabling the animal to shorten it; at the
same time the tentacle folds down over it, forming a protec-
tive cover at all times. The eyes are situated at the base of
the inner side of the tentacle, and resemble two very small
black spots. When examined with a power of 100 diameters,
they are seen to be transparent spherical lenses, surrounded
by a black zone or iris, the pigmental layer is continued some
distance down the pedicle. It is pear-shaped, and evidently
the little animal is very quick-sighted, as he avoids every
obstacle placed in his way, or quickly withdraws himself into
his house if one attempts to touch him ; although in avoiding
obstacles he appears to make great use of his tentacles as true
feelers. The tentacles are composed of a dense elastic tissue,
surrounded by a band of muscular fibre ; in shape they are
triangular, with the base attached to the body of the animal.
The Limnei are stated by Professor Forbes to have been
found in the fossil state as far back as the Oolitic epoch; and
the most ancient forms bear a striking resemblance to the
common existing types. In England, at the present time, they
are abundant in nearly all the waters where vegetable matter
is growing, and in the slow running rivers, especially where
the water-cress is found.
The Limneus, like every other living thing, is infested with
its parasite. Reaumur observed a sort of mite infesting the
snail (Helix aspersa), they were securely lodged in the pul-
monary cavity. Miiller also noticed in certain Gasteropods a
worm; and Dr. Gould, examining a specimen of the Physa
heterostropha, “‘ found the neck of the animal beset with
numerous little things, looking like short, minute, white lines,
attached like leeches, and which derive their nourishment
from the fluids of the animal without his having the power to
dislodge them.”
M. bier states that he discovered a Filaria in the abdomen
of Limneus stagnalis; and in many of the same family of
Mollusca he has met with a worm allied to the Naides,
“living in the respiratory cavity, or hanging like little tufts
of threads from the sides of the abdomen; whence he named
it Chelogaster.” Besides these, he says, “ a kind of Cercaria
* Professor Rymer Jones, op. cit.
102 -Hoae, on the Water-Snail.
finds an appropriate nidus for their evolutions in the body of
the lacustrine snails; and the curious transmutations of form
they undergo in the interior of the animals, and the circum-
fluent water, afford one of the most striking illustrations of
Steenstrup’s theory of alternating generations.” *
Upon observing the Limneus in my glass rather closely, I
noticed that tts body was covered with the “ little white line-
looking leeches,” described by Dr. Gould and M. Baer; upon
carefully detaching one or two, and viewing them with a half-
inch object-glass, it had the formidable appearance represented
in the drawing at fig.8. It has an anterior mouth, surrounded
with minute teeth or spines, over which it possesses great
power. Suddenly it may be seen to dart out its body, at the
same time projecting its mouth to some distance apparently for
the purpose of seizing its prey, when it as quickly retracts
itself within the shell of the animal, where it securely attaches
itself to its body by a. posterior sucker. It is possessed of a
great number of hooklets or feet, by these it creeps from one
part of the body to another, but is always found adhering to
those parts affording security in times of danger. Eventually
they become so numerous that the animal’s life falls a sacrifice
to its troublesome tormentors, having apparently no power to
rid itself of them.
In conclusion, [ would offer a word or two on the cell; the
primordial wall of which does not enter into the formative
process of the embryo. The cell contents only are required
for the purpose of affording nourishment to the vital blastema
of the nucleus, in which a cycle of progressive development
once set up, goes on until the animal is sufficiently matured to
break through the cell-wall,and escape from the ova-sac. At the
same time it may be inferred, that this is in some way assisted
by the process of endosmose, and in this way certain gases
or fluids become drawn into the cell-interior, and thus mate-
rially aid in the supply of nourishment for the growth of the
animal.
The cell-wall bears the same relation to the future perfect
animal that the egg-shell of the chick does to it; it is but an
external covering to a certain amount of gaseous and fluid
matter, and for the purpose of placing the germ of life in a
more favourable state for development, assisted as it is by
an increase of temperature usually the result of a chemical
action set up, or once begun, in an organism and a medium.
The ovum, destined to become a new creature, originates from
a cell enclosing a gemmule, from which its tissues are formed,
and nutriment is assimilated,.and which eventually enables
* Aoassiz and Gould’s ‘ Principles of Zoology.’
Hoae, on the Water-Snail. 103
the animal successively to renew its organs through a series
of metamorphoses, which give it permanent conditions not
only different but even directly contrary to those which it had
primitively.
In this one fact are we not furnished with a well marked or
broad line of demarcation between that of animal and vege-
table life? In the development of the animal, the cell-wall
takes no part in the formative process ; it is but an enveloping
membrane required for a time, and then thrown off. On the
contrary, in vegetable life it enters largely into the formative
process, and ultimate development of all its tissues; it is ever
to be found growing with its growth, cell-wall upon cell-wall
intact, with or without its earliest contents.
Note.—June 6th, 1854.
My attempt to arrest the development of some young
animals is still continued with perfect success. They have
remained in the same narrow glass-cell, at the stage of growth
before referred to, viz., about the size the animal usually
attains during the first two or three weeks of its existence.
They are now siz months old, alive and well, the cilia are re-
tained around the tentacles in constant activity ; whilst other
animals of the same brood and age, placed in a situation
favourable to growth, have attained their full size, and have
now produced young, which are of the size of their elder
relations.
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE VII.
Fig.
1.—A magnified representation of the increase and change of situation
occurring to the yolk of egg of Limneus on the fourth day.
2.—The change observed on the sixth day, showing the transverse fissure
or divisional line in the mass.
3.—The formation of the shell proceeding more rapidly, it appears on the
sixteenth day as the larger portion of the embryonic mass.
4,—The embryo performing its heliacal windings around the shell.
5.—The embryo, or young animal, seen soon after it has issued from the
shell.
6.—The tentacles, with cilia, seen under a 3-inch object-glass ; the arrows
indicating the course of the current produced by the cilia.
7.—The natural size and form of the shell of a full-grown Limneus.
8.—Parasitic animal found on the body of Limmneus, magnified 100
diameters.
104 Greeory, on Fossil Diatomacee.
Observations on some Deposits of Fossil Diatomacez. By
Wittram Gregory, M.D., F.R.S.E.
tead April LUt :
Read April 19th, 1854
In the series of microscopic objects issued by the Zurich
Microscopical Association, there occurs a specimen of Berg-
mehl, stated to be from Lillhaggsjon in Lapland, which is
very remarkable in several particulars.
First, there is a very great abundance of LHunotia Triodon,
exhibiting the most astonishing variations of outline, so that
the extreme varieties in opposite directions, those, for ex-
ample, which are short, compressed, and have strongly-marked
prominences, and such as are long, flattened, the apices being
lengthened out, while the prominences actually disappear, or
can only be traced by a hardly-perceptible waviness in the
dorsal outline, would hardly be supposed to belong to the
same species, and yet a perfect and gentle gradation may be
traced from the one extreme to the other. This remarkable
tendency to vary in form is peculiar, among the Eunotie I
have seen, to this species, E. Triodon and to E. begebba, Kiit-
zing. It is totally absent in the common fossil forms of £.
Tetraodon and E, Diadema, which hardly vary at all, save in
size,
It appears to me that this fact, especially when we consider
that all these species often occur together, as, for example, in
the Mull deposit, where FE. Triodon, though not frequent, is
just as variable as in the Bergmehl under consideration,
demonstrates that these species are really distinct, and not, as
some have conjectured, varieties of one, which may present
one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or more prominences.
If all belonged to one species, ‘all should be alike variable or
alike poneeinh, whereas some vary ad infinitum, others not at
all, in form at least. Nor can it be said that such a form as
E. Triodon is developed, as a variety, only under certain cir-
cumstances; for in the Mull deposit it occurs with all its
peculiarities, and therefore the supposed circumstances must
have occurred; and yet, in that deposit, Z. Tetraodon and
E. Diadema are much more abundant, and show no tendency
to vary inform. But these two last-named species are absent
from this Lapland deposit, where LE. Triodon abounds. It
seems to me that these facts settle the question as to the
species named, which must be held to be true and well-
marked species; one of the characters of E. Triodon and of
E. begebba being a tendency to vary in form, while fixity of
form characterises E. Tetraodon and E. Diadema.
This Laponian deposit also contains £. serra, and I think
Grecory, on Fossil Diatomacee. 105
I have seen E. heptodon. __E.. serra seems to be confined to
Scandinavian deposits.
Although differing from the Mull deposit in regard to the
forms I have named, and also some others, this Bergmehl
agrees with it in many points, as in the abundance of Navicula
rhomboides and N. serians, that of many Pinnularie, of Gompho-
nema coronatum, of several Cymbelle, Stauroneides, Tabellaria,
Orthosire, and other forms, but especially in the presence of
Eunotia incisa, first observed by me in the Mull earth. The
variety 6 is here the more frequent.
There is another form, common to these two deposits,
which, so far as I know, has not been described. It is an
aspect like a Synedra, long and narrow, straight in the middle,
and having the ends curved opposite ways. which gives to it
a sigmoid character. I am inclined, however, to suppose it
to be a Nitzschia, for while I cannot make out the transverse
strie of Synedra, 1 can see a row of puncta on each margin
in some specimens. It is, however, quite distinct from
N. sigmoidea. 1n the Mull earth it is generally broken, so that
we see only one-half; but I have found several entire ex-
amples. In the Lapland deposit it is more frequent, and
often entire, although from its slender proportions it is apt to
be broken, and fragments also occur. As we have already
Nitzschia sigmoidea and N. sigma, this form, if it be a
Nitzschia, may be called N. sigmatella.
_ I have still to notice a form occurring in this Lapland Berg-
mehl, which, so far as I have been able to ascertain, is un-
described. It is narrow and of considerable length, but bent
into the form of a sickle, or nearly a semicircle. It is slightly
attenuated at the rather acute apices, and has very strong and
distinct, though rather fine, transverse strie. It approaches
more nearly to Eunotia arcus, as figured by Smith, but differs
entirely from it, in being much more curved, in the absence
of the characteristic prominence in the so-called ventral
surface, and in its having much stronger and more distinct
strie, all of which characters combined give it an entirely
peculiar aspect. Taking it, for the present, to be a Eunotia,
I propose for it the name of Eunotia falx, or E. falcata.
I would now direct attention to a deposit, of which speci-
mens were sent to me by Mr. Norman, under the name of
Liineburg. It is well known that there is an extensive de-
posit on the Liineburg heath, in Hanover, and one part of it
is known as the earth or Bergmehl of Oberrohe, near Liine-
burg, another as that of the Liineburg heath. These I find to
be quite distinct from the deposit of which I now speak, as
obtained from Mr. Norman; for this, as I have found, has a
106 Greeory, on Fossil Diatomacee.
composition absolutely identical with that of the Lillhagesjon
Lapland deposit I have described. Not only the species are
the same, but they are in the same proportions. In both
Eunotia triodon presents in abundance its strange variations ;
in both the long sigmoid form, and also the sickle-like form,
occur,
In short, I can detect no difference between these two de-
posits ; besides the forms I have named, both contain Eunotia
tncisa, chiefly var.;8; and both alike contain such forms as
Eunotia serra, Tetracyclus lucustris, and others, inasmuch that
I think it more probable that one of them has been misnamed,
than that two deposits, in places so distant as Liineburg in
Hanover, and Lillhaggsjon in Lapland, should be identical in
composition. Since all the specimens of earth from Oberrohe
near Liineburg, and the Liineburg heath, that I have examined
(and I have seen several different specimens in the natural
state), differ from the Lapland earth, and since the Lapland
earth is referred to its locality by the Zurich Association, I
conclude that the earth in Mr. Norman’s hand is really not
from Liineburg, but from Lapland. Perhaps there may be a
place called Liineburg in Lapland, near Lillhaggsj6n ; but this
1 have not been able to ascertain. In the mean time, this
so-called Liineburg deposit will supply observers with the
two forms I have now described. I have noticed it in some
other forms which I believe to be undescribed ; to these I
shall returt on some future occasion.
a
|
’
i
“4
1
a
'
» ,
j
'
j
Pap
,
a @®
i‘
i
{
»
;
.
~ 5
a
eG
>
fy
2
Ns
QH Quarterly journal of micros-—
201 copical science
Biological
& Medica]
Serials
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
A Nt apein seo
Nett alta
Ment
leas a en